Laura Knight Jadczyk

UncategorizedApril 25, 2007 12:09 pm

How many of you have seen the movie "The Day After Tomorrow?" If you haven’t, the thesis of the movie is that Global warming causes large areas of the Arctic to melt, so that the northern Atlantic ocean is diluted by large amounts of fresh water which changes the density of the water layers causing a disruption of the Thermohaline current.. This then leads to a rapid and unnatural cooling of the northern hemisphere which triggers a series of anomalies, eventually leading to a massive "global superstorm" system consisting of three gigantic hurricane-like superstorms, which suck up heat and drop the super-cold upper atmospheric air down onto the planet resulting in an "instant Ice age."

This idea is nothing new and it didn’t really originate with Art Bell and Whitley Strieber. A NASA report from 2004 tells us "Andrew Marshall, a veteran Defense Department planner, recently released an unclassified report detailing how a shift in ocean currents in the near future could compromise national security."

In a 2003 report, Robert Gagosian cites "rapidly advancing evidence [from, e.g., tree rings and ice cores] that Earth’s climate has shifted abruptly and dramatically in the past." For example, as the world warmed at the end of the last ice age about 13,000 years ago, melting ice sheets appear to have triggered a sudden halt in the Conveyor, throwing the world back into a 1,300 year period of ice-age-like conditions called the "Younger Dryas." It is also now known that the Gulf Stream weakened in ‘Little Ice Age’

On 6 December 2005 Michael Schlesinger, a professor of atmospheric sciences at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, leading a research team, said "The shutdown of the thermohaline circulation has been characterized as a high-consequence, low-probability event. Our analysis, including the uncertainties in the problem, indicates it is a high-consequence, high-probability event." See also: Failing ocean current raises fears of mini ice age.

There is another danger that comes with Global Warming: release of huge amount of methane from the methane clathrates buried in the arctic seabed, and even from other subterranean sources as the earth struggles to shift around and balance itself. Methane can contribute to Global Warming, but it is a highly unstable gas. Mostly it just stinks and can kill. Consider a September, 2006 report Methane gas leak kills miners in Ukraine which says:

Emergency Situations spokesman Ihor Krol said "an unexpected eruption of a coal and gas mixture" - later identified as methane - occurred early this morning at a depth of 3,500ft … Methane probably emitted from rocks…"

We learn from further research that a high number of mining accidents are the result of methane pockets either igniting or poisoning miners.

In short, if big bubbles of methane gas are released from the ground, if a flock of birds happen to be in the area, they could very easily die and fall to the ground within a few minutes.
Now, of course, methane itself is odorless, but it is a byproduct of organic decomposition and, as a consequence, is often associated with hydrogen sulfide, a "rotten egg" smell. If you can smell it, the level is probably unsafe.

Of course, there is a tremendous dispute about this with a whole raft of critics (some of them scientists with questionable loyalties) pooh-poohing the idea and continuing along the line of "it’s all Global Warming" and if we concentrate on cutting emissions, over time, things will stabilize."

Not very likely.

Why do we think so?

Last month, for almost a week, the Gulf Stream ceased to flow northward to Europe. Go here: http://rads.tudelft.nl/gulfstream/ … and scroll down to "Animations of the Gulf Stream velocities are here".

Click, and when the page loads, select "Last 26 weeks (Jan 23 21 bytes)" and observe. After the images load and the animation plays, you will see a short period of about a week between Dec 11th and 19th when the Gulf Stream actually stopped flowing toward Europe and flowed back South without completing its normal circuit.

Here are still images from the event:

©rads.tudelft.nl
©rads.tudelft.nl
©rads.tudelft.nl

Now, keeping those dates in mind, let’s look at some headlines selected from the SOTT Weather Archive from the days during and after the temporary reversal of the Thermohaline current:

14 Dec 2006 Duck die-off in Idaho sparks fears

19 Dec 2006 Lewiston residents unnerved by dead crows
21 Dec 2006 Colorado reels under blizzard
26 Dec 2006 Christmas storm brings devastation
02 Jan 2007 Sections of Colo. Remain Buried in Snow
03 Jan 2007 Cherry Blossoms Bloom In Brooklyn
03 Jan 2007 Record snowfall buries Anchorage
04 Jan 2007 Warm winter wreaks havoc
04 Jan 2007 Scientists Say 2007 May Be Warmest Yet
05 Jan 2007 2 dead after strong storms, tornadoes rip through southern Louisiana
08 Jan 2007 Gas-like odour blankets Manhattan
08 Jan 2007 Ducks die en mass in Vietnam’s southern province
08 Jan 2007 Dead birds shut down Austin
08 Jan 2007 Outgassing: The environmental "surge" you’re not hearing anything about.
08 Jan 2007 NY gas smell shuts trains, forces evacuations
08 Jan 2007 Wacky warm weather throws birds and bees off balance
09 Jan 2007 Warm December Pushes 2006 to Record Year
10 Jan 2007 Are the dead porpoises on Scottish beaches more evidence of global warming?
10 Jan 2007 Freak tornado-like storm hits Barbados
12 Jan 2007 Storm Warnings Across UK
13 Jan 2007 Icy Weather Hits U.S. Midwest
13 Jan 2007 Record Cold, Snow in Southern California!
13 Jan 2007 Smelly Outgassing in Louisiana
13 Jan 2007 Staten Island: More Bad Smells - Outgassing?
14 Jan 2007 Powerful storm dumps ice and rain on central U.S
14 Jan 2007 Ice Storm lashes much of U.S. - 20 dead
15 Jan 2007 Near Hurricane Force Storm Batters Baltic States - 2nd time in 2 years for "once in a lifetime event"
17 Jan 2007 Schwarzenegger Seeks Disaster Aid For Freeze Ruined Crops
17 Jan 2007 Ice plays havoc with U.S. power grid
17 Jan 2007 Thousands Shiver As Storm Death Toll Hits 51
17 Jan 2007 Big freeze hits $1bn crop
17 Jan 2007 Wildfires Burn in Southern Australia
17 Jan 2007 Scores killed, crops devastated in harsh US winter weather
17 Jan 2007 Storms forecast to batter UK
17 Jan 2007 Warm Spell in Russia Wakes Up the Bears
18 Jan 2007 Snow in Malibu!!!
18 Jan 2007 Severe storms batter northwestern Europe
18 Jan 2007 Travel in Europe Disrupted by Wild Storm
19 Jan 2007 Hurricane Force Winds rip into eastern Europe
19 Jan 2007 Storm kills 27 in northern Europe
19 Jan 2007 Germany Limps Back To Life After Storm Claims 10 Lives - Wind Gusts Up to 202 KPH
19 Jan 2007 Killer of 29, Kyrill Hurricane Approaches Russia - "The Day After Tomorrow?"
19 Jan 2007 Experts Can’t Find Source Of Mysterious NYC Odor
19 Jan 2007 Okla., Mo., and Texas Brace for Storm
19 Jan 2007 Icy Storm Blamed for 65 Deaths in U.S.
19 Jan 2007 Germans Told to Stay Indoors as Hurricane Nears
20 Jan 2007 Europe counts cost of storms as stricken freighter is beached
20 Jan 2007 New winter storm stalks Southern Plains
21 Jan 2007 Snow Storm Rolls Across Plains; 8 Dead
25 Jan 2007 Getting Colder in U.S. Northeast - Polar Plunge Underway
25 Jan 2007 Anchorage Hit with Twice Normal Snowfall

The 64,000 $ question: Is there a connection between the reversal of the Gulf Stream in December and the numerous reports of birds falling dead from the sky and the wild and deadly weather during the first half of January?

The next question is: Does this small example suggest what might happen if the now highly unstable Gulf Stream finally and completely stops flowing North to Europe?

Meanwhile, on Jan 23rd, President Bush told the American Congress "we must confront the serious challenge of global climate change". However, the main thrust of his speech was to ask that Congress and the American People give his war escalation plan yet another chance.

Now, even though Senator Jim Webb (D-VA) responded to this nonsensical speech in a very appropriate way, telling Bush that "The majority of the nation no longer supports the way this war is being fought; nor does the majority of our military, nor does the majority of Congress," Senator Webb himself is probably not aware of the truly great danger that may be looming over all of us, rich and poor, in every country of the world. Just as Nero fiddled while Rome burned, the leaders of our world are acting as though they have unlimited time to play their political games.

The question is, will any of us survive the threat to our civilization that is inherent in a Global Warming that can turn into an Ice Age in an instant while Bush and other world leaders engage in endless arguments about wars and economics? The real enemy is not "over there," it is "out there," in terms of changes to our environment that we all need to understand as fast as possible. And here we mean, all people. When the Sword falls, the billionaire oil tycoons will suffer just as much, if not more, than the Third World subsistence farmer.

We desperately need to reach these people and inform them so that all of humanity can act together as one to bring this senseless war-mongering to a halt and work together to solve our mutual problems that threaten to destroy us more completely than any nuclear bomb ever could.

But here’s the problem: through the distortion and outright censoring of events in America and the world, the US media, in concert with the Bush government, are denying the American people access to knowledge and awareness that would allow them to play a pivotal role in their own future and that of their children. How many Americans truly know how many of their fellow citizens are totally opposed to the actions of the Bush government? If you read the US media you would have no idea whatsoever. If you read the international press however, you get a much better idea. Consider the following images from the front page of a French regional paper for 25th January 2007:

The text reads: "America Says ‘No’

Increasingly isolated, George Bush has asked congress for ‘another chance’. Less than one third of Americans are inclined to trust him. (click on image for large version)

The text reads:

"America against Bush. An ever increasing number of opponents of the Iraq war" (Click on image for large version).

The primary goal of the Signs of the Times news website and forum is to provide accurate data on current events to all those that seek it.

But we need your help. We exist only on the internet. That means that the information we have to share is available to less than 17% of the planet’s population; even less when you consider net censorship.

Together, we can change this and we can DO things. That’s why we’ve launched a our new Signs of The Times Interactive Website and why we have plans on the table to expand our activities to include a new line-up of Podcast discussions (with exciting new guests) and most important of all: distribution of free, informative printed matter all over the world!

It’s an exciting idea! If the newspapers won’t print the truth, we will! And if people can’t afford access, we will GIVE it to them! It’ll be a major, ongoing campaign. And to ensure we have the resources to keep the pressure on, we’re asking ALL our readers to contribute at least $15 a month. Since our last subscription drive, 188 people have signed on! But we still need 1145 more contributors! With over 10,000 readers per day, and 1427 people receiving SOTT in their email-box daily, there is no reason why we cannot achieve this modest goal. Can you chip in $15 a month? It’s easy–we bill your credit card each month, and you can cancel any time. Click here:

Subscribe to Signs!

Initially, we’re planning a sustained campaign of distribution of educational materials via the same processes that are used in political campaigns; only in this case, it will not be a campaign to elect anyone; it will be a campaign to wake up and stop the madness before we are all wiped off the face of the Earth forever. These materials will make people aware of SOTT and will give them further information about how to either find SOTT on the web, or how to sign up for the new, weekly printed SOTT that is in the pipeline.

We have volunteers around the world just waiting for the materials to be printed and shipped to them so that they can begin the distribution process. using our successful Signs Of The Times website as a backbone. We’ll use mail-out flyers, posters, stickers, book-marks, and web productions to inform the people of just what danger we are all in while our so-called leaders bicker over killing more people. If they don’t stop that wrangling now, and attend to the business at hand, there won’t be anybody to bomb anyway.

This is the moment. Look at the Gulf Stream. Remember the movie "The Day After Tomorrow." Consider what happened within two weeks of a one week reversal of the Gulf Stream. It may not be that bad or that fast, but we can see from what we have already experienced that it will certainly be bad enough. Getting the information out to as many people as possible is going to require concentrated effort and funding. Once the people are fully aware of what is really going on, it is our belief that they will, en masse, do what is right and demand, in tones that cannot be refused, that our leaders take care of the most important business on our planet: preparing us for a massive, shift in climate that undoubtedly will happen much, much, much faster than anyone currently thinks possible.

But that’s not going to happen unless we have the support.

That is the plan - flood the world with information - the Whole World! But it will require ongoing funding. Can you help with $15 per month? (You can cancel easily any time.) Click here to contribute:

Subscribe to Signs!

Every dollar, every flyer, poster, sticker, book, newsletter, we distribute together could save lives - perhaps the life of someone you love.

Together, we can wake the world up.

Together, we will wake up the world.

UncategorizedApril 23, 2007 2:03 pm

Over the past couple of months we here at SOTT have been following the Bee crisis with some interesting. It caught my eye when I read the first media article about it that was brought to my attention; I knew this was important. As Albert Einstein observed:

"If the bee disappeared off the surface of the globe then man would only have four years of life left. No more bees, no more pollination, no more plants, no more animals, no more man."

This really is BIG, people! Do you realize how CLOSE you are to the total collapse of whatever lifestyle you have, including having food on your table (let alone having a table to put it on or a house to keep the table in!) Don’t yawn because the habits of bees might be boring and it certainly isn’t as entertaining as TV or whatever mindless thing you do and call it entertainment. If you read every word I have written and assembled here, you will know more about global agriculture than you probably ever thought you WANTED to know, but just now, you had BETTER know it because YOUR life depends on it! The fact is, the disappearing bees are giving you a gift, right now, a choice if you will only take the time to read and learn.

The first clue that something was amiss was this odd item back on January 8: Wacky weather throws birds and bees off balance

If you think you’re confused by this winter’s warmer than usual weather, take a moment to ponder our feathered friends and furry neighbours.

While this season’s record-breaking temperatures have offered humans a welcomed reprieve, the unseasonal weather has played havoc with the lives of birds and animals.

The balmy winter weather has tricked many members of the wildlife community to alter their usual migration schedules, sleeping habits and feeding and breeding patterns.

Now, wildlife biologists, ornithologists and zoologists are concerned that the survival of some of these birds and animals could be threatened by the winter months ahead.

Among the anomalies reported in Eastern Canada:

-The Canada goose, which usually migrates south, staying put. An annual Montreal Christmas bird count found an all-time high number of the water fowl, 2,832, roosting on the open waters of the St. Lawrence.

-Raccoons and skunks foregoing their shorter but still important hibernation period and, burning up fat stores that they will need if and when a January or February deep freeze arrives.

-In Montreal, the eastern gray squirrel is feeding instead of nesting and getting fatter. At the same time, it has been joined by the Fox squirrel, a bigger and brown-reddish colored squirrel with a more southern range.

-Possums, a marsupial associated with the southern United States, have been spotted in southern Quebec.

"There’s a pile of stuff going on," said Lynn Miller, a Montreal wildlife biologist based at Le Nichoir, a bird refuge in Hudson."There will be winners and losers," she added.

Miller recently had to euthanize a great blue heron because it couldn’t stand up. Frostbite had destroyed its toes. The species usually migrates to Florida and other sunny climes for winter.

"The weather has been so warm, he thought he could stay," she said. "It was bloody awful."

Note that this article was written just before all hell broke loose weather wise on the planet. I have speculated elsewhere that the dramatic weather shift of early January could have been due to the brief stoppage of the Atlantic thermohaline current (Gulf Stream.) Go to this site and look at the pictures of the Gulf Stream. Scroll down to the bottom where you will see "Animations of the Gulf Stream velocities are here." Click and then select: "Last 52 weeks."

Observe. After the images load and the animation plays smoothly, you will see a short period of about a week between Dec 11 and 19 when the Gulf Stream actually stops flowing toward Europe and flows back down without completing its normal circuit. Right after that, it seemed like all hell broke loose weather-wise on the planet. All you have to do is scroll back through the SOTT Living Planet database to get a good idea of just how wacky things were: actual news items collected from all over the world in real time.

All of that was disconcerting enough, but I’ve never heard anyone declare authoritatively that birds migrate because it starts getting cold. Fact is, birds often migrate even before it is cold because there is some mysterious signal that tells them it is time to migrate. Perhaps it is the length of the days, perhaps the amount of sunlight has some EM or other frequency effects that tell the bird it’s time to go; whatever. I just don’t think I’ve ever heard anyone say that the birds forgot to migrate because it was too warm and they decided to just hang out and see how long the warm weather was going to last. In fact, I’ve heard stories from "old timers" that you can tell what kind of winter it is going to be by the density of the fur on the wooly bear caterpillar or by how many acorns squirrels stash away. I can’t vouch for such claims, but I have read that science really doesn’t understand what drives the seasonal habits of creatures; it is a mystery. The point being that there are mysterious signals that creatures receive from the environment that drive their hardwired instinctive patterns and somehow I don’t think that they watch thermometers. And, if that is the case, then it means that those signals are being crossed or confused. If that is happening to more than just bees, is it natural or unnatural? Does it have anything to do with the ocean thermohaline currents?

Moving on to the subject of bees in particular, the first story we put in the database on this subject was back in February, on the 6th: Mystery killer silencing honeybees - If the die-off continues, it would be disastrous for U.S. crop yields. It was written in a rather alarming tone:

Something is killing the nation’s honeybees.

Dave Hackenberg of central Pennsylvania had 3,000 hives and figures he has lost all but about 800 of them.

In labs at Pennsylvania State University, the Pennsylvania Department of Agriculture, and elsewhere in the nation, researchers have been stunned by the number of calls about the mysterious losses.

"Every day, you hear of another operator," said Dennis vanEngelsdorp, acting state apiarist with the Pennsylvania Department of Agriculture. "It’s just causing so much death so quickly that it’s startling."

At stake is the work the honeybees do, pollinating more than $15 billion worth of U.S. crops, including Pennsylvania’s apple harvest, the fourth-largest in the nation, worth $45 million, and New Jersey’s cranberries and blueberries.

While a few crops, such as corn and wheat, are pollinated by the wind, most need bees. Without these insects, crop yields would fall dramatically. Agronomists estimate Americans owe one in three bites of food to bees. […]

One of the first to notice the latest die-off was Hackenberg, who lives in Lewisburg, north of Harrisburg in Union County.

He and his son truck about 3,000 hives up and down the East Coast every year as part of a large but little-known cross-continental migratory bee industry.

Hackenberg’s bees pollinate oranges in Florida, apples, cherries and pumpkins in Pennsylvania, and blueberries in Maine. Come summer, they are buzzing along the Canadian border, making honey.

This season, Hackenberg hauled his hives to Florida by Oct. 10, just as he has done for 40 years. By November, some hives were empty; others had just sickly remains.

He made some calls and found out a beekeeper in Georgia had seen the same thing.

Since then, with concern mounting, experts have been investigating. A few months ago, they were referring to the die-off as "fall dwindle disease." Now, they have ratcheted up to "colony collapse disorder."

Last weekend, apiarist van Engelsdorp and other researchers headed to central California, where hundreds of acres of almond trees - the source of 80 percent of the world’s almond harvest - are about to blossom.

Last fall, workers transported managed hives - about 450 per tractor-trailer - to California from colder areas such as the Great Lakes and the Dakotas. Now, hives are coming from Texas, Florida, Maryland and Pennsylvania. In all, about half the country’s managed hives are needed for the mass pollination.

As workers open the hives to check them, "the picture’s not so good," said Jeffrey S. Pettis, a leader in bee research at a U.S. Department of Agriculture lab in Beltsville, Md.

Pettis said bees often had some winter loss, but this level of death was unprecedented. […]

Neither entomologists nor growers can say what will happen when the 2007 growing season for most of the country’s crops starts. "We’re coming up onto the season where people are really going to be worried," Frazier said.

The next item came on the 12th: Mystery illness killing U.S. honeybees.

A mystery ailment labeled Colony Collapse Disorder is killing tens of thousands of honeybee colonies across America.

The illness — reported in at least 22 states — is threatening the livelihood of beekeepers, honey production and possibly crops that need bees for pollination. […]

The country’s bee population had already been shocked in recent years by a tiny, parasitic bug called the varroa mite, which has destroyed more than half of some beekeepers’ hives and devastated most wild honeybee populations.

Beekeepers are wondering if bee deaths over the last couple of years that had been blamed on mites or poor management might actually have resulted from the mystery ailment.

"Now people think that they may have had this three or four years," said Dennis vanEnglesdorp, acting state apiarist for the Pennsylvania Department of Agriculture. […]

Hackenberg, 58, was first to report Colony Collapse Disorder to bee researchers at Penn State University. He notified them in November when he was down to about 1,000 colonies - after having started the fall with 2,900. […]

Among the clues being investigated by researchers:

– Although the bodies of dead bees often are littered around a hive, sometimes carried out of the hive by worker bees, no bee remains are typically found around colonies struck by the mystery ailment. Scientists assume these bees have flown away from the hive before dying.

– From the outside, a stricken colony may appear normal, with bees leaving and entering. But when beekeepers look inside the hive box, they find few mature bees taking care of the younger, developing bees.

– Normally, a weakened bee colony would be immediately overrun by bees from other colonies or by pests going after the hive’s honey. That’s not the case with the stricken colonies, which might not be touched for at least two weeks, said Diana Cox-Foster, a Penn State entomology professor investigating the problem.

"That is a real abnormality," Hackenberg said.

Geeze! That is actually kinda creepy if you think about it! An abandoned hive that no other bees will go near? Is that like "haunted houses" on the bee scale? Or how about the mutilated cattle that so many have claimed to be the work of ETs, pointing out that scavengers will not touch the carcasses?

Notice also the remark in the above item "Beekeepers are wondering if bee deaths over the last couple of years that had been blamed on mites or poor management might actually have resulted from the mystery ailment. Now people think that they may have had this three or four years."

Three or four years takes us back to 2002, 2003. Now, we can’t go blaming everything on Bush and the Ziocons, but I just find it really interesting that all kinds of weird planetary dysfunctions have been generated or noted since the inception of the Bush Reich. Perhaps it is a partly a consequence of the collective anger and frustration of humanity that has no other way to manifest? After all, didn’t the Princeton Global Consciousness Project register a significant spike PRIOR to 9/11? And the same prior to the Indonesian Tsunami? (See PEAR for details of this type of work.)

The next item was on 28 Feb. - Famine is Coming to the U.S.: Honeybees Vanish, Leaving Crops and Keepers in Peril. . Notice that the tone of this article is rather similar to controlled hysteria.

David Bradshaw has endured countless stings during his life as a beekeeper, but he got the shock of his career when he opened his boxes last month and found half of his 100 million bees missing.

In 24 states throughout the country, beekeepers have gone through similar shocks as their bees have been disappearing inexplicably at an alarming rate, threatening not only their livelihoods but also the production of numerous crops, including California almonds, one of the nation’s most profitable.

"I have never seen anything like it," Mr. Bradshaw, 50, said from an almond orchard here beginning to bloom. "Box after box after box are just empty. There’s nobody home." […]

As researchers scramble to find answers to the syndrome they have decided to call "colony collapse disorder," growers are becoming openly nervous about the capability of the commercial bee industry to meet the growing demand for bees to pollinate dozens of crops, from almonds to avocados to kiwis. […]

A Cornell University study has estimated that honeybees annually pollinate more than $14 billion worth of seeds and crops in the United States, mostly fruits, vegetables and nuts. "Every third bite we consume in our diet is dependent on a honeybee to pollinate that food," said Zac Browning, vice president of the American Beekeeping Federation.

The bee losses are ranging from 30 to 60 percent on the West Coast, with some beekeepers on the East Coast and in Texas reporting losses of more than 70 percent… […]

Once the domain of hobbyists with a handful of backyard hives, beekeeping has become increasingly commercial and consolidated. Over the last two decades, the number of beehives, now estimated by the Agriculture Department to be 2.4 million, has dropped by a quarter and the number of beekeepers by half.

Pressure has been building on the bee industry. The costs to maintain hives, also known as colonies, are rising along with the strain on bees of being bred to pollinate rather than just make honey. And beekeepers are losing out to suburban sprawl in their quest for spots where bees can forage for nectar to stay healthy and strong during the pollination season.

"There are less beekeepers, less bees, yet more crops to pollinate," Mr. Browning said. […]

Investigators are exploring a range of theories, including viruses, a fungus and poor bee nutrition.

They are also studying a group of pesticides that were banned in some European countries to see if they are somehow affecting bees’ innate ability to find their way back home. […]

Growers have tried before to do without bees. In past decades, they have used everything from giant blowers to helicopters to mortar shells to try to spread pollen across the plants. […]

Beekeepers have endured two major mite infestations since the 1980s, which felled many hobbyist beekeepers, and three cases of unexplained disappearing disorders as far back as 1894. But those episodes were confined to small areas, Mr. van Engelsdorp said.

The comment SOTT wrote on the above article was:
While we cannot yet say what might be behind this strange phenomenon, there are two suspects in view: EM waves in the atmosphere - either natural or artificial - or some other kind of disruptive frequency such as cell-phone towers.

It would be an event of the utmost irony if our civilization’s mad rush to have the latest gadgets brought the whole kit and kaboodle to its knees via starvation.

At this point, I ordered (from the local Uni library) some academic papers researching the effects of EM waves on Bees to look for clues. Nothing I read was the smoking gun, but the overall impression I had was that all kinds of waves and frequencies that are being propagated by modern technology are not only bad for bees, they are bad for humans. It was also clear that some waves can be produced naturally, as I speculated above. For example, it is well known that water flowing underground can generate an electrical current and an EM field. Tectonic stresses are also implicated in EM anomalies on the planet. So, it could very well be that all of these things, taken together, point to a generalized disruption in the Earth’s EM field, or signals of some processes going on deep in our planet of which we are ignorant and unaware.

I also went searching back through our archives to see what other clues I could find. There was this interesting item that came up back in December 06: Wild Bees Reject Genetically Engineered Crop. This was a research paper which said:

The ecological impacts of agriculture are of concern, especially with genetically modified and other intensive, modern cropping systems, yet little is known about effects on wild bee populations and subsequent implications for pollination. Pollination deficit (the difference between potential and actual pollination) and bee abundance were measured in organic, conventional, and herbicide-resistant, genetically modified (GM) canola fields (Brassica napus and B. rapa) in northern Alberta, Canada, in the summer of 2002. […]

There was no pollination deficit in organic fields, a moderate pollination deficit in conventional fields, and the greatest pollination deficit in GM fields. Bee abundance was greatest in organic fields, followed by conventional fields, and lowest in GM fields.

Again, it strikes me as tremendously ironic if the drive to control the planet and its population by greedy psychopaths leads to no planet and no people to control! But, if you are a victim of that rapacious mind-set, it’s not so ironic; it’s tragic. Just keep in mind, they are a minority. The rest of humanity could put a stop to this instantly if they wanted to.

Next item was: The Silence of the Bees on March 19 which profiled a bee keeper and his life and the industry. It didn’t have much to say about the sudden deaths of the bees except in the context of previous problems, but there are a couple of significant remarks that bear remembering: .

by Hannah Nordhaus

By the time John Miller realized just how many of his bees were dying, the almonds were in bloom and there was nothing to be done. It was February 2005, and the hives should have been singing with activity, plump brown honeybees working doggedly to carry pollen from blossom to blossom. Instead they were wandering in drunken circles at the base of the hive doors, wingless, desiccated, sluggish, blasé. Miller is accustomed to death on a large scale. “The insect kingdom enjoys little cell repair,” he will often remind you. Even when things are going well, a hive can lose 1,000 bees a day. But the extent of his losses that winter defied even his insect-borne realism. In a matter of weeks, Miller lost almost half of his 13,000 hives — around 300 million bees. […]

Without the bees’ pollination services, California’s almond trees — the state’s top export crop — would produce 40 pounds of almonds per acre; with the bees, they can generate 2,400 pounds. Honeybees provide the same service for more than 100 other crops, from lettuce to cranberries to oranges to canola, up and down the West Coast. […]

Not just the west coast, but the east coast and the rest of the world as well. Did you catch that number: from 2,400 pounds per acre to 40 pounds per acre.

The next item was from 22 March: Are GM Crops Killing Bees? It’s from the German mag, Der Spiegel, and apparently somebody was trying to put together the fact that bees avoid the GM crops reported above with the fact that they were disappearing all over the place.

By Gunther Latsch Der Spiegel Translated from German by Christopher Sultan.

A mysterious decimation of bee populations has German beekeepers worried, while a similar phenomenon in the United States is gradually assuming catastrophic proportions. The consequences for agriculture and the economy could be enormous.

Walter Haefeker is a man who is used to painting grim scenarios. He sits on the board of directors of the German Beekeepers Association (DBIB) and is vice president of the European Professional Beekeepers Association. And because griping is part of a lobbyist’s trade, it is practically his professional duty to warn that "the very existence of beekeeping is at stake."

The problem, says Haefeker, has a number of causes, one being the varroa mite, introduced from Asia, and another is the widespread practice in agriculture of spraying wildflowers with herbicides and practicing monoculture. Another possible cause, according to Haefeker, is the controversial and growing use of genetic engineering in agriculture.

As far back as 2005, Haefeker ended an article he contributed to the journal Der Kritischer Agrarbericht (Critical Agricultural Report) with an Albert Einstein quote: "If the bee disappeared off the surface of the globe then man would only have four years of life left. No more bees, no more pollination, no more plants, no more animals, no more man."

Mysterious events in recent months have suddenly made Einstein’s apocalyptic vision seem all the more topical. For unknown reasons, bee populations throughout Germany are disappearing - something that is so far only harming beekeepers. But the situation is different in the United States, where bees are dying in such dramatic numbers that the economic consequences could soon be dire. No one knows what is causing the bees to perish, but some experts believe that the large-scale use of genetically modified plants in the US could be a factor.

Felix Kriechbaum, an official with a regional beekeepers’ association in Bavaria, recently reported a decline of almost 12 percent in local bee populations. When "bee populations disappear without a trace," says Kriechbaum, it is difficult to investigate the causes, because "most bees don’t die in the beehive." There are many diseases that can cause bees to lose their sense of orientation so they can no longer find their way back to their hives.

Manfred Hederer, the president of the German Beekeepers Association, almost simultaneously reported a 25 percent drop in bee populations throughout Germany. In isolated cases, says Hederer, declines of up to 80 percent have been reported. He speculates that "a particular toxin, some agent with which we are not familiar," is killing the bees.

Politicians, until now, have shown little concern for such warnings or the woes of beekeepers. Although apiarists have been given a chance to make their case - for example in the run-up to the German cabinet’s approval of a genetic engineering policy document by Minister of Agriculture Horst Seehofer in February - their complaints are still largely ignored.

Even when beekeepers actually go to court, as they recently did in a joint effort with the German chapter of the organic farming organization Demeter International and other groups to oppose the use of genetically modified corn plants, they can only dream of the sort of media attention environmental organizations like Greenpeace attract with their protests at test sites.

But that could soon change. Since last November, the US has seen a decline in bee populations so dramatic that it eclipses all previous incidences of mass mortality. Beekeepers on the east coast of the United States complain that they have lost more than 70 percent of their stock since late last year, while the west coast has seen a decline of up to 60 percent.

In an article in its business section in late February, the New York Times calculated the damage US agriculture would suffer if bees died out. Experts at Cornell University in upstate New York have estimated the value bees generate - by pollinating fruit and vegetable plants, almond trees and animal feed like clover - at more than $14 billion.

Scientists call the mysterious phenomenon "Colony Collapse Disorder" (CCD), and it is fast turning into a national catastrophe of sorts. A number of universities and government agencies have formed a "CCD Working Group" to search for the causes of the calamity, but have so far come up empty-handed. But, like Dennis van Engelsdorp, an apiarist with the Pennsylvania Department of Agriculture, they are already referring to the problem as a potential "AIDS for the bee industry."

One thing is certain: Millions of bees have simply vanished. In most cases, all that’s left in the hives are the doomed offspring. But dead bees are nowhere to be found - neither in nor anywhere close to the hives. Diana Cox-Foster, a member of the CCD Working Group, told The Independent that researchers were "extremely alarmed," adding that the crisis "has the potential to devastate the US beekeeping industry."

It is particularly worrisome, she said, that the bees’ death is accompanied by a set of symptoms "which does not seem to match anything in the literature."

In many cases, scientists have found evidence of almost all known bee viruses in the few surviving bees found in the hives after most have disappeared. Some had five or six infections at the same time and were infested with fungi - a sign, experts say, that the insects’ immune system may have collapsed.

The scientists are also surprised that bees and other insects usually leave the abandoned hives untouched. Nearby bee populations or parasites would normally raid the honey and pollen stores of colonies that have died for other reasons, such as excessive winter cold. "This suggests that there is something toxic in the colony itself which is repelling them," says Cox-Foster.

Walter Haefeker, the German beekeeping official, speculates that "besides a number of other factors," the fact that genetically modified, insect-resistant plants are now used in 40 percent of cornfields in the United States could be playing a role. The figure is much lower in Germany - only 0.06 percent - and most of that occurs in the eastern states of Mecklenburg-Western Pomerania and Brandenburg. Haefeker recently sent a researcher at the CCD Working Group some data from a bee study that he has long felt shows a possible connection between genetic engineering and diseases in bees.

The study in question is a small research project conducted at the University of Jena from 2001 to 2004. The researchers examined the effects of pollen from a genetically modified maize variant called "Bt corn" on bees. A gene from a soil bacterium had been inserted into the corn that enabled the plant to produce an agent that is toxic to insect pests. The study concluded that there was no evidence of a "toxic effect of Bt corn on healthy honeybee populations." But when, by sheer chance, the bees used in the experiments were infested with a parasite, something eerie happened. According to the Jena study, a "significantly stronger decline in the number of bees" occurred among the insects that had been fed a highly concentrated Bt poison feed.

According to Hans-Hinrich Kaatz, a professor at the University of Halle in eastern Germany and the director of the study, the bacterial toxin in the genetically modified corn may have "altered the surface of the bee’s intestines, sufficiently weakening the bees to allow the parasites to gain entry - or perhaps it was the other way around. We don’t know."

Of course, the concentration of the toxin was ten times higher in the experiments than in normal Bt corn pollen. In addition, the bee feed was administered over a relatively lengthy six-week period.

Kaatz would have preferred to continue studying the phenomenon but lacked the necessary funding. "Those who have the money are not interested in this sort of research," says the professor, "and those who are interested don’t have the money."

Hmmm… if GM corn pollen can have that effect on bees, wonder what the GM corn is doing to those humans and animals that eat it?

Moving along, as the reports about the problem in the U.S. began to propagate, similar reports began coming in from other countries, mainly UK and Germany, on 1st April: . Flowers and fruit crops facing disaster as disease kills off bees.

Devastating diseases are killing off vast numbers of bees across the country, threatening major ecological and economic problems. Honeybee colonies have been wiped out this winter at twice the usual rate or worse in some areas.

Honeybee colonies in Britain have been wiped out this winter Honeybees account for 80pc of all pollination

The losses are the result of either Colony Collapse Disorder (CCD), a disease that has already decimated bee populations in the US and parts of Europe, or a new, resistant form of Varroa destructor, a parasite that attacks bees.

Experts fear that, because honeybees are responsible for 80 per cent of all pollination as they collect nectar for the hive, there could be severe ecological problems with flowers, fruit and crops failing to grow.

The pollination carried out by bees is worth £200 million to Britain’s farmers each year. However, the total contribution by bees to the economy, including profits made from the sales of food, is up to £1 billion.

In London, about 4,000 hives - two-thirds of the bee colonies in the capital - are estimated to have died this winter.

The normal winter mortality rate is about 15 per cent. John Chapple, the chairman of the London Beekeepers’ Association, who has lost the populations in 30 of his 40 hives, said:"It’s frightening. The mortality rate is the highest in living memory and no one seems to know what’s behind it."

In 23 of Mr Chapple’s hives, no trace was left of the bees - a characteristic commonly associated with CCD. Officers from the National Bee Unit at the Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs (Defra) in Sand Hutton, near York, are investigating the cause of the population slump.

They fear that, with many beekeepers yet to check their hives after the insects’ winter quiescence - a form of hibernation - the extent of the problem may deepen. So far, almost 30 per cent of hives inspected by the unit have been lost, twice the normal winter loss rate.

In Worcestershire and Hereford, of the 20 hives checked, only one had survived. In West Sussex, more than 80 per cent of the colonies had been lost. In Cambridgeshire, the figure was more than 50 per cent.

A spokesman for Defra said: "It is too early in the year to reach any conclusions. Some individual beekeepers have experienced large losses, others none. Any beekeeper who has concerns should make contact with the local bee inspector." […]

In 23 of Mr Chapple’s hives, no trace was left of the bees - a characteristic commonly associated with CCD. Officers from the National Bee Unit at the Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs (Defra) in Sand Hutton, near York, are investigating the cause of the population slump.

They fear that, with many beekeepers yet to check their hives after the insects’ winter quiescence - a form of hibernation - the extent of the problem may deepen. So far, almost 30 per cent of hives inspected by the unit have been lost, twice the normal winter loss rate.

In Worcestershire and Hereford, of the 20 hives checked, only one had survived. In West Sussex, more than 80 per cent of the colonies had been lost. In Cambridgeshire, the figure was more than 50 per cent.

A spokesman for Defra said:"It is too early in the year to reach any conclusions. Some individual beekeepers have experienced large losses, others none. Any beekeeper who has concerns should make contact with the local bee inspector." […]

Bee-keepers in Poland, Greece, Croatia, Switzerland, Italy and Portugal have also reported heavy losses. Meanwhile, scientists at universities in Southampton and Stirling who are concerned about declining numbers of wild bumblebees - which also aid pollination - are to use dogs to search for colonies in Scotland and Hertfordshire this year.

Don’t ya just love that guy who said: "It is too early in the year to reach any conclusions. Some individual beekeepers have experienced large losses, others none. Any beekeeper who has concerns should make contact with the local bee inspector."

Oh, yeah, right! That’s like some guy on the Titanic saying "Don’t worry folks, it was just a little bump…"

Interestingly, at this point, Cuban leader Fidel Castro checked in on the subject: Where Have All the Bees Gone? And Other Reflections on the Internationalization of Genocide. Yeah, I know "pinko dictator." Believe me, I was brought up in Florida next door to Cuban exiles, so thinking of Fidel Castro as an evil, anti-democratic, monster was as natural a part of the landscape as the oranges that grew all around me. Nevertheless, that was then, this is now. We have to grow up and understand how our fake democratic leaders have been lying to us for a very long time with the complicity of the Zionist controlled media. The piece is about ethanol - a fuel that is based on agriculture - and it’s pretty easy to see the connection: ethanol needs agriculture, agriculture needs bees; no bees, agriculture collapses, so no ethanol. Even though he is using the subject to get in a few hits at the West (justifiably, I think), every word Fidel Castro has written in this article deserves your attention. Even though he mentions the Bee problem only toward the end, I think you will agree, considering the material already presented, that he has a much better grasp of the scope of the issue than the leaders of the so-called "Free World," the much vaunted Western Civilization that we are all beginning to see is really a Great Beast that may devour us all:

April 4: The Camp David meeting has just come to an end. All of us followed the press conference offered by the presidents of the United States and Brazil attentively, as we did the news surrounding the meeting and the opinions voiced in this connection.

Faced with demands related to customs duties and subsidies which protect and support US ethanol production, Bush did not make the slightest concession to his Brazilian guest at Camp David.

President Lula attributed to this the rise in corn prices, which, according to his own statements, had gone up more than 85 percent.

Before these statements were made, the Washington Post had published an article by the Brazilian leader which expounded on the idea of transforming food into fuel.

It is not my intention to hurt Brazil or to meddle in the internal affairs of this great country. It was in effect in Rio de Janeiro, host of the United Nations Conference on Environment and Development, exactly 15 years ago, where I delivered a 7-minute speech vehemently denouncing the environmental dangers that menaced our species’ survival. Bush Sr., then President of the United States, was present at that meeting and applauded my words out of courtesy; all other presidents there applauded, too.

No one at Camp David answered the fundamental question. Where are the more than 500 million tons of corn and other cereals which the United States, Europe and wealthy nations require to produce the gallons of ethanol that big companies in the United States and other countries demand in exchange for their voluminous investments going to be produced and who is going to supply them? Where are the soy, sunflower and rape seeds, whose essential oils these same, wealthy nations are to turn into fuel, going to be produced and who will produce them?

Some countries are food producers which export their surpluses. The balance of exporters and consumers had already become precarious before this and food prices had skyrocketed. In the interests of brevity, I shall limit myself to pointing out the following:

According to recent data, the five chief producers of corn, barley, sorghum, rye, millet and oats which Bush wants to transform into the raw material of ethanol production, supply the world market with 679 million tons of these products. Similarly, the five chief consumers, some of which also produce these grains, currently require 604 million annual tons of these products. The available surplus is less than 80 million tons of grain.

This colossal squandering of cereals destined to fuel production - and these estimates do not include data on oily seeds - shall serve to save rich countries less than 15 percent of the total annual consumption of their voracious automobiles.

At Camp David, Bush declared his intention of applying this formula around the world. This spells nothing other than the internationalization of genocide.

In his statements, published by the Washington Post on the eve of the Camp David meeting, the Brazilian president affirmed that less than one percent of Brazil’s arable land was used to grow cane destined to ethanol production. This is nearly three times the land surface Cuba used when it produced nearly 10 million tons of sugar a year, before the crisis that befell the Soviet Union and the advent of climate changes.

Our country has been producing and exporting sugar for a longer time. First, on the basis of the work of slaves, whose numbers swelled to over 300 thousand in the first years of the 19th century and who turned the Spanish colony into the world’s number one exporter. Nearly one hundred years later, at the beginning of the 20th century, when Cuba was a pseudo-republic which had been denied full independence by US interventionism, it was immigrants from the West Indies and illiterate Cubans alone who bore the burden of growing and harvesting sugarcane on the island. The scourge of our people was the off-season, inherent to the cyclical nature of the harvest. Sugarcane plantations were the property of US companies or powerful Cuban-born landowners. Cuba, thus, has more experience than anyone as regards the social impact of this crop.

This past Sunday, April 1, CNN televised the opinions of Brazilian experts who affirm that many lands destined to sugarcane have been purchased by wealthy Americans and Europeans.

As part of my reflections on the subject, published on March 29, I expounded on the impact climate change has had on Cuba and on other basic characteristics of our country’s climate which contribute to this.

On our poor and anything but consumerist island, one would be unable to find enough workers to endure the rigors of the harvest and to care for the sugarcane plantations in the ever more intense heat, rains or droughts. When hurricanes lash the island, not even the best machines can harvest the bent-over and twisted canes. For centuries, the practice of burning sugarcane was unknown and no soil was compacted under the weight of complex machines and enormous trucks. Nitrogen, potassium and phosphate fertilizers, today extremely expensive, did not yet even exist, and the dry and wet months succeeded each other regularly. In modern agriculture, no high yields are possible without crop rotation methods.

On Sunday, April 1, the French Press Agency (AFP) published disquieting reports on the subject of climate change, which experts gathered by the United Nations already consider an inevitable phenomenon that will spell serious repercussions for the world in the coming decades.

According to a UN report to be approved next week in Brussels, climate change will have a significant impact on the American continent, generating more violent storms and heat waves and causing droughts, the extinction of some species and even hunger in Latin America.

The AFP report indicates that the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) forewarned that at the end of this century, every hemisphere will endure water-related problems and, if governments take no measures in this connection, rising temperatures could increase the risks of mortality, contamination, natural catastrophes and infectious diseases.

In Latin America, global warming is already melting glaciers in the Andes and threatening the Amazon forest, whose perimeter may slowly be turned into a savannah, the cable goes on to report.

Because a great part of its population lives near the coast, the United States is also vulnerable to extreme natural phenomena, as hurricane Katrina demonstrated in 2005.

According to AFP, this is the second of three IPCC reports which began to be published last February, following an initial scientific forecast which established the certainty of climate change.

This second 1400-page report which analyzes climate change in different sectors and regions, of which AFP has obtained a copy, considers that, even if radical measures to reduce carbon dioxide emissions that pollute the atmosphere are taken, the rise in temperatures around the planet in the coming decades is already unavoidable, concludes the French Press Agency.

As was to be expected, at the Camp David meeting, Dan Fisk, National Security advisor for the region, declared that "in the discussion on regional issues, [I expect] Cuba to come up if there’s anyone that knows how to create starvation, it’s Fidel Castro. He also knows how not to do ethanol".

As I find myself obliged to respond to this gentleman, it is my duty to remind him that Cuba’s infant mortality rate is lower than the United States‘. All citizens — this is beyond question — enjoy free medical services. Everyone has access to education and no one is denied employment, in spite of nearly half a century of economic blockade and the attempts of US governments to starve and economically asphyxiate the people of Cuba.

China would never devote a single ton of cereals or leguminous plants to the production of ethanol, and it is an economically prosperous nation which is breaking growth records, where all citizens earn the income they need to purchase essential consumer items, despite the fact that 48 percent of its population, which exceeds 1.3 billion, works in agriculture. On the contrary, it has set out to reduce energy consumption considerably by shutting down thousands of factories which consume unacceptable amounts of electricity and hydrocarbons. It imports many of the food products mentioned above from far- off corners of the world, transporting these over thousands of miles.

Scores of countries do not produce hydrocarbons and are unable to produce corn and other grains or oily seeds, for they do not even have enough water to meet their most basic needs.

At a meeting on ethanol production held in Buenos Aires by the Argentine Oil Industry Chamber and Cereals Exporters Association, Loek Boonekamp, the Dutch head of the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD)’s commercial and marketing division, told the press that governments are very much enthused about this process but that they should objectively consider whether ethanol ought to be given such resolute support.

According to Boonekamp, the United States is the only country where ethanol can be profitable and, without subsidies, no other country can make it viable.

According to the report, Boonekamp insists that ethanol is not manna from Heaven and that we should not blindly commit to developing this process.

Today, developed countries are pushing to have fossil fuels mixed with biofuels at around five percent and this is already affecting agricultural prices. If this figure went up to 10 percent, 30 percent of the United States’ cultivated surface and 50 percent of Europe’s would be required. That is the reason Boonekamp asks himself whether the process is sustainable, as an increase in the demand for crops destined to ethanol production would generate higher and less stable prices.

Protectionist measures are today at 54 cents per gallon and real subsidies reach far higher figures.

Applying the simple arithmetic we learned in high school, we could show how, by simply replacing incandescent bulbs with fluorescent ones, as I explained in my previous reflections, millions and millions of dollars in investment and energy could be saved, without the need to use a single acre of farming land.

In the meantime, we are receiving news from Washington, through the AP, reporting that the mysterious disappearance of millions of bees throughout the United States has edged beekeepers to the brink of a nervous breakdown and is even cause for concern in Congress, which will discuss this Thursday the critical situation facing this insect, essential to the agricultural sector. According to the report, the first disquieting signs of this enigma became evident shortly after Christmas in the state of Florida, when beekeepers discovered that their bees had vanished without a trace. Since then, the syndrome which experts have christened as Colony Collapse Disorder (CCD) has reduced the country’s swarms by 25 percent.

Daniel Weaver, president of the US Beekeepers Association, stated that more than half a million colonies, each with a population of nearly 50 thousand bees, had been lost. He added that the syndrome has struck 30 of the country’s 50 states. What is curious about the phenomenon is that, in many cases, the mortal remains of the bees are not found.

According to a study conducted by Cornell University, these industrious insects pollinate crops valued at anywhere from 12 to 14 billion dollars.

Scientists are entertaining all kinds of hypotheses, including the theory that a pesticide may have caused the bees’ neurological damage and altered their sense of orientation. Others lay the blame on the drought and even mobile phone waves, but, what’s certain is that no one knows exactly what has unleashed this syndrome.

The worst may be yet to come: a new war aimed at securing gas and oil supplies that can take humanity to the brink of total annihilation.

Invoking intelligence sources, Russian newspapers have reported that a war on Iran has been in the works for over three years now, since the day the government of the United States resolved to occupy Iraq completely, unleashing a seemingly endless and despicable civil war.

All the while, the government of the United States devotes hundreds of billions to the development of highly sophisticated technologies, as those which employ micro-electronic systems or new nuclear weapons which can strike their targets an hour following the order to attack.

The United States brazenly turns a deaf ear to world public opinion, which is against all kinds of nuclear weapons.

Razing all of Iran’s factories to the ground is a relatively easy task, from the technical point of view, for a powerful country like the United States. The difficult task may come later, if a new war were to be unleashed against another Muslim faith which deserves our utmost respect, as do all other religions of the Near, Middle or Far East, predating or postdating Christianity.

The arrest of English soldiers at Iran’s territorial waters recalls the nearly identical act of provocation of the so-called "Brothers to the Rescue" who, ignoring President Clinton’s orders advanced over our country’s territorial waters. Cuba’s absolutely legitimate and defensive action gave the United States a pretext to promulgate the well-known Helms-Burton Act, which encroaches upon the sovereignty of other nations besides Cuba. The powerful media have consigned that episode to oblivion. No few people attribute the price of oil, at nearly 70 dollars a gallon as of Monday, to fears of a possible invasion of Iran.

Where shall poor Third World countries find the basic resources needed to survive?

I am not exaggerating or using overblown language. I am confining myself to the facts.

As can be seen, the polyhedron has many dark faces.

Notice that Fidel mentions that the bee problem is "even cause for concern in Congress, which will discuss this Thursday the critical situation facing this insect, essential to the agricultural sector."

I searched the SOTT database and figured we must have missed that one. I then went on google to see what was up with Congress taking on the bee issue and nobody really knowing about it. That’s not to say that the news wasn’t published, it is just that it didn’t get a lot of coverage; it was there, only in local papers, not the big disinfo rags. After a bit of searching, I found that the issue was apparently brought up on March 29th. Valley Beekeepers Take Concerns to Congress. So, let’s back up to what was going on a few days before Fidel decided to accuse the U.S. of planning international genocide.

03/30/2007 - A Valley beekeeper who’s seen a huge number of his bees die off this year took his concerns to congress on Thursday.

A house committee led by Merced Congressman Dennis Cardoza held hearings on the mysterious deaths of bee colonies across the country in recent years.

Los Banos beekeeper Gene Brandi was among those who testified. He and other beekeepers want the federal government to fund more research on these deaths.

Bees are critical to Valley agriculture because they pollinate fruit and nut trees.

That’s it, total story. Another local item: Farm leader urges more bee research

By: Bill Curtis Friday, March 30th, 2007

Diseases and pests have whittled away at the bee population, which pollinates billions of dollars’ worth of crops. California Farm Bureau vice president Paul Wenger told a House Agriculture Subcommittee that more research is needed to restore beehives to full health.

Again, that was it.

The following day, there was this - also a local news item that did not get national coverage: Ethanol demand good for corn crop. No, the headline doesn’t say anything about bees, but that is mainly what the story is about. Curious, eh? Anyway, shades of Fidel’s speculations!

Saturday, March 31, 2007 By Rosemary Parker kalamazoogazette.com

On Thursday, scientists and beekeepers pleaded with Congress for money to help find out what’s killing the nation’s honeybees, pollinators of Michigan’s $359 million fruit industry.

On Friday, farmers learned that the acreage planted to corn this year, nationwide, will go up a whopping 15 percent — 300,000 acres in Michigan alone.

Farmers gamble every year on the vagaries of weather, insects and market demands.

But this year all of those variables, and now dying bees, are heaped atop a demand for corn for ethanol production that still has everyone reeling.

The supply-and-demand see-saw is not only unsettling for producers — it could end with consumers paying more for everything from hamburger patties (made from corn-fed beef) to the pickles on top (if cucumber yields fall).

The United States Department of Agriculture’s release Friday of the annual planting intentions survey showed a leap in corn planting even stronger than most experts predicted, said Jim Hilker, professor of agriculture economics at Michigan State University.

Here’s how it has complicated the picture since last fall, when corn prices, the amount farmers are paid, nearly doubled during harvest, and then stayed high:

The price of nitrogen fertilizer, essential to growing corn, has skyrocketed, said Mike Staton, MSU Extension agriculture educator in Van Buren County.

The price of anhydrous ammonia, the preferred fertilizer in Michigan’s sandy soils, has climbed from $565 a ton last April to $630 a ton Friday, said Dale Hiatt, manager of Crop Production Services in Mendon. “The price goes up daily,'’ Hiatt said.

In 1995, only 15 percent of this country’s fertilizer was imported. Last year 60 percent of the nitrogen fertilizer required by corn was manufactured in countries like Russia and China.

“Everyone’s concerned about energy independence,'’ Staton said, “and we should be thinking about fertilizer independence.'’

Supply and demand has farmland prices soaring too, with leased cropland rates in southwestern Michigan up as much as 25 percent since just last winter, Staton said.

Corn’s the big news, but Michigan also leads the nation in production of blueberries, cherries and cucumbers for pickles.

Growers of those crops are facing their own year of change.

The bees that pollinate their crops are dead and dying, and scientists still aren’t sure why — or whether there will be enough bees to do the job a month from now when Michigan’s fruit crops start blossoming.

Many Michigan crops are almost entirely dependent on pollination by bees. And that means growers rely on commercial beekeepers, who move hives by truck from one field to another, because infestations of parasitic mites and beetles in the 1990s have almost wiped out wild bees. Those migratory commercial bee colonies in 24 states, including Michigan, have been the hardest hit by a mysterious new affliction termed “colony collapse disorder'’ that has resulted in losses of up to 100 percent of the bees in stricken hives.

Because they don’t know what causes the problem, they have no way to treat it, nor can beekeepers be sure that the hives they have built up in Florida over the winter will still be alive when they are needed next month to pollinate Michigan fields and orchards.

“I haven’t got the foggiest idea,'’ said Terry Klein, vice president of the Michigan beekeeper’s association.

They do know that they’ll get scant help from the colonies of bees that were left here to overwinter, about half of the state’s total, Klein estimated.

Beekeepers are reporting about 80 percent of the bees did not make it through the winter — killed not by colony collapse disorder but by starvation.

Michigan’s mild early winter prompted bees to continue flight activity into December, explained Michigan’s state apiarist, Mike Hansen.

Bees ate honey to fuel that activity, stored in parts of the hive that were easiest to reach.

Then, when extremely cold weather hit in February, the bees weren’t able to generate enough heat to reach honey stored in other parts of the hive. They died of starvation in a hives still laden with honey.

Where does that leave Michigan’s fruit and vegetable farmers?

“They’re trusting the beekeeper; they don’t have a choice,'’ Klein said. But even the beekeepers won’t know until they get here whether there will be sufficient bees to pollinate here.

“Until they face the music,'’ Klein said, “they don’t know what the dance is going to be.'’

It’s sounding grimmer all the time, isn’t it?

Over the next couple of days, another local type item came up: Vanishing Honeybee Problem Hits Rockford

By Ryan Cummings 13 News It’s a strange phenomenon hitting the east and west coast. Billions of honey bees vanishing for no apparent reason. They’re leaving hives in Illinois too. Some, right here in Rockford. It’s so bizarre, Congress is looking into it. And farmers who rely on the insect are still confused. Pat Curran owns Curran’s Orchard. He says, "None of this makes sense. This has never happened before. If you had honey in there, you would typically have bees unless the mites got to them." It’s a weird feeling for Curran, Who lost a whole hive this past winter. "Normally when you open up a hive like that, where the bees can not defend their food supply and the other bees will attack and steal it and you’re not seeing that. It’s almost like ‘we don’t wanna go in there.’" The reason? No one knows. Some think it’s the environment. Others point to parasites. "You got terachiomites, you got beroahmites, you’ve got the hive beetle, you’ve got all these problems that bees are fighting right now and this thing comes along and we’re all scratching our heads saying ‘We don’t know what’s going on.’" Another theory: pesticides. Curran says, "I spray about 1/10th of what I’m supposed to put on out here and I haven’t changed my chemicals, you know, so I would say ‘I don’t think that’s it.’" It’s known as colony collapse disorder or CCD. Farmers are testifying in Washington because most crops are pollinated by honeybees. Curran, who also runs an orchard, says it could make some prices go up. "I mean you can always get apples from China, and Brazil and Argentina or someplace like that, but it’s your local supply here in the United States that could suffer. We don’t know yet, ya know? Well you just say ‘Well, could it or couldn’t it?’ And maybe it will." That remains to be seen. As for future planning. "You don’t, there’s nothing you can do at this stage of the game. You sit there and say ‘Come on baby, just live for me OK? Get out and do your thing and pollinate.’" The House Committee on Agriculture says it will monitor the situation until researchers find out what’s wrong.

And: Spring Mystery: Where Are All the Bees?

Apr. 2, 2007 - It is a mystery causing heated debate in the world of beekeeping: What’s wrong with the bees? Why are they suddenly and without warning leaving their colonies - and disappearing almost overnight - by the millions in the United States, Canada and Europe?

Nationwide, there are 2.4 million bee colonies that are used in agriculture to pollinate everything from almonds to fruits to flowering plants. Beekeepers estimate that 600,000, about 25 percent [? !] of the colonies, have been affected by the mysterious disappearance.

The U.S. Department of Agriculture reports that 27 states from New York to California are now affected by the bee mystery.

On Capitol Hill this week, Congress heard from beekeepers, scientists and government officials.

Beekeepers complained that the basic science of what is happening to the bees isn’t being done. Officials with the Department of Agriculture testified that they have collected samples of bees but they don’t have the money to process them.

David Ellingson, a commercial beekeeper from Minnesota, called this year "catastrophic" and said money is needed immediately to research the mystery. […]

California almond growers may have the most to worry about. Pollination of California’s vast almond groves is the main event of beekeeping nationwide. It takes about one million colonies of bees to pollinate the almond trees; in total that’s about 30 billion bees - many of them trucked in from across the country.

Paul Wenger of the California Farm Bureau testified that "bees are the unsung heroes of our state’s important almond industry that has an annual farm value of more than $2.5 billion."

Wenger added that more than honey and almonds are at stake.

In California, bees pollinate "melons, cherries, avocados, Bartlett pears, bushberries, kiwi, many apple varieties, cucumbers, plums, prunes, pumpkin, squash, ornamental plants, and dozens of vegetable and flower seeds," said Wegner. […]

That said, beekeepers warn that diminishing bee colonies will affect the price of honey and eventually the price of produce.

Of course things could always get worse.

Albert Einstein, quoted in Germany’s Der Spiegel, once said, "if the bee disappeared off the surface of the globe, then man would only have four years of life left. No more bees, no more pollination, no more plants, no more animals, no more man."

At this point, Congress had been notified that there was a problem, and in the meantime, Fidel Castro had begun "spreading evil commie lies" about the U.S. (sarcasm, people!) that were racing around the world, and a few more items came up: Mysterious disappearance of US bees creating a buzz

April 07, 2007 AFP: Bee numbers on parts of the east coast and in Texas have fallen by more than 70 percent, while California has seen colonies drop by 30 to 60 percent.

According to estimates from the US Department of Agriculture, bees are vanishing across a total of 22 states, and for the time being no one really knows why. "Approximately 40 percent of my 2,000 colonies are currently dead and this is the greatest winter colony mortality I have ever experienced in my 30 years of beekeeping," apiarist Gene Brandi, from the California State Beekeepers Association, told Congress recently. […] There are some 2.4 million professional hives in the country, according to the Agriculture Department, 25 percent fewer than at the start of the 1980s. And the number of beekeepers has halved. The situation is so bad, that beekeepers are now calling for some kind of government intervention, warning the flight of the bees could be catastrophic for crop growers. Domestic bees are essential for pollinating some 90 varieties of vegetables and fruits, such as apples, avocados, and blueberries and cherries. […] "CCD is associated with unique symptoms, not seen in normal collapses associated with varroa mites and honey bee viruses or in colony deaths due to winter kill," entomologist Diana Cox-Foster told the Congress committee. In cases of colony collapse disorder, flourishing hives are suddenly depopulated leaving few, if any, surviving bees behind. The queen bee, which is the only one in the hive allowed to reproduce, is found with just a handful of young worker bees and a reserve of food. Curiously though no dead bees are found either inside or outside the hive. The fact that other bees or parasites seem to shun the emptied hives raises suspicions that some kind of toxin or chemical is keeping the insects away, Cox-Foster said. Those bees found in such devastated colonies also all seem to be infected with multiple micro-organisms, many of which are known to be behind stress-related illness in bees. Scientists working to unravel the mysteries behind CCD believe a new pathogen may be the cause, or a new kind of chemical product which could be weakening the insects’ immune systems. The finger of suspicion is being pointed at agriculture pesticides such as the widely-used neonicotinoides, which are already known to be poisonous to bees. France saw a huge fall in its bee population in the 1990s, blamed on the insecticide Gaucho which has now been banned in the country.

They are all looking for some kind of chemical or disease to blame it on and point to the fact that the bees that are left behind are infected with all kinds of micro-organisms. Note that the Queen is found with a reserve of food and a few sick attendants, all of whom we assume are infected as described. But what about the reserve of food? That suggests that there is a consciousness about the thing and I begin to wonder if something hardwired into creatures is not being activated similar to the way their hardwiring is activated to migrate? I have heard many stories about creatures fleeing the scene of a future disaster. This was seemingly confirmed after the Indonesian after-Christmas Tsunami. I can’t help but wonder if the bees are sensing something very significant in the areas where they are disappearing and they are leaving purposively, abandoning the weak and sick, but doing so humanely (why do we use "humane" to describe kindness when humans are the unkindest creatures of all?), leaving food to last probably as long as they are expected to live.

Concerning what repels other creatures from the abandoned hive, it could be a toxin, but then again, it could be a signal generated by the remaining bees themselves.

And: Did the bees all buzz off? Colonies across country mysteriously vanishing

By Kathy Hanks The Hutchinson News

HILLSBORO - Brent Barkman is trying to solve a mystery.

Why did half of his 6,000 colonies of honeybees disappeared?

"It was strange," Barkman said. "It’s like they flew off and couldn’t find their way back."

The owner of Barkman Honey Co. began noticing the problem last fall.

Even Congress has been investigating the mystery, which has been identified as colony collapse disorder, characterized by the sudden die-off of honeybee colonies. […]

Honey producer Brent Barkman suggests concerned citizens contact representatives in Washington.

Residents can let legislators know they are concerned about the threat to the honeybee, and they don’t want to lose federal funding, which is necessary for researching the disorder.

Science Daily was apparently allowed by the Bush Reich to get on the bandwagon on April 13th with the following item designed to make it look like a general problem of humanity, not the problem of greedy corporations: Losing Bees, Butterflies And Other Pollinators

Humans are reducing numbers of pollinators like bees and butterflies by destroying habitats, spraying pesticides and emitting pollution. Now, a University of Kansas researcher and a world-famous crop artist are behind a nationwide campaign to publicize the peril faced by species that transfer pollen between flowers.

"This is serious," said Orley "Chip" Taylor, professor of ecology and evolutionary biology at KU. "We’re losing six thousand acres of habitat a day to development, 365 days a year. One out of every three bites you eat is traceable to pollinators’ activity. But if you start losing pollinators, you start losing plants."

Taylor works with the North American Pollinator Protection Campaign (NAPPC). That group has successfully worked with the United States Department of Agriculture and U.S. Senate to designate June 24 through June 30, 2007, as "National Pollinator Week." The NAPPC also has convinced the United States Postal Service to issue a block of four "Pollination" stamps this summer depicting a Morrison’s bumble bee, a calliope hummingbird, a lesser long-nosed bat and a Southern dogface butterfly.

Oh, geeze! Be still my heart! We are on the verge of a disaster of Biblical proportions and they have decided to create "National Pollinator Week" and issue a stamp? There are some days when I think that a huge segment of the population fell out of the stupid tree and hit every branch on the way down.

To call more attention to pollinators at risk, Taylor has enlisted help from noted Kansas-based artist Stan Herd. Herd executes masterful large-scale earthworks around the world, including rock mosaics, natural-material sculptures and crop art.

And now, they are going to create ART??!!! God help us! The Lunatics have taken over the asylum!

"I sent Stan Herd an e-mail and said, ‘Hey, we’ve got a project here I’d like to have you think about’," said Taylor. "Stan immediately said ‘yes.’ He’s very much aware of ecological issues and he wants to become involved."

Herd will take an image from one "Pollinator" stamp - the Southern dogface butterfly - and create a vast facsimile at Pendleton’s Country Market, a family farm between Kansas City and Lawrence. The image will be best viewed aerially from a nearby silo or an aircraft. Herd’s immense stamp reproduction is to incorporate plants that conservationists urge for use in backyard butterfly gardens.

"I wanted to add my artistic statement to the equation," said Herd. "I’m a fan of the flora and fauna and know that with migratory critters like butterflies there are increasing problems because of loss of habitat. My work is about my ideals. It also catches young people’s attention and we’ll bring school kids out to get involved in this piece."

Taylor and NAPPC are grateful for the awareness Herd’s work could bring to the drop in pollinator populations.

"We can use this larger image to attract the attention of the public to this cause," said Laurie Adams, who manages NAPPC. "Beautiful green lawns are wonderful but we need to do more with our cities, farms and the habitats that we control to provide for wildlife. Creating pollinator gardens or Monarch butterfly waystations through Monarch Watch are easy to do. And they are important."

Like we have time for that nonsense? And who do they think they are really kidding?

Oh, yeah, right. Lost my head. They are fooling the U.S. population into thinking that something is actually being done. Go back to sleep folks, nothing to see here!

The next item is quite interesting since it takes us back to the comments posted by SOTT to the Feb. 28th article: Are mobile phones wiping out our bees? Scientists claim radiation from handsets are to blame for mysterious ‘colony collapse’ of bees

15 April: It seems like the plot of a particularly far-fetched horror film. But some scientists suggest that our love of the mobile phone could cause massive food shortages, as the world’s harvests fail.

They are putting forward the theory that radiation given off by mobile phones and other hi-tech gadgets is a possible answer to one of the more bizarre mysteries ever to happen in the natural world - the abrupt disappearance of the bees that pollinate crops. Late last week, some bee-keepers claimed that the phenomenon - which started in the US, then spread to continental Europe - was beginning to hit Britain as well.

The theory is that radiation from mobile phones interferes with bees’ navigation systems, preventing the famously home loving species from finding their way back to their hives. Improbable as it may seem, there is now evidence to back this up.

Colony Collapse Disorder (CCD) occurs when a hive’s inhabitants suddenly disappear, leaving only queens, eggs and a few immature workers, like so many apian Mary Celestes. The vanished bees are never found, but thought to die singly far from home. The parasites, wildlife and other bees that normally raid the honey and pollen left behind when a colony dies, refuse to go anywhere near the abandoned hives.

The alarm was first sounded last autumn, but has now hit half of all American states. The West Coast is thought to have lost 60 per cent of its commercial bee population, with 70 per cent missing on the East Coast.

CCD has since spread to Germany, Switzerland, Spain, Portugal, Italy and Greece. And last week John Chapple, one of London’s biggest bee-keepers, announced that 23 of his 40 hives have been abruptly abandoned.

Other apiarists have recorded losses in Scotland, Wales and north-west England, but the Department of the Environment, Food and Rural Affairs insisted: "There is absolutely no evidence of CCD in the UK."

This must be the Titanic guy.

The implications of the spread are alarming. Most of the world’s crops depend on pollination by bees. Albert Einstein once said that if the bees disappeared, "man would have only four years of life left". No one knows why it is happening. Theories involving mites, pesticides, global warming and GM crops have been proposed, but all have drawbacks.

German research has long shown that bees’ behaviour changes near power lines.

Now a limited study at Landau University has found that bees refuse to return to their hives when mobile phones are placed nearby. Dr Jochen Kuhn, who carried it out, said this could provide a "hint" to a possible cause.

Dr George Carlo, who headed a massive study by the US government and mobile phone industry of hazards from mobiles in the Nineties, said: "I am convinced the possibility is real."

The case against handsets

Evidence of dangers to people from mobile phones is increasing. But proof is still lacking, largely because many of the biggest perils, such as cancer, take decades to show up.

Most research on cancer has so far proved inconclusive. But an official Finnish study found that people who used the phones for more than 10 years were 40 per cent more likely to get a brain tumour on the same side as they held the handset.

Equally alarming, blue-chip Swedish research revealed that radiation from mobile phones killed off brain cells, suggesting that today’s teenagers could go senile in the prime of their lives. Studies in India and the US have raised the possibility that men who use mobile phones heavily have reduced sperm counts. And, more prosaically, doctors have identified the condition of "text thumb", a form of RSI from constant texting.

Professor Sir William Stewart, who has headed two official inquiries, warned that children under eight should not use mobiles and made a series of safety recommendations, largely ignored by ministers.

I don’t know about you, but I’m not surprised that health recommendations for the safety of children are largely ignored by our leaders. When have they ever done anything that was really intended to help us? Even the anti-smoking nonsense is cooked up pseudo-research designed to do three things: 1) cover up the diseases caused by industrial pollution and government experiments on human beings; 2) accustom the populace to fascist controls of their private behaviors and generate animosity between people; 3) make more money for the tobacco industry.

Anyway, at this point, after this major UK publication covered the matter, suddenly "Matt Drudge" discovered it. And then… Vanishing honeybees mystify scientists - Congressional Hearing scheduled

22 April WASHINGTON - Go to work, come home. Go to work, come home. Go to work — and vanish without a trace.

Billions of bees have done just that, leaving the crop fields they are supposed to pollinate, and scientists are mystified about why.

The phenomenon was first noticed late last year in the United States, where honeybees are used to pollinate $15 billion worth of fruits, nuts and other crops annually. Disappearing bees also have been reported in Europe and Brazil.

Commercial beekeepers would set their bees near a crop field as usual and come back in two or three weeks to find the hives bereft of foraging worker bees, with only the queen and the immature insects remaining. Whatever worker bees survived were often too weak to perform their tasks.

If the bees were dying of pesticide poisoning or freezing, their bodies would be expected to lie around the hive. And if they were absconding because of some threat — which they have been known to do — they wouldn’t leave without the queen.

Since about one-third of the U.S. diet depends on pollination and most of that is performed by honeybees, this constitutes a serious problem, according to Jeff Pettis of the U.S. Agricultural Research Service. […]

Pettis and other experts are gathering outside Washington for a two-day workshop starting on Monday to pool their knowledge and come up with a plan of action to combat what they call colony collapse disorder.

"What we’re describing as colony collapse disorder is the rapid loss of adult worker bees from the colony over a very short period of time, at a time in the season when we wouldn’t expect a rapid die-off of workers: late fall and early spring," Pettis said.

SMALL WORKERS IN A SUPERSIZE SOCIETY

The problem has prompted a congressional hearing, a report by the National Research Council and a National Pollinator Week set for June 24-30 in Washington, but so far no clear idea of what is causing it.

"The main hypotheses are based on the interpretation that the disappearances represent disruptions in orientation behavior and navigation," said May Berenbaum, an insect ecologist at the University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign.

There have been other fluctuations in the number of honeybees, going back to the 1880s, where there were "mysterious disappearances without bodies just as we’re seeing now, but never at this magnitude," Berenbaum said in a telephone interview.

In some cases, beekeepers are losing 50 percent of their bees to the disorder, with some suffering even higher losses. One beekeeper alone lost 40,000 bees, Pettis said. Nationally, some 27 states have reported the disorder, with billions of bees simply gone. […]

Honeybees are not the only pollinators whose numbers are dropping. Other animals that do this essential job — non-honeybees, wasps, flies, beetles, birds and bats — have decreasing populations as well. But honeybees are the big actors in commercial pollination efforts. …no technology has been invented that equals, much less surpasses, insect pollinators."

Notice that the article above reiterates the idea that the main hypotheses relate to "disruption in orientation behavior and navigation," i.e. some kind of "wave" explanation. That brings us to another curious item: Wi-Fi: Children at risk from ‘electronic smog’:

22 April: Britain’s top health protection watchdog is pressing for a formal investigation into the hazards of using wireless communication networks in schools amid mounting concern that they may be damaging children’s health, ‘The Independent on Sunday’ can reveal.

Sir William Stewart, the chairman of the Health Protection Agency, wants pupils to be monitored for ill effects from the networks - known as Wi-Fi - which emit radiation and are being installed in classrooms across the nation.

Sir William - who is a former chief scientific adviser to the Government, and has chaired two official inquiries into the hazards of mobile phones - is adding his weight to growing pressure for a similar examination of Wi-Fi, which some scientists fear could cause cancer and premature senility.

Wi-Fi - described by the Department of Education and Skills as a "magical" system that means computers do not have to be connected to telephone lines - is rapidly being taken up in schools, with estimates that more than half of primary schools - and four-fifths of secondary schools - have installed it .

But several European provincial governments have already taken action to ban, or limit, its use in the classroom, and Stowe School has partially removed it after a teacher became ill.

This week the Professional Association of Teachers, which represents 35,000 staff across the country, will write to Alan Johnson, Secretary of State for Education, to demand an official inquiry. Virtually no studies have been carried out into Wi-Fi’s effects on pupils, but it gives off radiation similar to emissions from mobile phones and phone masts.

Recent research has linked radiation from mobiles to cancer and to brain damage. And many studies have found disturbing symptoms in people near masts.

Professor Olle Johansson, of Sweden’s prestigious Karolinska Institute, who is deeply concerned about the spread of Wi-Fi, says there are "thousands" of articles in scientific literature demonstrating "adverse health effects". He adds: "Do we not know enough already to say, ‘Stop!’?"

For the past 16 months, the provincial government of Salzburg in Austria has been advising schools not to install Wi-Fi, and is considering a ban. Dr Gerd Oberfeld, its head of environmental health and medicine, calls the technology "dangerous".

Sir William - who takes a stronger position on the issue than his agency - was not available for comment yesterday, but two members of an expert group that he chairs on the hazards of radiation spoke of his concern.

Mike Bell, chairman of the Electromagnetic Radiation Research Trust, says that he has been "very supportive of having Wi-Fi examined and doing something about it". And Alasdair Philips, director of Powerwatch, an information service, said that he was pressing for monitoring of the health of pupils exposed to Wi-Fi.

Labour MP Ian Gibson, who was interviewed with Sir William for a forthcoming television programme, last week said that he backed proposals for an inquiry.

Wow! People are getting cancer, children’s brain cells are being killed and millions of them face a future of premature senility, and they are going to propose an inquiry? Meanwhile, the bees are disappearing by the billions, and that, taken together with Climate change and water shortages, means the planet is facing a famine of Biblical proportions like NEXT YEAR EVEN!

People, we do not have time to wait on these psychopaths to take action! Something has to be done for the human race NOW. After all, if we leave it up to our non-democratically elected leaders, how are they going to handle it? I can give you an example: Looming US water crisis ‘big, big, big’

22 April 07: A prominent environmentalist is sounding the alarm about a closed-door trilateral meeting to discuss, among other things, large-scale water transfers to combat future shortages in the United States and Mexico despite Canada’s standing objection to such a plan.

Next week, government officials and academics from the three countries will gather in Calgary for the two-day North American Future 2025 Project where they’ll brainstorm ideas on how the continent should implement policies to deal with various challenges - including security, energy and labour.

But it’s the agenda on water that has activists concerned, given that the discussions will be held behind closed doors without public scrutiny, said Maude Barlow, national chairwoman of the Council of Canadians.

‘’We want this out in the light of day. We tried contacting them and they said this meeting is private,'’ Barlow said. ‘’How could it be private if it is setting up the political and policy framework for the future of North America?'’

An outline of the proceedings states that climate change is expected to greatly exacerbate water shortages in the United States and Mexico while Canada, which has the world’s largest supply of fresh water in the Great Lakes and elsewhere, is not expected to suffer to the same extent.

It goes on to state that ‘’creative'’ solutions - such as water transfers and artificial diversions of fresh water - may be needed to address the ‘’profound changes'’ that are bound to occur south of the border.

The idea that other countries aren’t getting the message about Canada’s refusal to allow transfers of its fresh water is scary considering the gravity of the looming crisis, Barlow said.

‘’The Americans are really getting thirsty. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency says there are 36 states that are in peril now, that are in water stress,'’ she said.

‘’There’s crisis in the U.S. and the issue of water has moved right up to the top of the national security political ladder - it’s big, big, big.'’

Federal Environment Minister John Baird, in a statement reacting to the council’s concerns, said Canada strictly prohibits transfers of water and that policy isn’t going to change.

‘’The Government of Canada has no intention of entering into negotiations, behind closed doors or otherwise, regarding the issue of bulk water exports,'’ Baird said.

Armand Peschard-Sverdrup of the Center for Strategic and International Studies, the American think-tank that organized next week’s meeting, said that no government decisions are expected to come out of the talks and it’s simply a way to discuss different ideas.

‘’We’re not just looking at bulk water transfers, we’re looking at the whole gambit of issues and policy options,'’ Peschard-Sverdrup said.

‘’We are a think-tank and what we do is we look at a whole range of issues, no matter how sensitive they may be, or no matter whether they are politically viable or not.'’

A spokesman for Baird said he had no plans to attend the meeting.

Well, it makes me feel real secure knowing that a U.S. think tank is talking about these problems. After all, it was a U.S. think tank that decided on the whole "Global War on Terror" that is presently diverting all U.S. resources to kill more and more people while its own population faces starvation. Oh, sorry, forgot. Yeah, that’s what it’s all about. The U.S. is really planning on taking care of its citizens by stealing everybody else’s resources! And they don’t care if the kids are turned into pre-senile lumps: make better slaves, doncha know! After all, the brain damaged ask so few questions and with just a few drugs, they can be kept quiet while they harvest the corn and sugar cane.

Yeah, it looks pretty bleak.

One the one hand, we have the fact that we are facing a global systems collapse that could very well drag us all into the black hole of another dark age, and on the other hand, we have all the people who are used to being "taken care of" and "having their comforts" including their televisions, video games, computers and cell phones and don’t want to give them up.

The world’s agriculture relies on commercial bee pollination, that’s a hard fact. The next hard fact is that more than half of all west coast U.S. bees are gonzerooni. They are presumed to be dead, but we don’t even know that for sure. On the East coast of the U.S. it is even worse. We notice that the above quoted stories give different figures, but we can figure out that it’s about 75% loss. Meanwhile, the problem exists elsewhere, stalking the UK and Europe. Of course, in Britain, all suggestions that there is a crisis are denied.

The problem snuck up on the U.S. in such a way that they didn’t have time to get their denial texts written. (Things have a way of doing that in an open universe.) When the High Country News quoted above mentioned the fact that the California almond crop could drop from 2,400 pounds per acre to 40, (600%), people understood how serious the problem was. I hope you are beginning to understand why Einstein said that if the bees go, so goes humankind. He gave it four years, I think we have already used up some of that time and there isn’t much left.

So, what do we do now?

Can you imagine a campaign against electronic technology similar to the one that has been launched against smoking?

No? Why not? Oh, yeah, forgot again. There’s no money to be made in it.

And that’s what it all comes down to: money. How much is a human life worth?

Apparently not much. Or at least, some lives are valued more than others.

Are you going to petition your local government to take down all the cell phone towers? Are you going to be the first to throw your blackberry on the fire? What good do you think it will do?

Now, really?

I’ve spent half a day researching these articles and getting them in presentable format to let you know just what it is you - and everyone you love - are facing. Among those problems are the very serious ones that the leaders and experts we have been conditioned to look to for guidance simply either don’t understand, or don’t care.

I think it is both. They are psychopaths. Psychopaths are simply incapable of conceiving of future consequences. That’s why they can’t really learn anything abstract. That’s why governments under psychopathic rule always fall to rack and ruin in a very short time. The old image of Nero fiddling while Rome burned is an apt metaphor for psychopaths in power.

Those in power keep their focus on making more and more money, gaining more and more power, and they do not even realize that conditions have already reached the point where, very soon, there is not going to be any place to spend the money and no one over whom to exercise that power. Psychopaths are like germs that do not realize that they, too, will die with the death of the body they have infected.

Most human beings around the planet have been conditioned to think that the proper response to reading or hearing what I am telling you now is to "ask the experts," or to have confidence that the political process will work. Create a "Pollinator’s Week" and issue a stamp; propose a congressional hearing; assign a think tank to work on it in secret.

Don’t you think we are past that now?

Have you really gotten it that what we really need to do is to take the incredible step of stopping doing what has caused all this mess to begin with: relying on psychopaths. It is not only the bees that have lost their direction, confused by false signals. The fate of the bees is the fate of humanity. Can we save them? If we cannot, there is no saving of ourselves.

Let me offer you a few "talking points" from The Politics of Obedience: Discourse of Voluntary Servitude by Éttiene de la Boétie..

We are all born free and naturally free.

People born into slavery regard it as a natural condition.

In general, people are shaped more by their environment than by their natural capacities - if they allow it.

Habit and custom are powerful forces that keep people enslaved.

Grown-up adults should adopt reason as their guide and never become slaves of anybody.

There are always some people who cannot be tamed, subjected, or enslaved. Even if freedom were to be entirely extinguished, these people would re-invent it.

Lovers of freedom tend to be ineffective because they are not known to one another.

People who lose their freedom also lose their valor (strength of mind, bravery).

Among free people there is competition to do good for humanity.

People can be enslaved through either force or deception.

When people lose their freedom through deceit, it is because they mislead themselves.

People seem to be most gullible towards those who deliberately set out to fool them. It is as if people have a need to be deceived.

Tyrants stupefy their victims with "pastimes and vain pleasures flashed before their eyes."

Tyrants parade like "workers of magic."

The victims bring about their own subjection - they "win their enslavement."

Tyrants attain their positions through: (a) Force; (b) Birth; or (c) Election.

The only power tyrants have is the power relinquished to them by their victims.

The tyrant is often a weak little man. He has no special qualities that set him apart from anyone else - yet the gullible idolize him.

Tyrants create a power structure, consisting of a multi-layered hierarchy, staffed by a conspiracy of accomplices. Accomplices receive their positions as a favor from the tyrant.

Tyrants can only give back part of what they first took from their victims.

The worst dregs of society gather around the tyrant - they are people of weak character who trade servility for unearned wealth.

Accomplices can profit greatly from their positions in the hierarchy.

Once you resolve to serve no more, you are free.

If without violence the tyrant is simply not obeyed, he becomes "naked and undone and as nothing."

If people withdraw their support, the tyrant topples over from his own corrupted weight.

And now the question that the bees are asking humanity in so symbolic a way: "To BE or not to be?

You don’t have a lot of time to make up your mind.

UncategorizedApril 21, 2007 7:17 pm

©n/a
The Mosaic Distinction - Psychopathy in action.
The other day I made a comment on the SOTT blog to the effect that things were getting pretty warm for the administration over the past few weeks, what with the Prosecutor’s purge and Bush’s "Fascist Law Czar" - Gonzales - getting ready to be called on the carpet in a serious way and that now, with the Va. Tech. Massacre as the subject of the latest media feeding frenzy, Gonzales is basically off the hook.

Then, of course, there is the issue of the growing movement for impeachment that is supposed to reach a fever pitch California Democratic Convention in San Diego on April 28. That has taken a back seat as well.

One of the QFG researchers wrote some insightful comments on the situation as follows:

Maybe I’m stretching it a bit, but I was seeing it as sort of a mini 9/11 (an orchestrated event) and having some parallels. The shooter being "programmed" like the suicide bombers (well, maybe *all* shooters are programmed in some way), two separate events with one being the main focus (WTC and Pentagon), endless broadcasts of the shooter’s clips on TV (same with burning WTC buildings) to extract maximum loosh from a grieving public, little details coming out like the gun receipt in the backpack (but then why file off the gun’s serial numbers?) compared to the passports that survived destruction and were conveniently found in 9/11. Oh, and the "islamic" sounding letters on the shooter’s arm. Again, I guess if you look hard enough, you can find parallels in any event of this type. To me, it seemed like the same "model."

I forget where I read it yesterday, but some article brought up all the stuff that’s happened in April around this date over the years, the Branch Davidian thing, the Oklahoma City bombing, Columbine, and now this. Like all within a week or so.

That old saying should be "beware the Ides of April" instead of "March!"

Another QFG member later wrote the following:

Just a few thoughts and observations I had on the VT massacre, which happened on the day I was traveling and unfolded during a week in which I did not access the internet at all - only a hotel TV with CNN and Fox News. I just returned and here are my thoughts:

Programmed killer.

*Probable distraction. Week-long news dominance provides cover. Not necessarily for Gonzales, but both issues may be covering something else.

*Social programming leading to acceptance of more "real strictures" to be enacted as a result. Fox went nuts with "experts" suggesting crazy stuff like arming teachers. Usual short-sighted emphasis on pre-emption rather than prevention.

*Media painting "oddball" or "loner" people as threats to society rather than leaders and promoting conformist, herd-mentality followers as "good." Many suggestions that non-conformists should be committed to institutions immediately, despite the fact that jails are the largest mental institutions in the USA. Mental illness isn’t a profitable one. One man was interviewed who committed his son whose mental illness he says began with belief that the US was behind 9/11 and wearing a "tin foil hat."

*Obscenely unbalanced coverage of VT compared to Iraq where many more people were murdered probably every day this week.

*Media people getting psychosis and psychopathy wrong and the absurdity of them "painting a mental picture" and going "inside the mind" of the killer.

*Horrified that people are threatening Cho’s parents so that they have to have police protection and move every night. Revenge mentality just like 9/11. Reminded me of the death threats against the innocent Duke "rapists" who were victims of an unbalanced woman and a psychopathic attorney.

Of course, the first thing that I (and others) thought of when I heard of the VA. Tech shootings was "Greenbaum." For those of you not familiar with this Project Paperclip-generated mind control program (or even Project Paperclip), you might want to get up to speed pretty quick. After all, "they" are trying to convince you that a "Cho" could be anyone, anywhere. That’s not true, but the truth is pretty scary: there are a lot of mind-controlled people walking the streets, working in average jobs, living next door to anybody, and you really do need to have the knowledge of what you are dealing with in order to protect yourself and your loved ones. And believe, me, it ain’t what the MSM is telling you.

Take Ted Kaczynski, the Unabomber, for example. According to his brother, David Kaczynski, Ted was unwittingly part of the MK-ULTRA-CIA mind control program for three years at Harvard, and then at the University of Michigan and probably U.C. Stanford. In recalling some of the details of his brother’s involvement in the covert behavior modification program, David Kaczynski says of his older brother, "In a sense, he wasn’t paranoid; he was in a sense conspired against."

This whole incident, of course, takes us back to Oklahoma City…

When I saw the face of the alleged Oklahoma Bomber, Timothy McVeigh, I knew I had seen that expression before. I couldn’t quite place the memory until a few days later when I read in a news article that Mr. McVeigh had told someone that the government had implanted a computer chip in his hip to track him! The bells rang and the lightbulb lit! I knew where I had seen that look before.

He was young, about 26 or 27, blond, blue-eyed, clean- cut, powerfully built and definitely suffering. His body- language said it all. The young man sitting across from me was overwhelmed by terror. His eyes darted to the right and the left as though expecting a blow from any quarter, and he was coiled as tightly as an overwound clock spring. His story was not entirely unique, but the level to which it had affected him was profound, possibly the worst I had seen, and I knew he needed help NOW.

Several months previously, I had been contacted by the owner of a large book store in a nearby city. She frequently referred clients to me for hypnosis. Generally they are the run-of-the-mill New Agers desiring past-life regressions out of simple curiosity, but sometimes the situations are quite serious and troubling. "Luke’s" case, (a pseudonym) was one of the latter.

Maggie, (pseudonym), the book store owner, sponsored and promoted many seminars and classes in her store and she had met Luke at one of these. She knew something was troubling him, but it was some time before he confided in her. Now, he was telling his story to me.

"The government is experimenting on me," he told me with anguish in his voice. "I don’t know why or how, but there are a lot of people in on this and they are trying to drive me crazy."

"What makes you think the government is experimenting on you?" I asked.

"I KNOW they are. They have my house bugged, my phone is tapped, they have some kind of thing planted in me to control my thoughts, and they have people everywhere watching me."

"What kind of people are watching you, where are they, and how do you know this?"

"The people who live around me are part of the project. They have them planted everywhere — at McDonalds, at the laundromat, in the stores, at the restaurant, where I work. They put drugs into my food to knock me out and then they come and take me and experiment on me. Then, when they put me back, I can hear the people next door discussing me." He paused and looked at me pleadingly. "I know you think I am crazy, but you have to believe me. Something REAL is happening to me. It is not just in my mind and I am not making it up. I sleep with a gun under my pillow because someday they are going to make a mistake and I am not going to be completely out when they come!"

And the story goes on. Luke’s anguish, paranoia and utter terror were real and tangible. He was my first Greenbaum victim.

Then, of course, there was Jonestown. It was SO convenient that Congressman Leo Ryan was taken out by the alleged suicidal cult members of Jim Jones’ "People’s Temple.’

No one ever questioned who ordered the assassination of Congressman Leo Ryan as he departed from the notorious Jonestown. "Jim Jones ordered…" was all the public needed to hear. "Bizarre cult" assassinates Congressman, then lurches into a macabre orgy of suicide and murder at the command of their deranged leader, Jim Jones. Stop the investigation! No need. We already got "the story."

But was Jones really a lone madman as we were told? Is it really a plausible story that more that nine hundred people took their own lives willingly, simply because he told them to? Or is there more to the story than what we have been told?

As it happens, not very long after the horrible events of that day, the rumors began. There were things that simply did not make sense and there were many clues to the presence of the CIA. As more bits and pieces were revealed, it was clear that the evidence pointed in the direction of strange human experiments in mind control, even genocide. At best, Jonestown was a CIA-run camp set up as an experimental laboratory for the secret government’s efforts to reprogram the American psyche. There are suggestions of parallel "Jonestowns". At worst, Jonestown served a dual purpose: to create the fear of "cults" in the Global mind AND it got rid of Leo Ryan.

Leo Ryan, it seems, was a problem for the secret government, the "National Security State."

[M]ost who knew Leo Ryan agreed he had flamboyance, tenacity, nerve and a knack for drawing attention to social abuses. A man who marched to the beat of his own drum, he galled bureaucrats, some of whom, according to a former aide, viewed the Democratic congressman from Northern California as the worst-case-scenario bull in their china shop.

After the riots in Watts in 1965, Ryan, then a California state legislator, traveled to that community under a false identity and became a substitute teacher to investigate conditions in the black community. Five years later, he again went undercover and had himself strip-searched and locked up in Folsom State Prison to discover what life in such a facility was really like. In 1978, he made plans to spend that Christmas season incognito once again, this time as a Postal Service employee to investigate complaints of bad working conditions.

As a congressman, his brassiness caused him to routinely do things which to others were unthinkable, such as "dropping in" at CIA headquarters in Langley, Virginia, to interrogate the spymasters about what they hadn’t been telling Congress.

"He was," according to a source formerly close to Ryan, and who once accompanied him on a trip to Langley, "a pain in their ass."

As a member of the House of Representatives’ International Relations Committee and its foremost CIA critic, he was the House sponsor of the Hughes-Ryan Amendment, a 1974 law that required the CIA to notify eight separate committees of Congress-totaling some 200 legislators and staff-prior to conducting undercover operations.

Hughes-Ryan also banned CIA covert paramilitary operations which were not expressly approved by the president and Congress. The agency hated this, a former Ryan associate told Freedom. But the Hughes-Ryan Amendment, which seriously restricted CIA covert operations internationally, was only one index of Leo Ryan’s impact.

In 1975, Ryan leaked word of the CIA’s involvement in the Angolan civil war to CBS newsman Daniel Schorr, creating a wave of major embarrassment for the agency which reverberated for years.

In 1977 and 1978, Ryan pressured the agency to reveal the extent of its involvement in psychiatric "mind-control" experiments. Among the tests he pushed to expose were those performed in the early 1970s on inmates at a state hospital in Vacaville, California, which may have included among their subjects Donald DeFreeze, known as "Cinque," a central figure in the 1974 kidnapping of Patricia Hearst.

Having said all of that, certainly there have been cults that committed suicide or slaughtered one another when faced with some terrible calamity. Masada is an example:

It is strange that a place known only because 960 Jews committed suicide there in the first century C.E. should become a modern symbol of Jewish survival. What is even stranger is that the Masada episode is not mentioned in the Talmud. Why did the rabbis choose to ignore the courageous stance and tragic fate of the last fighters in the Jewish rebellion against Rome?

It would be easy to assume that the problem we are looking it is a matter of intelligence. We could say that it’s hard for an intelligent person to really understand this mindset because, obviously, if an intelligent person is confronted with a demand to "change your beliefs or die," what’s the problem? We could say that a really intelligent person isn’t going to believe in all that salvation nonsense anyway, but we are obviously not dealing with a lot of very bright people here. But that would be missing the mark, I think. Let’s look in a slightly different direction for some clues.

In the year 1096, when the rampaging crusaders who had been called to make war against the Muslims decided along the way to turn against the local Jews, things got ugly very fast. You could say that what happened then has become the model for all cult suicides since (excluding any Mind Control experiments, though such programs have a lot in common with religions in general and Judaism in particular as we shall see). Since the Jews had been invited to live in Mainz and had been given special privileges by the Archbishop, (causing some bad feelings against them on the part of the non-Jews in the town, it should be mentioned), when the crusaders began to get out of hand, the Jews turned to the Archbishop for protection. The Archbishop did everything he could and then, when he had reached a position where he knew that his palace would be stormed and all would die, he came up with a plan to save the Jews. A Jewish chronicler of the time tells us:

[The Archbishop] called to R. Kalonymous [an esteemed Jew] and said to him: "I cannot save you. Your God has abandoned you; he does not wish to leave you a remnant and a residue. I no longer have sufficient strength to save you or to assist you henceforth. Therefore, know what you must do - you and your band that stands with you. Either believe in our deity or bear the sins of your ancestors."

R. Kalonymous the pious answered him and cried out in anguish; "It is true that our God does not wish to save us. Therefore your words are true and correct, that you no longer have the power to assist. Give me till tomorrow to respond to your words."

Then R. Kalonymous returned to his comrades, the pious ones, and told them the words of the archbishop. They all arose together and made a benediction over their sacrifice and accepted the judgment unanimously and singleheartedly and took upon themselves the yoke of the fear [of God]. First, before he returned to the archbishop, R. Kalonmyous the pious took his son Joseph, kissed him, and slaughtered him. When the archbishop heard that he had slaughtered his son, he was exceedingly angry. He said: "Now I certainly do not wish to assist you further."

When the villagers heard what the archbishop had said, they gathered against them, along with the crusaders, to kill the Jews. Meanwhile R. Kalonymous on that day returned to the archbishop. On the way, R. Kalonymous learned and heard what the archbishop had said. When he returned before him, he took a knife in his hand. He came before him and wished to kill him. But the Archbishop’s men and indeed the archbishop himself were aware of the fact. He ordered that he be removed from his presence.

How to understand this kind of thinking?

To Jews, the mythical "revelation on Sinai" is taught as the high point in all of human history. God’s alleged direct appearance to Moses is supposed to have distinguished that little group from all others and made them "chosen." Never mind that this story is a fiction that was created for the very purpose of political control over a large group of people, the medieval Jew believed it with all his heart. This meant that one could not question the ways of God, and if the situation demanded that they be put to death or kill themselves for the "unity of God’s name," then "Blessed are we if we do his will and blessed are all those who are killed and slaughtered and die for the Unity of his Name."

Some of them dressed themselves in their ceremonial clothing and waited passively to be killed. Others took matters into their own hands. A cry rang out through the bishop’s courtyard:

"Let us offer ourselves up before our Father in heaven. Anyone who has a knife should come and slaughter us for the sanctification of the unique Name [of God] who lives forever. Subsequently, let him pierce himself with his sword either in his throat or in his belly or let him slaughter himself."

They all stood - men and women - and slaughtered one another… They were all slaughtered. The blood of the slaughter flowed through the chambers in which the children of the sacred covenant were. They lay in slaughtered rows - the infant with the elderly - … making sounds like slaughtered sheep.

The Jews that did not wait passively for their end, or take their own lives, fled from chamber to chamber in the bishop’s palace. In each, the offer of conversion was made, and those that did not accept were slaughtered. According to the Jewish chronicler, all the Jews remained steadfast, rejecting the option of baptism though we understand that his account is undoubtedly slanted for a religious and/or political agenda.

One chamber in the palace held out until evening and there a very famous incident played out. Now, you have to realize that this sort of thing is referred to as "kiddush ha-Shem," or "sanctification of the Divine Name, and these stories were written to promote the idea that this was deeply moral behavior.

There was a notable lady, Rachel the daughter of R. Isaac ben R. Asher. She said to her companions: "I have four children. On them as well have no mercy, lest these uncircumcised come and seize them and they remain in their pseudo-faith. With them as well you must sanctify the Holy Name."

One of her companions came and took the knife. When she [Rachel] saw the knife, she cried loudly and bitterly. She beat her face, crying and saying: "Where is your steadfast love, O Lord?" She took Isaac, her small son - indeed he was very lovely - and slaughtered him. She had said to her companions: "Wait! Do not slaughter Isaac before Aaron." But the lad Aaron, when he saw that his brother had been slaughtered, cried out: "Mother, Mother, do not slaughter me!" He then went and hid himself under a bureau.

She took her two daughters, Bella and Matrona, and sacrificed them to the Lord God of Hosts, Who commanded us not to abandon pure awe of him and to remain loyal to him. When the saintly one finished sacrificing her three children before our Creator, she then lifted her voice and called out to her son: "Aaron, Aaron, where are you? I shall not have pity on you either."

She pulled him out by the leg from under the bureau, where he had hidden, and sacrificed him before the sublime and exalted God. She then put them under her two sleeves, two on one side and two on the other, near her heart. They convulsed near her, until the crusaders seized the chamber. They found her sitting and mourning them. They said to her: "Show us the money which you have under your sleeves." When they saw the slaughtered children, they smote and killed her. […]

When the enemy (Christian crusaders) came before the town (Wevelinghofen, north of Cologne), some of the pious ones ascended the tower and threw themselves into the Rhine River that flows around the town and drowned themselves in the river and all died. Only two young men did not die in the water - R. Samuel the bridegroom ben R. Gedaliah and Yehiel ben R. Samuel. Cherished in life - for they loved each other exceedingly, they were not parted in death. When they decided to throw themselves into the water, they kissed one another and held one another and embraced one another by the shoulders and wept to one another and said: "Woe for our youth, for we have not been deemed worthy to see seed go forth from us or to reach old age. Nonetheless, let us fall into the hands of the Lord. He is a steadfast and merciful God and King. Better to die here for his great Name and to stroll with the saintly ones in paradise than that these uncircumcised and unclean seize us and sully us against our will with their evil waters." (Baptism)

Subsequently, those [Jews] that remained in the town, who did not go up on the tower, came and saw the others who had drowned. They found there the two good friends, totally saintly, clasped together. When the pious Samuel saw his son Yehiel, who had thrown himself in the water but had still not died - he was a comely young man, as majestic as the Lebanon, he cried out: "Yehiel, my son, my son! Stretch out your neck before your father, and I shall offer you up as a sacrifice before the Lord… I shall make the benediction for slaughtering and you shall respond amen." R. Samuel the pious did so and slaughtered his son with sword in the water.

When R. Samuel the bridegroom ben R. Gedaliah heard that his friend Yehial the saintly had acceded to his father, that he slaughter him in the water, then he decided to do the same. He called to Menahem, who was the sexton in the synagogue of Cologne, and said to him: "By your life, take your sharp sword and examine it carefully that it have no defect and slaughter me likewise, so that I not see the death of my friend. Make the benediction for slaughtering and I shall respond amen." These pious ones did thus. When they were slaughtered together, prior to death, they clasped one another by the hand and died together in the river.

When R. Samuel the elder, the pious, the father of R. Yehial saw this act of sanctification they had undertaken, he also said to Menahem the pious, the sexton: "Menahem, conquer your will like a warrior and slaughter me with the same sword with which I slaughtered my son Yehiel. I have examined it well and it has no defect that might void the slaughtering." […]

Thus, these pious ones sanctified the holy Name of the zealous and avenging [God] in the water. Now come all inhabitants of the world and see! Was there ever anything like this, such a declaration of the unity of the [Divine] Name, from the days of Adam? How great was the strength of the father, whose mercies were not aroused for his son.

Apparently, not all of the young Jews of Cologne accepted martyrdom.

When Sarit the young lady, the bride, saw that they had killed themselves with their swords and had slaughtered one another - she was beautiful and comely and exceedingly lovely in the eyes of those who beheld her, she wished to flee, out of fear of what she saw through the window. When her father-in-law Judah ben R. Abraham the pious saw that this was the intention of his daughter-in-law, he called to her and said: "My daughter, since you were not permitted to be wed to my son Abraham, you will not be wed to any other, to the foreigners."

He seized her and held her outside the window and kissed her on the mouth and raised his voice in weeping, along with the lass. He cried out loudly and very bitterly and said to all those standing there: "Behold, all of you. This is the bridal canopy of my daughter, my bride, that I make this day." They all wept with great weeping and wailing and mourning and moaning. The pious Judah said to her: "Come and lie in the bosom of Abraham our ancestor. For in one moment you shall acquire your future and shall enter the circle of the saintly and pious."

He took her and placed her in the bosom of his son Abraham, her betrothed, and cut her with his sharp sword into two pieces. Subsequently he also slaughtered his son.

There was, in addition, a servant of the Lord who was a true convert. He asked Rabbi Moses, the high priest [an honorific title], and said to him: "My lord, if I slaughter myself for the unity of his great Name, what will be my lot?" He [Rabbi Moses] said to him: "You shall sit with us in our circle, for you shall be a true convert and sit with the rest of the saintly true converts in their circle. You shall be with our ancestor Abraham, who was the first of the converts." When the pious one heard this, he immediately took the knife and slaughtered himself. Indeed his soul is bound up in the bond of life, in paradise, in the light of the Lord. [Quoted by Robert Chazan, In The Year 1096, Jewish Publication Society, 1996]

The animosity and unbridled violence of the Rhinelanders against the Jews was profound and it was this - what we would call today - "cult-like" behavior that actually intensified the potent animosity against them. In particular, the Christians could not comprehend the Jewish killing of their own children. Of course, to the Jews, the willingness to offer up their children in sacrifice to their god was considered to be the highest form of heroism and absolute proof of the truth of their religion.

Then there are other cases where the people certainly did not want to die and made many efforts to resolve an issue, but because of government - and other - interference, things got way out of control and a horrible tragedy resulted. In short, the destruction of the Branch Davidians had little, if anything, to do with a real "cult" mind-set.

There was the clear and obvious culpability of the U.S. Attorney General, Janet Reno, in the case of the Branch Davidians. That situation flushed out all the ADL created "cult experts" (such as criminal Rick Ross) and, as a consequence, a whole lot of innocent people were murdered in broad daylight by the U.S. government.

Millions of Americans are beginning to discover the truth about what really happened February 28, 1993: BATF agents in National Guard helicopters zoomed in on the Branch Davidians’ church and home, Mount Carmel Center, with guns blazing, killing unarmed Davidians. Ground agents mortally wounded David Koresh’s unarmed father-in-law who stood at the front door with Koresh as he begged BATF agents to stop the attack on a building filled with 82 women and children. BATF agents–and FBI agents who took over from them–knew that more than a dozen agents would face prosecution if America learned the truth.

BATF and FBI agents in Waco conspired, either explicitly or silently, to lie to and harass the Davidians to keep them inside Mount Carmel so agents would have an excuse to destroy the building, its incriminating evidence, and the defiant witnesses calling for justice. A study of the April 19, 1993 gas and tank attacks suggests they were a successful systematic effort to render Mount Carmel an inescapable fire trap. [Waco]

There are real "true believers" like the Heaven’s Gate gang that offed themselves to catch a ride on the Hale-Bopp special, but you have to wonder how they got that way: was it their fearless leader, or was it something else?

In mathematics there is something called the "first Law of Construction" posited by George Spencer Brown. It goes:

Draw a distinction. Call it the first distinction. Call the space in which it is drawn the space severed or cloven by the distinction.

It seems that this law applies as well to societies, cultures and religions. Cultural and intellectual distinctions or divisions are all about creating "meaning" and identity and orientation for the self. Unfortunately, trying to create meaning for the self that is artificial is really an act of creating conflict, intolerance and violence.

What we have read above is about the distinction between true and false in religion that is at the root of religious distinctions such as those between Jews and Gentiles, Christians and pagans, Muslims and infidels. Once the distinction has been drawn, once it has been declared that there IS such a division between peoples, then it becomes easier and easier to make more and more distinctions, subdivisions of them, endless permutations.

Tradition ascribes this first distinction between "true and false" in religion to Moses - the first monotheist. That isn’t, of course, exactly correct. The first monotheist who attempted to violently impose his distinction on others was Akhenaten. That is probably where "Moses" got the idea. It should be noted that "Moses is a figure of memory but not of history, while Akhenaten is a figure of history but not of memory." Somehow, the two are mixed up together but this is not the place to discuss that. What is important is that the space that has been imbued with this "Mosaic Distinction" - conflict, intolerance and violence - is the space of Western Civilization due to Jewish influence on socio-cultural norms for the past 2000 years. It is not normal, nor has it ever been, but Western society is so inured in it that it is almost impossible to think outside of it.

The Mosaic distinction was a radically new division which dramatically changed the world in which it was drawn. Some scholars refer to Judaism and its initial division as "counter-religion" because it rejected and repudiated everything that went before and considered everything outside of itself to be idolatry and unclean. Instead of ancient polytheism, where the god of one group was "translated" into the equivalent in another group, leading to peaceful relations between societies, Judaism rejected translation and blocked intercultural translatability and instead promoted intercultural estrangement - or submission.

The concept of idolatry and the violent repudiation of it became stronger and stronger during the course of Jewish history. The later the texts, the more abusive the scorn and abominations they heaped on the heads of "idolators." This hatred became mutual and the accused idolators did not fail to retaliate against Jews again and again and again. [cf: Jan Assmann: Moses the Egyptian, Harvard Press, 1997]

It is that kind of mind that we are dealing with when we consider not only a person who can be mind-controlled to kill and be killed, whether the programming is from society, religion, or secret government experiments, but also the kind of mind that creates the Distinction. It should be noted that it is not exclusively Jewish nor was it invented by the Jews, but rather by an Egyptian.

Psychologist Andrew Lobaczewski describes for us the kind of mind that invents such divisive doctrines as that of the "Mosaic Distinction" as well as the kinds of individuals that are attracted by it, follow it, propagate it, live and die for it.

Schizoidia: Schizoidia, or schizoidal psychopathy, was isolated by the very first of the famous creators of modern psychiatry. From the beginning, it was treated as a lighter form of the same hereditary taint which is the cause of susceptibility to schizophrenia. However, this latter connection could neither be confirmed nor denied with the help of statistical analysis, and no biological test was then found which would have been able to solve this dilemma. For practical reasons, we shall herein discuss schizoidia with no further reference to this relationship rather motivated by tradition.

Literature provides us with descriptions of several varieties of this anomaly, whose existence can be attributed either to changes in the genetic factor or to differences in other individual characteristics of a non-pathological nature. Let us thus sketch these sub-species’ common features.

Carriers of this anomaly are hypersensitive and distrustful, but they pay little attention to the feelings of others, tend to assume extreme positions, and are eager to retaliate for minor offenses.

Sometimes they are eccentric and odd.

Their poor sense of psychological situation and reality leads them to superimpose erroneous, pejorative interpretations upon other people’s intentions.

They easily become involved in activities which are ostensibly moral, but which actually inflict damage upon themselves and others.

Their impoverished psychological worldview makes them typically pessimistic regarding human nature. We frequently find expressions of their characteristic attitudes in their statements and writings: "Human nature is so bad that order in human society can only be maintained by a strong power created by highly qualified individuals in the name of some higher idea." Let us call this typical expression the "schizoid declaration".

Human nature does in fact tend to be naughty, whenever the schizoids embitter other people’s lives, that is. When they become wrapped up in situations of serious stress, however, the schizoid’s failings cause them to collapse easily. The capacity for thought is thereupon characteristically stifled, and frequently the schizoids fall into reactive psychotic states so similar in appearance to schizophrenia that they lead to misdiagnoses.

The common factor in the varieties of this anomaly is a dull pallor of emotions and a feeling for the psychological realities of this essential factor in basic intelligence. This can be attributed to the incomplete quality of the instinctive substratum, which is working as though on sand.

Low emotional pressure enables them to develop proper speculative reasoning, which is useful in non-humanistic spheres of activity. Because of their one-sidedness, they tend to consider themselves intellectually superior to "ordinary" people.

The quantitative frequency of this anomaly varies among races and nations: low among Blacks, the highest among Jews. Estimates of this frequency range from negligible up to 3 %. … My observations suggest this anomaly is autosomally hereditary.

A schizoid’s ponerological activity should be evaluated in two aspects. On the small scale, such people cause their families trouble, easily turn into tools of intrigue in the hands of clever individuals, and generally do a poor job of raising the younger generation. Their tendency to see human reality in the doctrinaire and simplistic manner they consider "proper", transforms their frequently good intentions into bad results. However, their ponerogenic role can take on macro-social proportions if their attitude toward human reality and their tendency to invent great doctrines are put to paper and duplicated in large editions.

In spite of their typical deficits, or even an openly schizoidal declaration, their readers do not realize what the authors’ characters are like; they interpret such works in a manner corresponding to their own nature. The minds of normal people tend toward corrective interpretation thanks to the participation of their own richer, psychological world-view. However, many readers critically reject such works with moral disgust but without being aware of the specific cause. An analysis of the role played by Karl Marx’s works easily reveals all the above-mentioned types of apperception and the social reactions which engendered separations among people. [The Hexateuch as well.] […]

During stable times which are ostensibly happy, albeit marked by injury to individuals and nations, doctrinaire people believe they have found a simple solution to fix the problems of the world. Such a historical period is always characterized by an impoverished psychological world-view, a schizoidally impoverished psychological world-view thus does not stand out during such times and is accepted as legal tender. These doctrinaire individuals characteristically manifest a certain contempt with regard to moralists then preaching the need to rediscover lost human values and to develop a richer, more appropriate psychological world-view.

Schizoid characters aim to impose their own conceptual world upon other people or social groups, using relatively controlled pathological egotism and the exceptional tenacity derived from their persistent nature. They are thus eventually able to overpower another individual’s personality, which causes the latter’s behavior to turn desperately illogical. They may also exert a similar influence upon the group of people they have joined. They are psychological loners who feel better in some human organization, wherein they become zealots for some ideology, religious bigots, materialists, or adherents of an ideology with satanic features. If their activities consist of direct contact on a small social scale, their acquaintances easily perceive them to be eccentric, which limits their ponerogenic role. However, if they manage to hide their own personality behind the written word, their influence may poison the minds of society in a wide scale and for a long time. […]

The conviction that Karl Marx is the best example of this is correct as he was the best-known figure of that kind. Frostig, a psychiatrist of the old school, included Engels and others into a category he called "bearded schizoidal fanatics". The famous utterances attributed to Zionist wise men at the turn of the century start with a schizoidal declaration. The nineteenth century, especially its latter half, appears to have been a time of exceptional activity on the part of schizoidal individuals, often but not always of Jewish descent. After all we have to remember that 97% of all Jews do not manifest this anomaly, and that it also appears among all European nations, albeit to a markedly lesser extent. Our inheritance from this period includes world-images, scientific traditions, and legal concepts flavored with the shoddy ingredients of a schizoidal apprehension of reality.

Humanists would like to interpret that era and its legacy by fitting those events into categories of the "humanist tradition." They search for societal, ideational, and moral causes for known phenomena. Such an explanation, however, can never constitute the whole truth, since it ignores the biological factors which participated in the genesis of the phenomena. Schizoidia is the most frequent factor, albeit not the only one.

In spite of the fact that the writings of schizoidal authors contain the above described deficiency, or even an openly formulated schizoidal declaration which constitutes sufficient warning to specialists, the average reader accepts them not as a view of reality warped by this anomaly, but rather as an idea to which he should assume an attitude based on his convictions and his reason. That is the first mistake. The oversimplified pattern, devoid of psychological color and based on easily available data, exerts an intense influence upon individuals who are insufficiently critical, frequently frustrated as result of downward social adjustment, culturally neglected, or characterized by some psychological deficiencies. Others are provoked to criticism based on their healthy common sense, also they fail to grasp this essential cause of the error.

Societal interpretation of such activities is broken down into the main trifurcations, engendering divisiveness and conflict.

The first branch is the path of aversion, based on rejection of the contents of the work due to personal motivations, differing convictions, or moral revulsion. This already contains the component of a moralizing interpretation of pathological phenomena.

We can distinguish two distinctly different apperception types among those persons who accept the contents of such works: the critically-corrective and the pathological.

People whose feel for psychological reality is normal tend to incorporate chiefly the more valuable elements of the work. They trivialize the obvious errors and complement the schizoid deficiencies by means of their own richer world-view. This gives rise to a more sensible, measured, and thus creative interpretation, but is not free from the influence of the error frequently adduced above.

Pathological acceptance is manifested by individuals with diversiform deviations, whether inherited or acquired, as well as by many people bearing personality malformations or who have been injured by social injustice. That explains why this scope is wider than the circle drawn by direct action of pathological factors. This apperception often brutalizes the authors’ concepts and leads to acceptance of forceful methods and revolutionary means.

This last paragraph should be kept in mind when we consider the case of Cho. Let’s look at a few articles that might give us some clues:

First of all, we learn that Cho had been determined by a judge to be mentally ill.

Judge’s ruling prohibted Cho from buying guns

McLEAN, Va. (AP) - Cho Seung-Hui should have been barred from purchasing the guns he used to kill 32 people Monday on the Virginia Tech campus because of a 2005 judge’s ruling on Cho’s mental health, according to federal regulations.

It is unclear, though, whether anybody had an obligation to inform the feds of Cho’s mental-health problems - which could have caused him to be rejected when he tried to buy a gun - because of loopholes in the law that governs federal instant background checks.

Cho purchased two handguns in February and March, and was subject to federal and state background checks both times. The checks turned up clean, despite a judge’s finding in December 2005 that Cho "presents an imminent danger to himself as a result of mental illness."

We do not, of course, know whether he was mentally ill because he was born that way or if he was literally "mind-programmed" in the sense that some mad scientists kidnapped him and conducted experiments on him. There are other possibilities, of course. A person can be born with genetic psychological pathologies and those pathologies can be exacerbated in specific ways by familial, social, and cultural influences. This is, of course, the very subject of Andrew Lobaczewski’s Political Ponerology, which describes how societies are pathologized. In my article, Official Culture in America: A Natural State of Psychopathy?, I quote several experts on the subject who say that U.S. society is a breeding ground for psychopathy.

Linda Mealey of the Department of Psychology at the College of St. Benedict in St. Joseph, Minnesota, has proposed certain ideas in her paper: The Sociobiology of Sociopathy: An Integrated Evolutionary Model. These ideas address the increase in psychopathy in American culture by suggesting that in a competitive society - capitalism, for example - psychopathy is adaptive and likely to increase. In short, the American way of life has optimized the survival of psychopaths with the consequence that it is an adaptive "life strategy" that is extremely successful in American society, and thus has increased in the population in strictly genetic terms. What is more, as a consequence of a society that is adaptive for psychopathy, many individuals who are NOT genetic psychopaths have similarly adapted, becoming "effective" psychopaths, or "secondary sociopaths." In other words, in a world of psychopaths, those who are not genetic psychopaths, are induced to behave like psychopaths simply to survive. When the rules are set up to make a society "adaptive" to psychopathy, it makes psychopaths of everyone.

Now, there are different kinds of psychopaths, and this is an important point to remember. Here, we are not talking about the "Essential psychopath," and obviously, Cho was not a charismatic psychopath! He was silent and withdrawn. Does that mean he was not a psychopath? Not necessarily. Let’s see if we can find additional clues:

Cho was autistic: family

Virginia Tech gunman Seung-hui Cho was diagnosed with autism after the family emigrated to the United States, a relative in South Korea says.

"From the beginning, he wouldn’t answer me," Kim Yang-soon, Cho’s great aunt, said in an interview Thursday. He "didn’t talk. Normally sons and mothers talk. There was none of that for them. He was very cold".

"When they went to the United States, they told them it was autism," said Kim, 85, adding that the family had constant worries about Cho.

Cho’s uncle gave a similar account, but said there were no early indications that the South Korean student who killed 32 people and himself at Virginia Tech University in the US had serious problems. The uncle asked to be identified only by his last name, Kim.

Cho "didn’t talk much when he was young. He was very quiet, but he didn’t display any peculiarities to suggest he may have problems," Kim told The Associated Press in a telephone interview Thursday. "We were concerned about him being too quiet and encouraged him to talk more."

Autism is a neurodevelopmental disorder that encompasses a broad range of symptoms frequently including impaired social interaction and communication, as well as obsessive interests and behaviour. Autism remains a topic of heated debate in the scientific community, where little is understood about its cause. […]

He said his sister - Cho’s mother - occasionally called around holidays, but never mentioned having any problems with her son.

"She said the children were studying well. She didn’t seem worried about her children at all," Kim said. "She just talked about how hard she had to work to make a living, to support the children."

Cho’s high school classmates recall ‘kid who never spoke’

CENTREVILLE, Virginia (CNN) — Cho Seung-Hui’s classmates at Westfield High School in Chantilly, Virginia, had a few nicknames for him.

Some knew him as "the kid who never spoke," classmate Regan Wilder told CNN.

Others who saw him walking to the bus stop called him "the trombone kid," another classmate, John Williams, recalled.

"He was just walking with his trombone, all alone," Williams said on Thursday, three days after Cho carried out the worst mass shooting by a lone gunman in U.S. history.

Cho’s former classmates said other students had crueler names for him.

They said he was often picked on and taunted because he was such a loner.

"Such a quiet, shy kid like that is such an easy target," Williams said. "And he took it and took it and took it, and built up all that anger and whatever he felt inside. Someone like that is going to explode — it’s destined to happen." […]

He knew Cho 8 yrs., but killer never said a word to him

CENTERVILLE, Va.- Over the eight years they spent together at the same high school and college, Chris Davids learned the one way to communicate successfully with Cho Seung-Hui.

He would ask a yes-or-no question, and Cho would respond with a nod or a shake of the head. It was bizarre and awkward, but it was the only way Davids could pass on information.

Davids tried, yet failed, to build a relationship with the youth who refused to speak.

He barely recognized the sound of Cho’s voice until the airing of his now-infamous video manifesto. It was the most Davids had ever heard out of the painfully lonely man.

"In the whole eight years that I knew him, he hadn’t said a word to me directly," Davids told the Daily News yesterday.

Davids, 21, was one of many this week who gave an inside look into the mind of America’s newest mass murderer. But unlike the slew of professors, peers, and distant relatives who shared their odd encounters with Cho, Davids is one of the few who watched Cho remain silent for nearly a decade.

Davids said he introduced himself to Cho during their first week as freshmen at Centerville High School in Clifton, Va. Cho sat alone at a cafeteria table and Davids thought it was the perfect opportunity to befriend someone who looked like him.

Although Davids is half Korean, people often assume he is Chinese. As a boy, Davids was the target of ridicule because of his ethnicity. He wanted to start his high school career with a happier attitude and a new set of friends.

He spotted Cho and sat down across from him.

Cho "was by himself and I was by myself," Davids said. "Plus the Asian familiarity was a factor. I thought we could have a bond."

But Cho refused to talk. Davids sat in silence, finished his lunch, and gave up trying to warm up the eerily quiet teen.

As the years passed, both boys moved on to Westfield High School in Chantilly. Davids took up track and football while Cho remained invisible.

Davids began to run with different groups, but said he still reached out to Cho when they crossed paths. The two worked alongside each other in the Westfield Science Club, a voluntary after-school program. As the other kids played with dry ice and liquid nitrogen, Cho would stand around emotionless and watch.

The two also shared an English class. Davids recalled how Cho had turned red when the teacher asked him to read a story aloud. Two teens laughed at Cho because of his "strange mumbled voice" and yelled ‘go back to China.’ "

"I felt so bad for him," Davids said "but what was I supposed to do? I didn’t want to be the target of the whole class."

Taunts and bullies clouded Davids’ childhood, but his parents made sure he remained strong.

Davids’ father, Hondo, a retired Marine major, led a Boy Scout troop and watched his son as he advanced to become an Eagle Scout.

"Whatever he showed interest in, we stuck him in," said Davids’ mother, Migi, naming the long list of sports her son played from soccer to tae kwon do. "We made sure he was always in plenty of activities."

Migi Davids emigrated from South Korea to South Carolina at age 13.

Cho was just 8 when he and his parents and sister left South Korea for the United States in 1992. They moved to Fairfax County, Va., and joined the sizable Korean population there.

By the time Cho was in middle school, his family had moved into a neat cream-colored townhouse in the middle-class section of Centerville.

Cho’s social peculiarities didn’t hold him back from getting accepted to Virginia Tech along with Davids and dozens of their high-school classmates.

Cho majored in English while Davids picked history. For nearly the next four years, the two would pass each other on campus. Their interaction was routine: Davids would wave and Cho would either respond with a nod or just gaze at the ground.

Davids said he rarely thought of Cho until this week. His life has been busy with graduation, a fiancé, and a 6-month-old son. On Tuesday Davids, along with the rest of the world, learned that Cho was the psychopath who taken the lives of 32 Virginia Tech students.

And now the haunted memories won’t stop.

"The realization that I knew him hit me like a rock," Davids said. "I had a little bit of guilt. Maybe if I tried harder, than maybe this wouldn’t have happened. Now I fear retaliation. I am Korean. He is Korean. I am starting to get the stares."

Clearly, in spite of his silence, there was a lot going on inside Cho. We see a very troubled young boy who grew into a tragically troubled young man. Was it because of government mind-programming, or was it because he was born with a genetic psychological pathology and his experiences in U.S. society made it worse?

Fear Cho inspired by film

The images of Cho Seung-hui apparently mimicking scenes from a violent South Korean film highlighted concerns about links between screen brutality and violent crime. […]

Professor Paul Harris, of Virginia Tech, has reportedly alerted authorities to apparent similarities between the pictures Cho posted to NBC and scenes from the film.

They show Cho holding a gun to his head, and wielding a hammer, images that appear in the film.

If proved to have influenced the shootings, Oldboy will join a long list of films and TV shows, computer games and music videos blamed for inspiring violent acts.

Where was the help Cho needed ?

BLACKSBURG, Va. - If people noticed anything at all about Cho Seung Hui, it seems, they were struck by his silence. He wouldn’t respond in class. He wouldn’t talk to his roommates. Making his way across the Virginia Tech campus, he was quiet as a ghost. But when he was alone, at a keyboard or in front of a camera, he had volumes to say. "You have vandalized my heart, raped my soul and torched my conscience," he proclaimed in the video he mailed to NBC News between Act One and Act Two of his rampage. "You thought it was one pathetic boy’s life you were extinguishing. Thanks to you, I die like Jesus Christ, to inspire generations of the weak and the defenseless people." […]

Eventually there will be many lessons from the tragedy at Virginia Tech, but here is one that already seems clear: colleges and universities urgently need to reevaluate the way they monitor and care for the mental health of their students.

Early adulthood is the development stage at which a number of psychiatric illnesses, including schizophrenia and bipolar disorder, are most commonly diagnosed. Campus counseling services encounter students suffering from depression, attention-deficit disorder and anxiety. On some high-pressure campuses such as the University of Chicago, students get a day off from classes to learn about suicide prevention. […]

On every campus there are students who don’t talk very much, who don’t seem to have any friends, who don’t go on dates or show up at parties - students who spend most of their time alone. Only a few of these students suffer from serious mental illness, and fewer still pose any danger to themselves or others. But which ones?

Teachers and administrators at Virginia Tech at least were able to identify Cho as deeply troubled. But school policies, state laws and the ethic of unfettered, independent self-exploration - for most students, one of the great things about American universities - in this case conspired to let a sick, dangerous man deteriorate to the point where he became a mass murderer. The evidence so far suggests that Cho Seung Hui was not mentally competent to decline the help he so desperately needed.

This next couple of articles are where the ignorant spinmeisters begin to weave their webs of nonsense.

We all wonder — what if?

There were so many warning signs that might have changed the course of events at Virginia Tech - if only school officials and authorities had acted differently. We heard the same after the Columbine massacre, whose eighth anniversary we mark today.

Virginia Tech and Columbine are just two horrific events that were fraught with opportunities to intervene. Surely there is a lesson for authorities that might prevent a next time. […]

Mass killings grab our attention, but psychological problems present a larger danger - suicide. A 1999 Surgeon General’s Report estimated that one in five adults and children have mental disorders. About every two hours, a young person commits suicide, the Association of Suicidology reported in 2002. In Colorado, suicide is the second-highest cause of death after motor vehicle accidents for people ages 10-24, the Mental Health Association of Colorado says.

In Cho’s case, authorities are still piecing together details, hoping to determine precisely what set him off. It’s possible we’ll never know, just as we still don’t know exactly what set off Harris and Klebold. The signs were plentiful that they were angry and out of control. Authorities, friends, family - someone needed to successfully connect the dots.

Obviously, the above write is blissfully unaware that the Secret Government is only too glad to have such mass killings (and will stage them if necessary) and they certainly do not intend to allow U.S. society to be changed in any way that would prevent such tragedies.

This next article atually leaves me speechless.

Chavez : We will never know reason for Cho’s killing spree

Thirty-three people are dead; 32 of them innocents, gunned down by a young man who then killed himself.

We want to know why. We want to understand how such a horrific thing could happen on a bucolic college campus.

Could it have been pre- vented? Do we need better laws? Did university officials ignore the warning signs of a dangerous young man bent on destruction?

Did police fail to protect students in the hours between the first shootings in the dorms and the massacre that ensued in the engineering building later that morning?

It is as if we think that if we come up with the right answers, we can prevent what happened Monday morning at Virginia Tech from ever happening again, anywhere. It is what makes us human - the need to understand, to uncover the pattern that will explain everything, to impose order on anarchy.

In the end, we will never know why Cho Seung-Hui chose to murder students and teachers at Virginia Tech. Surely not by looking for clues in the videos and 1,800-page manifesto he mailed to NBC in the interlude between the first shootings and his final killing spree. […]

Perhaps it is easier in our postmodern age to ascribe illness to evil. Surely no one in his right mind would do the things that Cho did, we want to believe.

But this explanation, like all the others that have been offered to try, even after the fact, to exert some control over what happened, misses the point.

No one is responsible for Cho’s deadly deeds but Cho. He carefully planned the carnage he would wreak. He wrote and recorded a script to blame his victims, then mailed it to the media to ensure his own immortality, which most media outlets have been all too eager to accommodate.

There are no larger lessons to learn from this horror, except perhaps that man is capable of almost limitless evil.

But after Auschwitz and the Killing Fields of Cambodia, after Jeffrey Dahmer and John Evander Couey, after 9/11 and the suicide bombings that occur almost daily in Iraq, do we still need proof that evil exists?

It would be comforting to think we could stop the Cho Seung-Huis from their deadly missions. If only we had stricter gun laws - or maybe if we encouraged everyone to carry guns - we could prevent another Virginia Tech.

If only we could better diagnose and treat mental illness - or else lock up anyone who exhibits violent, antisocial tendencies - we could ensure no one else would die at the hands of a madman. If only . . .

It is human nature to seek solutions. But the capacity for evil is also a part of human nature. It is something we choose, each of us, of our own free will - to do good or evil. Cho Seung-Hui chose evil - and the only bulwark against evil is always to choose good ourselves.

"We will never know?" And that’s okay? "There are no larger lessons to learn from this horror, except perhaps that man is capable of almost limitless evil." Say what?! I don’t think I’ve ever read anything more ignorant - or - designed to just put the masses back to sleep. "Oh, life is a mystery… " "God works in mysterious ways…" "So it ever was… don’t get worked up about it." and so on. This is the very "head in the sand" attitude that is at the root of the problem.

"If a collection were to be made of all the books that describe the horrors of wars, the cruelties of revolutions, and the bloody deeds of political leaders and systems, most people would avoid such a library. In such a library, ancient works would be found alongside books by contemporary historians and reporters. The documentary evidence on German extermination and concentration camps, complete with dry statistical data, describing the well-organized ‘labor’ of the destruction of human life, would be seen to use a properly calm language, and would provide the basis for acknowledging the nature of Evil.

The autobiography of Rudolf Hess, the commander of camps in Osweicim (Auschwitz) and Brzezinka, (Birkenau) is a classic example of how an intelligent psychopath thinks and feels.

Our library of death would include works on philosophy discussing the social and moral aspects of the genesis of Evil, while using history to partially justify the blood-drenched ’solutions’.

The library would show to the alert reader a sort of evolution from primitive attitudes, that it is alright to enslave and murder vanquished peoples, to the present day moralizing which declares that such behavior is barbaric and worthy of condemnation.

However, such a library would be missing one crucial tome: there would not be a single work offering a sufficient explanation of the causes and processes whereby such historical dramas originate, of how and why human beings periodically degenerate into bloodthirsty madness.

The old questions would remain unanswered: what made this happen? Does everyone carry the seeds of crime within, or only some of us? No matter how faithful to the events, nor how psychologically accurate the books that are available may be, they cannot answer those questions nor can they fully explain the origin of Evil.

Thus, humanity is at a great disadvantage because without a fully scientific explanation of the origins of Evil, there is no possibility of the development of sufficiently effective principles for counteracting Evil. […]

In the macro-social phenomenon where Evil runs rampant, ‘Pathocracy’, a certain hereditary anomaly isolated as ‘essential psychopathy’ is catalytically and causatively essential for the genesis and survival of such a State. […]" [Political Ponerology]

And of course, it must be blamed on "normal human nature."

Recently, Henry See wrote about the U.S. Envrionment of Evil where he reported on a recent article: San Francisco psychologist says environment plays big role in evil behavior.

In "The Lucifer Effect: Understanding How Good People Turn Evil," Zimbardo writes that human nature is dualistic: Each of us, given certain uncontrolled circumstances, is capable of sadistic or abusive behavior. A professor emeritus of psychology at Stanford University, Zimbardo, 74, believes this so strongly that he spoke as an expert witness in defense of Staff Sgt. Ivan "Chip" Frederick, the military guard who supervised the night shift on Tiers 1A and 1B at Abu Ghraib, where the beatings, torture and sexual humiliation took place.

"Each of us, given certain uncontrolled circumstances, is capable of sadistic or abusive behavior."

There you have it. Anyone put into a similar set of circumstances will react in the same way. You, gentle reader of this web site, are capable of the kinds of horrors we have seen at Abu Ghraib, that have been reported at Guantanamo, or that we imagine take place in any one of the many US secret detention centres around the globe.

This idea is a very popular one. It is also used to explain the horrors of Nazi Germany. It implicates each of us because each of us has committed acts for which we are ashamed, for which we feel guilty. Therefore we buy into such an explanation. […]

Does that mean that everyone living under those conditions would turn into a monster?

According to Zimbardo, the answer is yes. But how, then, can we explain those individuals, too few and too rare, who are willing to risk their lives in situations such as that, to help others and go against the tide?

Studying evil, which he defines as "intentionally behaving in ways that harm others," has occupied Zimbardo for years. He’s lectured on the psychology of evil in classrooms and at professional conferences, and traveled to Brazil where he interviewed men who had been torturers and death-squad executioners. In the book, he draws examples from the 1994 Rwandan genocide of the early ’90s, the lynching of blacks by whites in the American South and the more recent phenomenon of Islamic fundamentalist suicide bombers.

He cites examples of men who, at the same time they inflicted evil in the context of work, maintained parallel lives as family men and loving fathers.

The old saw about torturers living parallel lives as "family men and loving fathers" is heard over and over again, as if it explains anything or even offers some "proof" that these men are what they say they are and not psychopaths or another pathological type. Were the children of these people interviewed? Were their wives? What sort of "family life" are we talking about? Given the pathological character of much of what passes for "family life", the reality may, yet again, be far from the illusion projected. Furthermore, given our distorted understanding of what "love" is, all sorts of predatory activities are classified as "love", and everyone accepts it. "Caring" for another often means allowing yourself to become food; "loving" someone means using them for food.

Were the women married to these men conditioned to believe that love was following the dictates of one’s husband? That a woman’s place was in the kitchen? We don’t know, but before accepting the statement that these were "family men and loving fathers", much more data is needed.

"What I’m saying is that the human mind is so complex that any of us have templates to do anything. I mean, we could be Mother Teresa, we could be Idi Amin. We could be Nelson Mandela, we could be Saddam Hussein. But for most of us, we go in and out. It’s not even a choice."

"It’s not even a choice." Think about that. It isn’t even a choice between doing Good or Evil, between being an Idi Amin or a Mother Teresa.

It just happens. You’re in the wrong place at the wrong time and, presto!

How far has the ponerological infection progressed when we are told that we have no choice between good and evil, that when it comes down to a choice, you have no choice? Evil will choose you. […]

Evil needn’t be on the scale of Abu Ghraib torture, he adds. Everyday evil includes "telling a racist or sexist joke, spreading gossip in school that can ruin another kid. Spousal or child abuse, doing something at work that violates your values. The newest evil now is cyber-bullying."

The division between good and evil is "permeable and nebulous," he writes. "It is possible for angels to become devils and, perhaps more difficult to conceive, for devils to become angels."

Excuse me, but there is a world of difference between spreading gossip about someone, telling a racist or sexist joke, or fighting with your spouse and the kinds of torture and abuse seen at Abu Ghraib! For most people, such acts are the furthest they go. These are the small acts that we do for which we feel guilty, and that sense of guilt is then used to implicate us in horrendous acts that far outstrip a lie or gossip or a shouting match with your mate.

Yes, these acts can have consequences that are physically and psychologically violent. I am in no way dismissing them. But there is more to them than that. Certainly,they can be attributed to pressure or a conjunction of events (the environment), and a sincere person feels truly remorseful when they snap out of it.

But there are individuals who never feel remorse, who are incapable of feeling remorse. Nothing in the world can help them to see the error of their act, the violence they have perpetrated on another, and to see the need to repair the damage. The reactiont is more along the lines of "What of it?" or "Get over it".

The truly horrific acts of evil, or the majority of them, are those perpetrated by such human looking predators. These predators can take positions of power in organizations and in society and can instill an environment where the morally weak are easily influenced into mimicking such acts. Other people who are not pathological can be influenced by this environment and can come to accept that such acts are normal or part of life. A mundane example is the way violence and taunts are now accepted as being part and parcel of sport. There is nothing about violence and taunts that is instrinsic to sport, and yet few bat an eye now when it shows its head. Many even hope it will show its head.

A good example of this appeared in the news yesterday: Psychopath Training! Women laughed as they forced toddlers to take part in ‘dog fight’

A mother and her three daughters who forced two toddlers to take part in a "dog fight" and filmed it walked free from court yesterday.

The women, including the children’s mother, goaded the tearful brother and sister to punch each other and even use a magazine and hairbrush as weapons. When the boy, who was in a nappy, stopped fighting they called him a "wimp" and "bloody faggot". […]

The court was told how the mother of the children, Zara Care, 21, and her sisters, Serenza Olver, 29, and Danielle Olver, 19, had met at the home of their mother, Carole Olver, 48.

They formed a circle in the living room around the children, a three-year-old girl and a boy of two, and urged them to fight while Zara Care capturing the whole episode on video.

In the film up to six adults, including a man, are seen chatting and smoking. As the two children run around the room, one of the women can be heard to say to them, "Do you want to play?’ before pushing the boy towards the girl.

The children start circling and slapping each other - goaded by four women, who can be seen and heard laughing.

The boy, who is wearing just a nappy and a T-shirt, is then floored by a blow from his sister and lies on the floor crying.

After clambering on to an armchair to escape, he buries his head under a cushion but a woman in the room tells him: "Get up - don’t be a wimp all your life."

He staggers to his feet and punches his sister in the mouth, and, as she falls to the ground, is encouraged to kick her.

A female voice says: "And again, whilst she’s down, boot her."

He then tries to leave the room but an older child blocks his path and the girl again runs over and pummels his back with her fists.

The boy is then told by a female voice: "Get up and punch her, you bloody faggot."

He tries to refuse, but then grabs a large black hairbrush and begins to beat his sister, while a woman is heard to say: "He needs weapons, she just has a fist."

The girl is caught in the mouth by the brush and begins to scream and lifts her arm in the air, appealing for help from an unseen adult - but is turned away.

At this point, an older child in the room can be heard to say: "Is it our turn yet?" The film ends with the two toddlers screaming and crying, and an adult saying: "That’s enough."

During the video the women hurl a stream of orders, such as "jump on him", "kick her" and "hit his face".

The word "punch" is heard more than 20 times. The video came to light after the children’s father, a serving soldier, returned from Iraq and decided to show his parents footage from the video camera the women used.

He had expected it to feature the children playing but he was horrified to come upon the eight-minute film of them fighting.

David Gittins, prosecuting, said that the father compared what he saw to a "dog fight" and was reduced to tears. He subsequently went to social services, who called in police.

The children’s grandmother, a mother of eight, showed no remorse when she was interviewed, insisting it would "harden" them up, it was stated.

The judge criticised her for still seeming defiant. The three other defendants wept as the offence was described.

Defending the women, who admitted child cruelty offences, Rupert Taylor said they were not wicked.

The three daughters had never been in trouble with the police before. But they were ill-educated, had few advantages in life, and did not realise what they were doing was abhorrent.

And lest you think that psychopaths only live in the U.S. or UK, check this out: Jaw Dropping! Jihadist Video Shows Boy Beheading Man

KILI FAQIRAN, Pakistan - The boy with the knife looks barely 12. In a high-pitched voice, he denounces the bound, blindfolded man before him as an American spy. Then he hacks off the captive’s head to cries of "God is great!" and hoists it in triumph by the hair. […]

The footage shows Nabi making what is described as a confession, being blindfolded with a checkered scarf.

"He is an American spy. Those who do this kind of thing will get this kind of fate," says his baby-faced executioner, who is not identified.

A continuous 2 1/2-minute shot then shows the victim lying on his side on a patch of rubble-strewn ground. A man holds Nabi by his beard while the boy, wearing a camouflage military jacket and oversized white sneakers, cuts into the throat. Other men and boys call out "Allahu akbar!" _ "God is great!" _ as blood spurts from the wound.

The film, overlain with jihadi songs, then shows the boy hacking and slashing at the man’s neck until the head is severed. […]

The method of Nabi’s death was not unusual for Pakistan’s lawless tribal regions. Suspected informers are regularly found beheaded and dumped along the side of the road in the lawless, mountainous regions along the Afghan-Pakistani border where al-Qaida and Taliban militants find sanctuary.

But such al-Qaida-style killings are rarely featured in the Taliban’s increasingly frequent propaganda videos. The use of a child to conduct the beheading stands out even among those filmed by militants in Iraq.

"This is outright barbarism," Iqbal Haider, secretary-general of the independent Human Rights Commission of Pakistan, said after viewing the video. "Whosoever has committed this, whether they are Taliban or anybody else or any Afghan or al-Qaida or anybody, they are enemy No. 1 of the Muslims."

And the good Doctor Zimbardo says we all have it in us, and the pundits say we ought not to look for any deeper reason than the fact that the capacity for evil is also a part of human nature. It is something we choose, each of us, of our own free will - to do good or evil. Cho Seung-Hui chose evil - and the only bulwark against evil is always to choose good ourselves.

And if you think that Cho was raised in a family such as the one described above, think again.

Statement by Sun-Kyung Cho, sister of Seung-hui Cho, on behalf of herself and her family

[…] We are humbled by this darkness. We feel hopeless, helpless and lost.

This is someone that I grew up with and loved. Now I feel like I didn’t know this person.

We have always been a close, peaceful and loving family. My brother was quiet and reserved, yet struggled to fit in. We never could have envisioned that he was capable of so much violence.

He has made the world weep. We are living a nightmare.

Certainly, the capacity to do evil is present in human society, but that is because human society is composed of many types of individuals, including pathological deviants that, because of their natures, have an extraordinarily powerful effect on society as a whole, and the result is that human beings who are born normal are subjected to pathological material for all of their lives to the point where they do not know the difference between good and evil.

That process that leads to the pathological being accepted as normal is the process of ponerization. It is real, and most everyone can be and is affected to one extent or another. An understanding of ponerology, of how society becomes infected with evil, is much different from the simplistic assertion that "we could all become an Idi Amin".[…]

By denying the fundamental difference between the psychopath, the person without conscience, and people of conscience, Zimbardo continues to propagate the great lie, the fundamental fact of the nature of our world that, if generally known and taken into account by society at large, could change our world for the better in ways we can’t even imagine. That lie states that we are all the same.

The truth, that not all who look human have a conscience, is a bitter pill to swallow. We have been raised under the twin peaks of religion and science. The religious shadow upon us tells us that God made us all in his image. The shadow cast by official science tells us that questions of conscience have no place in science.

In recent years, however, a few brave researchers into psychopathy are providing us with data that proposes to establish a study of evil that is scientific. Such is the proposition of Andrew Lobaczewski who presents the work of courageous Eastern European psychologists, now persecuted and forgotten, who actively studied psychopathy and political power. Others suggest there is a genetic link with conscience, that psychopaths differ genetically in a fundamental way from other people. They are born without the necessary hardware to choose a moral life. Robert Hare, a Canadian psychologist, has even taken brain scans of psychopaths that were refused publication in a scientific journal because the editors were convinced that they were not human but from some sort of ape.

If Zimbardo does not know this data, then he cannot offer a complete picture of the subject. […]

It doesn’t take an Einstein to see that things are bad on the planet. I can’t think of an adjective to qualify "bad" that sums up the actual state of things. Wars, starvation, inequality, injustice, disease, poverty, ecological disaster, and on and on. The developed countries consume the lion’s share of the world’s resources while the rest of the world starves. The United States consumes the lion’s share of the consumed resources. The vast majority of people in those countries accept the situation and think it is fine. If they have qualms, they aren’t so upset that they are actually doing anything about it.

People find excuses.

We are told that this is how things have always been. We hear stories of the Roman Empire, Alexander’s Empire, the Ottoman Empire, and our history books are filled with wars for this and wars for that as justifications for the current push for the establishment of an American Empire. The problems that beset us are somehow linked to human nature, we are told. We are rational animals, with stress on our animalistic side, not on reason. It is that animal inside that cannot always be tamed. Given the right circumstances….

The explanation offered by Zimbardo lies squarely in this conceptualization of humanity and society.

We suggest that the conceptualization is wrong, fundamentally wrong. It is fundamentally wrong because it does not take into account the fact that there are among us on our planet human-looking individuals devoid of conscience and incapable of anything resembling what others would consider as emotion. Their emotions are only related to those associated with the hunt, with predation. They have no ability to register and feel the suffering of other human beings as anything more than a tasty food source. In fact, they thrive on the suffering of other people because it makes them feel important, special, smarter, and better than everyone else. We squirm and suffer while they pump themselves up because they have put another over on us. They know how we can be manipulated through playing on our emotions, and they are extremely successful at it. They are so successful that we don’t even know that they exist! We blame ourselves. We even measure ourselves against their standards.

Psychologist Martha Stout agrees. In her excellent book The Sociopath Next Door, she writes:

"And so why does the world seem so terribly unsafe? How do we explain the six o’clock news, or even our own personal experiences? Could it conceivably be that a mere 4% of the population is responsible for nearly all of the human disasters that occur in the world, and in our individual lives? This is an arresting question, one that offers to overhaul many of our assumptions about human society. So I will repeat that the phenomenon of conscience is overwhelmingly powerful, persistent, and prosocial. Unless under the spell of psychotic delusions, extreme rage, inescapable deprivation, drugs, or a destructive authority figure, a person who is conscience-bound does not - in some sense cannot - kill or rape in cold blood, torture another person, steal someone’s life savings, trick someone into a loveless relationship as sport, or wilfully abandon his own children.

"Could you?

"When we see people doing such things, either on the news or in our own lives, who are they? On the rare occasion, they are formally insane, or under the pressure of some radical emotion. Sometimes they are members of a group that is desperately deprived, or they are substance abusers, or the follower of a malevolent leader. But most often they are none of these. Rather, most often, they are people who have no conscience. They are sociopaths." [Martha Stout, pp. 104-05.]

We ascribe barbarous acts to "human nature" when, in fact, it is not "human" at all. Normal humans are shocked and repelled. The idea that "we are all potential Idi Amins" is tantamount to the Stockholm Syndrome. We have identified with the kidnapper and so we elaborate theories to justify our behaviour. According to Stout, the idea that we all have a shadow side…

"…maintains in its most extreme form that anything doable or feelable by one human being is potentially doable and feelable by all… Ironically, good and kindhearted people are often the most willing to subscribe to this theory in the radical form that proposes they could, in some bizarre situation, be mass murderers. It feels more democratic and less condemnatory (and somehow less alarming) to believe that everyone is a little shady than to accept a few human beings live in a permanent nighttime. To admit that some people literally have no conscience is not technically saying that some human beings are evil, but it is disturbingly close. And good people want very much not to believe in the personification of evil." [Martha Stout. 106]

People of conscience, those who can feel remorse, you can feel distraught at having hurt another human being, buy into the big lie because of their ability to feel!

Lobaczewski points out over and over again in his book that psychopaths have a special psychological knowledge of normal people and use this knowledge against us constantly. Because they are never blinded by emotions, and yet they see how crippled in our thinking and our reactions we can become, they understand that our emotions, our noblest emotions, are the ultimate weapon against us.

These are the facts on the ground and any theory that doesn’t take it into account only plays further into the hands of these individuals.

If the existence of psychopaths and their ability to play us is denied, then their role in government, in business, in the media, in the military, in the police and law, in education, in any place where power is to be had, cannot be understood. That is the reality, those are the forces that are shaping the environment in which we can be ponerized. So on that level, yes, the environment is a factor. Fortunately, researchers such as Łobaczewski, Robert Hare and Paul Babiak are bringing to light the nefarious influence these pathological types play in society. We are beginning to have an understanding of the dynamic between psychopath and non-psychopath, between predator and prey, in individual lives and in society at large. [Environment of Evil]

In a recent paper, it is suggested that psychopathy may exist in ordinary society in even greater numbers than anyone has thus far considered:

"Psychopathy, as originally conceived by Cleckley (1941), is not limited to engagement in illegal activities, but rather encompasses such personality characteristics as manipulativeness, insincerity, egocentricity, and lack of guilt - characteristics clearly present in criminals but also in spouses, parents, bosses, attorneys, politicians, and CEOs, to name but a few. (Bursten, 1973; Stewart, 1991). Our own examination of the prevalence of psychopathy within a university population suggested that perhaps 5% or more of this sample might be deemed psychopathic, although the vast majority of those will be male (more than 1/10 males versus approximately 1?100 females).

"As such, psychopathy may be characterized … as involving a tendency towards both dominance and coldness. Wiggins (1995) in summarizing numerous previous findings… indicates that such individuals are prone to anger and irritation and are willing to exploit others. They are arrogant, manipulative, cynical, exhibitionistic, sensation -seeking, Machiavellian, vindictive, and out for their own gain. With respect to their patterns of social exchange (Foa & Foa, 1974), they attribute love and status to themselves, seeing themselves as highly worthy and important, but prescribe neither love nor status to others, seeing them as unworthy and insignificant. This characterization is clearly consistent with the essence of psychopathy as commonly described.

"The present investigation sought to answer some basic questions regarding the construct of psychopathy in non forensic settings… In so doing we have returned to Cleckley’s (1941) original emphasis on psychopathy as a personality style not only among criminals, but also among successful individuals within the community.

"What is clear from our findings is that (a) psychopathy measures have converged on a prototype of psychopathy that involves a combination of dominant and cold interpersonal characteristics; (b) psychopathy does occur in the community and at what might be a higher than expected rate; and (c) psychopathy appears to have little overlap with personality disorders aside from Antisocial Personality Disorder. …

"Clearly, where much more work is needed is in understanding what factors differentiate the abiding (although perhaps not moral-abiding) psychopath from the law-breaking psychopath; such research surely needs to make greater use of non forensic samples than has been customary in the past." [Salekin, Trobst, Krioukova: (2001) "Construct Validity of Psychopathy in a Community Sample: A Nomological Net Approach; Journal of Personality Disorders, 15(5), 425-441]

Andrew Lobaczewski discusses the fact that there are different types of psychopaths and this is where we come back to Cho and see how all of this comes together. Cho’s family member says that he was diagnosed as Autistic.

Autism is a syndrome that seems to have become more and more prevalent in U.S. society in the last 50 years. There is a lot of evidence to link Autism to child immunization though it is obvious that Autism is not a modern problem. Swiss psychiatrist Eugen Bleuler coined the term in 1911. Autism and autistic stem from the Greek word "autos," meaning self. The term autism originally was meant to refer to a basic disturbance of schizophrenia, i.e. an extreme withdrawal of oneself from the fabric of social life, but not excluding oneself.

We see here a connection between Autism and Schizoidal psychopathy. Then, there is Asperger’s a form of autism in which words and academic achievement come easily, but social interactions are virtually impossible.

A change in diagnostic criteria in 1987 opened the door for about a third more children to be classified or reclassified as autistic. Then, in 1994, Asperger’s syndrome-a type of high-functioning autism found in people with average to above-average intelligence-was added to the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, setting the stage for the still-rising wave of autism diagnoses. In 1987, 2,778 autistic people received assistance from the state of California. In 2002, 20,377 received assistance, and about 70 percent of them were 14 or younger. The Autism Society of America estimates that one in every 250 kids born is autistic, and about four of five of them are male. This problem is further exacerbated by the fact that a 2003 study from the Boston University school of medicine found that as autism diagnoses have risen 25 percent per year in the United States, reports of other behavioral disorders have fallen by 20 percent. In other words, a generation ago a child who showed academic ability but couldn’t control his emotions or follow rules might have been classified as having an "oppositional-defiant" disorder. A boy with an all-consuming interest in one subject-a hallmark of Asperger’s-might’ve been given the "obsessive-compulsive" tag. (Or maybe just "hobbyist.") Today, both conditions might be lumped under the heading "autistic." [Autism-Asperger’s Syndrome Blog]

In short, it it highly likely that a lot of genetic psychopaths are being diagnosed as "autistic" or as having "Asperger’s." It could also be that Asperger’s or Autism are just variations of psychopathy. What is striking is the pattern of deficits is fairly consistent though the intensity varies across the spectrum.

Here, I want to make it clear that there is really not enough data to determine a diagnosis for Cho, nor am I qualified to do so. I am a researcher, a writer, a historian who looks for patterns and repeating cycles. Among the things I have observed in recent years is a general tendency for the psychological profession to seek in myriads of ways to obfuscate the issue of psychopathy. I am not the only one noticing this either. One therapist was compelled to write:

Perverse abusiveness fascinates, seduces, and terrifies. We sometimes envy abusive individuals because we imagine them to be endowed with a superior strength that will always make them winners. They do, in fact, know how to naturally manipulate, and this appears to give them the upper hand, whether in business or in politics. Fear makes us instinctively gravitate toward them rather than away from them: survival of the fittest.

The most admired individuals are those who enjoy themselves the most and suffer the least. In any case, we don’t take their victims, who seem weak and dense, seriously, and under the guise of respecting another’s freedom, we become blind to destructive situations.

In fact, this "tolerance" prevents us from interfering in the actions and opinions of others, even when these actions and opinions are out of line or morally reprehensible.

We also weirdly indulge the lies and "spin" of those in power. The end justifies the means.

To what degree is this acceptable? Don’t we, out of indifference, risk becoming accomplices in this process by losing our principles and sense of limits? Real tolerance means examining and weighing values.

This type of aggression, however, lays traps in the psychic domain of another person and is allowed to develop because of tolerance within our current socio-cultural context. Our era refuses to establish absolute standards of behavior. We automatically set limits on abusive behaviors when we LABEL them as such; but in our society, labeling is likened to intent to censure. We have abandoned the moral constraints that once constituted a code of civility which allowed us to say "That just isn’t done!" We only become indignant when facts are made public, worked over and magnified by the media. […]

Even psychiatrists hesitate to use the term "abuse"’; when they do, it’s to express either their powerlessness to intervene or their fascination with the abuser’s methods. […]

[Psychopathy] arises from dispassionate rationality combined with an incapacity to respect others as human beings. Some [psychopaths] commit crimes for which they are judged, but most use charm and their adaptive powers to clear themselves a path in society, leaving behind a trail of wounded souls and devastated lives. … We have all been fooled by abusive human beings who passed themselves off as victims. They fulfilled our expectations in order the better to seduce us. …

We subsequently feel betrayed and humiliated when, in their search for power, they show their true colors. This explains the reluctance of some psychiatrists to expose them. Psychiatrists say to each other, "Watch out, he’s a [psychopath]", the implication being "This could be dangerous," and also, "There’s nothing that can be done." We then give up on helping the victim.

Designating [psychopathy] is certainly a serious matter… whether the subject is serial killing or perverse abusiveness, the matter remains one of predatory behavior: an act consisting in the appropriation of another person’s life.

The word "perverse" shocks and unsettles. It corresponds to a value judgment, and psychoanalysts refuse to pronounce value judgments. Is that sufficient reason to accept what goes on? A more serious omission lies in not labeling abuse, because the victim then remains defenseless…

Victims are often not heard when they seek help. Instead, analysts advise them to assess their conscious or unconscious responsibility for the attack upon them. … Emotional abusers directly endanger their victims; indirectly, they lead those around them to lose sight of their moral guideposts and to believe that freewheeling behaviors at the expense of others are the norm. [Marie-France Hirigoyen, Stalking the Soul]

From Lobaczewski, we know that pathological acceptance of what we can call the Mosaic Distinction - the Schizoidal Declaration - manifests in individuals with diversiform deviations, whether inherited or acquired, as well as by many people who have personality disorders or who have been injured by social injustice. That explains why people like Cho can do what they do without being literally "mind-programmed." Because of deviant ways of understanding reality, such individuals can take in material, brutalize the concepts, and reformulate them so that they believe that violence is not only appropriate, but is being demanded of them.

But Cho didn’t arrive at that point without help. The social conditions of U.S. society - not to mention the ways in which the U.S. influences global society - were a powerful contributing factor. Cho is, in essence, a symptom of what we have become. Lobaczewski describes the process and I think that the reader can easily draw the comparisons between the clinical description of an "Evil Empire" and how it was born, and what has happened in the U.S., particularly via the so-called "Neo-Conservatives" under the influence of Zionism. Keep in mind that the Democrats are controlled by the Zionists as well, but just who is going to emerge as the "top psychopaths" in this system still remains to be seen.

Schizoidia has thus played an essential role as one of the factors in the genesis of the evil threatening our contemporary world. Practicing psychotherapy upon the world will therefore demand that the results of such evil be eliminated as skillfully as possible.

The first researchers attracted by the idea of objectively understanding this phenomenon initially failed to perceive the role of characteropathic personalities in the genesis of pathocracy. However, when we attempt to reconstruct the early phase of said genesis, we must acknowledge that characteropaths played a significant role in this process. We already know from the preceding chapter how their defective experiential and thought patterns take hold in human minds, insidiously destroying their way of reasoning and their ability to utilize their healthy common sense. This role has also proved essential because their activities as fanatical leaders or spellbinders in various ideologies open the door to psychopathic individuals and the view of the world they want to impose.

In the ponerogenic process of the pathocratic phenomenon, characteropathic individuals adopt ideologies created by doctrinaire, often schizoidal people, recast them into an active propaganda form, and disseminate it with pathological egotism and paranoid intolerance for any philosophies which may differ from their own. They also inspire further transformation of this ideology into its pathological counterpart. Something which had a doctrinaire character and circulated in numerically limited groups is now activated at societal level, thanks to their spellbinding possibilities.

It also appears that this process tends to intensify with time; initial activities are undertaken by persons with milder characteropathic features, who are easily able to hide their aberrations from others. Paranoid individuals thereupon become principally active. Toward the end of the process, an individual with frontal characteropathy and the highest degree of pathological egotism can easily take over leadership.

As long as the characteropathic individuals play a dominant role within a social movement affected by the ponerogenic process, the ideology, whether doctrinaire from the outset or later vulgarized and further-more perverted by these latter people, continues to keep and maintain its content link with the prototype. The ideology continuously affects the movement’s activities and remains an essential justifying motivation for many. In this phase, such a union therefore does not move in the direction of mass scale crime. To a certain extent, one could justifiably define such a movement or union by the name derived from its original ideology.

In the meantime, however, the carriers of other (mainly hereditary) pathological factors become engaged in this already sick social movement. They accomplish the work of final transformation of the contents of such a union in such a way that it becomes a pathological caricature of its original contents and ideology. This is affected under the ever-growing influence of psychopathic personalities, thanks to the inspiration of essential psychopathy.

Such leadership eventually engenders a wholesale showdown: the adherents of the original ideology are shunted aside or terminated. This group includes many characteropaths, especially of the lesser and paranoidal varieties. Ideological motivations and the double talk they create thereupon serve to hide the actual new contents of the phenomenon. From this time on, using the ideological denomination of the movement in order to understand its essence becomes a keystone of mistakes.

Psychopathic individuals generally stay away from social organizations characterized by reason and ethical discipline. After all, these were created by that other world of normal people so foreign to them. They therefore hold various social ideologies in contempt, at the same time discerning all their actual failings. However, once the process of poneric transformation of some human union into its yet undefined cartoon counterpart has begun and advanced sufficiently, they perceive this fact with almost infallible sensitivity: a circle has been created wherein they can hide their failings and psychological differentness, find their own "modus vivendi", and maybe even realize their youthful Utopian dream. They thereupon begin infiltrating the rank and file of such a movement; pretending to be sincere adherents poses them no difficulty, since it is second nature for them to play a role and hide behind the mask of normal people.

Psychopaths’ interest in such movements does not result exclusively from their egoism and lack of moral scruples. These people have in fact been hurt by nature and society. An ideology liberating a social class or a nation from injustice may thus seem to them to be friendly; unfortunately it also gives rise to unrealistic hopes that they themselves will be liberated as well. The pathological motivations which appeared in the union when it was affected by the ponerogenic process strike them as familiar and hope-inspiring. They therefore insinuate themselves into a movement preaching revolution and war with that unfair world so foreign to them.

They initially perform subordinate functions in such a movement and execute the leaders’ orders, especially whenever something needs to be done which inspires revulsion in others. Their evident zealotry and cynicism gives rise to criticism on the part of the union’s more reasonable members, but it also earns the respect of some its revolutionaries. They thus find protection among those people who earlier played a role in the movement’s ponerization, and repay the favor with complements or by making things easier for them. Thus they climb up the organizational ladder, gain influence, and almost involuntarily bend the contents of the entire group to their own way of experiencing reality and to the goals derived from their deviant nature. A mysterious disease is already raging inside the union. The adherents of the original ideology feel ever more constricted by powers they do not understand; they start fighting with demons and making mistakes. […]

Within this system, the common man is blamed for not having been born a psychopath, and is considered good for nothing except hard work, fighting and dying to protect a system of government he can neither sufficiently comprehend nor ever consider to be his own. […]

An ever-strengthening network of psychopathic and related individuals gradually starts to dominate, overshadowing the others. Characteropathic individuals who played an essential role in ponerizing the movement and preparing for revolution, are also eliminated. Adherents of the revolutionary ideology are unscrupulously "pushed into a counter-revolutionary position". They are now condemned for "moral" reasons in the name of new criteria whose paramoralistic essence they are not in a position to comprehend. Violent negative selection of the original group now ensues. The inspirational role of essential psychopathy is now also consolidated; it remains characteristic for the entire future of this macro-social pathological phenomenon.

The pathological block of the revolutionary movement remains a minority in spite of these transformations, a fact which cannot be changed by propaganda pronouncements about the moral majority adhering to the more glorious version of the ideology. The rejected majority and the very forces which naively created such power start mobilizing against the block. Ruthless confrontation with these forces becomes the only way to safeguard the long-term survival of the pathological authority. We must thus consider the bloody triumph of a pathological minority over the movement’s majority to be a transitional phase during which the new contents of the phenomenon coagulate. The entire life of a society thus affected becomes subordinated to deviant thought-criteria and permeated by their specific experiential mode, especially the one described in the section on essential psychopathy. At this point, using the name of the original ideology to designate this phenomenon is meaningless and becomes an error rendering its comprehension more difficult.

I shall accept the denomination of pathocracy for a system of government thus created, wherein a small pathological minority takes control over a society of normal people. The name thus selected above all underscores the basic quality of the macrosocial psychopathological phenomenon, which differentiates it from the many possible social systems dominated by normal people’s structure, custom, and law. [Political Ponerology]

That is an exact description of how the Mosaic Distinction was born, grew, and expanded to take over the Western world with the help of its daughters: Christianity and Islam.

And so it is, Cho Seung-Hui, probably born with a particular genetic pathology, was brought to the U.S., a culture where violence, lying and cheating are not only common currency of life, they are effectively glorified because those are the values of its governing body, and under those influences and neglect became a metaphor for what the U.S. itself has become: psychopathically autistic, inured in the Mosaic Distinction where all others must be rejected, repudiated, destroyed.

Any reasonable scan of the news will reveal that lies and cheating are not "covered up" as thoroughly as American apologists would like to think.

Even the less well-informed Americans have some idea that there was certainly something fishy about the investigation into the assassination of JFK. In recent years, the man in charge of the Warren Commission, Gerald Ford, also a former president, admitted to "cheating" on the report.

Then, there was Watergate followed by the Iran-Contra affair, not to mention "Monica-gate." And here we are just hitting some highlights familiar to all Americans.

What consequences did the cheaters of society suffer?

None to speak of. In fact, in nearly every case, they were rewarded handsomely with those things of value to the psychopath: money and material goods. If anyone thinks they were shamed by public exposure, think again!

But what is of CRUCIAL interest here is the fact that the American people have simply NOT responded to the revelations of lies in government with any outrage that could be considered more than token. At the present time, there isn’t even "token outrage."

Don’t you find that odd?

But we have already noted the reason: the American way of life has optimized the survival of psychopathy and in a world of psychopaths, those who are not genetic psychopaths, are induced to behave like psychopaths simply to survive. When the rules are set up to make a society "adaptive" to psychopathy, it makes psychopaths of everyone. As a consequence, a very large number of Americans are effective sociopaths. (Here we use "sociopath" as a designation of those individuals who are not genetic psychopaths.)

And so, we have George Bush and the Third Reich calculating how much they can get away with by looking at the history of the reactions of the American People to cheating.

There aren’t any because the system is adaptive to psychopathy. In other words, Americans support Bush and his agenda because most of them are LIKE him.

But that is not because they are ALL born that way. It is because psychopathy is almost required to survive in Competitive, Capitalistic America.

As a society gets larger and more competitive, individuals become more anonymous and more Machiavellian. Social stratification and segregation leads to feelings of inferiority, pessimism and depression among the have-nots, and this promotes the use of "cheating strategies" in life which then makes the environment more adaptive for psychopathy in general.

Psychopathic behavior among non-genetic psychopaths could be viewed as a functional method of obtaining desirable resources, increasing an individual’s status in a local group, and even a means of providing stimulation that socially and financially successful people find in acceptable physical and intellectual challenges. In other words, the psychopath is a bored and frustrated sensation-seeker who "does not have the intellectual capacitiy to amuse and occupy himself" internally. Such individuals may begin their lives in the lower socio-economic levels, but they often rise to the top.

In America, a great many households are affected by the fact that work, divorce, or both, have removed one or both parents from interaction with their children for much of the day. This is a consequence of Capitalistic economics.

When the parents are absent, or even when one is present but not in possession of sufficient knowledge or information, children are left to the mercies of their peers, a culture shaped by the media. Armed with joysticks and TV remotes, children are guided from South Park and Jerry Springer to Mortal Kombat on Nintendo. Normal kids become desensitized to violence. More-susceptible kids - children with a genetic inheritance of psychopathy - are pushed toward a dangerous mental precipice. Meanwhile, the government is regularly passing laws, on the demand of parents and the psychological community, designed to avoid imposing consequences on junior’s violent behavior.

As for media violence, few researchers continue to try to dispute that bloodshed on TV and in the movies has an effect on the kids who witness it. Added to the mix now are video games structured around models of hunting and killing. Engaged by graphics, children learn to associate spurts of "blood" with the primal gratification of scoring a "win."

The U.S. is a deliberately contrived society of televised conformity, literate and creative inadequacy, and social unrest and decadence. It is apparent that the media is in charge of propagating these conditions, and the media is controlled by who?

The psychic stresses of our world are right in the home. There they can easily act on any kid who believes that "the world has wronged me" - a sentiment spoken from the reality of existence - a reality created by economic pressures instituted via Game Theory.

Is there a solution?

The obvious solution would be a world in which, at the very least, the psychopath - in government or in society - would be forced to be responsible for unethical behavior. But game-theory modeling demonstrates that selfishness is always the most profitable strategy possible for replicating units.

Could it ever be an evolutionarily stable strategy for people to be innately unselfish?

On the whole, a capacity to cheat, to compete and to lie has proven to be a stupendously successful adaptation. Thus the idea that selection pressure could ever cause saintliness to spread in a society looks implausible in practice. It doesn’t seem feasible to outcompete genes which promote competitiveness. "Nice guys" get eaten or outbred. Happy people who are unaware get eaten or outbred. Happiness and niceness today is vanishingly rare, and the misery and suffering of those who are able to truly feel, who are empathic toward other human beings, who have a conscience, is all too common. And the psychopathic manipulations are designed to make psychopaths of us all.

Nevertheless, a predisposition to, conscience, ethics, can prevail if and when it is also able to implement the deepest level of altruism: making the object of its empathy the higher ideal of enhancing free will in the abstract sense, for the sake of others, including our descendants.

In short, our "self-interest" ought to be vested in collectively ensuring that all others are happy and well-disposed too; and in ensuring that children we bring into the world have the option of being constitutionally happy and benevolent toward one another.

This means that if psychopathy threatens the well-being of the group future, then it can be only be dealt with by refusing to allow the self to be dominated by it on an individual, personal basis. Preserving free will for the self in the practical sense, ultimately preserves free will for others. Protection of our own rights AS the rights of others, underwrites the free will position and potential for happiness of all. If mutant psychopaths pose a potential danger then true empathy, true ethics, true conscience, dictates using prophylactic therapy against psychopaths.

And so it is that identifying the psychopath, ceasing our interaction with them, cutting them off from our society, making ourselves unavailable to them as "food" or objects to be conned and used, is the single most effective strategy that we can play.

Whether he was mind-programmed by mad doctors, or simply a victim - like all the rest of us - of the psychopathic landscape of the "Mosaic Distinction," Cho Seung-hui emerged from U.S. society as a stark reminder of the historically repeating fate of Imperial Hubris.

Indeed, beware the Ides of April.

UncategorizedApril 14, 2007 8:46 pm

The mother of one of the SOTT editors recently wrote to him about my post, The Hope, which compared the background ideology of the current U.S./Israel Administration to that formulated by the Catholic Church in the creation of the Inquisition. I think she was rather incensed that I compared the arrest of the Imams to such a dark period of history. She wrote:

I agree this administration is using fear to subvert the constitution and abridge civil rights. I’m not sure we have hit the Inquisition yet and I have hopes the political process will make a difference. …. maybe I am one of those who hides my head in the sand.

She has "hopes that the political process will make a difference".

I think that a lot of people have such hopes. A lot of people in Nazi Germany also had such hopes as Sebastian Haffner’s book "Defying Hitler" so poignantly revealed. Anyone who takes the time to watch the BBC Series about the Nazis quickly understands that the only reason the Nazis were able to ultimately do what they did was because people simply did not understand that their government had been taken over by pathological deviants and that the political process itself had been co-opted to the use of these criminals. And the reason the German people did not understand this was lack of knowledge. This lack of knowledge led to two kinds of blindness: 1) they did not know what signs to look for; 2) even those who could see the signs and knew that they did not bode well did not fully plumb the depths of the problem.

Discussing the Inquisition, I wrote in the above referenced article that America is today at a crossroads:

In a certain sense, you could say that it was a war between spiritual freedom and spiritual corporatism. Western Civilization had reached a crossroad similar to the crossroad that the Cathars taught existed within the hearts of individual humans: a return to consciousness of Angelic realms, or a new cycle of repeating again and again the pain and suffering of existence in this vale of tears we call Earth.

Historian R. I. Moore has noted that the years around 1200 were a turning point that led to the "formation of a persecuting society". Choices were made then that are still reverberating in human society.

And it is clear what choice was made then.

We are facing a similar choice today.

This choice is, as Sebastian Haffner made clear, a crossroads within the heart of every single individual. As I quoted in my last post, Charles Taylor wrote in Salon:

[Haffner’s] theory of how Hitler was allowed to flourish goes something like this: Haffner writes of his fellow Germans as a country of people who "had a spiritual organ removed: the organ that gives men steadfastness and balance, but also a certain inertia and stolidity. It may variously appear as conscience, reason, experience, respect for the law, morality, or the fear of God." […]

"A generation of young Germans," Haffner writes, "had become accustomed to having the entire content of their lives delivered gratis, so to speak, by the public sphere." […]

If Haffner’s tone sounds superior, remember that those words were written by a German who had seen no willingness to resist Hitler either inside or outside his country. The only comparison I can come up with for what follows, Haffner’s account of the ’30s, is to Don Siegel’s 1956 version (the first) of "Invasion of the Body Snatchers."

Well, there is another comparison, and it’s about to get way more real.

SOTT published an article by Henry See last week entitled Environment of Evil in which he wrote:

It doesn’t take an Einstein to see that things are bad on the planet. I can’t think of an adjective to qualify "bad" that sums up the actual state of things. Wars, starvation, inequality, injustice, disease, poverty, ecological disaster, and on and on. The developed countries consume the lion’s share of the world’s resources while the rest of the world starves. The United States consumes the lion’s share of the consumed resources. The vast majority of people in those countries accept the situation and think it is fine. If they have qualms, they aren’t so upset that they are actually doing anything about it.

People find excuses.

Indeed, people find excuses: "I’m not sure we have hit the Inquisition yet and I have hopes the political process will make a difference."

Today, I want to try to make it a whole lot easier for everyone to understand just what we are facing. In the article Henry wrote, he referenced a study done by Bob Altemeyer, Associate Professor at the University of Manitoba.

Altemeyer has spent much of his career researching the personality profile of what he calls Right Wing Authoritarians. He has published an overview of his research called The Authoritarians. It offers an insight into that percentage of the population that is easily swayed by the pathological types. Unfortunately, Altemeyer has not factored in the existence of psychopathy and pathocracy as important realities in society, so while he can help explain the functioning of the system, he is incapable of either explaining its origins or arriving at a solution.

Altemeyer writes on his website about The Authoritarians:

OK, what’s this book about?

It’s about what’s happened to the American government lately. It’s about the disastrous decisions that government has made. It’s about the corruption that rotted the Congress. It’s about how traditional conservatism has nearly been destroyed by authoritarianism. It’s about how the “Religious Right” teamed up with amoral authoritarian leaders to push its un-democratic agenda onto the country. It’s about the United States standing at the crossroads as the next federal election approaches.

“Well,” you might be thinking, “I don’t believe any of this is true.” Or maybe you’re thinking, “What else is new? I’ve believed this for years.” Why should a conservative, moderate, or liberal bother with this book? Why should any Republican, Independent, or Democrat click the “Introduction” link on this page?

Because if you do, you’ll begin an easy-ride journey through some relevant scientific studies I have done on authoritarian personalities–one that will take you a heck of a lot less time than the decades it took me. Those studies have a direct bearing on all the topics mentioned above. So if you think the first paragraph is a lot of hokum, or full of half-truths, I invite you to look at the research.

For example, take the following statement: “Once our government leaders and the authorities condemn the dangerous elements in our society, it will be the duty of every patriotic citizen to help stomp out the rot that is poisoning our country from within.” Sounds like something Hitler would say, right? Want to guess how many politicians, how many lawmakers in the United States agreed with it? Want to guess what they had in common?

Or how about a government program that persecutes political parties, or minorities, or journalists the authorities do not like, by putting them in jail, even torturing and killing them. Nobody would approve of that, right? Guess again.

Don’t think for a minute this doesn’t concern you personally.

Let me ask you, as we’re passing the time here, how many ordinary people do you think an evil authority would have to order to kill you before he found someone who would, unjustly, out of sheer obedience, just because the authority said to? What sort of person is most likely to follow such an order? What kind of official is most likely to give that order, if it suited his purposes? Look at what experiments tell us, as I did.

If, on the other hand, you’re way ahead of me, and believe the extreme right-wing elements in America are poised to take it over, permanently, I think you can still get a lot from this book.

The studies explain so much about these people.

Yes, the research shows they are very aggressive, but why are they so hostile?

Yes, experiments show they are almost totally uninfluenced by reasoning and evidence, but why are they so dogmatic?

Yes, studies show the Religious Right has more than its fair share of hypocrites, from top to bottom; but why are they two-faced, and how come one face never notices the other?

Yes, their leaders can give the flimsiest of excuses and even outright lies about things they’ve done wrong, but why do the rank-and-file believe them?

What happens when authoritarian followers find the authoritarian leaders they crave and start marching together?

As Henry points out, the roots of the problem of "authoritarianism" are not really addressed by Altemeyer. The cause IS addressed by psychologist Andrew Lobaczewski who studied the matter first hand both under the Nazis and the Communists in Poland. In his book, Political Ponerology, he gives one type of the "Authoritarian" personality a clinical name: Schizoidal psychopathy and tells us that it is, most often, hereditary.

Carriers of this anomaly are hypersensitive and distrustful, but they pay little attention to the feelings of others, tend to assume extreme positions, and are eager to retaliate for minor offenses. Sometimes they are eccentric and odd.

Their poor sense of psychological situation and reality leads them to superimpose erroneous, pejorative interpretations upon other people’s intentions. They easy become involved in activities which are ostensibly moral, but which actually inflict damage upon themselves and others. Their impoverished psychological worldview makes them typically pessimistic regarding human nature. We frequently find expressions of their characteristic attitudes in their statements and writings: “Human nature is so bad that order in human society can only be maintained by a strong power created by highly qualified individuals in the name of some higher idea.” Let us call this typical expression the “schizoid declaration”. […]

Because of their one-sidedness, they tend to consider themselves intellectually superior to “ordinary” people. […]

The quantitative frequency of this anomaly varies among races and nations: low among Blacks, the highest among Jews. […]

A schizoid’s [ability to generate evil] should be evaluated in two aspects. On the small scale, such people cause their families trouble, easily turn into tools of intrigue in the hands of clever individuals, and generally do a poor job of raising the younger generation. Their tendency to see human reality in the doctrinaire and simplistic manner they consider “proper”, transforms their frequently good intentions into bad results. However, their ponerogenic role can take on macro-social proportions if their attitude toward human reality and their tendency to invent great doctrines are put to paper and duplicated in large editions.

In spite of their typical deficits, or even an openly schizoidal declaration, their readers do not realize what the authors’ characters are like; they interpret such works in a manner corresponding to their own nature. The minds of normal people tend toward corrective interpretation thanks to the participation of their own richer, psychological world-view. […]

During stable times which are ostensibly happy, albeit marked by injury to individuals and nations, doctrinaire people believe they have found a simple solution to fix such a world. Such a historical period is always characterized by an impoverished psychological world-view, a schizoidally impoverished psychological world-view thus does not stand out during such times and is accepted as legal tender. These doctrinaire individuals characteristically manifest a certain contempt with regard to moralists then preaching the need to rediscover lost human values and to develop a richer, more appropriate psychological world-view.

Schizoid characters aim to impose their own conceptual world upon other people or social groups, using relatively controlled pathological egotism and the exceptional tenacity derived from their persistent nature. They are thus eventually able to overpower another individual’s personality, which causes the latter’s behavior to turn desperately illogical. They may also exert a similar influence upon the group of people they have joined.

They are psychological loners who feel better in some human organization, wherein they become zealots for some ideology, religious bigots, materialists, or adherents of an ideology with satanic features.

If their activities consist of direct contact on a small social scale, their acquaintances easily perceive them to be eccentric, which limits their ponerogenic role. However, if they manage to hide their own personality behind the written word, their influence may poison the minds of society in a wide scale and for a long time. […]

In spite of the fact that the writings of schizoidal authors contain the above described deficiency, or even an openly formulated schizoidal declaration which constitutes sufficient warning to specialists, the average reader accepts them not as a view of reality warped by this anomaly, but rather as an idea to which he should assume an attitude based on his convictions and his reason. That is the first mistake.

The oversimplified pattern, devoid of psychological color and based on easily available data, exerts an intense influence upon individuals who are insufficiently critical, frequently frustrated as result of downward social adjustment, culturally neglected, or characterized by some psychological deficiencies.

Others are provoked to criticism based on their healthy common sense, also they fail to grasp this essential cause of the error.

Societal interpretation of such activities is broken down into the main trifurcations, engendering divisiveness and conflict. The first branch is the path of aversion, based on rejection of the contents of the work due to personal motivations, differing convictions, or moral revulsion. This already contains the component of a moralizing interpretation of pathological phenomena.

We can distinguish two distinctly different apperception types among those persons who accept the contents of such works: the critically-corrective and the pathological.

People whose feel for psychological reality is normal tend to incorporate chiefly the more valuable elements of the work. They trivialize the obvious errors and complement the schizoid deficiencies by means of their own richer world-view. This gives rise to a more sensible, measured, and thus creative interpretation, but is not free from the influence of the error frequently adduced above.

Pathological acceptance is manifested by individuals with diversiform deviations, whether inherited or acquired, as well as by many people bearing personality malformations or who have been injured by social injustice. That explains why this scope is wider than the circle drawn by direct action of pathological factors.

There are, of course, other authoritarian pathologies, and the ways in which they fit together like a huge macro-social mechanical Evil is a fascinating and essential study for the survival of humanity. Only when you know the signs can you know what you are seeing and what is the likely outcome. Knowledge Protects in the most amazing ways. And now, for everybody who believes, along with my colleague’s mother …
I’m not sure we have hit the Inquisition yet and I have hopes the political process will make a difference.
… Here is your future:
Unauthoritarians and Authoritarians: Worlds of Difference

By now you must be developing a feel for what high RWAs [Right Wing Authoritarian] think and do, and also an impression of low RWAs. Do you think you know each group well enough to predict what they’d do if they ran the world? One night in October, 1994 I let a group of low RWA university students determine the future of the planet (you didn’t know humble researchers could do this, did you!). Then the next night I gave high RWAs their kick at the can.

The setting involved a rather sophisticated simulation of the earth’s future called the Global Change Game, which is played on a big map of the world by 50-70 participants who have been split into various regions such as North America, Africa, India and China. The players are divided up according to current populations, so a lot more students hunker down in India than in North America. The game was designed to raise environmental awareness, and before the exercise begins players study up on their region’s resources, prospects, and environmental issues.

Then the facilitators who service the simulation call for some member, any member of each region, to assume the role of team leader by simply standing up. Once the "Elites" in the world have risen to the task they are taken aside and given control of their region’s bank account. They can use this to buy factories, hospitals, armies, and so on from the game bank, and they can travel the world making deals with other Elites. They also discover they can discretely put some of their region’s wealth into their own pockets, to vie for a prize to be given out at the end of the simulation to the World’s Richest Person. Then the game begins, and the world goes wherever the players take it for the next forty years which, because time flies in a simulation, takes about two and a half hours.

The Low RWA Game

By carefully organizing sign-up booklets, I was able to get 67 low RWA students to play the game together on October 18th. (They had no idea they had been funneled into this run of the experiment according to their RWA scale scores; indeed they had probably never heard of right-wing authoritarianism.) Seven men and three women made themselves Elites. As soon as the simulation began, the Pacific Rim Elite called for a summit on the "Island Paradise of Tasmania." All the Elites attended and agreed to meet there again whenever big issues arose. A world-wide organization was thus immediately created by mutual consent.

Regions set to work on their individual problems. Swords were converted to ploughshares as the number of armies in the world dropped. No wars or threats of wars occurred during the simulation. [At one point the North American Elite suggested starting a war to his fellow region-aires (two women and one guy), but they told him to go fly a kite–or words to that effect.]

An hour into the game the facilitators announced a (scheduled) crisis in the earth’s ozone layer. All the Elites met in Tasmania and contributed enough money to buy new technology to replenish the ozone layer.

Other examples of international cooperation occurred, but the problems of the Third World mounted in Africa and India. Europe gave some aid but North America refused to help. Africa eventually lost 300 million people to starvation and disease, and India 100 million.

Populations had grown and by the time forty years had passed the earth held 8.7 billion people, but the players were able to provide food, health facilities, and jobs for almost all of them. They did so by demilitarizing, by making a lot of trades that benefited both parties, by developing sustainable economic programs, and because the Elites diverted only small amounts of the treasury into their own pockets. (The North American Elite hoarded the most.)

One cannot blow off four hundred million deaths, but this was actually a highly successful run of the game, compared to most. No doubt the homogeneity of the players, in terms of their RWA scores and related attitudes, played a role. Low RWAs do not typically see the world as "Us versus Them." They are more interested in cooperation than most people are, and they are often genuinely concerned about the environment. Within their regional groups, and in the interactions of the Elites, these first-year students would have usually found themselves "on the same page"–and writ large on that page was, "Let’s Work Together and Clean Up This Mess." The game’s facilitators said they had never seen as much international cooperation in previous runs of the simulation. With the exception of the richest region, North America, the lows saw themselves as interdependent and all riding on the same merry-go-round.

The High RWA Game

The next night 68 high RWAs showed up for their ride, just as ignorant of how they had been funneled into this run of the experiment as the low RWA students had been the night before. The game proceeded as usual. Background material was read, Elites (all males) nominated themselves, and the Elites were briefed. Then the "wedgies" started. As soon as the game began, the Elite from the Middle East announced the price of oil had just doubled. A little later the former Soviet Union (known as the Confederation of Independent States in 1994) bought a lot of armies and invaded North America. The latter had insufficient conventional forces to defend itself, and so retaliated with nuclear weapons. A nuclear holocaust ensued which killed everyone on earth–7.4 billion people–and almost all other forms of life which had the misfortune of co-habitating the same planet as a species with nukes.

When this happens in the Global Change Game, the facilitators turn out all the lights and explain what a nuclear war would produce. Then the players are given a second chance to determine the future, turning back the clock to two years before the hounds of war were loosed. The former Soviet Union however rebuilt its armies and invaded China this time, killing 400 million people. The Middle East Elite then called for a "United Nations" meeting to discuss handling future crises, but no agreements were reached.

At this point the ozone-layer crisis occurred but–perhaps because of the recent failure of the United Nations meeting–no one called for a summit. Only Europe took steps to reduce its harmful gas emissions, so the crisis got worse. Poverty was spreading unchecked in the underdeveloped regions, which could not control their population growth. Instead of dealing with the social and economic problems "back home," Elites began jockeying among themselves for power and protection, forming military alliances to confront other budding alliances. Threats raced around the room and the Confederation of Independent States warned it was ready to start another nuclear war. Partly because their Elites had used their meager resources to buy into alliances, Africa and Asia were on the point of collapse. An Elite called for a United Nations meeting to deal with the crises–take your pick–and nobody came.

By the time forty years had passed the world was divided into armed camps threatening each other with another nuclear destruction. One billion, seven hundred thousand people had died of starvation and disease. Throw in the 400 million who died in the Soviet-China war and casualties reached 2.1 billion. Throw in the 7.4 billion who died in the nuclear holocaust, and the high RWAs managed to kill 9.5 billion people in their world–although we, like some battlefield news releases, are counting some of the corpses twice.

The authoritarian world ended in disaster for many reasons. One was likely the character of their Elites, who put more than twice as much money in their own pockets as the low RWA Elites had. (The Middle East Elite ended up the World’s Richest Man; part of his wealth came from money he had conned from Third World Elites as payment for joining his alliance.) But more importantly, the high RWAs proved incredibly ethnocentric. There they were, in a big room full of people just like themselves, and they all turned their backs on each other and paid attention only to their own group. They too were all reading from the same page, but writ large on their page was, "Care About Your Own; We Are NOT All In This Together."

The high RWAs also suffered because, while they say on surveys that they care about the environment, when push comes to shove they usually push and shove for the bucks. That is, they didn’t care much about the long-term environmental consequences of their economic acts. For example a facilitator told Latin America that converting much of the region’s forests to a single species of tree would make the ecosystem vulnerable. But the players decided to do it anyway because the tree’s lumber was very profitable just then. And the highs proved quite inflexible when it came to birth control. Advised that "just letting things go" would cause the populations in underdeveloped areas to explode, the authoritarians just let things go.

Now the Global Change Game is not the world stage, university students are not world leaders, and starting a nuclear holocaust in a gymnasium is not the same thing as launching real missiles from Siberia and North Dakota. So the students’ behavior on those two successive nights in 1994 provides little basis for drawing conclusions about the future of the planet. But some of what happened in this experiment rang true to me. I especially thought, "I’ve seen this show before" as I sat on the sidelines and watched the high RWAs create their very own October crisis.

At the close of his article Henry wrote:
We are facing the second scenario, not as a simulation, not as a game, but as our own future unless the knowledge needed to change society is propagated and put into practice. Frankly, I don’t think there is a hope in hell that we can succeed in such a task, but ending on that note wouldn’t be very helpful or encouraging. So instead, let me turn the problem around: if we are going to save ourselves, it is up to each of us to learn what we can about psychopathy and ponerology. Psychopaths are found in our lives as individuals, and they are clearly running the show on the global scale. Our only hope is that each of us begins to immunize himself to their manipulations, works to spread the knowledge so that others, too, can become immune, and begin to exercise that part of us that separates us from our predator: our conscience. If we can do this work, then the pole of conscience can become something more than an idea. It can become a reality, a living example of how life can be lived in a new way.
Now, certainly, even with all of the evidence of history, the evidence of psychology, the evidence of the eyes and ears - and even, dare we say it - the Heart, can anyone still say:
I agree this administration is using fear to subvert the constitution and abridge civil rights. I’m not sure we have hit the Inquisition yet and I have hopes the political process will make a difference.
How many of you are willing to bet the lives of your children and grandchildren on that delusion? We are at the crossroads: which road will you take?

UncategorizedApril 9, 2007 3:10 pm

©Signs of the Times

"Look! You fools! You’re in danger! Can’t you see? They’re after you! They’re after all of us! Our wives…our children…they’re here already! You’re next!" ~Dr. Miles Bennell, The Invasion of the Body Snatchers

At the end of WW II, an American soldier stumbled into a bunker in Berlin where he found Hitler, Mussolini, Stalin and a lawyer. He only had two bullets; which two of the three tyrants did he shoot?

Answer: None, he shot the lawyer twice.

Is it just a bad joke or does it tell us something important about our society?

In my last article, The Hope, I took some pains to compare the current crisis in human society with the crises that arose during the time of the Inquisition and Nazi Germany. One of the symptoms of such a human crisis is a certain hystericization of society that was exemplified in the article, Passengers May Be Sued in Imams’ Removal. The article was so full of conversive thinking and paramoralisms that it should shock anyone who reads it; but of course, I realize that this is hardly likely to be the case. As Andrew Lobaczewski wrote:

Egotistic thought-terrorization is accomplished by the society itself and its processes of conversive thinking. This obviates the need for censorship of the press, theater, or broadcasting, as a pathologically hypersensitive censor lives within the citizens themselves. [Andrew Lobaczewski, Political Ponerology]

Today, I would like to look at the same problem from a slightly different angle - the legal profession and how it supports fascism. Recall from the article about the Imams the following remarks:

Six Muslim men removed from a plane last fall after being accused of suspicious behavior are suing the airline and threatening to sue the passengers who complained - a move some fear could discourage travelers from speaking up when they see something unusual.

The civil rights lawsuit, filed earlier this month, has so alarmed some lawyers that they are offering to defend the unnamed "John Doe" passengers listed as "possible defendants" free of charge. They say it is vital that the flying public be able to report suspicious behavior without fear of being dragged into court. […]

Some fear such lawsuits could weaken what has become the first line of defense against terrorism since Sept. 11 - an alert public. […]

In reaction to the imams’ lawsuit, Congress has taken steps to legally protect passengers who report suspicious activity. Earlier this week, the House approved an amendment to a rail transportation security bill that would make passengers immune from such lawsuits, unless they say something they know is false.

Wow! What kind of attorney would be so alarmed about a lawsuit to defend the rights of a group of people that are currently targets of extreme vilification exactly as the Jews were in Germany prior to WW II that they would offer to defend the perpetrators of vicious slander? Just substitute the word "Jews" for "Imams" or "Muslims" and you wouldn’t know that you weren’t reading an old report from Nazi Germany. What is important to note is that members of the legal profession - and the law-making body itself - have become so pathologically hypersensitive that it works pro-actively to create the framework in which Fascism can grow and flourish.

This is not a good sign; it betokens evil, bloody times ahead for everyone.

But the legal profession, like every other, has a percentage of decent, thinking members who are not so easily taken over by Thought Terrorization and societal hystericization. Consider Elizabeth de la Vega who recently wrote about Karl Rove’s Danse Macabre:

Last week, Americans with access to YouTube were subjected to a once-in-a-lifetime performance by President Bush’s senior political adviser Karl Rove. At least, I fervently hope that this event will only happen once in our lifetimes. Watching Rove, at the White House Correspondents’ Dinner, bobbing and weaving awkwardly in a pathetic parody of a rapper was painful. However, more excruciating than his routine — "MC Rove: Doin’ the Dance, the Karl Rove Dance" to lyrics supplied by comedian Brad Sherwood — was the sight of the members of our so-called independent Washington press corps laughing amiably at the antics of a senior presidential aide whose conduct is so universally considered despicable that no one even flinches at ill-timed lines like: "Don’t get the jitters/but MC Rove tears the head off of critters."

That scene was the stuff of nightmares.

Rove’s rap performance was disturbing, yes; but, in the end, it was also relatively brief and harmless. The same cannot be said of the danse macabre he has been directing since the Bush administration took over the White House. […]

Karl Rove has, for years, been choreographing an elaborate dance of death for the federal government designed to give life to the Republican Party, and yet the public remains largely ignorant of his activities because he so rarely takes the stage. That honor is reserved for an apparently infinite supply of young Republicans eager to dance their little hearts out for a chance to get plum appointments. In other words, the prerequisite for the success of the Bush administration’s extravaganza — whether in Washington, Iraq, or elsewhere — has been a chorus line of "loyal Bushies."

Of course, the term "loyal Bushie" requires no definition, but one has recently been supplied by Kyle Sampson, Attorney General Alberto Gonzales’s former deputy chief of staff. Undoubtedly to his everlasting regret, Sampson, who resigned just prior to his testimony last week before the Senate Judiciary Committee, used this term to describe those United States Attorneys who should be retained by the White House because they had "managed well and exhibited loyalty to the president and attorney general." Those who "chafed against administration initiatives" were recommended for removal, according to Sampson; while the rest of the lot, including U.S. Attorney for the Northern District of Illinois and Special Counsel Patrick Fitzgerald, were unranked.

I spent last Thursday watching Sampson testify about the White House choreographed firings of seven U.S. Attorneys who were chafers. I was compelled to watch, even though, having worked for more than 21 years as an Assistant United States Attorney myself, I considered the revelation of this latest outrage to be the least horrific of a long string of horrors carried out by the Bush administration in the name of the Department of Justice for the advancement of the Republican Party.

To satisfy the tobacco lobby, for instance, President Bush’s Department of Justice (DOJ) appointees gutted the most significant case ever brought against the giant tobacco companies. To assuage the Republican base, Bush’s DOJ brought an unprecedented number of civil rights cases on behalf of non-minorities, while drastically limiting its traditional affirmative-action lawsuits. In order to portray themselves as representatives of the party most likely to make the American people feel safe — a cherished nugget of political wisdom from Karl Rove’s constant polling activities — Bush’s Attorneys General have sanctioned, caused to be carried out, and/or turned a blind eye to the use of illegal spying on citizens, illegal detentions at Guantanamo and elsewhere, kidnappings and "extraordinary renditions" to countries which the State Department has classified as the most egregious of human rights violators and, worst of all, administration-sanctioned acts of torture.

It is these activities that, to adopt the words of a fellow former Assistant United States Attorney and lifelong Republican, "turn my stomach." […]

‘Main Justice’, as the DOJ’s Washington, D. C. office is called, is well-staffed with "loyal Bushies" who will apparently carry out any tasks assigned, regardless of how unethical, illegal, or immoral they may be. The President is now trying to staff the U.S. Attorney’s Offices throughout the country with the same feckless loyalists. If he is allowed to proceed unimpeded, those offices too will be run by United States Attorneys "Doin’ the Karl Rove Dance."

"Defying Hitler" is a memoir by the late German historian Raimund Pretzel. In 1938 he escaped Nazi Germany with his Jewish fiancée and went to London, where he adopted the pseudonym Sebastian Haffner so that his family, who remained in Germany, would not be endangered by his writing. Haffner was what the Nazis classified as Aryan, but he was also a non-Nazi who despised the Fascist regime.

Haffner began this little memoir in 1939, close to the time of the events it describes. It was never finished and was only discovered following Haffner’s death in 1999, by his son Oliver Pretzel, who found it while going through his father’s papers. In his introduction, Pretzel says that his father would have been embarrassed by the book because it was not his usual cool and concise historical style but rather raw and emotional. But it is that raw emotional power that comes from so recently having escaped the danger that gives this book something really special.

As it happens, Haffner was trained in the legal profession and he wrote a short passage in the book about his observations of what took place within the law courts after the Nazis came to power. I think that you will find this excerpt to be extremely enlightening in view of the article about the Imams tossed off the plane as well as De La Vegas’ comments about Karl Rove and the Purge of the Prosecutors:

I had studied law and become a Referendar. …[As a Referendar, he participates in the work of the courts or the civil service like a judge or administrator]… In two of the courts where I worked, the judge even let me run the proceedings. This sudden power has a profound effect on a young man… and it inevitably influences him deeply. It had two principal effects on me. The first was composure, an attitude of cool, calm, benevolent dryness… The second was a certain facility in following official thought processes and legal abstractions. …[T]he second facility was literally to save the life of my wife, and my own a few years later. …

Apart from that, I can only smile ruefully when I consider how prepared I was for the adventure that awaited me. I was not prepared at all. I had no skills in boxing or ju-jitsu, not to mention smuggling, crossing borders illegally, using secret codes and so on: skills that would have stood me in good stead in the coming years. My spiritual preparation for what was ahead was almost equally inadequate. Is it not said that in peacetime the chiefs of staff always prepare their armies as well as possible - for the previous war? I cannot judge the truth of that, but it is certainly true that conscientious parents always educate their sons for the era that is just over. I had all the intellectual endowments to play a decent part in the bourgeois world of the period before 1914. I had an uneasy feeling, based on what I had experienced, that it would not be much help to me. That was all. At best I smelled a warning whiff of what was about to confront me, but I did not have an intellectual system that would help me deal with it.

True, that was not just my situation but that of my whole generation, and even more the situation of the older generation. (It is still the situation of most foreigners, who only know about Nazism from the newspapers and newsreels.) Our thinking is usually constrained by a certain civilisation in our outlook, in which the basics are unquestioned - and so implicit that they are almost forgotten. When we argued about certain opposites - freedom and slavery, for example, or nationalism and humanism, or individualsim and socialism - the discussion always respected certain Christian, humanistic, civilised principles as axiomatic. Even some of those who became Nazis at this time did not fully realise what they were doing. They might think that they stood for nationalism and socialism, were against the Jews and for the pre-1914-18 status quo… Still, they expected all that to take the humane forms usual in a civilised nation. Most of them would have been deeply shocked if one had suggested that what they really stood for were torture chambers and officially decreed pogroms (to name but two of the most obvious things, and these are certainly not yet the final horrific culmination). Even today there are Nazis who are shocked and alarmed if this is pointed out to them.

At that time I had no strong political views. I even found it difficult to decide whether I was "right" or "left", to use the most general political categories. … None of the existing political parties seems particularly attractive to me, despite the abundant choice. Anyway, belonging to any of them would not have saved me from becoming a Nazi…

What saved me was - my nose. I have a fairly well-developed figurative sense of smell, or to put it differently, a sense of the worth (or worthlessness!) of human, moral, political views and attitudes. Most Germans unfortunately lack this sense almost completely. The cleverest of them are capable of discussing themselves stupid with their abstractions and deductions, when just using their noses would tell them that something stinks. …

As for the Nazis, my nose left me with no doubts. It was just tiresome to talk about which of their alleged goals and intentions were still acceptable, or even "historically justified" when all of it stank. How it stank! That the Nazis were enemies, my enemies, and the enemies of all I held dear, was crystal clear to me from the outset. What was not at all clear to me, was what terrible enemies they would turn out to be. I was inclined not to take them very seriously - a common attitude among their inexperienced opponents, which helped them a lot, and still helps them.

There are few things as comic as the calm, superior indifference with which I and those like me watched the beginnings of the Nazi revolution in Germany, as if from a box at the theatre. It was, after all, a movement with the declared intention of doing away with us. Perhaps the only comparably comic thing is the way that now, years later, Europe is permitting itself exactly the same indifferent attitude, as though it were a superior, amused onlooker, while the Nazis are already setting it alight at all four corners…. […]

At the end of March the Nazis felt strong enough to initiate the first act of their real revolution, a revolution not against some constitution or other, but against the basis of human society on earth, a revolution that, if nothing is done, will stop at nothing.

The first diffident move was the boycott of the Jews on the 1st of April 1933. It had been thought up by Hitler and Goebbels over tea and biscuits at the Obersalzberg in Bavaria the Sunday before. On Monday the papers carried the peculiarly ironic headlines, ‘Mass Demonstrations Announced’. From Saturday the 1st of April, they said, all Jewish shops would be boycotted. SA troops would stand guard in front of them and prevent anyone from going in. All Jewish doctors and lawyers were also to be boycotted. SA patrols would check their consulting rooms to ensure that the ruling was obeyed.

One could see the advances that the Nazis had made in just one month by considering the justification for the boycott. The myth of a Communist coup that had been used to override the constitution and remove civil liberties had been carefully and plausibly constructed. They had even felt the need to supply some direct evidence in the form of the Reichstag fire. The justification for this new affront was a barefaced insult and mockery of those who were expected to act as though they believed it. The boycott was to be carried out as a defence and reaction against the totally unfounded horror stories about the new Germany that the German Jews were alleged to have cleverly spread abroad. Yes, just so.

Further measures were added in the next few days (some of them later temporarily rescinded). All ‘Aryan’ shops had to sack their Jewish employees. Then all Jewish shops had to do so too. Jewish shops had to pay their ‘Aryan’ employees in full during the period they were closed by the boycott. Jewish owners had to withdraw from their businesses and install ‘Aryan’ managers. And so on.

At the same time a great ‘education campaign’ against the Jews was set in motion. The Germans were informed through pamphlets, posters and meetings that it had been a mistake to consider the Jews as human beings. In reality they were a kind of ’subhuman’ animal, but with the characteristics of a devil. The consequences that would be drawn from this were not spelt out for the moment. Still, the campaign slogan was given out as ‘Juda verrecke’ (Perish Judah). A man who had hitherto been unknown to most Germans was appointed as leader of the boycott: Julius Streicher.

All this aroused in the German people something one might not have expected after the previous four weeks: widespread alarm. A murmur of dissent, suppressed but audible, spread through the land. The Nazis sensed that they had gone too far for the moment, and withdrew some of their measures after the 1st of April. Not, however, without first allowing these to unleash the full force of their terror. By now everyone knows to what extent the Nazis have changed their true intentions.

Apart from-the terror, the unsettling and depressing aspect of this first murderous declaration of intent was that it triggered off a flood of argument and discussions all over Germany, not about anti-Semitism but about the ‘Jewish question’. This is a trick the Nazis have since successfully repeated many times on other ‘questions’ and in international affairs. By publicly threatening a person, an ethnic group, a nation, or a region, with death and destruction, they provoke a general discussion not about their own existence, but about the right of their victims to exist. In this way that right is put in question.

Suddenly everyone felt justified, and indeed required, to have an opinion about the Jews, and to state it publicly. Distinctions were made between ‘decent’ Jews and the others. If-some pointed to the achievements of Jewish scientists, artists and doctors to justify the Jews ( justify? what for? against what?), others would counter that they were a detrimental ‘foreign influence’ in these spheres. Indeed, it soon became customary to count it against the Jews if they had a respectable or intellectually valuable profession. This was treated as a crime or, at the very least, a lack of tact. The defenders of the Jews were frowningly told that it was reprehensible of the Jews to have such-and-such a percentage of doctors, lawyers, journalists, etc. Indeed, per cent calculations were a popular ingredient of the ‘Jewish question’. People discussed whether the percentage of Jews among the members of the Communist Party was not too high, and among the casualties of the Great War perhaps too low. (This is the literal truth. I heard this argument in the mouth of an educated man with a Ph.D., who reckoned himself a member of the cultured class. He argued quite seriously that the 12,000 Jewish dead in the Great War was too small a proportion of the Jewish population in comparison with the corresponding number of ‘Aryans’ killed, and derived from this a certain justification for Nazi anti-Semitism.)

Today it is quite clear that Nazi anti-Semitism has nothing to do with the virtues or vices of the Jews. The interesting thing about the Nazis’ intention to train the Germans to be persecutors of the Jews throughout the world, and if possible exterminate them, an intention they made no secret of, is not the justification they give. That is such utter nonsense that it is demeaning even to take it seriously enough to argue against it. It is the intention itself that is significant. It is something new in the history of the world: an attempt to deny humans the solidarity of every species that enables it to survive; to turn human predatory instincts, that are normally directed against animals, against members of their own species, and to make a whole nation into a pack of hunting hounds. Once the violence and readiness to kill that lies beneath the surface of human nature has been awakened and turned against other humans, and even made into a duty, it is a simple matter to change the target. That can be clearly seen today; instead of ‘Jews’, one can just as easily say ‘Czechs’ or ‘Poles’ or anyone else.

We have here the systematic infection of a whole nation, Germany, with a germ that causes its people to treat their victims like wolves; or, to put it differently, the freeing and revitalisation of precisely those sadistic instincts whose chaining and restraint has been the work of a thousand years of civilisation. In a later chapter I intend to show how, in spite of its general weakness and dishonour, large parts of the German nation still find the strength to resist, perhaps from a dark feeling for what is at issue. Were it different, and should the central core of the Nazis’ programme become a reality, it would amount to a major crisis for humanity, and would place the survival of the species Homo sapiens at risk. It might only be possible to save the species by destroying the part infected by the ‘wolf virus’ completely.

This brief discourse shows that it is precisely the Nazis’ anti-Semitism that raises the most basic questions of existence, not just for the Jews. That is not true to the same extent of any of their other election pledges. It shows how ridiculous the attitude is, still found widely in Germany, that the anti-Semitism of the Nazis is a small side issue, at worst a minor blemish on the movement, which one can regret or accept, according to one’s personal feelings fol the Jews, and of ‘little significance compared to the great national issues’. In reality these ‘great national issues’ are unimportant day-to-day matters, the ephemeral business of a transitional period in European history - while the Nazis’ anti-Semitism is a fundamental danger and raises the spectre of the downfall of humanity.

Again, these are all things that nobody saw with any clarity in March 1933. In this case, however, I can pride myself in having had a sense of what was in the air. I felt distinctly that what had happened so far was merely disgusting and no more. But what was in the offing had something apocalyptic about it. In rarely visited corners of my mind I felt that we were facing ultimate questions, though I did not yet know quite what they were. […]

Friday the 3ist of March. Tomorrow things would get serious. I still could not quite believe it. I scanned the papers, looking for signs of any mitigation, perhaps some movement towards a more reasonable, acceptable position. There was nothing. Just the intensification of some measure or other and pedantic instructions about the details of the action and the manner in which it was to be executed. Otherwise it was business as usual. Looking at the steady bustle and traffic on the streets, one had no sense that anything special was about to take place. Jewish shops were still open and trading as usual. Today one was still permitted to shop there. It would not be prohibited until tomorrow, at 8 a.m. precisely.

I went to the Kammergericht (the court). It stood there, cool and grey as always, set back from the street in a distinguished setting of lawns and trees. Its halls were filled with the hushed fluttering of barristers in their bat-like, black silk gowns, carrying briefcases under their arms, with concentrated, serious expressions on their faces. Jewish barristers were pleading in court as though this were a day like any other.

Not being due in court, I went to the library (as though this were a day like any other), settled down at one of the long work tables, and started reading a document about which I had to give an opinion. Some complicated affair with intricate points of law. I carried the heavy legal tomes to my place and surrounded myself with them. I looked up decisions of the high courts of the Reich and made notes. As always, the high-ceilinged, spacious room was filled with the inaudible electricity of many minds hard at work. In making pencil marks on paper, I was setting the instruments of the law to work on the details of my case, summarising, comparing, weighing the importance of this or that word in a contract, investigating what bearing this or that clause would have on the matter, according to the precedents. When I scribbled a few words something happened, like the first cut in a surgical operation: a question was clarified, a component of a judicial decision put in place. Not the final decision, naturally: ‘It is thus irrelevant whether the plaintiff .. . so it remains to investigate whether …’ Careful, precise, silent work. Everybody in the room was similarly immersed in their own cases. Even the ushers, somewhere between beadles and policemen, moved more quietly here in the library, and seemed to try and make themselves invisible. The room was full of extreme silence, a silence filled with the high tension of deeply concentrated work. It was like a silent concert. I loved this atmosphere. At home I would have been unable to work today, here it was perfectly easy. Your thoughts just could not stray. It was like being in a fortress, or better, a test-tube. No breath came in from the outside world; here there was no revolution.

What was the first noticeable noise? A door banging? A distant sound like an order being given? Suddenly everybody raised their heads, and strained to hear what it was. The room was still utterly quiet: but the quality of the silence had changed. It was no longer the silence of concentrated work. It was filled with alarm and agitation. There was a clatter of footsteps outside in the corridor, the sound of rough boots on the stairs, then a distant indistinct din, shouts, doors banging. A few people got up and went to the door, looked out, and came back. One or two approached the ushers and spoke quietly with them - in here no one ever raised their voice. The noise from outside grew stronger. Somebody spoke into the silence: ‘SA.’ Then, not particularly loudly, somebody else said, ‘They’re throwing out the Jews,’ and a few others laughed. At that moment this laughter alarmed me more than what was actually happening. With a start I realised that there were Nazis working in this room. How strange.

Gradually the disturbance took shape - at first it had been intangible. Readers got up, tried to say something to one another, paced about slowly to no great purpose. One man, obviously a Jew, closed his books, packed his documents and left. Shortly afterwards somebody, perhaps a superintendent, appeared in the doorway and announced clearly but calmly, ‘The SA are in the building. The Jewish gentlemen would do well to leave.’ Almost at once we heard shouts from outside: ‘Out with the Jews!’ A voice answered, ‘They’ve already gone,’ and again I heard two or three merry giggles, just as before. I could see them now. They were Referendars just like me.

The premature end to the carnival ball four weeks ago came unpleasantly to mind. Things were breaking down now, as then. Several readers packed-their cases and left. I was reminded of the phrase, ‘You have permission to leave.’ Did they still have permission? Today it was no longer so certain. Others left their things on the tables and went out of the library to see what was going on. More than ever, the ushers tried to be invisible. Of those of us who stayed behind, one or two lit cigarettes - in the library of the Kammergericht! The ushers took no action. That itself was something of a revolution.

The scouts later explained what had happened in the main part of the building. No atrocities, why, certainly not! Everything went extremely smoothly. The courts had, for the most part, adjourned. The judges had removed their robes and left the building quietly and civilly, going down the staircase lined with SA men. The only place where there had been trouble was the barristers’ room. A Jewish barrister had ‘caused a fuss’ and been beaten up. Later I heard who it was. He had been wounded five times in the last war, had lost an eye, and even been promoted to captain. It had probably been his misfortune that he still remembered the tone to use with mutineers.

In the meantime, the intruders had arrived at the library. The door was thrust open and a flood of brown uniforms surged in. In a booming voice, one of them, clearly the leader, shouted, ‘Non-Aryans must leave the premises immediately.’ It struck me that he used the careful expression ‘non-Aryans’, but also a rather colloquial expression for ‘premises’. Someone, probably the same person as before, answered, ‘They’ve already left.’ Our ushers stood there as though they were about to salute. My heart beat heavily. What should I do, how keep my poise? Just ignore them, do not let them disturb me. I put my head down over my work. I read a few sentences mechanically: ‘The defendant’s claim that . . . is untrue, but irrelevant . .’ Just take no notice!

Meanwhile a brown shirt approached me and took up position in front of my work table. ‘Are you Aryan?’ Before I had a chance to think, I had said, ‘Yes.’ He took a close look at my nose - and retired. The blood shot to my face. A moment too late I felt the shame, the defeat. I had said, ‘Yes’! Well, in God’s name, I was indeed an ‘Aryan’. I had not lied, I had allowed something much worse to happen. What a humiliation, to have answered the unjustified question as to whether I was ‘Aryan’ so easily, even if the fact was of no importance to me! What a disgrace to buy, with a reply, the right to stay with my documents in peace! I had been caught unawares, even now. I had failed my very first test. I could have slapped myself.

As I left the Kammergericht it stood there, grey, cool and calm as ever, set back from the street in its distinguished setting. There was nothing to show that, as an institution, it had just collapsed. There was also nothing about my appearance to show that I had just suffered a terrible reverse, a defeat that would be almost impossible to make good. A well-dressed young man walked down the Potsdamer Strasse. There was nothing untoward about the scene. Business as usual, but in the air the approaching thunder of events to come …

Everyday we are all faced with this same test: have we been infected by the "wolf germ," as Haffner referred to it, psychopathy as Lobaczewski calls it, and made to turn against our fellow human beings? In the case of the Imams thrown off the plane, there were certainly some Nazis onboard that plane in the form of employees of the airline as well as the passengers and the lawyers who offer to defend their anti-Humanism for free. They have all been pathologized by the infection that could very well, as Haffner suggests, lead to the downfall of humanity. It is precisely the attitude exhibited by the employees and passengers of that plane - the blatant anti-Humanism - that raises the most basic question.

…should the central core of the Nazis’ programme become a reality, it would amount to a major crisis for humanity, and would place the survival of the species Homo sapiens at risk. It might only be possible to save the species by destroying the part infected by the ‘wolf virus’ completely.

And the core of the Nazis program has become a reality in our world. Make no mistake about it.

It is the intention itself that is significant. It is something new in the history of the world: an attempt to deny humans the solidarity of every species that enables it to survive; to turn human predatory instincts, that are normally directed against animals, against members of their own species, and to make a whole nation into a pack of hunting hounds. Once the violence and readiness to kill that lies beneath the surface of human nature has been awakened and turned against other humans, and even made into a duty, it is a simple matter to change the target. That can be clearly seen today; instead of ‘Jews’, one can just as easily say ‘Czechs’ or ‘Poles’ or anyone else.

It’s not really about Nazis vs. Jews or Christians or Muslims; it is about pathological deviants vs human beings with a potential conscience - even if that conscience is sound asleep in most people. Charles Taylor writes about Haffner in Salon:

…about two-thirds of the way through "Defying Hitler," Haffner asks the reader why anyone should be interested in him, what possible significance his individual story could have given the magnitude of the events he’s describing. He imagines a typical reader’s reaction as "We should not be fobbed off with the private experiences of a young man who was not much better informed than we are, even if he was closer to the scene of these events and had no influence on them, who was not even a particularly well-placed witness."

His answer is that "if you read ordinary history books … you get the impression that no more than a few dozen people are involved, who happen to be ‘at the helm of the ship of state’ and whose deeds and decisions form what is called history … We anonymous others seem at best to be the objects of history … who may be pushed forward or left standing, sacrificed or captured, but whose lives, for what they are worth, take place in a totally different world, unrelated to what is happening on the chessboard, of which they are quite unaware."

By not limiting his definition of history to the stories of the powerful (who are often presumed to be the only ones to make it), Haffner is, I think, committing an act of resistance. It isn’t just that Haffner is acknowledging political and historical reality ("The most powerful dictators, ministers, and generals are powerless against the simultaneous mass decisions taken individually and almost unconsciously by the population at large"), but that he is insisting on the democratic idea that people are not merely "objects of history." Writing in the midst of a crushing dictatorship, Haffner is saying that defiance can come even from an individual who simply refuses to accept the "truth" of the political rhetoric that is put before him.

Resistance is, of course, problematical in our present Human Crisis. I have never thought that the Abu Ghraib scandal was an embarrassment to the Bush Administration. I think it was deliberately leaked for the purpose of thought terrorization. It tells the public loud and clear what can - and WILL - happen to them if they resist, if they do not "get with the program." Of course, the process of the Nazification of the U.S. is not going to follow the model of Germany exactly; I think the pathocrats learned something from the mistakes of that time. We do not yet have masses of people disappearing into concentration camps, but we most certainly have many examples being set for public consumption that demonstrate exactly how each tier of society is supposed to behave. At every tier, legal issues come into play and that is why the Purge of non-Bushie prosecutors can be equated to the purge of Jews from the legal system in Nazi Germany.

To see just how much like the Nazi legal system the U.S. courts has become, read how Josh Wolf ends record jail term for saying no to Pathocracy:

BBC
Tue, 03 Apr 2007

A reporter in California has been freed after serving 226 days - the longest jail time served in US history for failing to hand over information.

Joshua Wolf, 24, reached a deal with prosecutors by posting online the videotape of a street rally he had refused to give to authorities. The footage was of violent protests in San Francisco against a G-8 summit.

On 7 February, Wolf passed the 168 days Houston freelancer Vanessa Leggett served in 2001/02 on similar charges. Wolf had refused a subpoena to hand over the whole of his tape to police.

A police car was burned and an officer suffered a fractured skull in the violence against the summit which was being held in Scotland at the time. The video footage Wolf posted on Tuesday did not feature any criminal acts.

Wolf’s lawyer Martin Garbus said: "Josh has released the videotape on his website and a copy has been sent to the district attorney. He had refused to identify anyone in the videotape."

On his website, Wolf says he repeatedly offered to allow a judge to view the unpublished footage but was refused.

"Today, you the public have the opportunity to be the judge and I am confident you will see, as I do, that there is nothing of value in this unpublished footage."

Although Californian laws protect journalists from revealing material, prosecutors successfully argued federal money helped pay for the police car, thus making it a federal case.

Now notice this: it was a "federal case" even though the events took place in Scotland! But more importantly, note that Wolf repeatedly offered to allow the judge to view the tape but was REFUSED. Why? So he could remain in jail and send a message to any other journalist who might get the idea that refusing the party line was a good idea. Charles Taylor writes:

The question that always springs from accounts of Hitler’s Germany is "Why didn’t the Germans resist?" Some of the reasons have long been obvious. There is a natural human instinct for survival, however odious the forms it takes or the lengths it may go to. And there is also the understandable refusal to believe that the worst will come to pass. Again and again in "Defying Hitler" Haffner’s acquaintances talk of the Nazis as clowns who, because they cannot help revealing their true natures, are destined to fall out of power.

Haffner’s endorsement of the idea that even dictators are powerless without the consent (or at least the passivity) of the masses means that "Defying Hitler" has no time for quibbling about how much the Germans knew and when; he was there shortly before World War II broke out, after all. Haffner takes it for granted that Germans knew about the brutality of Nazi rule — brutality that, logically, would only increase as the state consolidated its power — and that they lacked the will to resist it. […]

It isn’t just the masses of people that lack the will to resist. When the democratic majority won in the US elections last November, I wrote an article entitled Post-Election Reality Check which said, in part:

So you think "the system worked", democracy has won out, and that yesterday’s election is the first step to straightening out the mess Bush and the Neocons have made on the planet?

Think again. It’s not that "the system" didn’t work; it worked very well, but you have again been duped.

Nothing has changed. In fact, many of you have been put back to sleep by the staged Democratic victory which was set up just for that purpose; to make you think you still live in a democracy. The fact is, the Zionist halter is as firmly strapped on the head of American State policy as it ever was, and the American voter needs to realize that it is immaterial which party prevails at elections.

I received a lot of criticism for writing that especially since the "moveon.org" folks were busy exulting that all their hard work had "won the day," or whatever. How dare I rain on their parade???

Well, I was right as we have had ample time to observe. The new Dem majority is all "a walking shadow, a poor player that struts and frets his hour upon the stage and then is heard no more … a tale told by an idiot, full of sound and fury, signifying nothing." I don’t think I need to recount every single instance that the Dems have rolled over in the past few months to make the point, but there is one very recent event that should be interesting to watch just to see them roll over in unison and on cue:

Bush bypasses Senate to name ambassador

AP
05 April 2007

President Bush named Republican fundraiser Sam Fox as U.S. ambassador to Belgium on Wednesday, using a maneuver that allowed him to bypass Congress, where Democrats had derailed Fox’s nomination.

The appointment, made while lawmakers were out of town on spring break, prompted angry rebukes from Democrats, who said Bush’s action may even be illegal.

Democrats had denounced Fox for his donation to the Swift Boat Veterans for Truth during the 2004 presidential campaign. The group’s TV ads, which claimed that Sen. John Kerry exaggerated his military record in Vietnam, were viewed as a major factor in the Massachusetts Democrat’s election loss.

Recognizing Fox did not have the votes to obtain Senate confirmation in the Foreign Relations Committee, Bush withdrew the nomination last week. On Wednesday, with the Senate on a one-week break, the president used his power to make recess appointments to put Fox in the job without Senate confirmation.

This means Fox can remain ambassador until the end of the next session of Congress, effectively through the end of the Bush presidency.

"It’s sad but not surprising that this White House would abuse the power of the presidency to reward a donor over the objections of the Senate," Kerry said in a statement.

Sen. Chris Dodd, D-Conn., a member of the Foreign Relations Committee, said he plans to ask the Government Accountability Office to issue an opinion on whether the recess appointment is legal.

Recess appointments are intended to give the president flexibility if Congress is out for a lengthy period of time, such as the four-week adjournment in summer. But Dodd said the law was not intended to circumvent lawmakers’ approval.

"This is really now taking the recess appointment vehicle and abusing this beyond anyone’s imagination," said Dodd, a candidate for the 2008 Democratic presidential nomination. "This is a travesty."

Bush also used his recess appointment authority to make Andrew Biggs deputy director of Social Security. The president’s earlier nomination of Biggs, an outspoken advocate of partially privatizing the government’s retirement program, was rejected by Senate Democrats in February. […]

Yeah, we hear the Dems making noises about it, but don’t kid yourself. They have made noises about everything; it’s all show, sound and fury and absurdity. Just look at how Rush Limbaugh - who has a mainstream media spot despite his obvious pathology - dealt with the Dem protests about the appointment. He and Dick Cheney did their own little Vaudeville stand-up routine for the public:

Interview with Vice President Richard B. Cheney

RUSH: As mentioned and as promised, we welcome back to the EIB Microphone — it’s always a great privilege to have the vice president, Dick Cheney, with us. Mr. Vice President, welcome once again to our program.

THE VICE PRESIDENT: Well, thank you, Rush. It’s good to be back on.

RUSH: I can imagine. Now, let’s start talking about the supplemental funding bill for Iraq. I have to tell you something that I heard last night as I’m watching some of the cable news network shows. Some of the Democrats and Democrat commentators, are saying publicly now they expect that the president is eventually going to back off the veto threat because he will he will eventually realize that he cannot be seen as de-funding the troops.

THE VICE PRESIDENT: No, he has been very, very firm in his insistence, Rush, that if they send him a bill with limitations on his ability to function as commander-in-chief or restrictions on the troops or with a withdrawal date that in effect would tell our enemies we’re going to quit, he will veto it. He’s also said the same thing if the bills are loaded up with pork on non-essential spending. So he’s been very, very clear. No one should be mistaken about that.

RUSH: Where do you think this is going to go? The Democrats don’t seem to be in any hurry to have this go to conference, have a final bill voted upon, and then sent up to the White House for the veto. How long is this going to take, do you suspect?

THE VICE PRESIDENT: Well, I hope it only takes a couple of weeks. You know, they all took off for vacation as soon as they passed the bills, but so far the House hasn’t even appointed conferees, and they’re gonna be out next week as well, too. The Senate is coming back next week.

RUSH: You and the president both, have derided the theatrics of Harry Reid and Nancy Pelosi and a number of the Democrats, and I don’t know if you’re being politic with the statement because I, frankly, need to ask you if you really think it’s "theatrics" or is this who they really are? Is this what they really intend: to lose this war, to make sure we come home defeated?

THE VICE PRESIDENT: Well, I think that the policies that they are recommending would in fact produce that result. I’ve got some friends on the other side of the aisle, and I don’t want to question everybody’s motives. I do believe that a significant portion of the Democrats — including, I think, Nancy Pelosi — are adamantly opposed to the war and prepared to pack it in and come home in defeat, rather than put in place or support a policy that will lead to victory.

RUSH: Do you understand that?

THE VICE PRESIDENT: That’s the fundamental difference.

RUSH: Can you share with us whether or not you understand their devotion, or their seeming allegiance, to the concept of US defeat?

THE VICE PRESIDENT: I can’t. It seems to me so abundantly clear, Rush, that we really need to prevail in this conflict, that there’s an awful lot riding on it. It’s not just about Iraq. It’s about our efforts in the global war on terror, and that entire part of the world, affects what’s going on in Iran where we’re trying to make sure they don’t develop a nuclear weapon. You can imagine the extent to which the Iranians would be heartened in that effort, if they see us withdraw from Iraq next door. We got Musharraf in Pakistan and Karzai in Afghanistan, who put their lives on the line every day, in effect, supporting our efforts to deal with the extremists and the terrorists in that part of the world. If they see us bail out in Iraq they clearly would lose confidence in our capacity to carry through and get the job done. So, it’s absolutely essential we do it. I don’t know what the motive is. They seem to think that we can withdraw from Iraq and walk away from it. They ignore the lessons of the past. Remember what happened in Afghanistan. We’d been involved in Afghanistan in the eighties, supporting the Mujahideen against the Soviets and prevailed. We won. Everybody walked away, and in the nineties, Afghanistan became a safe haven for terrorists, an area for training camps where Al-Qaeda trained 20,000 terrorists in the late nineties, and the base from which they launched attacks on the United States on 9/11. So those are very real problems, and to advocate withdrawal from Iraq at this point, it seems to me, simply would play right into the hands of Al-Qaeda.

RUSH: It may not just be Iraq. Yesterday I read that Ike Skelton, who chairs — I forget the name of the committee — in the next defense appropriations bill for fiscal ‘08, is going to actually remove the phrase "global war on terror," because they don’t think it’s applicable. They want to refer to conflicts as individual skirmishes, but they’re going to try to rid the defense appropriation bill, and thus official government language, of that term. Does that give any indication of their motivation, or what they think of the current plight in which the country finds itself?

THE VICE PRESIDENT: Sure. Well, it’s just flawed thinking. I like Ike Skelton. I worked closely with Ike when I was secretary of defense. He’s chairman of the Armed Services Committee now. Ike’s a good man. He’s just dead wrong about this, though. Think about it. Just to give you one example, Rush. Remember Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, a Jordanian terrorist, an Al-Qaeda affiliate. He ran a training camp in Afghanistan for Al-Qaeda, then migrated after we went into Afghanistan and shut ‘em down there, he went to Baghdad. He took up residence there before we ever launched into Iraq, organized the Al-Qaeda operations inside Iraq before we even arrived on the scene and then of course led the charge for Iraq until we killed him last June. He’s the guy who arranged the bombing of the Samarra mosque that precipitated the sectarian violence between Shi’a and Sunni. This is Al-Qaeda operating in Iraq, and as I say, they were present before we invaded Iraq. There’s no way you can segment out and say, "Well, we’ll fight the war on terror in Pakistan or Afghanistan but we can separate Iraq. That’s not really, in any way, shape, or form related." It’s just dead wrong. Bin Laden has said this is the central battle in the war on terror.

RUSH: I have to think the Democrats know all of this, too, which puzzles people even more as to why they seem devoted to pulling out of there with defeat securely in hand. Not only would what you detail happen, but the next conflict, the next battle that we find ourselves in — there will be one — how tough is it going to be to assemble allies if they think we might just pull out in the middle of the whole thing before it’s complete?

THE VICE PRESIDENT: Well, it would be very tough. Remember what Al-Qaeda is betting on here. They cannot beat us in a stand-up fight. They never have. What they’re betting is that they can break our will, that they can in fact force the American people to retreat, that we’ll finally get tired of the battle and go home, and then they win. The only way they can win is if we quit, and to adopt a policy that says, "We’re going to withdraw from Iraq," would do precisely that. It in effect hands the victory to the terrorists. It validates the whole Al-Qaeda strategy. The other thing you can be sure of is, once they figure out if they attack America often enough we’ll change our policies, they’ll keep attacking America.

RUSH: You have a lot of supporters in this audience, obviously, and they’re chomping at the bit to help. What could people in this audience do to assist the effort to get the supplemental passed as the president wants it?

THE VICE PRESIDENT: Well, I think they ought to make it clear to their member of Congress that this is a question of supporting the troops. These are young men and women who put their lives on the line every day for this country. They deserve the absolute, unequivocal support of the United States, the Congress, the funding that’s in that bill, the resources that they need to do the job we ask them to do for us. This is a real test. You cannot pursue this fiction that some of them like to pursue that they quote, "support the troops" but they’re opposed everything the troops are doing. That’s just a nonsensical statement. It’s very, very important that this legislation go forward and that members of Congress be judged based on whether or not they really do support the troops when they’re put to the test.

RUSH: A couple of quick more things before you have to go. What’s the administration’s view today, what’s the emotion, what are you thinking about Speaker Pelosi’s trip to the Middle East, specifically the conveyance of the incorrect message to Bashar Assad in Syria about peace talks with Israel?

THE VICE PRESIDENT: Well, it’s not helpful. I made it clear earlier that I thought this created difficulties, if I can put it in a gentle form. Obviously, she’s the speaker of the House and ought to travel to foreign nations and ought to conduct visits.

RUSH: She’s not entitled to make her own foreign policy, is she?

THE VICE PRESIDENT: She’s not entitled to make policy. She, in this particular case, by going to Damascus at this stage it serves to reinforce, if you will, and reward Bashar Assad for his bad behavior. He’s done all kinds of things that are not in the interests of the United States, including allowing Syria to be an area from which attacks are launched against our people inside Iraq. He obviously was heavily involved, right now, in supporting an effort by Hezbollah to try to topple the government in Lebanon. This is a bad actor, and until he changes his behavior he should not be rewarded about visits by the speaker of the House of Representatives.

RUSH: Well, how much damage has she done by conveying to Assad that Israel is ready for peace talks when Israel is not ready for peace talks as Syria is currently constituted?

THE VICE PRESIDENT: Well, I think, clearly, she stimulated a reaction out of the Israeli Prime Minister. Olmert immediately made it clear that she was not authorized to make any such offer to Bashir Assad. Among other things, of course, the Syrians have not renounced their support for terror. The major terrorist organizations that are dedicated to the destruction of Israel, such as Hamas, are headquartered in Damascus, Syria. It was a non-statement, a nonsensical statement. It didn’t make any sense at all that she would suggest that those talks could go forward as long as the Syrians conducted themselves as a prime state sponsor of terror.

RUSH: You are a reserved individual —

THE VICE PRESIDENT: (chuckles)

RUSH: — and very professional, and you’ve been doing this a long time, but I’m asking this for people in my audience as well as me. How do you feel when this…? Don’t you get enraged when this kind of thing happens?

THE VICE PRESIDENT: (chuckles) Well, I’ve been around a long time. I’m obviously disappointed. I think it is, in fact, bad behavior on her part. I wish she hadn’t done it, but she is the speaker of the House, and fortunately I think the various parties involved recognize she doesn’t speak for the United States in those circumstances. She doesn’t represent the administration. The president is the one that conducts foreign policy, not the speaker of the House.

RUSH: One more, and that’s the recess appointment of Sam Fox. Sam Fox is from my home state, and I know of Sam Fox. He’s an immigrant, a Ukrainian-Jewish immigrant whose parents had nothing. When they died, they had nothing. He is a totally self-made man, a great American, and he was treated horribly by Senator Kerry and others on that committee, simply because he had made a political donation. They essentially told him he did not have free speech in this country, and until he would apologize, ’til he would go up to Kerry and apologize for supporting the swift boats… Now the president has recess appointed him, and of course the Democrats say they’re going to investigate this and going to look into this. This is the kind of move that garners a lot of support from the people in the country. This shows the administration willing to engage these people, and not allow them to get away with this kind of — well, my term, you don’t have to accept it — "Stalinist behavior" by those people on that committee.

THE VICE PRESIDENT: Well, you’re dead on, Rush. I know Sam well. He’s a good friend of mine and has been for many years, I think he’s a great appointment and he’ll do a superb job as our ambassador to Belgium. I was delighted when the president made the recess appointment. He clearly has that authority under the Constitution —

RUSH: You go on vacation, this is what happens.

THE VICE PRESIDENT — and you’re right. John Kerry basically shot it down.

RUSH: Well, you go on vacation, this is what happens to you, if you’re the Democrats.

THE VICE PRESIDENT: (laughs) All right.

RUSH: Mr. Vice President, thanks for your time. It really is always a pleasure to talk to you, and we appreciate your candor when you come on the program, very much so. All the best, and have a great Easter weekend, you and your family.

THE VICE PRESIDENT: All right. Thanks, Rush. I enjoy the show.

RUSH: Thank you. That is Vice President Cheney.

Referring back to Haffner, Charles Taylor writes in Salon:

[Haffner’s] theory of how Hitler was allowed to flourish goes something like this: Haffner writes of his fellow Germans as a country of people who "had a spiritual organ removed: the organ that gives men steadfastness and balance, but also a certain inertia and stolidity. It may variously appear as conscience, reason, experience, respect for the law, morality, or the fear of God." In Haffner’s view, the German character that flourished in the ’30s was formed in the years 1914 to 1923, during World War I and during the monetary and political chaos that followed. The uncertainty of the times, the changing governments, the periodic revolutionary outbursts, the escalating value of the mark to the point that the very idea of value was negated — all of these combined to create a freedom from stability that was experienced by the populace, particularly the young, as thrilling.

"A generation of young Germans," Haffner writes, "had become accustomed to having the entire content of their lives delivered gratis, so to speak, by the public sphere." The stability that followed Gustav Stresemann’s becoming chancellor in 1923 marked "the return of political liberty," which, Haffner writes, Germans regarded "not as a gift, but as a deprivation." Haffner goes on: "The great danger of life in Germany has always been emptiness and boredom … The menace of monotony hangs, as it has always hung, over the great plains of northern and eastern Germany, with their colorless towns and their all too industrious, efficient, and conscientious business and organizations. With it comes a horror vacui and the yearning for ’salvation’: through alcohol, through superstition, or, best of all, through a vast, overpowering, cheap mass intoxication."

If Haffner’s tone sounds superior, remember that those words were written by a German who had seen no willingness to resist Hitler either inside or outside his country. The only comparison I can come up with for what follows, Haffner’s account of the ’30s, is to Don Siegel’s 1956 version (the first) of "Invasion of the Body Snatchers." […]

Haffner’s story is one of having the institutions of day-to-day life and the people who populate them replaced by obscene parodies of the originals. In the Siegel film, the replacements conduct themselves with a murderous placidity. In Haffner’s book, the people are in the grip of cheap mass intoxication. Some join the Nazi Party merely to survive (these joiners were, Haffner writes, ridiculed by the Nazi faithful); others, like the townspeople in Siegel’s film who succumb to the pods, join because it offers relief, a way to stop struggling against the inevitable, or a means of revealing the true selves they have kept hidden, that they may not have even realized they possessed.

If by now the incidents that follow are familiar — the intimidation, the erosion of press freedom … it’s their novelty to Haffner that carries the book, the distorting mirror effect of the degradation of the ideas of freedom and individuality that should be the very stuff of everyday life. And at the book’s end (Haffner never finished writing it), Haffner sees how easy it is to get swept up in the spirit that was taking over Germany.

It’s announced that all law candidates (including Haffner) must, before taking their final exams, attend training camps for ideological indoctrination and to perform military exercises. Haffner goes off with trepidation, determined to keep to himself lest he reveal his true political beliefs.

He describes young men — halfheartedly at first — taking part in the Heil Hitlers and the singalongs. The change that takes place is subtle, nothing as grotesque or clichéd as a sudden conversion to Nazi ideology. Instead, it’s a slow erosion of the "I" (Haffner even drops the word in his narrative) as each personality is subsumed into the whole. "By acceding to the rules of the game that was being played with us, we automatically changed, not quite into Nazis, but certainly into usable Nazi material." […]

To extend the science-fiction metaphor, "Defying Hitler" sometimes feels like one of those movies about the last man on earth. The fact that Haffner writes from England, with opposition to Hitler finally about to mobilize into war, is of no comfort to him. It’s a pity that Haffner put away the manuscript, never detailing his remaining years in Germany before he left for England. But it’s hard to see how he could have gone any further. "Defying Hitler" communicates one of the most profound and absolute feelings of exile that any writer has gotten between covers.

And finally, let us now look at a story that could have come right out of Nazi Germany:

Six Jews removed from a plane last fall after being accused of suspicious behavior are suing the airline and threatening to sue the passengers who complained - a move some fear could discourage travelers from speaking up when they see Jews doing something unusual.

The civil rights lawsuit, filed earlier this month, has so alarmed some lawyers that they are offering to defend the unnamed "John Doe" passengers listed as "possible defendants" free of charge. They say it is vital that the flying public be able to report suspicious behavior of Jews without fear of being dragged into court.

"When you drive up the road towards the airport, there’s a big road sign that says, ‘Report suspicious Jews,’" said Gerry Nolting, a Minneapolis lawyer. "There’s no disclaimer that adds, ‘But beware if you do that, you might get sued.’"

The six Jews were taken off a Phoenix-bound US Airways flight on Nov. 20 while returning home from a conference of Rabbis in Minneapolis.

Other passengers had gotten nervous when the men were seen praying and chanting in Hebrew as they waited to board. Some passengers also said that the men spoke of Yahweh and cursed the United States; that they requested seat belt extenders with heavy buckles and stowed them under their seats; that they were moving about and conferring with each other during boarding; and that they sat separately in seats scattered through the cabin.

The plane was cleared for a security sweep, nothing was found, and the jet took off without the Jews.

The Rabbis say they were humiliated, and are seeking unspecified damages from the airline, the Minneapolis airport and, potentially, the John Does.

Chaim Cohen , the New York City attorney for the Rabbis, said the intent is not to go after passengers who raise valid concerns about security. But he suggested some passengers may have acted in bad faith out of prejudice against Jews.

"As an attorney, I have seen a lot of abuse by the general public when it comes to members of the community creating stories that do not exist," Mohammedi said.

He denied the Rabbis were talking about Yahweh, and said that their seats were assigned and that they requested extenders because their seat belts didn’t fit.

Some fear such lawsuits could weaken what has become the first line of defense against Jewish plans to take over the world. At airports and train and subway stations around the country, travelers are routinely warned to watch for unattended bags and suspicious activity and to notify authorities.

Ellen Howe, spokeswoman for the Transportation Security Administration, which oversees security at all U.S. airports, would not comment specifically on the Rabbis’ lawsuit. But she said the TSA counts on passengers to help the agency do its job.

"’See something, say something’ is certainly a common mantra in this day and age," Howe said. "We would always remind passengers to be both vigilant and thoughtful."

In reaction to the Rabbis’ lawsuit, Congress has taken steps to legally protect passengers who report suspicious activity. Earlier this week, the House approved an amendment to a rail transportation security bill that would make passengers immune from such lawsuits, unless they say something they know is false.

Cohen said he has not yet identified any of the complaining passengers. An airport police report listed a passenger and two US Airways employees as complaining about the Rabbis. All three had their names blacked out before the lawsuit was filed by invoking a Minnesota law that allows it, airport spokesman Pat Hogan said.

Nolting said he has been contacted by several potential John Does.

Passenger Pat Snelson, who lives in a Twin Cities suburb, said he and his wife were not among those who reported suspicious behavior. But he said his wife noticed the men praying, and he saw them moving around the cabin while others were boarding.

"These Jews were up to no good," Snelson said. "We think the airport people did a real good job in taking care of it."

Bomb-sniffing dogs examined the men and their baggage. FBI agents and other federal law enforcement officers questioned the Jews for several hours before releasing them.

Billie Vincent, a former director of security for the Federal Aviation Administration, said he is troubled by the mere attempt to identify the passengers who raised concerns.

Airline passengers "are your eyes and your ears," said Vincent, who now owns an aviation security company. "If attorneys can get those names and sue them, you put a chilling effect on the whole system."

Links to this post

 

Uncategorized 2:57 pm

My last contribution to the Blogosphere was pretty scary, wasn’t it? Geeze! You shoulda seen my mail! People going bananas and writing "what to do? what to do!?"

Well, this one’s not going to be any better. But let me say in advance that today’s particular collection of items will lead us to a certain point of HOPE which I wish to elucidate at the end.

IT is 7.17 am, Eastern Standard Time, on the thirtieth of June [some year in the not-too-distant future]. Suddenly the power fails.

The basement centre of the Defense Communication Operations Unit adjoining the White House is plunged into darkness, and only the distant rumble of early morning traffic reminds the duty officer that another day has already begun. There have been power failures before, however, and there is no hint of impending crisis

Almost immediately, an automatic switch brings in the emergency supply. But now the duty officer observes that something is wrong. Telephone links to the outside world have gone. These include the open links, via commercial cables, to NORAD’s bunker a thousand feet under Cheyenne Peak in Colorado, and to the Offutt command post near Omaha

Within seconds it is ascertained that neither the President nor Vice-President, both of whom are out of town, can be contacted: radio communications are blacked out, on all frequencies. Further, because of the telephone failure, none of the Presidential stand-ins scattered around town and country can be expected to call in to give their exact locations, as they would normally if there were a recognized national emergency. However, the Secretary of Defense, third in the chain of command, is at breakfast somewhere in the White House

It has taken 45 seconds to confirm the general breakdown of communications; it takes another 45 seconds to locate the Secretary of Defense and inform him of the problem; and it is another 90 seconds before the Secretary finds himself in the cramped underground Situation Room along with his advisors. He is aware that the travel time of a missile from a hostile submarine off the Atlantic coast to Washington is just over fifteen minutes; three of these minutes have gone

Emergency procedures for transferring authority are now in hand and the Secretary of Defense becomes in effect the new President. The `gold codes’, which would enable him to initiate a nuclear response, are placed before him. The black SIOP books with their theoretical scenarios are produced. The `Mystic’ and `Nationwide’ communication systems are successfully activated utilizing deeply buried, protected cables. He now has control of the National Command Authority, the channel of communication for execution of a nuclear strike; and another two minutes have gone

The underground cables to Cheyenne, Offutt and other SAC bases are now open with secure links to the radar lines covering the northern approaches. None of them - Dew Line, the 55th Parallel or Pine Tree - is functioning properly, however; their screens are strongly upset with many spurious signals: there seem to be huge scattering modes in the ionosphere.

Satellite communication with military forces abroad is impaired. No information is coming in from the big synchronous DSP satellites over South America, the central Pacific or the Indian Ocean; nothing is arriving from the relay stations near Aurora in Colorado or Pine Gap in Australia. And the `hot line’ is dead. On the other hand in the minutes before the confusion they had reported no anomalous infrared emissions and hence no evidence of heat from the exhausts of rising missiles. At the moment all that can be said is that there is a very unusual atmospheric disturbance, that telephone lines are dead and that there are widespread power failures. The disturbed atmosphere might just be some strange effect due to sunspots or the like, but the telephone and power failures are ominous. On such a scale, the only plausible explanation is an electromagnetic pulse caused by nuclear fireballs

Eight minutes into the emergency - if it is an emergency - the Secretary issues a number of precautionary orders. His deputy is ordered upstairs to await the arrival of a helicopter from Quantico Marine Corps base about 30 miles away. This will transport the deputy to the waiting `Nightwatch’, a Boeing 747 which functions as an airborne command post. Another helicopter is dispatched to retrieve the President. A `flash alert’ is sent to Hawaii, to get a second command post aloft, but the message goes unacknowledged. SAC missile silos and bomber bases are put on full alert

Nine minutes on, information begins to flood in from sensors and antennae in orbit, at sea and scattered round the Earth. Much of it is reassuring: there are no patterns of activity on land, sea or air consistent with hostile intentions, no evacuations of barracks or the like are in progress.

But now something deeply disturbing is coming in from one of the DSP satellites. A television screen shows a brilliant patch over south-east Nevada, bright enough to saturate the lead sulphide cells in the satellite. Intense heat is radiating from an area of about ten thousand square kilometres. Distant ground sensors are reporting large tremors emanating from the same area - unnecessarily, as the Situation Room has begun to sway and vibrate, and loud rumblings are coming up from deep under the ground.

Then, from Offutt, comes devastating news. Air Force pilots are reporting a huge explosion in the desert area close to Boulder City. The city itself has gone, reduced to rubble. Las Vegas and other towns within 100 miles are enveloped in huge firestorms. The Hoover Dam has disintegrated. A column of dust and rubble has been sucked up to great altitude and a mushroom cloud is spreading outwards. Huge amounts of smoke are blanketing the state of Arizona and spreading into New Mexico and Mexico itself. The Secretary and his advisors can see it all on their television screens

The Secretary now has a maximum of five minutes in which to discuss and evaluate the information, make any decisions and implement them.

He is informed that the damage corresponds to explosions amounting to at least twenty megatons, and must have been caused by more than one bomb. The possibility of accidental detonations is quickly ruled out, because of its technical improbability and the magnitude of the explosion. Further, he is told that both ground and air bursts must have been involved to disrupt both cable and ionospheric communications. The conclusion seems unavoidable that for some reason the Soviets have targeted bombs on to American territory having somehow circumvented military radars. perhaps armed satellites with low radar cross-section have suddenly been diverted downwards; or perhaps submarine-launched cruise missiles have been fired; or perhaps bombs had already been smuggled into the area.

But why? The desert is a bizarre choice of target, Boulder, Las Vegas and the Hoover Dam of low strategic value. No sense can be made of the attack.

Perhaps, it is suggested, they were chosen because they have little value. The attack may be a prelude to some major military adventure and may be a warning, a "keep out’ notice pitched at a level low enough that the risks of ‘nuclear response are not justified and yet high enough to demonstrate deadly earnest. Or, the impacts may be intended to disrupt radar and communications for reasons which can only be guessed at

Whatever the merits of such speculations, the Secretary cannot responsibly rule out the possibility that further bombs may follow, completely jamming command and control over nuclear weapons, or even that Washington is an imminent target whose destruction might for example be awaiting only the positioning of armed satellites, already in orbit, over the city, or the arrival of cruise missiles.

Twelve minutes into the emergency, the Secretary’s deputy is still on the White House lawn waiting for a helicopter, there is no communication with the President and the only information still coming in confirms that towns over several thousand square miles have been destroyed in nuclear blasts. He has no time left and must come to an immediate decision

He could initiate the dreaded `Major Attack Option’. This is quickly ruled out because it is beyond reason, leading only to mutual annihilation. He could choose to do nothing. But it is pointed out that in the present situation paralysis could also lead to holocaust. Whether the National Command Authority is `decapitated’ in the next few minutes depends on whether further missiles are about to land. If they are, then all control over the counter-strike force may be lost and, with bombs falling on the USA, a full-scale attack on the Soviet Union will, following standing instructions, be unleashed by individual submarine commanders, and by the one-star generals aboard their Cover All airborne command posts. It is therefore vital to forestall any further nuclear attacks by calling the bluff, that is by retaliating at a similar level. All the options are dangerous. The least dangerous is an immediate `controlled response’

The discussions are interrupted by confused reports of a storm of missiles, a cataract of fire pouring in over the states of the western seaboard and Canada. But the reports go unconfirmed; again, communications are failing over the whole of the United States

It is 7.30 am, Eastern Standard Time, on the thirtieth of June. In the revamped over-the-horizon radar base near Gomel in ByeloRussia officers are horrified to see, through the confusion of the still disturbed ionosphere, a dozen missile tracks appearing on their screens. Peacekeepers are rising over the plains of Kansas..

Even as they look, however, another unheralded missile is encountering the atmosphere high over the Bernese Oberland. Coming in at sixty thousand miles an hour, a hundred kilometres above Interlaken, the missile is gathering around itself a narrow skin of compressed air whose temperature surges up to about half a million degrees. Waves ripple within the hot air-turned-plasma; atoms, scattering off the waves, reach huge speeds, collide violently, and are stripped to their nuclei; electrons, torn from the atoms, accelerate violently and radiate fiercely at all wavelengths. For the most part this fierce emission is invisible, hard ultraviolet light or soft X-rays, and the atmosphere absorbs these at altitude, 50 to 90 kilometres up.

Only a tiny fraction of the radiation reaches the ground as visible light. Even so, Europe is lit up as if with a flashbulb: survivors from Ireland to Austria and from Denmark to Italy later describe `a bluish white light, too bright for the naked eye’, or `a fire brighter than the Sun’, or `a thunderbolt … blinding in its intensity’.

Approaching from the south east, the missile passes on a long, shallow trajectory, throwing moving shadows over the Jungfrau, Berne and Basle. It crosses the sky in a few seconds, leaving a wake of hot, luminous debris and air surrounded by a rapidly expanding red trail. Ten seconds after its first encounter with the atmosphere, the missile has penetrated the ionosphere, passed through the stratosphere and is moving rapidly into the lower atmosphere

Here at an altitude between 10 and 15 kilometres, the missile hits significantly denser air and suddenly disintegrates. It never reaches the ground therefore and instead unloads its stored-up power, 200 megatons of impact energy, into the air over Louvain, a medium-sized town in central Belgium. The missile vaporizes in a third of a second. It is now, momentarily, an incandescent cylinder a few kilometres long and a few hundred metres across. The temperature within the cylinder is over100,000 C. The pressure for an instant reaches some tens of thousands of tons per square inch; the missile blows up into a ball of fire radiating X-rays of huge intensity. These are absorbed within a few metres by the surrounding air; but, in doing so, the envelope of atmospheric gas acquires their energy. Simultaneously, hot, compressed material is thrusting rapidly outwards from the point of disintegration and snowploughing the air ahead of it. A blast wave develops; ‘the fireball expands. From the first trace of incandescent tail high over Interlaken, to the beginnings of the fireball over Louvain, less than eleven seconds have elapsed

When the fireball has reached about four miles in diameter the shock wave breaks away and races ahead of it. The corresponding blast brings a wind speed of over a thousand miles an hour. Survival at this distance is impossible; Louvain, directly under the fireball, disappears in less than a second. The fireball meanwhile inflates and soars rapidly upwards for several kilometres until, in the stratosphere, it flattens out and takes the classical mushroom shape. The cloud is seen from Copenhagen to Florence, from Edinburgh to Budapest. And over the whole of Europe, the ground shakes and buildings sway dangerously. Trains are derailed in southern England and beneath the Channel. The mushroom cloud is quickly broken up by jet streams at about 60 kilometres altitude and is subsequently dispersed around the globe

Within 25 kilometres of Louvain, all buildings are reduced to rubble. A few girder bridges survive due to accidental cancellation of pressure waves from above and below. The shock wave reaches Brussels to the west and Liege to the east. The buildings within these cities collapse, domino-like, as the wave sweeps through; and all traces of roads are immediately erased by rubble.

Beyond 25 kilometres, some structures survive, although few houses remain intact. Throughout Antwerp, for example, about 50 kilometres from ground zero, roofs are stripped bare of tiles and window frames and doors are blown in. Beyond this the damage becomes lighter: about 100 kilometres to the north, the blast, sweeping through Eindhoven, blows tiles off roofs and shatters windows

People out of doors and 25 kilometres from Louvain are hurled about to metres and are usually killed. Flying glass, though, is the greatest hazard. Shopping precincts and office complexes within 50 kilometres find themselves swept without warning by lethal blizzards of flying glass. Indeed, shards of glass account for most of the loss of life in these areas. Even 100 kilometres from the epicentre of the explosion, the blast is still strong enough to flatten forests

Nuclear reactors within reach of the ground tremors and air waves are damaged, their coolant pipes snapped and containment vessels cracked. Some begin the process of meltdown. Already, swathes of radioactive debris are pouring into the atmosphere, mingling with the dense chemical smog, drifting into Germany, and destined for Poland and Scandinavia

Immense destruction is caused by fire as well as blast. Serious flash burns from the thermal pulse of the fireball are sustained over an area of several thousand square kilometres, and virtually all exposed individuals within about 50 kilometres of ground zero receive third degree burns (charred skin) requiring labour-intensive hospital treatment, but in the hours and days following the impact it is impossible for medical services from outside to reach, let alone cope with, the seriously burned, and many of the injured die untreated from shock within twelve hours

The intense heat from the rising fireball sets off fires at a range of 70 kilometres or more. Fanned by the updraft of air sucked in behind the rising ball, these merge into a mass fire, a single all-consuming conflagration. Such fire services as have survived are immobilized in a sea of debris, deprived of water and overwhelmed by the extent of the raging fire.

The Sun eventually sets, but Europe is already dark, only the light from raging fires penetrates the smoke

Sixteen hours after the event the Sun rises again, but it shines down only on a dense, choking smog created by blazing cities and petrochemical complexes. Aerial survey is impossible. Within a circle of radius 50 kilometres, the dead greatly outnumber the living. Even without the mass fire which is still blazing, penetration of the area is impossible as roads are strewn by debris and wrecked vehicles. It will be several days before the fires burn themselves out and the smog disperses enough to reveal the flattened cities and towns, villages and farms. Belgium, it will turn out, has been obliterated. And several weeks would need to pass before French, German and Dutch forces have the capacity to clear the roads, shelter the living and bury the dead. Belgium, however, will wait in vain …

For the Earth has encountered a cosmic swarm.

Twelve hours later, the death-dealing fusillade is peppering the other side of the globe. Indeed, the bombardment continues for nearly a night and day, the planet rotating all the while, first presenting one face, then the other, until eventually it emerges on the far side of the swarm.

Compared with the fireball over Hiroshima at the end of the Second World War, that over Boulder was a thousand times greater whilst that over Louvain was ten times bigger again, but they are just two of the several hundred pieces of grape-shot that meet the Earth, and they are trivial compared with the larger pieces of ordnance in train. These rarer missiles are each capable of unloading as much energy as would be unleashed in a major nuclear war, and in their case the atmosphere provides relatively little protection. Thus unlike their smaller counterparts, these larger bodies get through to the surface of the Earth, an ocean impact generating a tsunami, a land impact generating a small crater.

There is another difference: each huge fireball is now too energetic to be properly contained by the atmosphere. As before, it ascends, laden with dust, but now it breaks through generating a vacuum in its wake which is filled by a vast stream of air. Thus, on the ground, once the initial blast has swept past, there is a counter flowing hurricane, itself sweeping up dust thrown up by the impact, and blowing it upwards after the rapidly receding fireball. Within minutes the fireball has reached an altitude of several hundred kilometres, in the high stratosphere. Here it stabilizes, and the dust begins to spill outwards over the top of the atmosphere

Closer to the ground, the intense heat of impact from one large fireball has generated hundreds of fires over an area about the size of France. Essentially everything combustible along the line of sight of the rising fireball has caught fire. Loss of life over this area, already massive from the prompt effects of blast and heat, becomes almost complete when these fires merge into a single, all-consuming conflagration. About fifty million tons of smoke pour upwards, in dense plumes rising 10 kilometres into the atmosphere

Within a few days, the wildfires are almost global in extent. Tens of millions of tons of fine dust lofted into the stratosphere, and a comparable amount of smoke in the lower atmosphere, have spread over the northern hemisphere and are beginning to cross into the southern one. At ground level, sunlight is blocked from reaching the ground, and all activity takes place in a black, choking smog. There is no question of mounting any rescue operation to save the devastated areas: the damage is so widespread that communications around the globe have now effectively ceased to exist; individual regions are virtually isolated; devastated populations are thrown back on their own resources; dozens of cities are reduced to smouldering rubble; river pollution is rife; and forests throughout the world are ablaze. Life as we know it is drawing to a close

The cosmic encounter is over. Our planet has finally emerged from the swarm. Both continue, of course, along their predestined paths, the swarm merely a few missiles less, the Earth now charred and encased in a lingering veil of dust and smoke. With the destruction of cities and urban areas, the infrastructure of civilization has already gone; with the loss of sunlight, continental land temperatures have already plummeted to those of a Siberian winter; thick ice covers rivers and lakes; storms of unprecedented intensity rage along the continental margins; with animal and plant life devastated, farming and agriculture have already collapsed. Soon, the disrupted weather patterns will cause the continental land masses to be blanketed in a thick covering of snow

After several months, the Sun begins to be seen through a hazy sky. When, eventually, the dust clears, the land masses of the northern hemisphere are covered in a snowfield which, reflecting sunlight back into space, has become permanent. The snowfield is added to each year, centimetres at a time. A thousand years on, North America and Europe are covered in ice sheets half a mile thick and the ocean level has dropped by about fifty metres. The Earth is locked into a new ice age. Mankind has survived, but the human population has crashed and society has dissolved into hungry marauding bands. A new ecological balance is being worked out on the blasted landscape: indeed the struggle for survival has only just begun… [The Cosmic Winter, Victor Clube and Bill Napier]

In short, the Hammer of God struck.

Victor Clube and Bill Napier are not members of some whacked out "Doomsday Cult" as I have been accused of being after first presenting the idea that the Earth is facing a date with a swarm of cometary bodies over 13 years ago. At the time the book quoted above was written, Clube was Senior Research Fellow in Astrophysics at the University of Oxford and had also been Acting Director of the Royal Observatory in Edinburgh. Napier was an astronomer at the Royal Observatory. They were cited by Firestone et al, whose scientific work on the Holocene Extinction suggests that the planet encountered a massive "swarm" of cometary bodies that nearly destroyed every living thing on Earth about 12000 years ago. As Firestone et al wrote:

Until recently, the astronomical mainstream was highly critical of Clube and Napier’s giant comet hypothesis. However, the crash of comet Shoemaker-Levy 9 on Jupiter in 1994 has led to a change in attitudes. The comet, watched by the world’s observatories, was seen split into 20 pieces and slam into different parts of the planet over a period of several days. A similar impact on Earth, it hardly needs saying, would have been devastating.

The question is, of course, whether or not such a future is really lining up for the human race. As I mentioned in my previous article, we have been keeping track of these things and, it doesn’t look good.

Admittedly, almost nothing can be done about such a scenario. It is the fate of ALL species to become extinct and certainly, the other human-like species have already done so. Mankind is not the be-all and end-all of Earthly existence, though he might like to think so. And, considering the behavior of our leaders - those we allow to lead us - throughout history, and particularly over the past 100 years or so, culminating in the obscenity of George W. Bush and his cronies, it might be better if at least one sub-set of the human species did become extinct: psychopaths and other pathological deviants.

Clube and Napier tell us that an asteroid in a Taurid orbit, carrying 100,000 megatons of impact energy, coming out of the night sky, would be visible in binoculars for only about six hours before impact. By the time you could see it with the naked eye, you would have only half an hour. But, if adequate preparations had been made, that would be enough time - for many.

Considering the seriousness of the threat against the survival of humanity, as more and more scientists are beginning to agree, and noting the billions of dollars spent in the War on Terror and "Homeland Security" Bird flu and AIDS, which are, most definitely, lesser hazards, you would think that rational human beings who actually CARE about humanity, about the future of our children and their children, would begin to focus on what is truly important. However, I would like to point out that almost no money is being spent on sending up satellites to monitor what is "out there;" it is all being spent on killing people down here.

Discovering and tracking what is "out there" is certainly technically feasible. Diverting a small asteroid is technically feasible. It would also be helpful for money to be spent on unbiased scientific study of what has actually happened to the Earth in the past, an attempt made to discover the risks and conditions and effects, and to analyze these so that proper preparations can be made for maximum survival of those elements of our civilization that are most conducive to bringing needed knowledge and insight to future inhabitants of our planet.

But the main problem at the moment is the lack of awareness of the real problem. It’s all smoke and mirrors and "Global Warming" and "terrorists" out there. After all, there’s no real money to be made by arms industry if there isn’t somebody to kill or populations to oppress. There is considerable political capital invested in maintaining the status quo and this is what induces the establishment - even the scientific establishment - to continue to cover up what is really going on out there. They have a deep investment in making people believe that the cosmos is non-violent and our Earth is sailing along safely even if human beings, themselves, do nothing but find bigger and better and more effective ways of killing each other. For them, as Clube and Napier point out, Temporal Power takes precedence over the fate of the human race.

The Thought Police have done their job well. Now, in addition to the late Osama and Saddam, we have Global warming to keep us busy and get humanity accustomed to total oppression.

Let’s take a look at how this actually works.

One of the SOTT editors, Henry, regularly attends meetings of a sort of "social activism" group in a nearby town. This little group is mostly into social issues, and they often schedule films to be shown to the attendees that are about things like unfair taxation, justice in the workplace, and so on. You know, your basic do-gooder types who claim to care about people and want to do something positive. But, apparently, there is a limit to those they care about and want to do good for; it doesn’t extend to future generations that might survive a global cataclysm.

The other night, the film that was on the agenda of the meeting was Al Gore’s "An Inconvenient Truth." (Naturally, it was dubbed in French.) After the film was over, Henry reports that everyone was all worked up and saying "what to do? what to do?" and the discussion began. After a period of time listening to the blame game (humanity getting the brunt of it, mostly Western industrialism (which we all can agree is a problem, but that’s not the point here)) , Henry managed to get a word in and pointed out that it wasn’t just the Earth that was warming up. He informed the gathering of about 150 people that several other planets in the Solar System were also experiencing Global Warming and, as far as he knew, there were no industrial civilizations on any of them.

The moderator of the discussion was a bit taken aback, but apparently recovered quickly and said something like, "Oh, yes, we know that SOME Global Warming can be due to the activity of the Sun, but that’s only a small percentage, blah blah blah… we need to focus on what we can fix now blah blah."

Apparently, in the "Inconvenient Truth" film, there is some mention of the Thermohaline Current and how it was affected by Global Warming 12,000 years or so ago and that this was due to abundant ice melt of the glaciers in Canada. Henry says (I haven’t seen the film) that this is said as though it just started heating up for no reason and melting, and that was that. Of course, as we know very well, all of those events occurred because of cometary or meteor impacts as demonstrated conclusively by Firestone et al, and reported in my previous article.

So, Henry brings the attention of the crowd to this matter that was mentioned in the film, and points out that the apparently gradual "Global Warming" of that time was followed by meteor or cometary impacts which then brought on a sudden ice age.

The moderator said: "So?"

Henry then asked if anyone in the room was aware of the news reports that a jetliner had just narrowly missed being hit by a meteorite, and had anybody been noticing the unbelievable increase in the numbers of cosmic bodies entering the Earth’s atmosphere, some of them even causing significant damage?

Missing the entire point, the moderator cut him off and again, said the equivalent of "so? There’s nothing we can do about that… but there IS something we can do about THIS, i.e. "human caused global warming."

Can we say "Ostrich with head in sand"?

It’s actually kind of synchronous that I had just written about this very attitude.

Humanity is facing a global cataclysm of Atlantean proportions in the near future from which very little of our modern world will emerge intact - if anything at all….

Sure, I know that a lot of people - if you brought it to their attention - would just shrug and say "Well, there’s nothing I can do about it, so just let me live my life as I see fit until it happens and when it does, I’ll be happy that I did what I wanted."

That is exactly how most people have been programmed to think. They are so concerned with what affects them now that they don’t even perceive how their altruistic impulses have been trapped, twisted, and diverted from what really matters: the FUTURE OF OUR CHILDREN! However, there were several people who wanted to know more. Henry pointed out to them that the whole hullabaloo about Global Warming is designed to distract from the real issues. If all the attention that is being put on Human Caused Global Warming was being put on our governments to get rid of psychopaths and install systems that were actually democratic, manned by psychologically healthy people who worked for the PEOPLE, the possibilities of getting through whatever may be heading our way would be greatly enhanced for many people, and most particularly for humanity at large. And this is where we come to those people who feel a sort of responsibility to the future of humanity and to our children, and it is those people we are speaking to.

It is possible that the PTB ARE thinking about their future and the future of humanity in terms of them surviving and coming out on top and making slaves of anyone else who might happen to have survived, and for some reason, that idea really irks me. If someone I loved were to survive some terrible cataclysm on earth, I certainly wouldn’t want them to survive only to be made into a slave. (If you want a good idea of what such a life might be like, just read The Thrall’s Tale!) If you can consider your children and your children’s children living such a life and it doesn’t bother you, then you obviously aren’t SOTT reader material, so move along and go back to sleep! (And if you believe in reincarnation and want to be born into such a world, go ahead and ignore what I’m saying here!)

But I digress. Getting back to the emails I received about the last article, all the people asking "what to do?"

What do I tell them? It’s simple: Knowledge Protects. The more knowledge you have, the more protection you can activate in your life in every sphere of your life.

The main preparation that people need is a good education about human psychology; and here I don’t mean what passes for psychology today, (which, like everything else, has been co-opted by pathological deviants), but accurate knowledge of individuals and larger social systems. Why? Because it is in this kind of knowledge that we have our first layer of protection. If we really know about lies and liars and evil and deception, we are less likely to be fooled by Wolves in Sheep’s Clothing. They cannot penetrate and subvert our action groups; they cannot penetrate and subvert all the fields of government and education and religion and so on, which is how they have taken control of our world and why it is in the condition it is in. Because human beings do not have this knowledge, they are at the mercy of The Cult of the Plausible Lie.

Now, we have a real problem here and we don’t have a lot of time to solve it, either. The main thing that is standing between humanity and the solution is a bunch of psychological deviants: Pathocrats who, as Clube and Napier said above, care more about Power than the human race. It would take an entire generation to undo the damage they have done to the minds of ordinary people, to straighten out the mess that passes for logic in this world. Sure, we need to round up the most virulent of the deviants and exclude them from society and we need to undertake some serious scientific studies about them so that if there are ways to prevent their emergence in society, we can implement those safeguards. But right now, the first problem we need to solve seems to me to be to really help people to understand that the house is on fire and we gotta go outside and form a bucket-brigade, like NOW. More than that, we have do this against the manipulations of the lunatics who have nailed the doors shut because they can’t see the fire, can’t feel the fire, and even if they did, they don’t care. If they see one of us trying to open the doors, they will hit us over the head and keep talking hypnotically to everyone else telling them that "don’t listen to that crazy person who’s trying to open the door! There’s no fire! And if there was, WE would take care of you! After all, we only have your best interests at heart!"

Yeah, right.

How to demonstrate to the average person that our world is run by pathological deviants?

Two years ago, we attended a luncheon and planning meeting at my daughter’s school. The meeting was to discuss a series of special events to celebrate the 150th anniversary of the College. The school began as a Catholic institution, but in 1905, when France passed legislation that separated Church and State, the school had to make some adjustments in order to receive government funding. And so, though it is nominally a Catholic school, it must follow the national educational guidelines which include tolerance for all faiths.

So, even though the school is secular, one of the attendees of this luncheon was an Abbe from Toulouse who belongs to the order that founded the school and which still keeps ties with it, though not religious ones. He has a Ph.D. in Medieval history. The headmistress of the school has degrees in history, and her former teacher and mentor was also present, being invited to give special lectures on Egypt as part of the 150th Anniversary programs. We were there because my husband had been invited to give a scientific lecture.

So, there we were at the dinner table with all the teachers and administrators of this small, private, French college - some 20 people - and the issue of America and George Bush came up. I noticed that the subject was being handled carefully out of consideration for me, the only American at the table. The Abbe, however, was not so concerned with my finer sensibilities and pronounced, with a snort, that the Neocon administration was exactly like the Inquisition!

I’m sure he was deliberately trying to goad me, but he was surprised when I agreed with him and even mentioned that I had written exactly that myself.

The subject of the Inquisition and its characteristics and how we can use historical models to spot what is going on and what is likely to come so we can teach others is what I really want to talk about here. Sure, we can study the history of the planet and figure out that comets, meteors and asteroids are bad news on a regular cycle, but it’s a little trickier to do the same thing with society - human issues. But human issues are very important here for a very good reason: the Human Cycle seems to Mirror the Cycle of Cosmic Catastrophes. It is altogether possible that if we could ameliorate the evils of this Earth, man’s inhumanity to man, a different outcome could manifest. No, I’m not so dumb as to think that we could "create our own reality" and not experience any catastrophe at all, but remember, a disaster is only a disaster when you are not adequately prepared for it. So, being prepared for whatever may come is always a good idea. And nearly without exception, every Cosmic Catastrophe that I have been able to track has been associated with great human evil running amok on the planet at the time. There is definitely a statistical connection.

With comprehensive psychological knowledge, we can analyze history with a different eye, see how the dynamics operated, and extract principles that can be applied anywhere, anytime. And the time for applying the principles extracted from a study of the Inquisition is now.

Unfortunately, trying to use historical examples or psychology or anything else as "evidence" to explain what is going on in our world today is about as problematical as it is for psychical researchers who spend their lives trying to prove one tiny little paranormal event occurred - to get that hard, rock-solid, indisputable proof that no one can reject. Our world is so corrupted by the deviants that people actually believe that black is white, white is black, good is evil and evil is good: witness George Bush bringing democracy to the Iraqis by force!

Just this morning I read a news item that nearly made me drop my teeth in amazement that people can say and do what they say and do and be so totally unaware of what they are saying and doing and its implications: that their minds have been totally corrupted by pathological material. Keeping in mind the idea that one can study history and extract principles and make predictions, read the following article:

Passengers May Be Sued in Imams’ Removal

Six Muslim men removed from a plane last fall after being accused of suspicious behavior are suing the airline and threatening to sue the passengers who complained - a move some fear could discourage travelers from speaking up when they see something unusual.

The civil rights lawsuit, filed earlier this month, has so alarmed some lawyers that they are offering to defend the unnamed "John Doe" passengers listed as "possible defendants" free of charge. They say it is vital that the flying public be able to report suspicious behavior without fear of being dragged into court.

"When you drive up the road towards the airport, there’s a big road sign that says, ‘Report suspicious behavior,’" said Gerry Nolting, a Minneapolis lawyer. "There’s no disclaimer that adds, ‘But beware if you do that, you might get sued.’"

The six imams were taken off a Phoenix-bound US Airways flight on Nov. 20 while returning home from a conference of Islamic clerics in Minneapolis.

Other passengers had gotten nervous when the men were seen praying and chanting in Arabic as they waited to board. Some passengers also said that the men spoke of Saddam Hussein and cursed the United States; that they requested seat belt extenders with heavy buckles and stowed them under their seats; that they were moving about and conferring with each other during boarding; and that they sat separately in seats scattered through the cabin.

The plane was cleared for a security sweep, nothing was found, and the jet took off without the imams.

The Muslim clerics say they were humiliated, and are seeking unspecified damages from the airline, the Minneapolis airport and, potentially, the John Does.

Omar Mohammedi, the New York City attorney for the imams, said the intent is not to go after passengers who raise valid concerns about security. But he suggested some passengers may have acted in bad faith out of prejudice.

"As an attorney, I have seen a lot of abuse by the general public when it comes to members of the community creating stories that do not exist," Mohammedi said.

He denied the imams were talking about Saddam, and said that their seats were assigned and that they requested extenders because their seat belts didn’t fit.

Some fear such lawsuits could weaken what has become the first line of defense against terrorism since Sept. 11 - an alert public. At airports and train and subway stations around the country, travelers are routinely warned to watch for unattended bags and suspicious activity and to notify authorities.

Ellen Howe, spokeswoman for the Transportation Security Administration, which oversees security at all U.S. airports, would not comment specifically on the imams’ lawsuit. But she said the TSA counts on passengers to help the agency do its job.

"’See something, say something’ is certainly a common mantra in this day and age," Howe said. "We would always remind passengers to be both vigilant and thoughtful."

In reaction to the imams’ lawsuit, Congress has taken steps to legally protect passengers who report suspicious activity. Earlier this week, the House approved an amendment to a rail transportation security bill that would make passengers immune from such lawsuits, unless they say something they know is false.

Mohammedi said he has not yet identified any of the complaining passengers. An airport police report listed a passenger and two US Airways employees as complaining about the imams. All three had their names blacked out before the lawsuit was filed by invoking a Minnesota law that allows it, airport spokesman Pat Hogan said.

Nolting said he has been contacted by several potential John Does.

Passenger Pat Snelson, who lives in a Twin Cities suburb, said he and his wife were not among those who reported suspicious behavior. But he said his wife noticed the men praying, and he saw them moving around the cabin while others were boarding.

"These guys were up to no good," Snelson said. "We think the airport people did a real good job in taking care of it."

Bomb-sniffing dogs examined the men and their baggage. FBI agents and other federal law enforcement officers questioned the men for several hours before releasing them.

Billie Vincent, a former director of security for the Federal Aviation Administration, said he is troubled by the mere attempt to identify the passengers who raised concerns.

Airline passengers "are your eyes and your ears," said Vincent, who now owns an aviation security company. "If attorneys can get those names and sue them, you put a chilling effect on the whole system."

Did you get the connection to the Inquisition in the above article?

Not everyone would, of course.

I admit that reading it almost rendered me speechless, but my mind was sure going! I thought "Whoah! It just staggers the mind to read something like that in the daily news, published as though such attitudes and events were the most normal thing on Earth!" Sure, a thousand FACTS and all the knowledge I have in my head of psychology and history and so on went racing through my mind, but how in the Hell am I supposed to convey all that all in one neat package when it has taken me years to acquire it? How can I show you, the reader, how the above article is as grave a warning signal about our future as the jetliner that was barely missed by a meteorite the other day?

But I am going to try. It’s Story Time, boys and girls.

This may seem a bit long, but believe me, it’s worth it! You will acquire YEARS of hard-won knowledge in whatever time it takes you to read the following selections from my memory and databanks.

In this year, on the Sunday before the Feast of St. John the Baptist, after sunset when the moon had first become visible a marvellous phenomenon was witnessed by some five or more men who were sitting there facing the moon. Now there was a bright new moon, and as usual in that phase it’s horns were tilted toward the east; and suddenly the upper horn split in two. From the midpoint of the division a flaming torch sprang up, spewing out, over a considerable distance, fire, hot coals, and sparks. Meanwhile the body of the moon which was below writhed, as it were, in anxiety, and to put it in the words of those who reported it to me and saw it with their own eyes, the moon throbbed like a wounded snake. Afterwards it resumed its proper state. This phenomenon was repeated a dozen times or more, the flame assuming various twisting shapes at random and then returning to normal. Then after these transformations the moon from horn to horn, that is along its whole length, took on a blackish appearance. The present writer was given this report by men who saw it with their own eyes, and are prepared to stake their honour on an oath that they have made no addition or falsification in the above narrative. [Report of the medieval monk Gervase of Canterbury, AD 1178 cited by Clube and Napier in The Cosmic Winter]

Clube and Napier suggest that what was seen was the impacting of one or more asteroids on the surface of the Moon, 800 years ago similar to what happened on Jupiter back in 1994. Two and a half centuries lay between the Gervase chronicle and the onset of the Black Death in Europe in 1348. More than that, this was preceded by an acute crisis in human affairs. One chronicler reported that the cause of the plague was that there was a "vast rain of fire" between "Cathay and Persia. The fire burned up mountains and plains and whoever beheld it died within a half a day.

Not long after, the Arctic polar cap extended changing the rainfall patterns which led to devastating famines. In England and Scotland there were abandoned villages and farms, soaring wheat prices and declining population from starvation and disease. The chronicles of monasteries in Poland and Russia speak of cannibalism, so many corpses that they were buried together in overflowing common graves, and mass migrations to the West.

There are a number of such fluctuations to be found in the historical record, and there is good evidence that these climatic stresses are connected not only with famine but also with times of great social unrest, wars, revolution and mass migrations. [Clube and Napier, p.274]

Let us now look at what else was going on between the asteroid/meteorite impacts on the Moon and the coming of the Black Death, all of which preceded the Maunder Minimum - a mini-ice age.

"Kill them all, god will know his own."

A chronicler reported that Arnold Amaury, the monk who led the Albigensian Crusade, uttered this catchphrase outside the city of Beziers on July 22, 1209. His crusaders had asked him how to tell the Catholic believers from the Cathar Heretics.

Arnold’s instructions were followed, and the entire population of Beziers - some 20,000 men, women and children - were indiscriminately murdered.

No one really knows if Arnold really said what was reported, but what is known is that such an ideology was the essence of the crusade against the Cathars, and such ideology has arisen among human beings again and again throughout history, even to the present day in the halls of government of the United States. The consequences are always and ever the same - something that the current administration does not seem to realize - proving the saying that those who forget history are doomed to repeat it.

There are many parallels between those times and the present that might serve us well to examine.

On the 10th of March 1208, Pope Innocent III issued a summons to all Christian nations to take up arms against fellow Christians. He declared that the destruction of these heretics was not only justified, but that it was a dire necessity because the heretics who inhabited an ostensibly Christian land were "worse than the very Saracens." This appeal came four years after a Crusader army had captured and pillaged Constantinople, still another Christian land, though one which claimed to be the true seat of original Christianity. The Eastern church considered the church at Rome to be an upstart, a Frankish invention of Northern Germanic invaders that had nothing at all to do with the Christianity of the historical Jesus.

The new enemy of the church at Rome was one of the greatest princes in Christendom, Count Raymond VI of Toulouse. Raymond was a feudal sovereign whose authority extended over a very large section of what is now known as France, but was then known as Languedoc.

Raymond’s crime was that he ruled a country where the authority of the church was in decline, and he wasn’t doing anything about it.

The declared aim of the crusade was to overthrow a prince of unquestioned legitimacy, who was more inclined to support his people than the church. The church in Rome saw that its continued existence in the Midi of France depended upon putting the country under the control of an alien, external government that would crush rebellion and would not rebel against the church itself.

In short, the Church’s aims were Imperialistic. Imperialism is always a bad sign. The chief characteristic of pathological deviants, psychopaths in particular, is that they always want to pull the "big con," to take what belongs to others, has been rightfully earned or worked for by others, and do it without working themselves, by psychologically and emotionally manipulating others to get it for them.

The Cathars were pacifists who embraced tolerance in a period when tolerance was not what the church needed in its overweening ambition to rule the Western World. The heresy grew during a period of change and experimentation and expansion of horizons. Crusaders to the Holy Land had returned bringing new ideas, understandings that life could be organized differently and that those who lived or worshiped differently were human beings too - and interesting and valuable to an eclectic society at that. The spread of such ideas led to extreme dissatisfaction with the Medieval Catholic Church which was erected on a foundation of large corporate monasteries and churches lording it over huddled masses of cold and hungry peasants and even aristocrats desirous of making it to heaven. The Catholic Church was basically a large corporation selling salvation and everybody else was supposed to be cogs in the wheel of this great mechanical "control of salvation" organization.

Catharism began to thrive in those areas that were growing democratic: merchant cities of Italy, and trading centers of Champagne and the Rhineland, and independent cities of the Languedoc in France. Catharism was ideally suited to the tolerant, protective feudalism of Languedoc, and for that reason, it had to be destroyed.

In the north, women were excluded from inheritance, and everything went to the eldest son. Younger sons and daughters who were unable to marry heiresses or heirs, were grist for the Catholic monastic factories, a system designed to incrementally increase the power of the Church. In the Languedoc, women had rights, could inherit and manage their own properties, and fiefs were divided among children. This naturally led to a more democratic spread of property, and prevented enormous power from being gathered into the hands of any one person or group of persons. It also, in a way, weakened the Languedoc because no one person or small group of persons could mobilize all the men of a region to go to war for personal ambition or greed. This is always and ever the weakness of a real democracy.

It was in the Occitan language that troubadour poetry flowered. In the fertile lands of Languedoc, love of a spiritual kind was revealed. Troubadours sang of courtly love, games of deferred pleasure, exalted sublimation of physical desires to spiritual goals, and even, in some cases, what seemed to be adulterous fulfillment. The ethos of amorous longing, of exalted spiritual women revealed the different mold of the Languedoc mind.

At the same time, beyond the Loire and the Rhine, the northern nobles were singing about swords dripping with blood, and viscera being scattered and exulted over, all the while masking this barbarity in a strange mix of rapacious piety rather like the present day Christians who back George Bush.

The towns of the Languedoc were governed by consuls and Roman law formed the basis of all local legislation. The consuls were elected from among the city nobility and bourgeoisie, and the burgher was the knight’s equal. The Count of Toulouse lacked any legal authority in his own city, and was only obeyed so long as he respected and upheld the local common law. Every burgher had the right to buy, sell, or engage in barter without paying any duties or taxes on such transactions. There were no restrictions placed upon marriages and resident aliens enjoyed full citizens’ rights regardless of their nationality or creed. Such free towns were the centers of the country’s social life and the election of a consul was a great public event with processions, pomp and circumstance.

The Rhone and Garonne rivers carried merchandise and raw materials through the land, and Marseilles, Toulouse, Avignon and Narbonne were major seaports. There was a relaxation of the traditions of caste, and Jews and Arabs mixed freely in the melting pot towns of Languedoc. The spirit of independence from princely power was strong in the Midi.

Being predominantly commercial cities, the towns of the Languedoc were quite opulent and modern compared with the cities of the North such as Paris, Troyes or Rouen. The cities of the south had universities that taught medicine, philosophy, mathematics, astrology, and more. The works of the Arab philosophers were censored in Paris, but available in Toulouse. Arab doctors and merchants came to Languedoc, and the "infidel" was not regarded as a "natural enemy." Jews were fully integrated into public life and were held in high regard by the general populace. In some towns, Jews were consuls or magistrates.

One thing is certain, life in the Languedoc was more secular than anywhere else, and as a result, life in general flourished to a higher degree than in those places under the jackboot of religious intolerance. The cities of the Languedoc were centers of culture and great industry and prestige.

Poetry, literature, and music also flourished and became a part of daily life as much for the bourgeoisie and the common man as for the nobility. The Poetry of the Languedoc is not only the most ancient in European history, but also the most sublime in terms of inspiration. It seems that the Occitan language was the tongue par excellence of literature. Even today, no one can think of the South of France without recalling the troubadours. The phenomenon of an aristocracy passionately devoted to spiritually inspirational poetry, that dedicated their lives to living out the ideals of that age and milieu, is unmatched by any other group or period of history. The prosaic northerners might have thought the Southerners had gone off their rockers, but then the northern nobility’s highest ambition was to help their king put on his underwear.

The nobility of the Languedoc had a different idea of honor than sacrificing his life for his king, or tying his shoes. In spite of the opulence of their surroundings, the southern aristocrat had a certain disdain for the material things of life, combined with a high regard and even exaltation of personal virtues that was possessed of a great and noble WILL. The adoration of the Lady was a declaration of free will; a proof that, even though one is giving, and giving all, it is being given to a private deity of one’s own free choice.

It is very likely that the Lady of the Languedoc was merely a symbol of something much deeper and was directly related to the knowledge that was held by the Cathar perfecti. One thing for certain is this: the nobility of the Languedoc were not only permitting heresy, but were its most famous and dedicated supporters and defenders.

Although mystery surrounds the origin of Catharism, recent research indicates that it was connected to the Gnosticism of the Bogomils of the Byzantine Empire. This tradition may relate directly to the Esoteric Christian tradition revealed by Georges Gurdjieff, P.D. Ouspensky, and Boris Mouravieff, and may actually be a conduit of legitimate transmission of the original teachings of the man around whom the Jesus myth was formed. It is suggested that he was only another in a long line of followers of this ancient tradition that was also present in the Megalithic societies.

The fact is, the so-called Cathar Heresy was really a rival religion that was rapidly gaining ground in Europe, and it claimed to be the original Christianity. These believers were not dissidents; they were fully conscious of belonging to a faith that was more ancient than the Church at Rome itself.

Some modern historians have theorized that Catharism was not a heresy due to the simple fact that it was a completely different religion that had nothing at all in common with Christianity as we know it.

The so-called Cathar heresy was predicated upon the question of Good and Evil. The irreducible bone of contention between the Cathars and the Catholic Church was the role and power of Evil in the life of human beings.

For the Cathars, the god of Judaism, was an evil Archon of Darkness. They rejected entirely the Old Testament as being the work of this evil god. The Cathars considered worldly authority, based on so-called Divine Sanction such as the Church claimed, to be a fraud.

The Cathar God was a god of light who ruled invisible consciousness and did not meddle in human affairs. The God of the Cathars simply didn’t care if you got into bed before getting married, associated with or intermarried with Jews or Arabs, black or white, and whether or not you were a woman or a man. For the Cathars, it was material life, pursuit of material things, money, power and possessions, that was the hallmark of Idolatry.

The Cathars believed that it was a free choice for every person as to whether or not they wanted to renounce the materialistic life for a life of self-denial so as to purify oneself of material desires and thus "ascend" to a different world - an Edenic like state of purity. The only "hell" the Cathars admitted was that if a person did not choose to purify themselves, they would reincarnate over and over again until their material desires and passions were burned away in the sufferings of material life. In short, to be damned was to live again and again in this vale of tears we call Earthly life.

Good grief! What kind of religion doesn’t try to control people with fears of hellfire and damnation?

Such Gnostic Dualism isn’t new; it is a notion that has been shared by other creeds throughout history. For the Cathars, however, the unique crossroads of choice lay within each and every human being. It was in the human consciousness that the divine spark was found - the "Kingdom of Heaven within" - and this spark was a remnant of an earlier, angelic state of existence that had the potential to be redeemed. It was there, in everyone, waiting to be set free from the cycle of reincarnation.

Now, what was so evil about this?

It should be obvious. If such ideas were true, the sacraments of the Catholic Church were null and void, and the Church itself was a fraud, a cruel hoax played by those who were only seeking power (what a concept!). If such ideas were true, the status of human beings could never be looked at the same way again. If everybody believed, as the Cathars did, that a king in one life could be a serving wench in the next, a Jew in one life could be an Arab in the next, and that women could be highly evolved spiritual beings - even leaders - it put a whole different spin on how humans ought to behave toward one another.

One of the more serious charges against the Cathars was their repugnance against swearing oaths. It’s hard to understand this now, but it can be compared to the idea that a modern earthly contract has no binding power when issues of morality and ethics come into the picture. The swearing of oaths, especially oaths of fealty, was the contractual underpinning of a feudal society. It gave a "sacred weight" to the controllers of the hierarchy, the Catholic Church. If an individual broke an oath, he could be condemned by the authority of the Church to Hell. Kingdoms, estates, bonds of service, all were created, transferred, and maintained by the mediation of the Church. You could say that "swearing oaths" was medieval Corporatism.

The Cathars believed that linking the activities of business and government to the Divine was an exercise in Wishful Thinking if not out and out blasphemy. From their point of view, god was detached from such things and any idea that he was either interested, or cared about the business and government doings of human beings was a fanciful house of cards. For anyone to claim that they had the power to control human dealings by threatening the wrath of God just on their say-so was hubris in the extreme.

Catharism taught that man and woman were one. A human being was reincarnated over and over again - as peasant, king, boy, girl, master, servant - but what really mattered was one’s divine, immaterial, androgynous - or rather, sexless - spiritual self. That did irreparable damage to the Catholic church’s teachings about the sinful state of women, the exclusion of women from inheritance, the "fall of man" via the temptation of Eve, and so on.

In short, Catharism was one of the greatest threats to the Powers That Be that has ever existed - then and since. The church, and kings and rulers who relied on the Church to control people and to give weight to their contracts, could not allow such a heresy to spread. Spurred on by the Catholic Church in its unholy alliance with power-seeking aristocrats, the might of Feudal Europe fell upon Languedoc in a righteous fury. In a certain sense, you could say that it was a war between spiritual freedom and spiritual corporatism. Western Civilization had reached a crossroad similar to the crossroad that the Cathars taught existed within the hearts of individual humans: a return to consciousness of Angelic realms, or a new cycle of repeating again and again the pain and suffering of existence in this vale of tears we call Earth.

Historian R. I. Moore has noted that the years around 1200 were a turning point that led to the "formation of a persecuting society". Choices were made then that are still reverberating in human society.

And it is clear what choice was made then.

We are facing a similar choice today.

When the Corporatist Church and Nobility went after the Democratic Cathars, the people of the Languedoc did not go down without a fight. But, as it is in all times, those who fight for the rights of free will for all are hindered by their very humanity; they are unable to achieve the single-minded rapacity that denies humanity to others so as to be able to mercilessly destroy them. (This, of course, is where accurate psychological knowledge would come in very handy. One cannot treat a genetic psychological deviant as a human with a soul, but one should, of course, treat them with the consideration that one gives to a rare species of animal.)

Pope Innocent III needed an explosive incident that would fire the public imagination and justify a declaration of war. The Pope had no army, and crusades were, essentially, volunteer operations. The Pope couldn’t force anyone to fight, and so the idea was to persuade the landed nobles with their retinues of soldiers to agree to join in. This incident was provided by the murder of Peter of Castelnau which was blamed on Count Raymond. There are very good grounds, according to the historical experts, to think that Raymond had nothing to do with the murder of the Papal Legate, that it was s set-up just like the alleged "Muslim extremist" attack on the World Trade Center in our own times has been used to launch a war against Islam.

A propaganda campaign was launched. Papal emissaries, carrying Peter’s bloodstained habit from place to place, expiated on the tragedy of a country abandoned to the ravages of heresy. This was the equivalent of showing the falling of the Twin Towers on television over and over again accompanied by inflammatory rhetoric against Islam. Just as we see in the present day - and so it has been throughout history - fantastic slanders were created and spread about the Cathars as they were about the Jews and later the Templars and now the Muslims. They were said to consume the ashes of dead babies and to indulge in incestuous orgies. The Cathars were accused of homosexuality and sodomy. The heretics were said to desecrate communion chalices and to declaim blasphemies against the saints, declaring they were all damned. You might call it Medieval Psy-ops and COINTELPRO.

The propaganda efforts were so successful that volunteers to "kill ‘em all" streamed in from all quarters. Not only knights with no lands, and hopes of acquiring a fief of their own, but also peasants and burghers.

Crusades in general had long formed a part of the social structure of the Western European aristocracy. It was a way to grab land and plunder. The thing that made Crusades so popular was the approval of the Church. Those who went to war "for the Church," were convinced that, by practicing a profession - that of warrior and murderer - that, under different circumstances would contribute nothing to their salvation, they were not only serving God, but were saving their own souls. Crusaders enjoyed indulgences, privileges, and could win forgiveness for the most heinous sins while grabbing property, plunder, fame and fortune.

What a deal! Sounds like the Christian backed Bushies and Halliburton in Iraq.

Another lure to the Crusades was that it was a handy way of getting out of debt. A Crusader’s goods and property were sacrosanct for the whole period of his absence, and his creditors could touch nothing no matter how much he might owe them.

Sounds like the deals offered to the Bush cronies who stand behind him, eh? Too bad he isn’t as generous to the average foot soldier.

The faith of the Crusaders who could exterminate fellow human beings for the Glory of God may seem contemptible to us now, but is what America is doing in Iraq any different? It seems that, to such minds, ordinary human morality cannot be considered when God’s interests are at stake. Never mind that "god’s interests" are surprisingly blood-thirsty and similar to the interests of whoever happens to be in power. Thus it is when a religion is based on a construct of human imagination.

Catholic Faith among the masses in the Middle Ages was deep, sincere, and violent in its attachment to external manifestations. It was a period of "mundane religions," since the urge to perceive God as more or less human and concrete with a special interest in his chosen human beings was a vigorous movement. When the Church had outlawed the sublime mysticism of the ancient Celts (which was surprisingly similar to the beliefs of the Cathars, by the way), they also took over the related myths and legends, transforming them into Saints and stories of martyrdom for Christianity rather than the other way around which it actually was, in many cases.

The world of the Medieval Christian was filled with the lives of Saints and readings from sacred books which took the place of theatre, cinema, magazines, and what we would call best sellers. Literature that was NOT religious in character, was almost unknown, and generally reserved for the pleasure of a small elite. The creative energy of the entire society was wholly focused on religious life. The frantic urge to incarnate the Divine, to make it concrete, suggests a very deep materialism; a high regard for the values of the physical world mixed with contempt for human life. Those who were listeners to the words of the envoys of the popes undoubtedly thought that a mutilated crucifix was more distressing than a mutilated human body.

And so, a heresy that was opposed to the massive Corporate constructions of faith - cathedrals, churches, monasteries, and royal power granted by that faith - was opposed most strenuously by those who clung most frantically to their religious customs as though they were a national heritage.

In short, the papal emissaries had little trouble working up the anger and indignation of large audiences, and the Cathars became "God’s Enemies."

The war against the Cathars, then, was a war that symbolized a particular view of God and the Universe that was held by those whose motives of sentiment and passion were peculiarly brutal and Corporatist.

Throughout the merciless Crusade against the Cathars, it seems that it became more and more clear that the presence of heretics in Languedoc was merely an excuse. The real aim of the Church, the French Crown, the Crusaders, was genocide and grabbing of plunder via the destruction of the entire country and its aristocracy. The destruction of Catharism was only achieved by the obliteration of everything that made up the living traditions of the Languedoc.

The story of the crusade against the Cathars is a terrible story of the triumph of the Evil Archon of Darkness over the Light of the Spirit and Freedom. We have lived, ever since, in that persecuting society that was formed by Western Christendom at that time.

The creation of the Inquisition.

Many people think of the Inquisition as something that was started to eliminate witches and Devil worship, and the word conjures images of the rack and iron maidens and all kinds of bizarre and twisted torture equipment. Sure, torture was a big part of the Inquisition, but not as much as some people might think.

You have to remember that the Inquisition began during a period of history when human life was treated so casually by some that cutting off noses or ears or hands, or gouging out eyes was not unheard of as a legal punishment.

After years of brutal massacres, of destruction of the land, of some of the most horrible events ever to bear witness of man’s inhumanity to man, Pope Gregory IX decided that it was only results that counted. He intended to wipe Catharism from the face of the earth. He must have sat up at night to create the bizarre system that was put into place to deal with heresy.

First, he created special papal legates who were granted wide powers of prosecution similar to what we have today in the Homeland Security nonsense, and sent them out all over Europe. The men chosen for this task were clearly psychopaths, and their mission was to spread terror all over Europe.

Gregory staffed the episcopal palaces of the South of France with psychopathic bishops who offered a cash bounty to anyone who betrayed a heretic. The inducements to betray one’s neighbor were surely tempting in the best of times. But in a time when starvation and destruction was everywhere after more than 20 years of the rampaging of the Crusading armies, it was well-nigh impossible to resist. The terms were that the property confiscated from the heretic was divided between the informer, the church and the crown. Naturally, in a land that was financially devastated, where people were displaced and starving after years of being battered by this same church and crown, there were a lot of individuals offering up their neighbors for blood money.

Robert le Bourgre, which means "the bugger", suggesting the contempt in which he was held by the people, terrorized formerly peaceful northern France. Another legate, Conrad of Marburg found unsuspected heretics everywhere in the Rhineland. Thousands were sent to the stake, often on the same day that they were accused. Again, sure sounds like Bush and his private torture chamber at Guantanamo.

Conrad rode about on his mule with two assistants, bringing terror to every village and town they approached. Apparently, even the regular clergy saw through this nonsense and finally decided to do something about it. On July 30, 1233, a Franciscan friar, driven to act in the name of justice, intercepted Conrad and murdered him.

And that was the living end for the Pope. He was NOT amused and he was not going to be denied his Imperialist ambitions. He turned to the Dominicans.

In the spring of 1233, papal inquisitors were appointed in Toulouse, Albi, and Carcassonne. These inquisitors were succeeded in an unbroken line for 600 years. Thousands of people were summoned to testify before inquisitors. The questions were repetitive, designed to plant doubt in the mind of the person being interrogated as to what, exactly, the inquisitor knew, and who had told him.

Hmmm… Sounds like "Total Information Awareness," doesn’t it?

A person suspected of Cathar sympathies was not always informed of the charges hanging over his head; if apprised of the danger, he had no right to know who his accusers were; and if he dared to seek legal help, his lawyer could be charged with abetting heresy.

Sounding more and more like George and his War on Terrorism and Gitmo and all the new laws passed by the Bush gang since 911, particularly the military tribunals act: the New Inquisition!

Whatever the verdict of the inquisitor - who was prosecutor, judge and jury - no appeal was allowed. Anyone could be held indefinitely in prison for further questioning without cause of explanation.

Yes. Enemy Combatants, no doubt.

The inquisition destroyed the bonds of trust that hold societies together. Informing on one’s neighbor became not only a duty, but a necessary survival strategy.

And so it is becoming in America today as a result of the terror tactics of a gang of psychological deviants.

For 100 years, the inquisition was a fact on the ground of life in the Languedoc. The arrival of an inquisitor in a town was the occasion for demeaning displays of moral collapse just as the arrival of AIPAC is the occasion for legislators and journalists to take off their shirts and display the wide yellow streaks down their backs.

In theory, of course, no one could be punished if no one talked because the inquisitor could not act without a writ of denunciation, but in practice, no community possessed the cohesion needed to combat the power of a secret tribunal. And that is the problem that the masses of humanity face today. Because pathological deviants exist among us, and we do not have the accurate psychological knowledge to identify them and weed them out, we are constantly at risk of being betrayed by adherents of The Cult of the Plausible Lie that lurk in our society just waiting to turn US in.

They don’t even have to be genetic deviants to be dangerous. In America today, the masses have been thoroughly conditioned by watching "reality TV" and "Survivor," and they know the rules of the psychopath and live by them: Do unto others before they do unto you. And so it was in the Languedoc, the historical model for what is happening in the United States today, and for what happened in Germany under Hitler. But, we’ll get to that.

Upon his arrival in a town, the inquisitor consulted with the local clergy. All males over the age of 14, and females over the age of 12, were required to make a profession of faith in the Catholic church. Those who didn’t were the first to be questioned.

Then, the inquisitor would give a speech in which he invited the people to spend some days thinking very, very hard about their activities past, present and future, and to come forward in the following week to give confidential depositions. After a seven day grace period, those who had not denounced themselves would be issued a summons. The punishments ranged from loss of property to loss of life. As you might guess, everyone was outdoing themselves in an effort to denounce themselves and each other.

Aside from the capital crime of being a Cathar, punishable offenses included sheltering a Cathar, or even failing to report any instance of heresy.

The real proof of genuine piety toward the Catholic Church was defined as the number of people the sinner was willing to betray!

It only took ten years for the Inquisition, the work of a few psychopathic fanatics, to become a proficient bureaucracy that lasted for 600 years. It employed hundreds of individuals who interrogated thousands of people with such monotonous regularity that a regular "glossary" was established for the "workers". Armed with a list of proposed offenses to be considered "heretical" or "supporting heretics," which included just knowing that a heretic had crossed one’s property and failing to report it, the Inquisition proceeded to intimidate the population of Europe on a scale that was impossible to imagine. The sheer numbers of people called to testify, and re-called to testify again and again, was staggering.

Egotistic thought-terrorization is accomplished by the society itself and its processes of conversive thinking. This obviates the need for censorship of the press, theater, or broadcasting, as a pathologically hypersensitive censor lives within the citizens themselves. [Andrew Lobaczewski, Political Ponerology]

In a strange twist of historical irony, the Cathars - who believed that the material world was evil and irrelevant - inspired the codification of the Police State - the Ultimate Material Theology.

A cross-referenced compendium of the confessions extracted from tens of thousands of people was compiled, creating a map of the mental landscape of the Languedoc. The more than 5 thousand transcripts of interrogations that survive represent only a small fraction of the work of the Inquisition.

Inquisitors manuals were created to serve as guides for the growing number of Papal courts in Europe. These manuals reminded the inquisitors that they were in the business of saving souls, but I think that the distinction was lost on those whose lives were lost or ruined by the judgments of the Inquisition.

Languedoc was, essentially, the laboratory for repression.

The reputation of the Inquisition was enhanced by the talented Inquisitor of Toulouse, Bernard Gui, who was the villain in Umberto Eco’s "The Name of the Rose." The Inquisitors persuaded a handful of captured Cathars to convert and sell their testimony. Sicard de Lunel of Albi gave the friars an exhaustive list of Cathar sympathizers, even fingering his own parents. Anyone who had ever helped him in his life as a Cathar, whether they had just given him a bed for the night, a bit of food, or even a jar of honey, were hauled in to be punished - just on his word. He and several others like him were lodged thereafter in a castle outside of Toulouse in the medieval version of the "witness protection program." Sicard was well paid for his perfidy and lived to a ripe old age.

The use of torture was delicately referred to as "putting the question." In the Languedoc, successive waves of highly trained inquisitors, aided by informers and torturers, fired by the totalitarian creed of the Catholic church, with detailed manuals and expanding registers of "intelligence," slowly but surely ground Catharism into oblivion. Thousands of dramas of conscience ended in the dungeons or in fires quenched with blood. By the end of the century, only the truly heroic dared to say that this world was evil…

It was not a legal system; it was a system designed to create fear. And so is the War on Terror in America today which was born in the demented minds of priests who "saved souls" by killing people.

Now, let’s turn to our second example: Nazi Germany.

The story of the rise of Adolf Hitler is the single most important story of the 20th century. With this event, in less than a single lifetime, one of the most civilized countries in Europe was reduced to moral, physical, and cultural ruin. The rest of the world was nearly gobbled into this black hole of evil.

In 1951, almost half of the citizens of Germany who responded to a public opinion poll, said that the period between 1933 and 1939 was the time during which things in Germany were better than they had ever been during any other period in history. [Herbert, Ulrich, quoted in Life in the Third Reich]

For the large part of the German population, the image of Nazism was that of reduction of unemployment, economic boom, tranquility and order and NOT terror and mass murder. Those crimes were being committed by their government against "someone else" and most definitely were hidden or justified by propaganda.

At the end of WW II, over 65 million human beings were dead and almost one third of the Earth was uninhabitable.

How can it be that half the people of a country that was almost totally destroyed in a war, STILL perceive all the events leading up to that war as "the best there ever was?" How did they perceive - IF they perceived it at all - the deaths of 65 million other human beings? How did they justify the fact that their own culture was essentially gone forever?

Many observers of the Nazi takeover in 1933, and the Nazis themselves, emphasized the "peaceful" and "democratic" nature of the "German Revolution." In 1933, Germany did not crumble, there was no civil war, the army did not intervene, the trains ran on time, and there was no large scale violence accompanying Hitler’s takeover. It was only after the Nazis were finally able to gain control of all the ministries and police headquarters throughout Germany that the campaign of terror began. Americans ought to sit up and take notice of this fact.

The fact is, long before Germany was officially declared to be a "one party state," open political activity directed against the Nazis had come to a screeching halt. (For more details on how political suppression was achieved in Germany, read The Mystic vs. Hitler.)

The term "Liberal" could be used to describe both the Leftists and the Communists of Germany who were the targets of the Nazis. The Leftists of Germany were known as "Social Democrats." These were largely trade unions, worker’s organizations and so on who supported the Social Democratic Party or the Communist Party. There was "back door" encouragement by the Nazi government for the violence against the "Left." The police, having been subjected to endless propaganda, saw the communists and labor unions as "evil." Anxious to make a good impression on their new masters, to be promoted, and most certainly, to not end up in a detention camp themselves, were easily manipulated to act against their fellow citizens in hundreds of illegal ways. The courts, similarly "pressured," acted in favor of the government’s wishes and "law and order" became "what the Nazis wanted, the Nazis got." The same rules obtained for the majority of newspapers. The left-wing press was suppressed, and by the time of the elections in Germany, the Left had been driven from public view.

Egotistic thought-terrorization is accomplished by the society itself and its processes of conversive thinking. This obviates the need for censorship of the press, theater, or broadcasting, as a pathologically hypersensitive censor lives within the citizens themselves. [Andrew Lobaczewski, Political Ponerology]

Leading members of the left-wing parties were arrested as the various police forces and Nazi formations began to coordinate their activities. After the election, the Nazis turned their attention to rooting out and destroying the supporters of the now underground Left and Liberal parties. The once impressive supports of German Social Democracy, which had withstood Bismarck’s attacks for fifty years, were destroyed piecemeal.

The campaign against the Left and Liberals was all the more effective because of its ambiguous nature. There was no single, decisive confrontation. It was carried out both within and outside of the existing legal structure just as we see happening in the US today. The Leftists and Liberals essentially faced what were apparently "spontaneous" attacks from "marauding bands" of Nazis just as marauding bands of Bushistas roam the Internet and the streets of the US. These types of attack are quite effective because, essentially, the power of the State stands behind them.

Egotistic thought-terrorization is accomplished by the society itself and its processes of conversive thinking. This obviates the need for censorship of the press, theater, or broadcasting, as a pathologically hypersensitive censor lives within the citizens themselves. [Andrew Lobaczewski, Political Ponerology]

Analysts suggest today that even if the Left and the Communists had been united, they would not have prevailed because once the Nazis and their conservatives controlled the State organs of power, as do Bush and his gang at present, the police and the army were used effectively to eliminate opposition.

If the history of the Nazi seizure of power teaches us anything, it is that there is little the Liberals can do to stop a powerful Right Wing movement that has mass support - or has created the illusion of mass support - allies in powerful places (such as the media), and control of the repression apparatus of the State.

Of course, the Left Liberals were not the only targets of the Nazis: there were the Jews as today there are the Muslims. It should be clear, however, that the assault of Germany’s Jews took second place behind the attacks on the Left.

The Third Reich was only able to establish and maintain itself by being in a perpetual state of emergency. And mostly, they targeted "Liberals." It seems that a liberal then and now is anyone who values human life even if that human is different. So, when you start flaming Liberals, Communists and the "Left," the only conclusion that can be drawn is that you are a Fascist - a Nazi. (But again note that pathological deviants can infiltrate and subvert any group or movement, so what calls itself "Left" or "Liberal," may be just a name and the original ideology has been completely twisted and perverted.)

Nazi activism, like today’s neo-conservatism, was predominantly a male preserve that praised "male" virtues of toughness and "standing one’s ground". The Nazis were able to channel the violent behavior of young men into domestic politics. The young man, out to prove his virility, found nirvana in radical nationalism. This tells us that Nazi behavior, far from being defiant or the "personal frustrations" of individuals of naturally violent natures, was actually founded upon mainstream social values. Think of how Bush came to power on the platform of "moral values".

One of the things that enabled the Nazi takeover was massive unemployment, as we have seen in the US in recent years. The actual figures for unemployment became so frightening that the government actually stopped counting and reporting them a couple of years ago. Certainly, the situation in Germany was catastrophic and a consequence of a long string of factors stemming from WW I and conditions during the Wiemar Republic. What is important is that in both cases, there was a process of hysterization of society. In the U.S., that hysterization has included such things as VietNam, the Assassinations of JFK, RFK, MLK, Watergate, Monicagate, Hostage crises, and other psychological traumas. It might even be proposed that the alleged "alien abduction" phenomenon could be a product of deliberate and programmed hysterization of society.

In Germnay, the combination of massive unemployment, the breakdown of traditions, and a culture which embraced violent, aggressive values, lifted the Nazi movement - in very short order - to the top of the heap. Again, we note the conditions of hysterization which psychologist, Andrew Lobaczewski discusses in Political Ponerology.

It is important to note that Hitler was NOT given the "keys to the kingdom" by violence. Hitler had seen the folly of openly confronting law and order in 1923. The Nazis were thus committed to gaining power by "legal means," even if those means only appeared to be legal. In the same way has Bush gained power by pretending to do it "legally," from the stolen election of 2000 to the "fixed" election of 2004.

The Nazis promised a radical change back toward traditional values which appealed to both the rough lower class and the worried middle class. The SA appealed to young men who needed to prove their manliness and who could not do so otherwise - they couldn’t even get a job. The Nazis provided a hierarchical structure that was "safe" and handed out attractive uniforms to those who felt their lives had no meaning or direction.

Utilizing propaganda to create a "straw man" in Marxism and Communism, the Nazis vowed to restore law and order that had been disrupted by the eeeevil Commies. This posture of using violence in defense of order is one of the central paradoxes of the Nazi movement. It was the "attraction" of this ideology that enabled the Nazis to attract massive support and to consolidate power rapidly. The same tactic has been used by the Ziocons.

Indeed, the politics of violence played a key role in the rise of the Nazis, but they knew that this was a dangerous serpent to nurture to one’s bosom. Once the dictatorship was established, those who assisted in the consolidation of power were ruthlessly purged.

The Nazis were successful in convincing people that they could provide increased employment and reduce poverty. They gained popularity through the introduction of the Arbeitsdienst (Labor Service), and by establishing separate organizations for women and children. The "Strength Through Joy" program which provided cheap, packaged holidays was a big attraction.

For almost a decade after 1933, Hitler enjoyed remarkable popularity among the majority of German people. Hitler’s own character - bizarre in some instances, mediocre and unpleasant in others - does little to explain his magnetism and popular appeal. The same can be said for George Bush in the present time. About half the US population sees him as the "village idiot," and the other half sees him as a "heroic leader" in a time of great crisis.

But what is important to us here is the Gestapo and how it operated. For this segment, I am going to quote directly from Chapter 2 of The Nazis: A Warning From History by Laurence Rees. This book was written as a companion to a BBC Series about the Nazis that I highly recommend that everyone watch at the soonest possible opportunity. It is full of rare, original film footage that will open your eyes to what happened in Germany in a way that nothing else will. (U.S. version of the DVD HERE.)

CHAOS AND CONSENT - THE NAZI RULE IN GERMANY

[…]In those first months of power the chaotic terror was directed mainly at the Nazis’ former political opponents. Josef Felder was an SPD member of the Reichstag who was picked up by the Nazis and taken to the newly established concentration camp at Dachau, outside Munich.

He was thrown into a cell and chained to an iron ring, and his Nazi jailers removed the straw palliasse which was lying on the concrete floor, saying: ‘You won’t be needing this because you’ll only be leaving here as a corpse.’ The abuse continued as the guard took a rope and demonstrated the best way Felder could use it to hang himself. Felder told him, ‘I have a family. I’m not going to do that. You’ll have to do it yourselves!’ He was eventually released after more than eighteen months in Dachau, having contracted a lung disease.

The pragmatists among the Nazis’ political opponents either escaped Germany or tried to conform to the wishes of the new regime; only the exceptional, like Alois Pfaller, tried to resist. In 1934 he tried to restart his old Communist youth group. It was a heroic act but, against a ruthless regime that singled out Communists as a particular enemy, failure was inevitable.

Pfaller was betrayed by a double agent - a woman who worked for both the Communist Party and the Gestapo. He was arrested, taken to a police station and brutally interrogated; his nose was broken and he was beaten unconscious with leather belts: ‘And when I came to again, they did it a second time, again unconscious, the fourth time, again unconscious, then they stopped because I hadn’t said anything.’

Now the interrogation tactics changed. One man sat at a typewriter to take down Pfaller’s ‘confession’, while the other smashed his fist into Pfaller’s face every time he failed to answer a question. The interrogation grew worse after the violent policeman sprained his right hand and began using his left. Now he hit Pfaller on the side of the head and split his ear-drum. ‘Then I heard an incredible racket,’ says Pfaller. ‘It was a roaring, as if your head was on the sea-bed, an incredible roaring.’

Pfaller resolved to kill the man who was beating him, even though it would also mean his own certain death. He had learnt judo when he was young and he intended to stretch out and stick his fingers into his interrogator’s eyes. But just as he decided on this course of action, he hemorrhaged. The interrogation stopped and Pfaller was given a bucket and cloth and ordered to clean his own blood off the floor. Then he was taken to a cell for the night and subsequently transferred to a concentration camp. He was not released until 1945. […]

Most Germans did not confront the regime. More common was the experience of Manfred Freiherr von Schröder, a banker’s son from Hamburg, who welcomed the new regime and joined the Nazi Party in 1933. He thought himself an idealist and believed that 1933 was the beginning of a wonderful new period for Germany:

‘Everything was in order again, and clean. There was a feeling of national liberation, a new start.’

Like most Germans, von Schröder knew that Socialists and Communists were imprisoned in concentration camps, but he dismisses this as unimportant in the context of history:

‘You have never had anything of this kind since Cromwell in England. Closest is the French Revolution, isn’t it? To be a French nobleman in the Bastille was not so agreeable, was it? So people said, “Well, this is a revolution; it is an astonishing, peaceful revolution but it is a revolution.” There were the concentration camps, but everybody said at that time, “Oh, the English invented them in South Africa with the Boers.”’

…It should be remembered that the camps which sprang up in 1933 were, for all their horror, not identical to the extermination camps of the Holocaust which were to emerge during the war. If you were imprisoned in Dachau during the early 1930s, it was probable that you would be released after a brutal stay of about a year. (Alois Pfaller’s experience is unusual for a political opponent arrested in 1934, in that he had to endure eleven years in a concentration camp.) On release, former inmates were compelled to sign a paper agreeing never to talk about the experience, on pain of immediate re-entry to the camp.

Thus it was possible for Germans to believe, if they wanted to, that concentration camps were ‘merely’ places designed to shock opponents of the regime into conforming. Since the terror was mostly confined to the Nazis’ political opponents, or to Jews, the majority of Germans could watch what Göring called the ‘settling of scores’ with equanimity, if not pleasure. […]

Remember this:

Egotistic thought-terrorization is accomplished by the society itself and its processes of conversive thinking. This obviates the need for censorship of the press, theater, or broadcasting, as a pathologically hypersensitive censor lives within the citizens themselves. [Andrew Lobaczewski, Political Ponerology]

At this point, we come to some descriptions of Hitler that remind us disturbingly of George Bush:

Fritz Wiedemann, one of Hitler’s adjutants, wrote that Hitler ‘disliked the study of documents. I have sometimes secured decisions from him, even ones about important matters, without his ever asking to see the relevant files. He took the view that many things sorted themselves out on their own if one did not interfere.’ The result was, in the words of Otto Dietrich, Hitler’s press chief, that ‘in the twelve years of his rule in Germany Hitler produced the biggest confusion in government that has ever existed in a civilized state.’

I actually think that George Bush is going to beat this record; he’s done it in less than eight years. But then, there has been a lot of scientific thought that went into the hysterization process prior to the take-over, and we should expect that this "science" is well thought out.

Nor does Hitler’s daily routine at this time sound like that of a political workaholic. Fritz Wiedemann wrote, ‘Hitler would appear shortly before lunch, read through the press cuttings prepared by Reich press chief Dietrich, and then go into lunch. When Hitler stayed at the Obersalzberg [the mountain in southern Bavaria on whose slopes Hitler built his house - the Berghof], it was even worse. There he never left his room before 2.00 p.m. Then he went to lunch. He spent most afternoons taking a walk; in the evening straight after dinner, there were films.’

That does sound a lot like George Bush and his endless vacations on his ranch, not to mention the well-known fact that he doesn’t like to read and he is proud of his non-intellectual state of being, doesn’t it?

Albert Speer, the architect who was to become the Nazi armaments minister, tells how, when Hitler was staying in Munich, there would be only ‘an hour or two’ a day available for conferences: ‘Most of his time he spent marching about building sites, relaxing in studios, cafés and restaurants, or hurling long monologues at his associates, who were already amply familiar with the un-changing themes and painfully tried to conceal their boredom.’ The fact that Hitler ‘squandered’ his working time was anathema to Speer, a man who threw himself into his work. ‘When,’ Speer often asked himself, ‘did he really work?’ The conclusion was inescapable: ‘In the eyes of the people Hitler was the leader who watched over the nation day and night. This was hardly so.’

Hitler was not a dictator like Stalin who sent countless letters and orders interfering with policy, yet he exercised as much or more ultimate authority over the state and was at least as secure as a dictator. How was this possible?

How could a modern state function with a leader who spent a great deal of time in his bedroom or in a café?

One answer has been provided by Professor Ian Kershaw in a careful study of a seemingly unimportant speech given by Werner Willikens, State Secretary in the Ministry of Food, on 21 February 1934. Willikens said:

‘Everyone who has the opportunity to observe it knows that the Führer can hardly dictate from above everything he intends to realize sooner or later. On the contrary, up till now everyone with a post in the new Germany has worked best when he has, so to speak, worked towards the Führer-in fact it is the duty of everybody to try to work towards the Führer along the lines he would wish. Anyone who makes mistakes will notice it soon enough. But anyone who really works towards the Führer along his lines and towards his goal will certainly both now and in the future one day have the finest reward in the form of the sudden legal confirmation of his work.”

‘Working towards the Führer’ suggests a strange kind of political structure. Not one in which those in power issue orders but one in which those at the lower end of the hierarchy initiate policies themselves within what they take to be the spirit of the regime and carry on implementing them until corrected. Perhaps the nearest example we have in British history occurred when Henry II is supposed to have said, ‘Who will rid me of this turbulent priest?’ and the barons rushed to Canterbury to murder Thomas à Becket. No direct order was given, but the courtiers sensed what would please their liege lord.

Professor Kershaw believes that the practice of ‘working towards the Führer’ is a key insight into understanding how the Nazi state functioned, not just in the 1930s, but also during the war, and is particularly relevant when examining the provenance of many of the administrative decisions taken in the occupied territories. It gives the lie to the excuse offered by some Nazis that they were just ‘acting under orders’. Often, in fact, they were creating their own orders within the spirit of what they believed was required of them. Nor does the idea of ‘working towards the Führer’ excuse Hitler from blame. The reason Nazi functionaries acted as they did was because they were trying to make an informed judgment about what Hitler wanted of them and, more often than not, the substance of their actions was retrospectively legitimized. The system could not have functioned without Hitler or without those subordinates who initiated what they believed were desired policies.

‘Working towards the Führer’ can be used to explain the decision-making process in many of those areas of domestic policy that Hitler, through temperament, neglected. Most political parties, for example, have a carefully conceived economic policy at the core of their manifesto. The Nazis did not. Indeed, one academic joked to me that the question, ‘What was Hitler’s economic policy?’ was easy to answer -’He hadn’t got one.’ Perhaps that is unfair in one respect, for despite a lack of policy, Hitler always had economic aims. He promised to rid Germany of unemployment, and, less publicly trumpeted but, in his eyes, more important, to bring about rearmament. Initially he had only one idea how to achieve this and that was to ask Hjalmar Schacht, a former president of the Reichsbank and a brilliant economist, to ‘sort it out’ (see Chapter Three). Apart from rearmament and strengthening the army, Hitler had little detailed interest in domestic policies.

Surprisingly, for those who believe that a successful economy has to be guided by a political leader, in the short term Hitler’s delegation of the economy to Schacht seemed to work. Schacht pursued a policy of reflation financed on credit, and alongside this implemented a work-creation programme based on compulsory work service for the unemployed. […]

Knowing as we do the unique horrors perpetrated by this regime, people who claim to have been happier under Nazi rule than they are today are, at best, likely to attract ridicule. But it is vital that [such people] speak out, for without their testimony an easier, less troublesome view of Nazism might prevail - that the regime oppressed the German population from the very beginning.

No, such a regime only begins with oppressing SOME of the population. And those who do not see this at the beginning generally are doomed to suffer by it.

Academic research shows that [the average German] is not unusual in his/her rosy view of the regime during this period. Over 40 per cent of Germans questioned in a research project after the war said they remembered the 1930s as ‘good times’. As this survey was conducted in 1951, when the Germans knew the full reality of the wartime extermination camps, it is a telling statistic.

Unexpected as it may be to discover that many Germans were content during the 1930s, this news is as nothing compared to recent revelations about the infamous Nazi secret police - the Gestapo.

In popular myth the Gestapo have a secure and terrifying role as the all-powerful, all-seeing instrument of terror that oppressed an unwilling population. But this is far from the truth.

To uncover the real story you have to travel to the town of Würzburg in southwest Germany. Würzburg is a German town much like any other, except for one special attribute: it is one of only three towns in Europe where Gestapo records were not destroyed by the Nazis at the end of the war. Resting in the Würzburg archive are around 18,000 Gestapo files, which exist more by luck than design; the Gestapo were in the process of burning them as the American troops arrived. They had begun to burn them alphabetically, so there are relatively few A-D files left; otherwise the files are complete.

Professor Robert Gellately of Ontario was the first person to uncover the secrets of the files. As he started work on them, an old German man saw what he was studying and said to him, ‘Perhaps you’d like to interview me, because I lived here during that time and I know a lot about it.’ Professor Gellately talked to him over a cup of coffee and asked him how many Gestapo officials there had been in this part of Germany. ‘They were everywhere,’ the old man replied, confirming the conventional view of the Gestapo.’

Yet after studying the files, Professor Gellately discovered that the Gestapo simply couldn’t have been ‘everywhere’.

Würzburg lies in the administrative area of Lower Franconia, a district covering around a million people. For that whole area there were precisely twenty-eight Gestapo officials. Twenty-two were allocated to Würzburg, and almost half of those were involved only in administrative work.

The idea that the Gestapo itself was constantly spying on the population is demonstrably a myth.

So how was it possible that so few people exercised such control?

The simple answer is because the Gestapo received enormous help from ordinary Germans. Like all modern policing systems, the Gestapo was only as good or bad as the cooperation it received - and the files reveal that it received a high level of cooperation, making it a very good secret police force indeed.

Only around 10 per cent of political crimes committed between 1933 and 1945 were actually discovered by the Gestapo; another 10 per cent of cases were passed on to the Gestapo by the regular police or the Nazi Party. This means that around 80 per cent of all political crime was discovered by ordinary citizens who turned the information over to the police or the Gestapo. The files also show that most of this unpaid cooperation came from people who were not members of the Nazi Party - they were ‘ordinary’ citizens.

Yet there was never a duty to denounce or inform. The mass of files in the Würzburg archive came into being because some non-party member voluntarily denounced a fellow German. Far from being a proactive organization that resolutely sought out its political enemies itself, the Gestapo’s main job was sorting out the voluntary denunciations it received.

The files teem with stories that do not reflect well on the motives of those who did the denouncing. One file tells of a Jewish wine-dealer from Würzburg who was having an affair with a non-Jewish woman who had been a widow since 1928. He had been staying overnight with her since 1930 and they had declared their intention of getting married. The file demonstrates how Hitler’s becoming Chancellor coincided with the widow’s neighbours starting to voice objections to the presence of the Jewish man and confronting him on the communal stairs. As a result, he stopped staying overnight with the widow, but continued to help her out financially and to eat with her.

Then, a 56-year-old woman who lived in the same house sent a denunciation to the Gestapo. Her main complaint was that she objected to the widow having a relationship with a Jew, although it was not then an offence. From correspondence between the party and the police it becomes clear that she and a male neighbour pressurized the party into taking action. The local Nazi Party then put pressure on the SS, who, in August 1933, marched the Jewish man to the police station with a placard around his neck. The placard, with its despicable message painted in blood red, is still carefully preserved in the file. In neatly stencilled letters it reads, ‘This is a Jewish male, Mr Müller. I have been living in sin with a German woman.’ Herr Müller was then kept in jail for several weeks before leaving Germany altogether in 1934. He had broken no German law.

Denunciations became a way in which Germans could make their voices heard in a system that had turned away from democracy; you see somebody who should be in the army but is not - you denounce them; you hear somebody tell a joke about Hitler - you denounce them as well. Denunciations could also be used for personal gain; you want the flat an old Jewish lady lives in - you denounce her; your neighbours irritate you - you denounce them too.

During his many months of research in the Würzburg archive Professor Gellately struggled hard to find a’hero’ - someone who had stood up to the regime, an antidote, if you like, to the bleak aspect that the study of the Gestapo files casts on human nature. He believed he had found just such a person in Ilse Sonja Totzke, who went to Würzburg as a music student in the 1930s.

Her Gestapo file reveals that she became an object of suspicion for those around her.

The first person to denounce her was a distant relative, who said that she was inclined to be too friendly to Jews and that she knew too much about things that should be of no concern to women, such as military matters. This relative said that he felt driven to tell the Gestapo this because he was a reserve officer (though there was nothing in being a reserve officer that required him to do so).

Totzke was put under general surveillance by the Gestapo, but this surveillance took a strange form: it consisted of the Gestapo asking her neighbours to keep an eye on her.

There follows in the file a mass of contradictory evidence supplied by her neighbours. Sometimes Totzke gave the ‘Hitler greeting’ (Heil Hitler) and sometimes she didn’t, but overall she made it clear that she was not going to avoid socializing with Jews (something which at this point was not a crime). One anonymous denouncer even hinted that Totzke might be a lesbian (‘Miss Totzke doesn’t seem to have normal predispositions’). But there is no concrete evidence that she had committed any offence.

Nonetheless, it was enough for the Gestapo to bring her in for questioning. The account of her interrogation in the file shows that she was bluntly warned about her attitude, but the Gestapo clearly didn’t think she was a spy, or guilty of any of the outlandish accusations made against her. She was simply unconventional. The denunciations, however, kept coming in, and eventually the file landed on the desk of one of the most bloodthirsty Gestapo officials in Würzburg - Gormosky of Branch 2B, which dealt with Jews.

On 28 October 1941 Totzke was summoned for an interrogation. The Gestapo kept an immaculate record of what was said. Totzke acknowledged that, ‘If I have anything to do with Jews any more, I know that I can reckon on a concentration camp.’

But despite this, she still kept up her friendship with Jews and was ordered once more to report to the Gestapo. She took flight with a friend and tried to cross the border into Switzerland, but the Swiss customs officials turned her over to the German authorities. In the course of a long interrogation conducted in southwest Germany, she said:

‘I, for one, find the Nuremberg Laws and Nazi anti-Semitism to be totally unacceptable. I find it intolerable that such a country as Germany exists and I do not want to live here any longer.’

Eventually, after another lengthy interrogation in Würzburg, Totzke was sent to the women’s concentration camp at Ravensbrück, from which we have no reason to believe she ever returned. Her courage cost her her life.

We decided to follow up Professor Gellately’s research with this file by trying to find living witnesses to Totzke’s denunciation. Eventually we traced Maria Kraus, who had lived with her parents less than a hundred metres from Totzke. At the time we interviewed her, she was 76 years old and no different in appearance from any of the respectable elderly ladies one sees on the streets of Würzburg, itself a solid, respectable town.

But lying in Totzke’s Gestapo file there is a denunciation signed by a 20-year-old Maria Kraus on 29 July 1940. The statement begins: ‘Maria Theresia Kraus, born 19.5.20, appeared in the morning at the Secret State Police.’

During our own interview with her we read her the statement, which includes the section:

‘Ilse Sonja Totzke is a resident next door to us in a garden cottage. I noticed the above-named because she is of Jewish appearance.. . I should like to mention that Miss Totzke never responds to the German greeting [Hell Hitler]. I gathered from what she was saying that her attitude was anti-German. On the contrary she always favoured France and the Jews. Among other things, she told me that the German Army was not as well equipped as the French… Now and then a woman of about 36 years old comes and she is of Jewish appearance … To my mind, Miss Totzke is behaving suspiciously. I thought she might be engaged in some kind of activity which is harmful to the German Reich.’

The signature ‘Resi Kraus’ is under the statement. We asked Frau Kraus if it was her signature. She agreed that it was but said that she did not understand how the document could exist. She denies having given the statement and has no recollection of ever visiting the Gestapo. ‘I do not know,’ she told us. ‘The address is correct. My signature is correct. But where it comes from I do not know.’

Whether Resi Kraus’s amnesia was genuine or merely diplomatic is impossible to say. Of course, it is scarcely in anyone’s interests today to confess to having denounced one’s neighbour to the Gestapo. In a telling remark at the end of our brief interview with her she said: ‘I was talking to a friend of mine and she said “Good God! To think that they rake it all up again fifty years later”…I mean I did not kill anyone. I did not murder anyone.’

But, in fact, she did. Just as everyone who does not stand up against the Fascism galloping across the planet is just as guilty of murder as the one who commits the act.

Egotistic thought-terrorization is accomplished by the society itself and its processes of conversive thinking. This obviates the need for censorship of the press, theater, or broadcasting, as a pathologically hypersensitive censor lives within the citizens themselves. [Andrew Lobaczewski, Political Ponerology]

Let’s keep in mind that the entire German people were held responsible for the acts of the Nazis. This, of course, begs the question as to why it is now considered morally reprehensible for the Jews to be held responsible for the actions of the Zionist government against the Palestinians. I don’t agree with either because it is clear that those people who lack adequate psychological knowledge become the victims of psychopaths everywhere, whether Jew, Arab, Gentile or Hottentot.

I still have the image in my mind of Frau Kraus as we left her, after the interview, standing in the cobbled town square of Würzburg; a profoundly unexceptional figure and thus a deeply troubling one. If you want to believe there is a difference in kind between those who may have aided the Nazi regime and those who definitely did not, then a meeting with Frau Kraus is a shocking one, for in all respects, other than the denunciation signed with her name that lies in the Gestapo file, she appears an ordinary, decent woman - some­one who kindly enquired how old my children were and where we planned to go for our holidays. [The Nazis: A Warning From History]

And so it is.

Now, I want to come back to one particular paragraph quoted in Passengers May Be Sued in Imams’ Removal:

The civil rights lawsuit, filed earlier this month, has so alarmed some lawyers that they are offering to defend the unnamed "John Doe" passengers listed as "possible defendants" free of charge. They say it is vital that the flying public be able to report suspicious behavior without fear of being dragged into court.

Let’s think about that in light of the recent Prosecutors Purge scandal where it is becoming more evident every day that Bush and the Ziocons made a decision to get rid of any attorney’s that were not supportive of the Bush program. Back in Hitler’s day it was called ‘Working towards the Führer’. Different words, same meaning.

Firing a bunch of Prosecutors that do not "toe the party line" is a sure way to put a chilling effect on the whole system. And certainly, exhibits of torture photos are a sure way to make the public afraid and willing to be "see things the right way" and turn in people for no reason other than not being like them.

And then, of course, there was the trial of attorney Lynne Stewart. She was convicted of "violating special administrative prison rules and of providing material support to terrorists." Remember the Rules of the Inquisition?

A person suspected of Cathar sympathies was not always informed of the charges hanging over his head; if apprised of the danger, he had no right to know who his accusers were; and if he dared to seek legal help, his lawyer could be charged with abetting heresy.

Whatever the verdict of the inquisitor - who was prosecutor, judge and jury - no appeal was allowed. Anyone could be held indefinitely in prison for further questioning without cause of explanation.

Jennifer Van Bergen wrote about Lynne Stewart in CounterPunch:

Only a few weeks ago, Assistant U.S. Attorney Anthony Barkow told the jury in his closing statement that Lynne Stewart "thought she could blow off the rules that apply to everyone else because she’s a lawyer, and she’s above the law. She said, ‘I think my client is more important than the law. My cause is more important that the risk to lives of innocent people.’

This is a complete distortion of the woman I have come to know. […]

Lynne Stewart never ever thought she could blow off the rules that apply to everyone else. She never thought she was above the law. She never supported or endorsed terrorism. Nor did she ever intend to provide material support to terrorists.

The words she spoke to her client were meant for her client alone and the one who has violated rights here is the Department of Justice. They violated something so sacred that it can hardly be spoken without somehow losing the value of it: they violated the attorney/client privilege.

The DOJ violated this privilege by listening in on her conversations with her client, which they then took out of context and tried to make into a monstrous thing.

But is anyone prosecuting them for this violation? No.

The DOJ has violated something more, as well. They have violated the right of an accused to have zealous counsel represent them. This right is so fundamental that our Framers put it in the Bill of Rights: the Sixth Amendment right to counsel.

The DOJ has violated the last vestige of democracy: the judiciary, by using this system to destroy one of the watchdogs of liberty, our criminal defense lawyers. Without criminal defense lawyers, who will protect us from government incursions of our rights?

Now, the idea of a convicted terrorist having any sort of privilege is perhaps unfathomable to a jury. But that privilege is considered sacrosanct and we all have it, we all may call upon the attorney/client privilege because without it, we have no defense attorneys, we have no defense, and we have no witnesses to government abuse of our rights.

Lynne continued to believe in her client’s innocence, and to declare that evidence against him was fabricated by our government in order to secure his conviction.

Has this fact come out anywhere? Has any newspaper revealed that the client Stewart represented was convicted on fabricated evidence? Have any of them investigated the charge? Has the Department of Justice investigated it?

No? Why not?

Well, as far as I know, Lynne never brought this charge out to the press during her trial. But it was certainly known to the DOJ. And if it is true that her client was convicted on fabricated evidence, what does it mean that she is now convicted because of her representation of him? […]

This day, while I do not want to believe that the prosecutors themselves maliciously prosecuted Stewart, the best I can believe is that they have blinded themselves with their own zeal. But I have seen prosecutors and government officials declare what they should have known were untruths about the law, what I knew were untruths and if they didn’t know they were untruths, they could only have been ignorant of the law.

This day the Justice Department has done a great injustice, not just to Lynne Stewart, but to our entire system of justice, to our country, and to our democracy.

Jennifer Van Bergen must not know her medieval history very well or she would recognize exactly what is happening in America today. Just as the Inquisition was declared to be a War for Salvation of Souls, but in reality, was a war for Control, so is the United States "War on Terror" in reality a Terrorist War Against Freedom.

Which brings us back to our consideration of the Imams’ case against the denunciations by ordinary U.S. citizens who just think they are "being good":

The inquisition destroyed the bonds of trust that hold societies together. Informing on one’s neighbor became not only a duty, but a necessary survival strategy.

And so it was in Nazi Germany and is becoming the norm in America today. Remember:

Egotistic thought-terrorization is accomplished by the society itself and its processes of conversive thinking. This obviates the need for censorship of the press, theater, or broadcasting, as a pathologically hypersensitive censor lives within the citizens themselves. [Andrew Lobaczewski, Political Ponerology]

What has happened in the conviction of Lynne Stewart is that, just as was done during the Inquisition and in Nazi Germany, a clear message has been sent to those who might try to stand up for the freedom of the individual and that message is: If you defend the right of the individual against the predations of the State, YOU are going to be destroyed. And so, there will be no more defense of anyone’s rights.

This is not a legal system, it is a system designed to create fear, to destroy social bonds, and to put absolute power into the hands of a few, immoral elitists.

Martin Niemöller, a German Protestant pastor learned this lesson the hard way.

Niemöller was a commander of a German U-boat in World War I. A seminal incident in his moral outlook, as he related in many public speeches later in his life, occurred when he commanded his submarine crew not to rescue the sailors of a boat he torpedoed, but let them drown instead.

In 1931 Niemöller became a pastor in a wealthy Berlin suburb. As a German nationalist he initially supported Hitler, but as the Nazis began to interfere in church affairs, he moved into opposition.

In 1937 he was arrested because of his outspoken sermons, and sent to Sachsenhausen concentration camp. In 1941 he was moved to Dachau, where he stayed until the end of the war.

Shortly after the end of the war Niemöller became convinced that the German people had a collective responsibility for the Nazi atrocities. In October 1945 Niemöller was the prime mover behind the German Protestant Church’s "Confession of Guilt".

It was clearly in this Oct/Nov 1945 context that Niemöller’s most quoted saying began to evolve. This early statement implies that he may have thought first of the Communists, then the disabled, then Jews, and finally countries conquered by Germany.

In a 6 January 1946 speech, Niemöller said:

We preferred to keep silent. We are certainly not without guilt/fault, and I ask myself again and again, what would have happened, if in the year 1933 or 1934 - there must have been a possibility - 14,000 Protestant pastors and all Protestant communities in Germany had defended the truth until their deaths? If we had said back then, it is not right when Hermann Göring simply puts 100,000 Communists in the concentration camps, in order to let them die, I can imagine that perhaps 30,000 to 40,000 Protestant Christians would have had their heads cut off, but I can also imagine that we would have rescued 30-40,000 million people, because that is what it is costing us now.

In 1947 his reputation was challenged because he devoted substantial energy to protecting Nazi war criminals from the death penalty, and because of some pro-German things he had said in his own defense while on trial by the Nazis in 1937. However, during the 1950s and 1960s he refused to join in the dominant anti-communist sentiment in the West, which earned him the respect of the left again. His uncompromising stance allowed him to remain a figurehead of the German peace movement into the 1980s.

Niemöller’s famous quote generally runs as follows:

First they came for the Communists, but I was not a Communist, so I said nothing.

Then they came for the Social Democrats, but I was not a Social Democrat, so I did nothing.

Then came the trade unionists, but I was not a trade unionist.

And then they came for the Jews, but I was not a Jew, so I did little.

Then when they came for me, there was no one left to stand up for me.’

Many people use this quotation in various ways. Some of them even alter it to suit their purpose. When Time magazine used the quotation, they moved the Jews to the first place and dropped both the communists and the social democrats. American Vice-President Al Gore likes to quote the lines, but drops the trade unionists for good measure. Gore and Time also added Roman Catholics, who weren’t on Niemöller’s list at all. In the heavily Catholic city of Boston, Catholics were added to the quotation inscribed on its Holocaust memorial. The US Holocaust Museum drops the Communists but not the Social Democrats; other versions have added homosexuals.

‘The Nazis did not come first for the Jews," Peter Novick tells us in his book, The Holocaust in American Life, "First they came for the Communists" - a circumstance acknowledged by Niemöller. The Holocaust Museum in Washington DC is just another place where "Communists" is omitted from Niemöller’s homily. [Some interesting background on Niemöller can be found HERE]

Do you get it?

The gestapo and the Inquisition had no power without normal humans turning against each other because they believed the lies of psychopaths.

And so it is in America today: Categories of heretics have been established, and soon, it will become possible to hold the hammer of the New Inquisition over the heads of everyone.

And, when that day arrives, God’s Hammer will fall.

Because based on OTHER observations in our world, the crisis in Human Affairs is only a reflection of the "Heat" in our Solar System…

But didn’t I say I was going to end with a bit of hope?

Have I convinced you that we are living in a time to rival the period in which the Inquisition took over most of Europe and drove it to despair? That we are living in a time to rival the Nazi takeover of Germany?

Well, surely, by now, you know what that hope is, don’t you?

If, as I wrote above, the crisis in Human Affairs is a reflection of the "Heat" in our Solar System, just as there was obviously increasing heat in the solar system accompanying other periods of human crisis, and prior to other Cosmic Catastrophes, then the only hope is to wake up as many other people as possible with the hope of ameliorating the OUTCOME of any future disasters by being prepared. Only when a sufficient number of people are awake will they be able to awaken those around them. And then, and only then, will it be possible to form a united movement to simply remove all support from the psychopaths that have taken over our world and to begin to plan for the future of our children - not the offspring of psychopaths.

That is why they lie and deceive us; that is why they work so hard and spend so much money denying humanity the knowledge it needs. Because if people were awake, if people understood what kinds of creatures they really are, that they really are not human, then they would have no more support. And that is how the do what they do: because human beings support and help them to get into and stay in power by believing their lies.

If every soldier on the battlefield simply laid down his gun and refused to fight anymore, if every worker who is employed by the government system to keep the "chain of command" running, simply refused to participate in the madness anymore, and did so with the support of the rest of the people, en masse, the nightmare would be one big step toward being over.

Then, and only then, could we rationally and systematically begin to prepare our Planet Home for the Coming Storm. And even if all of us cannot survive - we can ensure that some of our children will, and they will survive without being reduced to howling savages, forced to eat their own kind in order to stay alive on a freezing planet with red skies, while the icy wind moans…

 

4 comments:

Eric said…

seems we have a choice of two evils, a simlple loose, loose situtaion

9:45 PM   agc said…

GOD bless you and thank you for the reference. Your comments concerning the medieval Cathar movement lack a coherent thread in terms of origin, history, doctrine and associations. However, we understand your intent is postive. May GOD bless you and bring you to a good End.

Brad Hoffstetter, Communications Division Assembly of good Christians. bhoffstetter@nyms.net www.cathar.net

10:50 PM   Marge said…

A very good posting here, Laura. My only comment– I would say that in this dreaded, quasi-imperial state that the US has become, we don’t resemble Nazi Germany as much as we do Britain at the height of the Victorian excesses of the British Empire.

Interwar Weimer Germany, after all, had not been a world power or an imperial power, as France and Britain had been– if anything, it went to war as an imitation of what France and Britain had been doing before, especially the Victorian British.

OTOH, the USA right now is top dog, the only superpower with a vast military empire (bases in over 100 countries), roughly akin to– and much more than– the United Kingdom had been during the 19th-century Victorian period. We don’t have anything akin to the resentment from WWI or Versailles, an excuse that perhaps the Weimar Germans had.

Like Victorian Britain, we are, at the moment, the world’s foremost political and economic power. The British, unfortunately for them (and their colonies), were a terrible military power, though. The British were defeated in Haiti in 1793 (as French authority waned), in two invasions of South America in 1805-1807 by Spanish-native forces led by a French soldier of fortune (Liniers), by Egypt (Muhammad Ali) and on multiple occasions by the Afghans, especially in the 1840’s and then the 1870’s. In fact, the Afghans defeated the British so badly in the First Anglo-Afghan War in the 1840’s, that the Afghan warriors annihilated an entire British army of close to 20,000 http://www.mindfully.org/Reform/Retreat-From-Kabul.htm . The British were also heavily defeated in the first Anglo-Boer War (around 1880 or so). The French and Belgians e.g. faced some tough opponents in their own colonies and were never defeated like that.

So to make up for military mediocrity, the British employed tremendous cruelty against civilians in the native lands in a desperate attempt to forestall rebellions. After the First Indian War of Independence (the Sepoy Rebellion) in 1857, the British hanged women and children from trees in occupied India, while burning down Indian croplands and seizing other farms for opium and cotton– which directly killed tens of millions of people in India in the late 1800’s.

The British also deliberately targeted aborigines in Australia and New Zealand for murder and nearly wiped them out with their firearms, while pushing opium on China and, of course, establishing the first concentration camps in South Africa during the Boer War. Also, quite topically– the British occupied Iraq (the country itself was a British invention after WWI, designed to get the oil and push the native peoples against each other), but the Iraqis rebelled, and the British used RAF terror-bombing against them. That fool, Arthur Bomber Harris, cut his teeth in the Iraq campaign.

In imperial Britain at the time, unsurprisingly, the poor were brutally exploited and dissent at home was suppressed. Britain was a "democracy" in name only– only very wealthy, property-owning White men could vote until well into the 20th century. Scandinavian countries, Germany and others extended the franchise to other groups well before the British did.

Thus, imperial Britain is probably the best historical analogy for the USA today, not Nazi Germany. Like the 19th-century UK, the United States is basically the top dog, yet despite this, we brutally impose ourselves and our military upon lands far away from our own, and upon cultures vastly different from our own. And we kill millions of civilians in the process, as we did in Vietnam, if not quite so blatantly as the British did.

Furthermore, and perhaps most relevant, the United States military, like that of the British, is vastly overrated. The British were smashed on numerous occasions by colonial enemies far inferior technologically. Today, the United States, with one of the most powerful militaries in history, is being humiliated by Iraqis without outside assistance (as the Vietnamese had gotten from Russia), and with a tiny, tiny fraction of US military resources. And so we lash out with cruelty in frustration, as the Victorian British did.

1:46 AM   Neil said…

^^

"And we kill millions of civilians in the process, as we did in Vietnam, if not quite so blatantly as the British did."

Ahem. Would someone kindly explain to me how round-the-clock high-altitude bombing sorties over urban centres of the Vietnamese civilian population (I believe the term for it was ‘pacification’) can be described as "lashing out with cruelty in frustration"??

12:57 AM  

 

 

Links to this post

 

 

Uncategorized 2:47 pm

 

by Laura Knight-Jadczyk & Henry See

©n/a
Are we past our due date?

Often, some of the most important news comes from local papers, stories that don’t make it up the feeding chain and onto the news wires or major newspapers or nightly network news. It can be news that at first glance wouldn’t appear to have a national or international impact. Second glance, and a good memory, can reveal that the impact may well be quite significant.

The other day a reader sent us an article link that he found on another alt.news website: Bad news - we are way past our ‘extinct by’ date

Since we had run the same story back when it first came out, we thought "yeah! Flashback!" After all, with all the talk about Global Warming, it served to remind readers that human caused CO2 levels are not all there is to what is going on here on the BBM today.

Later in the evening, we had a conversation here at SOTT Central about this article and how it relates to a book that is currently being passed around in the house here: The Cycle of Cosmic Catastrophes: Flood, Fire, and Famine in the History of Civilization by Richard Firestone, Allen West, Simon Warwick-Smith. This book is about the "Event" that took place about 12,000 years ago that is recorded in myth and legend variously as the Fall of Atlantis and Noah’s Flood. Plato describes a destruction that occurred in a day and a night, and the Bible recounts the story of torrential rains and an immense flood in which most of the life on earth perished. There is also a rich body of Native American literature about a worldwide cataclysm of fires, followed by floods and death raining down from the skies. As many as fifty different cultures around the globe record versions of this story, and physicist Firestone, along with his geologist co-authors, have put together a book, based on hard scientific evidence, describing a cosmic chain of events that they believe culminated in the global catastrophe of 12,000 years ago. They believe that the Event was triggered by a nearby supernova that occurred 41,000 years ago.

Regular readers of SOTT are familiar with my Cassiopaea website and the experiment in superluminal communication that I began in 1992 which finally bore fruit in 1994 on the day that the fragments of Comet Shoemaker Levy began impacting the planet Jupiter. We find it amusingly synchronous that one of the themes of the Cassiopaean experiment is planetary destruction via a Comet Cluster that cycles through the solar system every 3,600 years as a consequence of the orbit of our Sun’s solar Companion, a smaller, dark, Twin Sun. As it happens, Firestone, West and Warwick-Smith also talk about a bombardment of Planet Earth by literally thousands of asteroids, comets, or other debris, though they attribute it to the supernova 28 or 29 thousand years earlier; that it took that long for the ejecta from the supernova - along with debris it kicked out of the Oort cloud - to reach Earth.

©NASA
Shoemaker-Levy Approaching Jupiter

With the idea that there is a Cometary Bombardment Cycle, we have naturally been alert to the fact that the last few years have brought increasing evidence that this theory is the correct one. This evidence includes the fantastic increase in the number of "moons" attached to Jupiter that have so recently been "discovered", as well as the increase in frequency of comets over the past few years, along with the astonishing increase in meteorites and fireballs entering Earth’s atmosphere and falling to earth. In some cases, these events have resulted in damage to human beings and property, and one recent case even resulted in deaths as we will see further on…

Anyway, to get back to our conversation about humanity being past its "extinct by" date, I mused that anybody with eyes and ears and a bit of scientific knowledge can look around and see that something is going on "out there". The problem is, of course, that the masses of humanity are so distracted by all the concerns of everyday life - many of which are quite serious nowadays, especially the threat of nuclear war brought to us by George W. Bush and the Ziocons - that most of them haven’t got a clue that they probably don’t have to worry about Global Warming. (And just because I say that people don’t have to worry about Global Warming doesn’t mean they don’t have to worry!)The evidence that is all around us nowadays even helps us to realize that there was nothing really magical or mysterious about the story of Noah. The Bible tells us that God told Noah that something was up, something was coming, and that he should build an ark and that would enable him and his family and a few critters to survive. But obviously, in this day and time, we really don’t need God to tell us that Something Wicked This Way Comes.

Then, of course, it was pointed out to me that it was the Cs that told me about the cycle of Cometary disasters. I thought about that for a moment and said, "well, partly". I did write about all of this in my book The Noah Syndrome back in 1985, long before the Cs proper ever introduced themselves. (This book was never published, but much of it is incorporated into Secret History.) Of course, back then, I had started from a purely metaphysical question: "Is there going to be an end of the world as described in the Bible, and if so, what does it really mean?" It was that question that lead to a deep study of the Bible, which then led to a realization that the destruction described in the book of Revelation was almost identical to what was described in the story of the Exodus, so whatever happened then, was being predicted to happen again. It wasn’t until I read Velikovsky’s Worlds in Collision that I realized that this was very likely talking about a bombardment of the Earth by rocks and bolides from space. Velikovsky, of course, attributed it to an errant planet Venus that came careening into the solar system just as Firestone et al attribute it to a supernova 41,000 years ago. The Cyclic Comet Cluster related to a Companion Sun explanation is a better fit to all the data, though a supernova could also be involved as well as a "Newcomer" to the Solar System.

In any event, what is perfectly clear is that the story of Noah and the story of Atlantis are apocryphal: : many groups of people survived the event of 12,000 years ago here and there, and very likely many of them survived because they realized what was coming. Afterward, in their stories and legends they ascribed their survival to the intervention of their particular deity to give that deity more authority.

Getting back to the article that started the discussion: Bad news - we are way past our ‘extinct by’ date, we are told:

Some say the world will end in fire, some say in ice, wrote Robert Frost. But whatever is to be our fate, it is now overdue.

After analysing the eradication of millions of ancient species, scientists have found that a mass extinction is due any moment now.

Their research has shown that every 62 million years - plus or minus 3m years - creatures are wiped from the planet’s surface in massive numbers. Even worse, scientists have no idea about its source.

‘There is no doubting the existence of this cycle of mass extinctions every 62m years. It is very, very clear from analysis of fossil records,’ said Professor James Kirchner, of the University of California, Berkeley. ‘Unfortunately, we are all completely baffled about the cause.’

This part of the article is actually quite disingenuous. It is well known that there are other major extinctions and the cycle is not ONLY every 62 million years! There is also a very strong signal for a 26 million year extinction cycle. The different estimates of the number of major mass extinctions in the last 540 million years are due mainly to what the individual researcher chooses as the threshold for naming an extinction event as "major" as well as what set of data he selects as the determinant measure of past diversity. As it happens, the 62 million event data stems mainly from marine fossil evidence.

The report, published in the current issue of , was carried out by Professor Richard Muller and Robert Rohde also from the Berkeley campus. They studied the disappearances of thousands of different marine species (whose fossils are better preserved than terrestrial species) over the past 500m years.

Their results were completely unexpected. It was known that mass extinctions have occurred in the past. During the Permian extinction, 250m years ago, more than 70 per cent of all species were wiped out, for example. But most research suggested that these were linked to asteroid collisions and other random events.

But Muller and Rohde found that, far from being unpredictable, mass extinctions occur every 62m years, a pattern that is ’striking and compelling’, according to Kirchner.

But what is responsible? Here, researchers ran into problems. They considered the passage of the solar system through gas clouds that permeate the galaxy. These clouds could trigger climatic mayhem. However, there is no known mechanism to explain why the passage might occur only every 62m years.

Alternatively, the Sun may possess an undiscovered companion star. It could approach the Sun every 62m years, dislodging comets from the outer solar system and propelling them towards Earth. Such a companion star has never been observed, however, and in any case such a lengthy orbit would be unstable, Muller says.

Or perhaps some internal geophysical cycle triggers massive volcanic activity every 62m years, Muller and Rohde wondered. Plumes from these would surround the planet and lead to a devastating drop in temperature that would freeze most creatures to death.

Unfortunately, scientists know of no such geological cycle.

‘We have tried everything we can think of to find an explanation for these weird cycles of biodiversity and extinction,’ Muller said. ‘So far we have failed. And, yes, we are due one soon, but I would not panic yet.’

©NASA
Coming Our Way
Well, they have a problem, don’t they? They think it’s coming and, based on the ancient legends, it happens very fast and almost without warning.

The classical "Big Five" mass extinctions identified by Raup and Sepkoski in 1982 (interestingly, right about the same time I started asking questions about Revelations culminating in The Noah Syndrome in 1985!) are widely agreed upon as some of the most significant. They are:

The late Ordovician period (about 438 million years ago) - 100 families extinct - more than half of the bryozoan and brachiopod species extinct.

78 million years later:

The late Devonian (about 360 mya) - 30% of animal families extinct.

106 million years later:

At the end of the Permian period (about 245 mya) - Trilobites go extinct. 50% of all animal families, 95% of all marine species, and many trees die out.

37 million years later:

The late Triassic (208 mya) - 35% of all animal families die out. Most early dinosaur families went extinct, and most synapsids died out (except for the mammals).

143 million years later:

At the Cretaceous-Tertiary (K-T) boundary (about 65 mya) - about half of all life forms died out, including the dinosaurs, pterosaurs, plesiosaurs, mosasaurs, ammonites, many families of fishes, clams, snails, sponges, sea urchins and many others.

As you can see from the above, using the number "62 million years" and building a theory on it is really a bit misleading. But does that mean we have nothing to worry about? Nope. Read on.

Raup and Sepkoski are mentioned as identifying the "Big Five", but the fact is that Sepkoski, a University of Chicago paleontologist suggested that the extinction of the dinosaurs 65 million years ago was part of a 26 million year cycle!! However, I would like to mention that if you multiply the 26: 3 X 26 is 78 - which just happens to be the time between the Ordovician and Devonian extinctions; 4 X 26 is 104 which is very close to the 106 million years between the Devonian and Permian extinctions; and 5 X 26 is 130, which (when dealing with these kinds of numbers) is close enough to the gap between the Triassic and K-T extinction to be in the ballpark. So, maybe there is something to this 26 million year thing after all, only each "return" has varying effects based on many other solar system variables. A companion star with a 26 million year orbit might be more stable, since Muller has suggested that a 62 million year orbit is too great to be stable.

As it happens, if we postulate the 26 million year orbit of a Companion Star, we would find that there ought to be a return about 39 million years ago, and then another 13 million years ago, which would put us half-way in the Companion star orbit cycle. Wherever the theorized Twin Sun might be at the moment, which we will talk about further on, what we know is that there are other extinction events of great magnitude that seem to have little to do with a 62 million year cycle and a great deal to do with some other cycle. Another thing that is clear is that extinction events occur far more frequently than the general public is aware of and yes, we are way overdue for one.

Leaving the possible triggers for mass extinctions for the moment, let’s look at some hows extinctions might occur. Here is a handy little run-down of the problem:

Ways to Destroy Life

Of all the ways in which scientists have proposed that it is possible to cause a mass extinction here are a few of the front runners. Conceptually there are 4 main ways:

1. Freeze it (Snowball Earth)

2. Boil it (Greenhouse Earth)

3. Drop a meteor on it ( Meteor Impact)

4. Cover it with ash and Lava ( Giant Volcanic Eruption)

It is important to realise that numbers 3 and 4 are essentially ways which have been put forward to explain 1 and 2, though Snowball earth and Greenhouse earth are still theories in their own right, as they are to some extent self replicating, i.e. we rather get stuck in vicious circles as the more we warm the earth, the more greenhouse gasses we can potentially release, (at least in theory).

Now that’s all very well and good but, how do these physical effects [1 and 2 alone] cause mass extinctions?

The simplest answer to this is climate. Every species alive on earth today and so presumably in the past is adapted to a certain range of conditions. In the same way that if we were suddenly whisked off to the North Pole and expected to live there for a year with only a wooly jumper and a Mars bar, we would surely die. It is the same in an extinction event, climatic zones essentially shift around the globe (so us being placed on the north pole is not as far fetched as you first thought), or ecosystems are starved of light or nutrients. This results in plants and animals being out of equilibrium with their surroundings, this not only causes the death of individuals but whole species. With the death of a species there is a gap in the food chain, and so even animals which have adapted to the new climate find themselves with no food so die out and so on…

EXTINCTION PROBLEMS IN A STRANGE ECOSYSTEM

If we consider the example of us at the North Pole, but this time with a whole box of Mars bars, assuming we did not freeze to death in the first day, we would slowly become more accustomed to the cold, maybe we would find shelter from the cold, but either way as soon as our prey (the Mars Bars) ran out, unless we found an alternative source of food we would starve. To create a more dynamic ecosystem let us assume we provide a food source for another organism such as a polar bear, now if we died what would the polar bear eat?

Unfortunately my example falls down here as no one is going to believe that without us eating Mars bars they’re going to reproduce uncontrollably. However, in our North Pole ecosystem of Mars bars, us and Polar bears, let us assume we find extra clothes and shelter, so the cold no longer controls our numbers, and we manage to find the recipe and ingredients for mars bars (and by some freak coincidence they provide us with all the essential nutrients for life), in this case it would be the polar bears controlling our numbers since they are our direct predators. So if polar bears were wiped out, then our numbers would no longer be controlled, so our population would over many generations grow, until eventually we could no longer supply ourselves with mars bars, or we may have even eaten all the mars bars in the world. This would cause a huge population crash, or maybe even extinction of the human race (or at least those dependant on Mars Bars). This rather abstract example helps illustrate the point that all the trophic levels of a food chain (or web) need to be in place, otherwise there will be instability in all other populations.

The above description of how Global warming or cooling can cause mass extinctions is clever, but it does not take into account the creativity of human beings. Certainly, there could be massive reductions in the human population as a consequence of Global Warming or Cooling, but it would be unlikely to produce a mass extinction such as those for which we have evidence in the past.

Back in the 1940s Dr. Frank C. Hibben, Prof. of Archeology at the University of New Mexico led an expedition to Alaska to look for human remains. He didn’t find human remains; he found miles and miles of icy muck just packed with mammoths, mastodons, and several kinds of bison, horses, wolves, bears and lions. Just north of Fairbanks, Alaska, the members of the expedition watched in horror as bulldozers pushed the half-melted muck into sluice boxes for the extraction of gold. Animal tusks and bones rolled up in front of the blades "like shavings before a giant plane". The carcasses were found in all attitudes of death, most of them "pulled apart by some unexplainable prehistoric catastrophic disturbance."[Hibben, Frank, The Lost Americans (New York: Thomas & Crowell Co. 1946)]

©RPP
The evident violence of the deaths of these masses of animals, combined with the stench of rotting flesh, was almost unendurable both in seeing it, and in considering what might have caused it. The killing fields stretched for literally hundreds of miles in every direction.[ibid.] There were trees and animals, layers of peat and moss, twisted and tangled and mangled together as though some Cosmic mixmaster sucked them all in 12000 years ago, and then froze them instantly into a solid mass. [Sanderson, Ivan T., "Riddle of the Frozen Giants", Saturday Evening Post, No. 39, January 16, 1960.]

Just north of Siberia entire islands are formed of the bones of Pleistocene animals swept northward from the continent into the freezing Arctic Ocean. One estimate suggests that some ten million animals may be buried along the rivers of northern Siberia. Thousands upon thousands of tusks created a massive ivory trade for the master carvers of China, all from the frozen mammoths and mastodons of Siberia. The famous Beresovka mammoth first drew attention to the preserving properties of being quick-frozen when buttercups were found in its mouth.

What kind of terrible event overtook these millions of creatures in a single day? Well, the evidence suggests an enormous tsunami raging across the land, tumbling animals and vegetation together, to be finally quick-frozen for the next 12000 years. But the extinction was not limited to the Arctic, even if the freezing at colder locations preserved the evidence of Nature’s rage.

Paleontologist George G. Simpson considers the extinction of the Pleistocene horse in North America to be one of the most mysterious episodes in zoological history, confessing, "no one knows the answer." He is also honest enough to admit that there is the larger problem of the extinction of many other species in America at the same time. [Simpson, George G., Horses, New York: Oxford University Press) 1961] The horse, giant tortoises living in the Caribbean, the giant sloth, the saber-toothed tiger, the glyptodont and toxodon. These were all tropical animals. These creatures didn’t die because of the "gradual onset" of an ice age, "unless one is willing to postulate freezing temperatures across the equator, such an explanation clearly begs the question." [Martin, P. S. & Guilday, J. E., "Bestiary for Pleistocene Biologists", Pleistocene Extinction, Yale University, 1967]

Massive piles of mastodon and saber-toothed tiger bones were discovered in Florida. [Valentine, quoted by Berlitz, Charles, The Mystery of Atlantis (New York, 1969)] Mastodons, toxodons, giant sloths and other animals were found in Venezuela quick-frozen in mountain glaciers. Woolly rhinoceros, giant armadillos, giant beavers, giant jaguars, ground sloths, antelopes and scores of other entire species were all totally wiped out at the same time, at the end of the Pleistocene, approximately 12000 years ago.

This event was global. The mammoths of Siberia became extinct at the same time as the giant rhinoceros of Europe; the mastodons of Alaska, the bison of Siberia, the Asian elephants and the American camels. It is obvious that the cause of these extinctions must be common to both hemispheres, and that it was not gradual. A "uniformitarian glaciation" would not have caused extinctions because the various animals would have simply migrated to better pasture. What is seen is a surprising event of uncontrolled violence. [Leonard, R. Cedric, Appendix A in "A Geological Study of the Mid-Atlantic Ridge", Special Paper No. 1 ( Bethany: Cowen Publishing 1979)] In other words, 12000 years ago, a time we have met before and will come across again and again, something terrible happened - so terrible that life on earth was nearly wiped out in a single day.

Harold P. Lippman admits that the magnitude of fossils and tusks encased in the Siberian permafrost present an "insuperable difficulty" to the theory of uniformitarianism, since no gradual process can result in the preservation of tens of thousands of tusks and whole individuals, "even if they died in winter." [Lippman, Harold E., "Frozen Mammoths", Physical Geology, (New York 1969)] Especially when many of these individuals have undigested grasses and leaves in their belly. Pleistocene geologist William R. Farrand of the Lamont-Doherty Geological Observatory, who is opposed to catastrophism in any form, states: "Sudden death is indicated by the robust condition of the animals and their full stomachs … the animals were robust and healthy when they died." [Farrand, William R., "Frozen Mammoths and Modern Geology", Science, Vol.133, No. 3455, March 17, 1961] Unfortunately, in spite of this admission, this poor guy seems to have been incapable of facing the reality of worldwide catastrophe represented by the millions of bones deposited all over this planet right at the end of the Pleistocene. Hibben sums up the situation in a single statement: "The Pleistocene period ended in death. This was no ordinary extinction of a vague geological period, which fizzled to an uncertain end. This death was catastrophic and all inclusive." [Hibben, op. cit.]

The conclusion is, again, that the end of the Ice Age, the Pleistocene extinction, the end of the Upper Paleolithic, Magdalenian, Perigordian, and so on, and the end of the "reign of the gods," all came to a global, catastrophic end about 12,000 years ago. [The Secret History of the World]

This is the event that Firestone, West and Warwick-Smith discuss in their book, The Cycle of Cosmic Catastrophes: Flood, Fire, and Famine in the History of Civilization, mentioned above.

But if the above accounts are the result of such a catastrophe, what might the Event itself be like? If you were to live to see it, what would you experience? The following is condensed and adapted from Chapter 11 of Firestone, West and Warwick-Smith’s book:

It begins with meteors failing like raindrops, a few here and there. Perhaps a few hit the sun, provoking large solar flares. The solar flares provoke colourful auroras even in the daytime sky. Then the day of the comets arrive. From horizon to horizon, growing larger every second, they streaked into the atmosphere, lighting up brighter than the sun.

Heated to immense temperatures by its passage through the atmosphere, the lethal swarm exploded into thousands of mountain-sized chunks and clouds of streaming icy dust. The smaller peices blew up high in the atmosphere, creating multiple detonations that turned the sky orange and red.

Then the largest comet smashed through the sheet of ice covering part of the northern hemisphere in what is now Hudson Bay. Other comets struck in Lake Michigan, Canada, Siberia and Europe. Then the ground shock waves hit, shaking the earth violently for ten minutes in great rolling waves and shudders. Fissures opened, trees shook and fell, and rivers and streams disappeared into the cracked earth.

Within seconds of the impact, the blast of superheated air expanded outward at more than 1,000 miles an hour, racing across the landscape, tearing trees from the ground and tossing them into the air, ripping rocks from mountainsides, and flash-scorching plants, animals, the earth, as well as any humans in its way. The only living things to survive would have been those who had sought shelter underground or underwater.

Across the upper part of North America and Europe, the immense energy from the multiple impacts blew a series of ever-widening, giant, overlapping bubbles that pushed aside the atmosphere to create a near vacuum inside. As the bubble passed by, the air pressure dropped making it difficult to breathe. Behind the expanding edge of the bubble, the Earth was stripped of the protective shield of the atmosphere. The blast had ejected tiny, fast-moving grains in all directions through the thin air. Some lodged into trees, plants and animals, while others went up only to fall back again at incredible speeds as there was no atmosphere to break their fall. At the same instant, high speed cosmic rays bombarded the area with radiation. Animals and humans dropped dead on the spot from the bombardment. Inanimate objects appeared to come to life and shiver and quak on the ground from the barrage.

When the outward push of the shock wave ceased, the vacuum began to draw back the air. As the expanded atmosphere rushed back toward the impact site, the bubbles collapsed, sucking white-hot gases and dust inwards at tornado speeds and then channelling them up and away from the ground. Some of the dust escaped from the Earth’s atmosphere while the rest flowed out as a red mushroom cloud that flattened out for thousands of miles across the upper atmosphere, blocking the sun and engulfing the Earth in darkness.

The dust and debris that was too heavy began crashing back down to earth. Still superhot from the blast, it gave off a powerful lavalike glow. The pieces landed on the continental ice sheet, instantly melting untold gallons of water that coursed off the ice sheet in all directions causing flooding.

The raging updraft through the hollow bubbles created an equally powerful downdraft of frigid, high-altitude air, travelling at hundreds of miles per hour. With temperatures exceeding 150 degrees F below zero, the downward stream of air hit the ground and radiated out from the many blast sites in all directions, flash-freezing within seconds everything it touched. The howling, frigid blast turned trees and plants into brittle ice statues and flash froze mastodons and mammoths with food in their mouths that we have uncovered still frozen in Siberia.

The rapid temperature fluctuations meant the end of millions of plants and animals…. but the destruction was only beginning.

The impacts and shock waves triggered enormous earthquakes along existing fault lines from the Carolinas to California while shaking awake dormant volcanoes from Iceland across to the Pacific. Erupting with furious activity, they spewed hot lava across the landscape and noxious chemicals into the air, adding to the already heavy cloud cover.

The impacts, the blast waves, and the eruptions started thousands of ground fires wherever there was fuel to feed them, some of which continued to burn for days. Fast-moving, wind-driven wildfires formed spiralling tongues of raging flames that twisted for thousands of feet into the air and the inferno raced through forests faster than birds and animals could flee. The roar of the fire shook the ground, and the fierce heat blew apart trees like bombs, exploded rocks like shrapnel grenades, and set off steam explosions wherever the fast-moving fire-front jumped across frozen ponds and streams. When the fires had finally burned themselves out, there was little left besides smoldering stumps and telltale charcoal strewn across the continents.

The noxious chemicals in the atmosphere fell back to earth as poisoned rain. In some places, the air was too toxic and oxygen-depleted to support life.

The impact in Hudson Bay sent up 200,000 cubic miles of the glacier, throwing off the icy debris that followed the pieces of the comet out across the continent. A rain of incandescent debris and chunks of steaming ice showered down across most of North America, Europe and Asia. Within minutes, the massive, low-flying clumps crashed into the Carolinas and the eastern seaboard, exploding into fireballs and gouging out the Carolina Bays, over 500,000 of them. Other lumps exploded across the plains from Nebraska and Kansas to Arizona.

©Fairchild Aerial Surveys for the Ocean Forest Company
Aerial view of some of the Carolina Bays taken in 1930

Pieces of flying ice and debris, large and small, fell from the Atlantic to the Pacific, from the Gulf of Mexico to the Arctic, from Europe over to Asia and even down to Africa. More than one-quarter of the planet was under siege.

But even that was not all.

The impact through the glacier at Hudson Bay sent high velocity meltwater surging under the ice sheet. The surges lifted and floated large sections of ice, causing monolithic ice blocks to slide southward along hundreds of miles of the ice front. Moving nearly as quickly as a horse is able, the blocks plowed over forests, shearing off the trees.

The oceans, too, were targets. Thousands of ice chunks and clouds of slushy water hit the Atlantic, exploding with colossal detonations. The multiple concussions triggered immense underwater landslides off the Carolinas and Virginia, releasing thousands of cubic miles of mud. In turn, the mud unleashed a 1,000 foot high tidal wave that raced away towards Europe and Africa at 500 miles an hour.

Nine hours later the wave hit, 1,000 feet tall at 400 miles per hour, probably taking with it some of the survivors of the first explosions. The wave broke over hundreds of miles inland, devastating everything in its path. Anything living on the coast was killed instantly.

Its momentum spent, the churning water paused briefly and then began its rush backwards to the coast, pulling with it the battered remains of plants and animals under its tow. The surge provoked, in turn, offshore landslides in Europe and Africa, sending a second round of megawaves back towards North and South America. Miles of coastland was hit by the 100 foot waves that triggered yet another wave of tsunamis that hit Europe and Africa once again. But little was left to damage.

Within minutes of the impacts, the subzero air and rising water vapour combined to produce heavy snow and sleet that reached as far south as Mexico, the Caribbean, and Northern Africa. In the south, the snow turned to rain and the northern hemisphere was under a steady downpour for months, a downpour of noxious water contaminated and deadly. Anyone lucky enough to survive was now a potential victim of acid, toxis metals, cyanide, formaldehyde, and arsenic, a combination that would kill many and render the rest gravelly ill.

The melted water of the glaciers had another effect: flooding into the North Atlantic, it turned off the ocean conveyor that brought warm water to the northern climes. Once shut off, coupled with the clouds of dust blocking the sun, the temperature fell drastically. Within days or weeks after the impacts, continental temperatures fell well below freezing, and a brutal ice age chill once again spread across the land, remaining in place for another thousand years.

And all of this in an instant, in less time than it takes to cook a meal or write an email.

©n/a
62 Million Years Ago A Dinosaur Meets Its Doom: Are We Next?

You will, of course, notice that "12,000 years ago" is just a rough estimate because some of the dates of their samples come back as old as 14 KYA and as recent as 10 KYA. When considering a 3600 year Comet Cluster Cycle, this range could cover more than one event. But what is important is that the main event did, apparently, happen in a single day and based on the scientific data collected by Firestone et al, it was one of the most horrifying events ever to happen on planet earth since modern Homo Sapiens appeared.

Why do I keep referring to a 3600 year cycle? Well, in addition to having been explicated within the context of the Cassiopaean experiment, it seems that this 3600 year period was important enough to certain ancient peoples that it was the basis of their mathematics.

Around 3,200 BC, the Sumerians devised their numerical notation system, giving special graphical symbols to the units 1, 10, 60, 600, 3,600. That is to say, we find that the Sumerians did not count in tens, hundreds and thousands, but rather adopted base 60, grouping things into sixties, and multiplying by powers of sixty.

Our own civilization utilizes vestiges of base 60 in the ways we count time in hours, minutes and seconds, and in the degrees of the circle.

Sixty is a large number to use as a base for a numbering system. It is taxing to the memory because it necessitates knowing sixty different signs (words) that stand for the numbers from 1 to 60. The Sumerians handled this by using 10 as an intermediary between the different sexagesimal orders of magnitude: 1, 60, 602, 603, etc. The word for 60, geš, is the same as the word for unity. The number 60 represented a certain level, above which, mutiples of 60 up to 600 were expressed by using 60 as a new unit. When they reached 600, the next level was treated as still another unit, with multiples up to 3,000. The number 3,600, or sixty sixties, was given a new name: šàr, and this, in turn, became yet another new unit.

So, they mystery is: why did the Sumerians enshrine the number 60 - and its multiple 60 X 60 - in their numbering system? Zecariah Sitchin believed that it was because there was a 10th planet in the solar system that had an orbit 3600 years long, and that they based their numbering system on the cycle of this event. But the evidence for the 10 planet - as a planet - and his related ideas, is rather skimpy, while the evidence for bombardment of the earth by masses of cometary debris is growing every day. Examining the hard data, it doesn’t take a genius to figure out that if there is something that returns every 3600 years, it is more likely to be a cluster of cosmic bodies than a 10th planet.

And that is bad news.

©Dartmouth, Classics Department
Santorini. View East from Nea Kammeni Volcano to Phirï on Crater Rim.

COMETS AND DISASTER IN THE BRONZE AGE

At a certain point in our history, the major civilisations of the world collapsed, simultaneously it seems. The Akkadian Empire in Mesopotamia, the Old Kingdom in Egypt, the Early Bronze Age civilisation in Israel, Anatolia and Greece, as well as the Indus Valley civilisation in India, the Hilmand civilisation in Afghanistan and the Hongshan Culture in China - the first urban civilisations in the world - all fell into ruin at more or less the same time. Not long afterward, in archaeological time, disaster overtook the Myceneans of Greece, the Hittites of Anatolia, the Egyptian New Kingdom, Late Bronze Age Israel, and the Shang Dynasty of China.

The reasons for these widespread and apparently simultaneous disasters - which coincided also with changes of cultures and societies elsewhere, such as in Britain - have long been a fascinating mystery. Traditional explanations include warfare, famine, and more recently ’system collapse’, but the apparent absence of direct archaeological or written evidence for causes, as opposed to the effects, has led many archaeologists and historians into a resigned assumption that no definite explanation can possibly be found.

Some decades ago, the hunt for clues passed largely into the hands of natural scientists. Concentrating on the earlier set of Bronze Age collapses, researchers began to find a range of evidence that suggested that natural causes rather than human actions, may have been initially responsible. There began to be talk of climate change, volcanic activity, and earthquakes - and some of this material has now found its way into standard historical accounts of the period.

Agreement, however, there has never been. Some researchers favoured one type of natural cause, others favoured another, and the problem remained that no single explanation appeared to account for all the evidence.

Over the past 15 years or so, however, a new type of ‘natural disaster’ has been much discussed and is beginning to be regarded, by many scholars, as the most probable single explanation for widespread and simultaneous cultural collapse, but not only in the Bronze Age but at another times as well. The new theory has been advanced largely by astronomers, and remains almost completely unknown amongst archaeologists (a few notable exceptions include the dendrochronologist Prof Mike Baillie of Queen’s University, Belfast, and Dr Euan MacKie at Glasgow University). The new idea is that these massive cultural disasters were caused by the impact of comets or other types of cosmic debris on the Earth. […]

Yet what was the cause of these earthquakes, eruptions, tidal waves, fire-blasts and climate changes? By the late 1970s, British astronomers Victor Clube and Bill Napier of Oxford University had begun to investigate cometary impact as the ultimate cause.. Then in 1980, the Nobel prizewinning physicist Luis Alvarez and his colleagues published their famous paper in Science that argued that a cosmic impact had led to the extinction of the dinosaurs. He showed that large amounts of the element iridium present in geological layers dating from about 65 million BC had a cosmic origin.

Alvarez’s paper had immense influence and stimulated further research by such British astronomers as Clube and Napier, Prof Mark Bailey of the Armagh Observatory, Duncan Steel of Spaceguard Australia, and Britain’s best known astronomer Sir Fred Hoyle. All now support the theory of cometary impact and loosely form what is now known as the British School of Coherent Catastrophism. […]

These scholars envisage trains of cometary debris which repeatedly encounter the Earth. We know that tiny particles of cosmic material penetrate the atmosphere every day, but their impact is insignificant. Occasionally, however, cosmic debris measuring between one and several hundred metres in diametre strike the Earth and these can have catastrophic effects on our ecological system, through multimegaton explosions of fireballs which destroy natural and cultural features on the surface of the Earth by means of tidal-wave floods (if the debris lands in the sea), fire blasts and seismic damage.

Depending on their physical properties, asteroids or comets that punctuate the atmosphere can either strike the Earth’s surface and leave and impact crater, such as the well-known Barringer Crater in Arizona caused by an asteroid made of iron some 50,000 years ago. At least ten impact craters around the world dating from after the last Ice Age, and no fewer than seven of these date from around the 3rd millennium BC - the date of the widespread Early Bronze Age collapses - although none occurred in the Near East.

Alternatively, comets and asteroids can explode in the air. A recent example - known as the Tunguska Event - occurred in 1908 over Siberia, when a bolide made of stone exploded about 5km above ground and completely devastated an area of some 2,000 km’ through fireball blasts. The cosmic body, although thought to have measured only 60 m across, had an impact energy of about 20 to 40 megaton, up to three times as great as the Arizona example (about 15 megaton), and was equivalent to the explosion of about 2,000 Hiroshima-size nuclear bombs - even though there was no actual physical impact on the Earth. […]

Until recently, the astronomical mainstream was highly critical of Clube and Napier’s giant comet hypothesis. However, the crash of comet Shoemaker-Levy 9 on Jupiter in 1994 has led to a change in attitudes. The comet, watched by the world’s observatories, was seen split into 20 pieces and slam into different parts of the planet over a period of several days. A similar impact on Earth, it hardly needs saying, would have been devastating.

According to current knowledge, Tunguska-like impacts occur every 100 years or so. It is, therefore, not farfetched to hypothesise that a super-Tunguska may occur every 2000, 3000 or 5000 years and would be capable of triggering ecological crises on a continental or even global scale. In the past, skeptics have demanded the evidence of a crater before they would accept an argument of cosmic impact, but it is now become understood that no crater is necessary for disastrous consequences to ensue. The difficulty this leaves scholarship, however, is that in a Tunguska Event no direct evidence is left behind. It may be impossible to prove that one ever took place in the distant past.

The extent to which past cometary impacts were responsible for civilisation collapse, cultural change, even the development of religion, must remain a hypothesis. But in view of the astronomical, geological and archaeological evidence, this ‘giant comet’ hypothesis should no longer be dismissed by archaeologists out of hand. [Dr Benny J Peiser: BRITISH ARCHAEOLOGY, December 1997, No 30, pp. 6-7. Dr Benny J Peiser is a historian and anthropologist at Liverpool John Moores University. With Mark Bailey and Trevor Palmer, he is editing "Natural Catastrophes during Bronze Age Civilisations" (Oxford: British Archaeological Reports, in preparation) ]

Among the many side-effects of cometary bombardments are earthquakes, tsunamis and volcanic eruptions. As it happens, there was a significant volcanic event at the time of the collapse of the Bronze Age civilizations that gives us a firmly fixed date: Thera. Recent developments published in the April 2006 issue of Science fix the date of the eruption between 1627 and 1600 B.C. with 95 % certainty. This, of course, is rejected by many archaeologists because they have spent their entire careers trying to date things according to the Bible, and it really upsets the apple cart to realize that they’ve been chasing an illusion.

©?
Rendering of a comet hitting the planet Mars

Yoshiyuki Fujii and Okitsugu Watanabe demonstrate that "large scale environmental changes possibly occurred in the Southern Hemisphere in the middle of the Holocene." [Microparticle Concentration And Electrical Conductivity of A 700 m Ice Core from Mizuho Station Antarctic, published in Annals of Glaciology (1-, 1988) pp. 38-42] (Within the last 10,000 years). Their depth profiles of microparticle concentration, electrical conductivity and Oxygen 18 at circa 1600 BC indicates a spike in readings for all of these elements. The evidence shows that this disturbance covered this designated period, but with a "huge spike" at c. 1600 BC.

Similar evidence exists at 5200 BC. This period shows less severe but similar climatological stress. The oxygen 18 profile is close to normal, but there is a visible volcanic dirt band. The dating of this segment is less close because it is clear that nobody is really looking for this cycle, but it appears to correspond to the ash band from the Byrd station core. [ cf. G. Cope Schellhorn, Ph.D.: Evidence of Cyclical Earth Changes, from When Men are Gods] In an article in Nature, November 1980, C.U. Hammer, H. B. Clausen and Dansgaard date a disturbance from the Camp Century ice core to 5470 BC +/- 120 years. This compares to the proposed Hekla eruption which was radiocarbon dated to 5450 BC +/- 190 years. There is an appreciably high acidity signal at these sections of the core which indicates a high level of volcanic activity - again, right at the 3600 year cycle mark.

It is conjectured that the cycle goes unnoticed because of long-term after-effects, such as cooling climate, as well as the fact that each cycle has greater or lesser effects on the earth depending on the particular dynamical interactions within the solar system at any disruption.

What is clear is that something happens at 3600 year intervals as shown by the ice cores, and is capable of setting off prolonged periods of earth changes that are above the levels of ordinary uniformitarian geologic and climatalogical changes.

Looking further: Michel R. Legrand and Robert J. Delmas of Laboratoire de Glaciologie et Geophysique de l’Environment published an article "Soluble Impurities in Four Antarctic Ice Cores Over the Last 30,000 Years" [Annals of Glaciology (10, 1988, pp 116-120)], in which they graphed the Oxygen 18 variations and the ionic components Na,NH 4 and Ca2 and H and Cl and NO3 and SO4. The time scale for each ionic component level as well as the O18 levels stretches back 30,000 years. The graph shows correlations to spikes at 5,200 BC, 8,800 BC, 12,400 BC, c. 16,000 BC, c. 19,600 BC. All of these were times of great geologic stress.

When looking at the data and taking into account the acknowledged dating inaccuracies (some of the ranges of dates can go 100 years in either direction of the spike, even though the spiking is regular and rhythmic) for the more recent dates, and 3 to 600 years variance for the older dates - especially when one considers that these are broad analyses and nobody was really looking for anything specific - they just said "wow! look at that wavy line!" - we find that the southern ice cores do not always register the same as the northern ones. The c. 1628 BC event that really slammed the tree rings in the northern hemisphere shows almost no registration in the Antarctic cores in terms of volcanic activity. But the northern cores show the activity beginning 1644 BC.

The evidence for the 5200 BC event is strong in the Dome C core. The 8,800 BC event is well marked - in fact, seems to be the strongest of them all. Keep in mind that this was 10,800 years ago - exactly within the range of dates reported by Herodotus and Plato. The oxygen 18 isotope variation is noticeable, the rise in sea-salt, elevated levels of C1 and C1/Na. There is an extreme spike in SO4 and H readings suggesting widespread volcanic activity - great earth changes were happening at that time, and they registered in the climate, the oceans, and were preserved in ice.

The 12,400 BC event is also extremely pronounced in the cores. The graphs show a quick, vast change including the end of the Wisconsin Ice Age. There is a great Oxygen 18 isotope variation as well as peaks of Na and very pronounced spikes in Ca, SO 4 and H.

There is absolutely no question that the Santorini event occurred. The acid signal in the ice core is very strong. Which means that there is very little question about when it occurred. Something very unusual and specific happened then, starting in 1644, and culminating in a major cataclysm, and it seems that it walked all over the Aegean and Anatolian area, leaving tracks that are impossible to miss. Impossible for anyone, that is, except Egyptologists and their kin.

All over the Mediterranean there were kingdoms and cultures that communicated and traded with one another. Reading the many books on each region, produced by the various experts on the different cultures, again and again one encounters the fact that a period of severe disruption was noted in the historical and archaelogical record. Somehow, such an event in one region is not necessarily connected to a similar event in another region. The idea that all of the disruptions in a given general time period may be simultaneous cannot be considered because it would disrupt the carefully constructed chronology that is based on endless acts of tetraphyloctomy. [Splitting a hair four ways; coined by Umberto Eco in Foucault’s Pendulum].

In his book Stratigraphic Comparée et Chronologie de l’Asie Occidentale, [London, Oxford University Press, 1948] Claude Shaeffer’s lifelong archaeological investigations led him to propose that a great natural catastrophe brought about the end of the Middle Kingdom in Egypt, and also devastated by fire and earthquake almost every other populated region of Crete, Cyprus, the Caucasus, Syria, Palestine, Persia, and Asia Minor in general. That’s one heck of a "local event." It is only logical to conclude that the Santorini event and the end of the Middle Bronze Age are one and the same event.

And it happened a little over 3,600 years ago.

In other words, we are overdue.

Now, let’s come back to what I mentioned above about being half-way through a 26 million year Companion Star orbit. We really have no idea where the theorized critter is or what it is up to, but we do have some clues. But the first question we want to ask is what is the relation between this companion star - Nemesis - and extinction? How can a star, way out beyond the solar system, have an effect on the third rock from the sun?

Far beyond the orbit of Pluto lies the Oort cloud.

©N/A
The Oort Cloud

The Oort cloud, alternatively termed the Öpik-Oort Cloud, is a postulated spherical cloud of comets situated about 50,000 to 100,000 AU from the Sun. This is approximately 2000 times the distance from the Sun to Pluto or roughly one light year, almost a quarter of the distance from the Sun to Proxima Centauri, the star nearest the Sun.

Click on the above image to study the larger copy. The solar system is engulfed by this cloud comprised of billions of comets. Imagine what would happen if a star passed through that cloud, knocking the comets in the same way a bowling ball sends bowling pins scattering in all directions. Imagine then a certain number of those comets heading towards the centre of the cloud, our sun and its solar system. The sun, being the largest object in the neighbourhood, would be the attraction point. The comets in the incoming cloud would be pulled into an orbit around the sun.

Although no direct observations have been made of such a cloud, it is believed to be the source of most or all comets entering the inner solar system (some short-period comets may come from the Kuiper belt), based on observations of the orbits of comets.

So far, only one potential Oort cloud object has been discovered; 90377 Sedna. With an orbit that ranges from roughly 76 to 928 AU, it is much closer than originally expected and may belong to an "inner" Oort cloud. If Sedna indeed belongs to the Oort cloud, this may mean that the Oort cloud is both denser and closer to the Sun than previously thought.

So, we have a mechanism which can hypothetically trigger the launching of a swarm of comets into the solar system. The orbit of the proposed binary twin of our sun conforms to the cycles of major extinctions on Earth. But it is still a hypothesis. More importantly, you might ask, even if we assign a high probability to the truth of the hypothesis, if these cycles of cometary swarms are kicked off anew every 26 million years, what evidence do we have that we are alive during one of the, shall we say, unlucky periods?

One of the corollaries of the Nemesis theory is that the dark companion might well become visible as a second sun in the sky when it approaches the sun. Is there any evidence that might suggest that people have ever seen a "second sun"?

In her book Comets and Popular Culture and the Birth of Modern Cosmology, Sara J. Schechner writes:

The sunny disposition of the weather during the coronation (of Charles II) was seen as the fulfillment of a prophecy. In 1630, at the time of Charles’ birth, a noonday star or rival sun allegedly had appeared in the sky. […]

Aurelian Cook in Titus Britannicus explained its import: ‘As soon as Born, Heaven took notice of him, and eyed him with a star, appearing in defiance of the Sun at Noonday….’

For Cook, the extra sun announced that Charles ruled by divine right. Moreover, the timing of Charles’ entry into London on his birthday was politically calculated to fulfill what had been portended at his birth. Abraham Cowley, poet, diplomat and spy for the court wrote: ‘No Star amongst ye all did, I beleeve, Such Vigorous assistance give, As that which thirty years ago, At Charls his Birth, did in despight of the proud Suns’ Meridian Light, His future Glories, this Year foreshow.

Edward Matthew devoted an entire book to the fulfillment of the prophecy declaring Charles "ordained to be the most Mighty Monarch in the Universe…"

Charles’ return was seen as a rebirth of England and duly recorded by a special act in the statute book, which proclaimed that 29 May was the most memorable Birth day not only of his Majesty both as a man and Prince, but likewise as an actual King…

Well, that certainly sounds like it fits the bill: 377 years ago a second sun appeared and no one, so far as I know, has ever linked this to either a comet or a supernova. Interestingly, it was followed thirty years later by the sighting of several comets.

But the 17th century was interesting for another anomaly involving our sun: the Maunder Minimum. Between the years 1645 and 1715, our sun stayed in a period of solar minimum.

During one 30-year period within the Maunder Minimum, for example, astronomers observed only about 50 sunspots, as opposed to a more typical 40,000&-50,000 spots. The Maunder Minimum coincided with the middle — and coldest part — of the so-called Little Ice Age, during which Europe and North America, and perhaps much of the rest of the world, were subjected to bitterly cold winters. Recently published research suggests that the Sun’s rotation slowed in the deep Maunder minimum (1666-1700).[1] At our current level of understanding of solar physics, a larger and slower Sun necessarily implies a cooler Sun that provides less heat to Earth.

Perhaps the close approach, astronomically speaking, of the dark companion was the cause of this dampening. The lower solar activity during the Maunder Minimum also affected the amount of cosmic radiation reaching the Earth. The resulting change in the production of carbon-14 during that period caused an inaccuracy in radiocarbon dating until this effect was discovered.

In total, carbon 14 analysis as well as tree rings and ice core studies indicate there seem to have been 18 periods of sunspot minima in the last 8,000 years, and studies indicate that the sun currently spends up to a quarter of its time in these minima. We can only speculate at the moment whether these cycles have a relationship to our dark companion and/or its cometary children.

Returning to our hypothesis, if we are correct, the dark star was seen 377 years ago. If it was in fact the companion, Nemesis, then the comets heading to the inner solar system should be heading our way. Depending on their locations and orbits in the Oort cloud, there would be variable groups - variable both in size and arrival time. Is there any evidence for this?

The third edition of the university textbook Exploration of the Universe, by George O. Abell, published in 1975, informs us that Jupiter has 9 moons as of 1974. It says:

The outer seven, however, have rather eccentric orbits, some of which have a large inclination to Jupiter’s equator. The four most distant satellites revolve from east to west, contrary to the motions of most of the other objects in the solar system. They may be former minor planets captured by Jupier. [p. 324]

Please note that Abell is suggesting that some of Jupiter’s moons have been captured by Jupiter’s gravity.

Now let’s time travel back to the future, and see what the latest information tells us about Jupiter’s moons:

Jupiter is now given 63 satellites. Forty-seven of those satellites have been discovered since 1999. What if they weren’t there before?

What about Saturn. Our 1975 text tells us that Saturn has 10 satellites. In 2007? Well, there are so many that one source declines to give a precise number!

However, counting the named satellites on the Timeline of discovery of solar system planets and their natural satellites gives us a count of 62, with 41 being discovered since 2000 and another ten in the 80’s and 90’s.

Moving outward, we come to Uranus, given five satellites in 1975, it now has 28, with ten being discovered in the 1980’s, six in the 90’s, and 7 since 2000.

Neptune had two satellies in 1975, now it has 13.

Planet 1975 2005
Jupiter
9
63
Saturn
10
62
Uranus
5
28
Neptune
2
13
Table 1. Number of moons

The explanation given most often to explain this surge in the numbers of satellites for these planets is that telescopes have gotten better. That is, we can see further, with greater detail, and can therefore find things that we couldn’t see before. It is an explanation that makes sense. One small problem with this theory is that the "new" moons of Neptune and Uranus showed up before the new moons of Jupiter and Saturn. One would think that powerful telescopes capable of finding moons as far away as the seventh and eighth planets would have found the hard to see moons of the fifth and sixth first.

Another possible explanation, and one which fits with new moons appearing around Nepture and Uranus prior to appearing around Jupiter and Saturn, is that these new moons, or some of them, are objects that have been trapped into orbits around these planets only recently, that they were captured by the gravity of these planets and removed from the incoming comet cloud. Passing the orbits of the outer planets first, they would arrive at the inner planets afterwards.

We also note that the much derided Immanuel Velikovsky, in his book Worlds in Collision, gives a time frame of nine years as the time it would take for a comet to cover the distance between Jupiter and Earth. The new Jovian moons were discovered beginning in the late nineties.

Do the math.

©Space Channel
Raindrops keep falling on our heads

Which brings us to a series of local stories that give impact a less than metaphoric meaning.

Friday, February 16 SOTT page brought us this story: Strange noise might have been meteor

By JIM SABIN, City Editor

NEWARK — Something happened at around 9 p.m. Wednesday that a lot of people heard, or even felt.

What it was, though, might forever remain a mystery.

"It" was a loud bang, something loud enough to be heard across southern and central Ohio, and loud enough to make small objects move in houses. Reports have rolled into The Advocate from Hanover to Heath, from Buckeye Lake to Granville, and NBC4 heard reports from Muskingum, Fairfield and Pickaway counties.

Rumors range from an earthquake to a meteor strike, a sonic boom to something ice-related. […]

Jeff Gill, of Granville, said he saw a meteor with a relatively long trail, with red, green and gold coloration. It was headed east to west and lasted about three seconds; after it faded, the sonic boom washed over him, he said.

"I saw it first. It was the most eerie, cool, scary, wonderful thing. You just see this dragon tail going across the sky," said Gill, who also writes a religion column for The Advocate. "All of a sudden, everything goes boom." […]

The reports came in from Ohio to New Jersey.

Notice the reference to the dragon tail. Could reports of meteorites be the basis for some of the ancient myths about dragons fighting in the sky? Check out Mike Baillie’s book Exodus to Arthur for more on that subject.

Some weeks ago, while much of the United States was watching the XLI Super Bowl, people in the Midwest were being treated to a different type of spectacle: Local residents witness meteor’s flaming flash.

If you saw a bright light with a flaming tail plummeting to earth Sunday night, you may have seen a minor meteor shower, according to reports in Wisconsin, Illinois and Iowa.

James T. Luedke of Ripon said he was driving in Green Lake County between 7:30 and 8 p.m. Sunday when he saw a "half-dollar sized flaming ball falling at a rapid speed to the earth" in the southern sky.

He described it as a round, orange flaming ball with a blue/green tail.

Kay Diederich of St. Cloud was driving out of the village about 7:50 p.m. with a friend when they saw a "ball of fire" shooting to the south.

"It almost looked like a plane crash," she said. Her friend is an EMT and she listened to her scanner, but no reports came in.

People across the Midwest reported seeing balls of fire streaking across the sky Sunday night, according to state news reports.

A preliminary report does indicate the objects came from a meteor. Most reports described the objects as bright lights with a flaming tail. Several of the objects were seen exploding when they hit the ground, according to WEAU. […]

Sightings were reported from Minnesota through Missouri and east through Illinois.

Then we have this report on February 7, 2007 from the United Kingdom: Meteor lights up the sky.

By Rachel PeggThe Argus

A meteor has been spotted falling to the Earth.

The shooting star was engulfed in bright flames as it shot towards the ground over Hangleton, Hove, at about 8.15pm yesterday. […]

Not to mention a report from Turkey: Meteorite lands in Didim

Friday, February 02Voices

POLICE were inundated with calls from scores of people from Didim to Bodrum after they heard a big bang and a flash of light across the skies.

Despite officers being unable to explain the flashing green, yellow and red lights, Voices has solved the phenomena.

It was not a UFO but a meteorite which crash through the earth’s atmosphere and landed in Yeşilkent.

A startled Abdullah Arıtürk revealed that the rock had smashed a hole in the ground at the Green Park Complex, at Yeşilkent, narrowly missing him by ten metres.

Police reported that people from Bodrum, Milas and Didim had heard a bang and seen the flashing light across the skies at about 5.30pm on Thursday (Jan 31).

Mr Arıtürk said: "I thought this was it. I thought it was the apocalypse. I saw the bang and the flashing lights and this rock smashed into the ground quite near me. It was very frightening."

After telling the Voices of his story, Mr Arıtürk is now awaiting scientists from Aegean University, in İzmir, to take the meteorite away for closer examination.

Fortunately, no one was hurt with these meteors, but people in India weren’t so lucky: Three Killed In Suspected Meteorite Fall In India’s Rajasthan

February 8th 2007

Three people were killed and four injured in a mysterious blast in a village in India’s northern Rajasthan state Thursday that villagers claim was caused by a meteorite, news reports said.

Residents of Banchola village in Bundi district, about 200 kilometres south of Rajasthan capital Jaipur, said the victims were sitting with some iron scrap in an open field when an "object" fell from the sky and hit them, IANS news agency reported.

"The matter is under investigation. We know that there was a blast but looking at the crater it does not seem that it happened due to a meteorite," a Bundi police official was quoted as saying by IANS.

He said the crater was just 8-10 inches in diameter and two inches deep. A team from the state-run forensic science laboratory in Jaipur was collecting evidence from the site, the official said.

Then there was the meteorite that crashed into a house in New Jersey recently and embedded itself in the wall: Possible Meteorite Crashes Through New Jersey Roof

By Chris NewmarkerAssociated Press

4 January 2007

FREEHOLD TOWNSHIP, N.J. — Authorities were trying to identify a mysterious metallic object that crashed through the roof of a house in eastern New Jersey.

Nobody was injured when the golf-ball sized object, weighing nearly as much as a can of soup, struck the home and embedded itself in a wall Tuesday night [image].

Federal officials sent to the scene said it was not from an aircraft.

The rough-surfaced object, with a metallic glint, was displayed Wednesday by police.

"There’s some great interest in what we have here," said Lt. Robert Brightman. "It’s rather unusual. I haven’t seen anything like it in my career."

He said he hoped to have the object identified within 72 hours, but declined to name the other agencies whose help he has enlisted.

Approximately 20 to 50 rock-like objects fall every day over the entire planet, said Carlton Pryor, a professor of astronomy at Rutgers University.

"It’s not all that uncommon to have rocks rain down from heaven," said Pryor, who had not seen the object that struck the Monmouth County home. "These are usually rocky or a mixture of rock and metal." […]

And the cottage destroyed by a meteorite in Germany in October 2006: German cottage destroyed by meteor .

Reuters

October 20, 2006

BERLIN - A fire that destroyed a cottage near Bonn and injured a 77-year-old man was probably caused by a meteor and witnesses saw an arc of blazing light in the sky, German police said on Friday.

Burkhard Rick, a spokesman for the police in Siegburg east of Bonn, said the fire gutted the cottage and badly burnt the man’s hands and face in the incident on October 10.

"We sought assistance from Bochum observatory and they noted that at that particular moment the earth was near a field of meteoroid splinter and it could be assumed that particles had entered the atmosphere," he said.

"The particles usually don’t reach the surface because they disintegrate in the atmosphere," he added. "But some can make it to the ground. We believe this was a bolide (meteoric fireball) with a size of no more than 10 mm."

And the falling ice that hit a car in Florida: Mysterious, Large Ice Chunk Falls on Tampa Man’s Car.

©n/a
Car dented by falling ice in Tampa.

1/28/2007 11pm report

TAMPA, FL (AP) — Raymond Rodriguez was changing a tire when an 18-inch chunk of ice plummeted from the sky with a piercing whistle, then a metallic crunch. The ice chunk crushed the roof of a nearby Ford Mustang on Sunday morning. No one was hurt.

"I was scared," Rodriguez said, who was only feet away. "It’s crazy, man."

The Federal Aviation Administration is reviewing flight schedules to see if the ice fell off a plane. The ice did not have a blue tint that would indicate it came from a plane’s lavatory. The National Weather Service said conditions in Tampa were not favorable for the formation of large balls of ice, known as megacryometeors.

"It’s not an act of God," said Carlos Javage, whose son’s car was wrecked by the mystery ice. "This came off an airplane."

So, what are we to make of this sudden appearance of so many "once in a lifetime" meteors across the globe? Anything? Coincidence? Or something else?

Let’s put together an overview of the data we have been collecting and outline the working hypothesis that we have to explain it. It isn’t very hopeful, we’ll tell you that right at the start. It may well make Tunguska look like a firecracker in comparison. The blast at Tunguska has been described thusly:

The explosion was probably caused by the airburst of a meteorite or comet 6 to 10 kilometers (4-6 mi) above the Earth’s surface. The energy of the blast was later estimated to be between 10 and 15 megatons of TNT, which would be equivalent to Castle Bravo, the most powerful nuclear bomb ever detonated by the US. It felled an estimated 60 million trees over 2,150 square kilometers (830 sq mi).

The Binary System

We look out at our sky and we see only one sun. We naturally conclude that our star system includes only the sun. However, binary star systems are very frequent.

There is an hypothesis that argues that our sun is part of such a binary system. The sun’s hypothetical companion has been named, as mentioned above, "Nemesis". The projected orbit of Nemesis is 26 million years, give or take the time necessary for the rising and falling of several civilizations.

Studies of the fossil record by Dave Raup and Jack Sepkoski have shown that there is a cyclic repetition to periods of extinction. The Nemesis theory was drawn up to explain the extinction cycle.

©Raup & Sepkoski
Chart of the 26 million year extinction cycle

I can offer no proof for the working hypothesis outlined above. We are working on a limited data set. The most that I can say is that an argument can be made suggesting the following scenario:

The sun’s dark companion, on its 26 million year orbit, came close to the solar system 377 years ago, showing itself and pushing in front of it comets, a few of which appeared thirty years after the 1630 showing of the dark star itself. The passage of the companion through the Oort cloud dragging hundreds of thousands of other bodies in its wake, swung around in its orbit, and flung a swarm of them our way, travelling now for nearly four hundred years. Members of that swarm have been picked off by the gravitational fields of the outer planets, increasing the numbers of moons in recent years. If the swarm has passed by Jupiter, then it may be arriving here very soon.

Are the articles pulled from papers around the world over the last few months the announcement of their arrival?

One final point. There have been reports that Earth is not the only planet being hit by "global warming". Might it be possible that this apparently widespread change of "climate" in the solar system is linked to an incoming comet cloud? We do not know and are sorely lacking in the means to acquire data to refine or reject the working hypothesis. Perhaps someone else out there does have the means. Whatever the explanation for a generalized warming of several planets, it is clear that we know very little about the fundamental mechanisms behind it. We are a speck in the universe, a drop in an ocean more vast, more complex, and more mysterious than we can imagine.

To close, I want to quote from the final pages of The Cycle of Cosmic Catastrophes: Flood, Fire, and Famine in the History of Civilization because the words there should have meaning for all of us.

©?

NOT-SO-HARMLESS SHOOTING STARS

If you want more evidence for what happened to the mammoths, you need only to look up at the clear night sky. In almost any month, you can see shooting stars from one of many meteor showers. Nearly every fiery streak you see is the tiny remnant of some giant comet that broke up into smaller pieces. Of course, most of those pieces are microscopic, but their parent comet was not - it was enormous. Astronomers know that, even today, hidden in those cosmic clouds of tiny remnants, there are some huge chunks of comet pieces. We pass through their clouds every year like clockwork, so eventually we will collide with some of bigger pieces.

In 1990, Victor Clube, an astrophysicist, and Bill Napier, an astronomer, published The Cosmic Winter, a book in which they describe performing orbital analyses of several of the meteor showers that hit Earth every year. Using sophisticated computer software, they carefully looked backward for thousands of years, tracing the orbits of comets, asteroids, and meteor showers until they uncovered something astounding. Many meteor showers are related to one another, such as the Taurids, Perseids, Piscids, and Orionids. In addition, some very large cosmic objects are related: the comets Encke and Rudnicki, the asteroids Oljato, Hephaistos, and about 100 others. Every one of those 100-plus cosmic bodies is at least a half-mile in diameter and some are miles wide. And what do they have in common? According to those scientists, every one is the offspring of the same massive comet that first entered our system less than 20,000 years ago! Clube and Napier calculated that, to account for all the debris they found strewn throughout our solar system, the original comet had to have been enormous.

So was this our megafauna killer? All the known facts fit. The comet may have ridden in on the supernova wave, [or was knocked into the solar system by the Companion Sun - LKJ] then gone into orbit around the sun less than 20,000 years ago; or, if it was already here, the supernova debris wave may have knocked it into an Earth-crossing orbit. Either way, any time we look up into the night sky at a beautiful, dazzling display of shooting stars, there is an ominous side to that beauty. We are very likely seeing the leftover debris from a monster comet that finished off 40 million animals 12 to 13,000 years ago.

Clube and Napier also calculated that, because of subtle changes in the orbits of Earth and the remaining cosmic debris, Earth crosses through the densest part of the giant comet clouds about every 2 ,000 to 4,000 years [or 3,600 years?]. When we look at climate and ice-core records, we can see that pattern. For example the iridium, helium-3, nitrate, ammonium, and other key measurements seem to rise and fall in tandem, producing noticeable peaks around 18,000, 16,000, 13,000, 9,000, 5,000, and 2,000 years ago. In that pattern of peaks every 2,000 to 4,000 years, we may be seeing the "calling cards" of the returning megacomet.

Fortunately, the oldest peaks were the heaviest bombardments, and things have been getting quieter since then, as the remains of the comet break up into even smaller pieces The danger is not past, however. Some of the remaining miles-wide pieces are big enough to do serious damage to our cities, climate, and global economy. Clube and Napier (1984) predicted that in the year 2000 and continuing for 400 years, Earth would enter another dangerous time in which the planet’s changing orbit would bring us into a potential collision course with the densest parts of the clouds containing some very large debris. Twenty years after their prediction, we have just now moved into the danger zone. It is a widely accepted fact that some of those large objects are in Earth-crossing orbits at this very moment, and the only uncertainty is whether they will miss us, as is most likely, or whether they will crash into some part of our planet.

That may seem like bad news, but there is a glimmer of good news too. For the first time in human kind’s known history, we have ways to detect those objects and prevent them from hitting us again. One such effort is Project Spaceguard, a multinational cooperative attempting to locate those Earth threatening objects, and other similar programs include the Near-Earth Asteroid Tracking (NEAT) telescope and the Spacewatch Project at the University of Arizona. Unfortunately, not one of them is funded nearly well enough to complete the job for many years, bur they are working at it steadily.

No one knows exactly how many dangerous comets and asteroids are out there, but astronomers are certain that hundreds to thousands of them remain undiscovered. The worst part is that many of those space objects are so dark and difficult to see that they are nearly invisible until they come very close, and by then it is too late. It is certain that one of these monsters is on a collision course with Earth - we just do not know the details. Is it days from now or hundreds of years from now? Even if we were sure one was coming, there is just very little that we can do about it currently.

We are years away from being able to control our own destiny as it relates to supernovae and giant comets and asteroids, but scientists are working on solutions. This is not a high priority with the world’s governments, however, which typically prefer to confront terrestrial threats rather than cosmic ones. To prevent one of those giant objects from smashing into us, collectively, we spend about $10 to $20 million annually, an amount less than the cost of one or two sophisticated fighter jets. Almost no money is spent trying to detect imminent supernovae [or comets].

Our politicians are seriously underestimating these severe threats, which are capable of ending our species, just as they snuffed out the mammoths a mere 13,000 years ago, only an eyeblink in cosmic terms. There are few threats of that magnitude facing us today. The survival of the human race is not seriously threatened by the avian flu, Al Qaeda attacks, the end of the Age of Oil, monster hurricanes, giant earthquakes, or enormous tsunamis; if any of those occur, most of us will continue with our lives. Furthermore, nothing on that list is broadly accepted as having caused worldwide extinctions in the past. The same cannot be said about supernovae and massive [cometary] impacts. Those two cosmic events are implicated in many of the largest extinctions on our planet over the last millions of years. Fortunately, we survived them, but many of our fellow species did not. Humankind might not survive the next one. It seems reasonable to forgo several of our military fighter jets each year to decrease our chances of being" nuked" from space by a supernova or a comet.

So, indeed, humanity has passed its "extinct by" date and, just as it was in the days of Noah…

They did eat, they drank, they married wives, they were given in marriage, until the day that Noe entered into the ark, and the flood came, and destroyed them all.

Likewise also as it was in the days of Lot; they did eat, they drank, they bought, they sold, they planted, they builded; But the same day that Lot went out of Sodom it rained fire and brimstone from heaven, and destroyed them all.

©Beloit University
Somehow, we don’t think it was a boat….

 

2 comments:

Anonymous said…

I think you just bowled a strike… and with your funny face on too…who would have thought Mars bars as the potential source of human species continuation? The opening quote reminded me of the power of Love, the creative principle in which chaos is used to destroy the old to make way for the new… or as young Harry Potter is told by the wand merchant of ‘he who must not be named’, "He did increadible things…terrible yes….but incredible" or something like that…
We seldom think of Love in such terms… the power of the forces of creation, the maker of form.

You threaded the needle of expectation rather excitingly this time leaving the reader looking for a good seat to enjoy the show…some may see it as fear, but Love is always in the eye of the beholder, and learning to accept the Truth allows joy to replace pain.

If nothing else, it should remind us all that nothing we experience remains the same except that found in silence… and in a world where the noise has reached its zenith, perhaps this is Nature’s call to shut up and listen.

10:04 PM   Anonymous said…

Wasn’t this cluster said to be following in the gravity well/wake of the companion star? Would that wake still be present after so many centuries if seen at the time of Charlemagne? Does this jive with the info from the C’s? As our system was said to be orbitting the now dark star, not it us… and if it’s already passed, why would it create fear in the public?

Second thoughts.

10:14 PM  

 

Uncategorized 2:44 pm

 

by Laura Knight-Jadczyk & Henry See

©n/a
Are we past our due date?

Often, some of the most important news comes from local papers, stories that don’t make it up the feeding chain and onto the news wires or major newspapers or nightly network news. It can be news that at first glance wouldn’t appear to have a national or international impact. Second glance, and a good memory, can reveal that the impact may well be quite significant.

The other day a reader sent us an article link that he found on another alt.news website: Bad news - we are way past our ‘extinct by’ date

Since we had run the same story back when it first came out, we thought "yeah! Flashback!" After all, with all the talk about Global Warming, it served to remind readers that human caused CO2 levels are not all there is to what is going on here on the BBM today.

Later in the evening, we had a conversation here at SOTT Central about this article and how it relates to a book that is currently being passed around in the house here: The Cycle of Cosmic Catastrophes: Flood, Fire, and Famine in the History of Civilization by Richard Firestone, Allen West, Simon Warwick-Smith. This book is about the "Event" that took place about 12,000 years ago that is recorded in myth and legend variously as the Fall of Atlantis and Noah’s Flood. Plato describes a destruction that occurred in a day and a night, and the Bible recounts the story of torrential rains and an immense flood in which most of the life on earth perished. There is also a rich body of Native American literature about a worldwide cataclysm of fires, followed by floods and death raining down from the skies. As many as fifty different cultures around the globe record versions of this story, and physicist Firestone, along with his geologist co-authors, have put together a book, based on hard scientific evidence, describing a cosmic chain of events that they believe culminated in the global catastrophe of 12,000 years ago. They believe that the Event was triggered by a nearby supernova that occurred 41,000 years ago.

Regular readers of SOTT are familiar with my Cassiopaea website and the experiment in superluminal communication that I began in 1992 which finally bore fruit in 1994 on the day that the fragments of Comet Shoemaker Levy began impacting the planet Jupiter. We find it amusingly synchronous that one of the themes of the Cassiopaean experiment is planetary destruction via a Comet Cluster that cycles through the solar system every 3,600 years as a consequence of the orbit of our Sun’s solar Companion, a smaller, dark, Twin Sun. As it happens, Firestone, West and Warwick-Smith also talk about a bombardment of Planet Earth by literally thousands of asteroids, comets, or other debris, though they attribute it to the supernova 28 or 29 thousand years earlier; that it took that long for the ejecta from the supernova - along with debris it kicked out of the Oort cloud - to reach Earth.

©NASA
Shoemaker-Levy Approaching Jupiter

With the idea that there is a Cometary Bombardment Cycle, we have naturally been alert to the fact that the last few years have brought increasing evidence that this theory is the correct one. This evidence includes the fantastic increase in the number of "moons" attached to Jupiter that have so recently been "discovered", as well as the increase in frequency of comets over the past few years, along with the astonishing increase in meteorites and fireballs entering Earth’s atmosphere and falling to earth. In some cases, these events have resulted in damage to human beings and property, and one recent case even resulted in deaths as we will see further on…

Anyway, to get back to our conversation about humanity being past its "extinct by" date, I mused that anybody with eyes and ears and a bit of scientific knowledge can look around and see that something is going on "out there". The problem is, of course, that the masses of humanity are so distracted by all the concerns of everyday life - many of which are quite serious nowadays, especially the threat of nuclear war brought to us by George W. Bush and the Ziocons - that most of them haven’t got a clue that they probably don’t have to worry about Global Warming. (And just because I say that people don’t have to worry about Global Warming doesn’t mean they don’t have to worry!)The evidence that is all around us nowadays even helps us to realize that there was nothing really magical or mysterious about the story of Noah. The Bible tells us that God told Noah that something was up, something was coming, and that he should build an ark and that would enable him and his family and a few critters to survive. But obviously, in this day and time, we really don’t need God to tell us that Something Wicked This Way Comes.

Then, of course, it was pointed out to me that it was the Cs that told me about the cycle of Cometary disasters. I thought about that for a moment and said, "well, partly". I did write about all of this in my book The Noah Syndrome back in 1985, long before the Cs proper ever introduced themselves. (This book was never published, but much of it is incorporated into Secret History.) Of course, back then, I had started from a purely metaphysical question: "Is there going to be an end of the world as described in the Bible, and if so, what does it really mean?" It was that question that lead to a deep study of the Bible, which then led to a realization that the destruction described in the book of Revelation was almost identical to what was described in the story of the Exodus, so whatever happened then, was being predicted to happen again. It wasn’t until I read Velikovsky’s Worlds in Collision that I realized that this was very likely talking about a bombardment of the Earth by rocks and bolides from space. Velikovsky, of course, attributed it to an errant planet Venus that came careening into the solar system just as Firestone et al attribute it to a supernova 41,000 years ago. The Cyclic Comet Cluster related to a Companion Sun explanation is a better fit to all the data, though a supernova could also be involved as well as a "Newcomer" to the Solar System.

In any event, what is perfectly clear is that the story of Noah and the story of Atlantis are apocryphal: : many groups of people survived the event of 12,000 years ago here and there, and very likely many of them survived because they realized what was coming. Afterward, in their stories and legends they ascribed their survival to the intervention of their particular deity to give that deity more authority.

Getting back to the article that started the discussion: Bad news - we are way past our ‘extinct by’ date, we are told:

Some say the world will end in fire, some say in ice, wrote Robert Frost. But whatever is to be our fate, it is now overdue.

After analysing the eradication of millions of ancient species, scientists have found that a mass extinction is due any moment now.

Their research has shown that every 62 million years - plus or minus 3m years - creatures are wiped from the planet’s surface in massive numbers. Even worse, scientists have no idea about its source.

‘There is no doubting the existence of this cycle of mass extinctions every 62m years. It is very, very clear from analysis of fossil records,’ said Professor James Kirchner, of the University of California, Berkeley. ‘Unfortunately, we are all completely baffled about the cause.’

This part of the article is actually quite disingenuous. It is well known that there are other major extinctions and the cycle is not ONLY every 62 million years! There is also a very strong signal for a 26 million year extinction cycle. The different estimates of the number of major mass extinctions in the last 540 million years are due mainly to what the individual researcher chooses as the threshold for naming an extinction event as "major" as well as what set of data he selects as the determinant measure of past diversity. As it happens, the 62 million event data stems mainly from marine fossil evidence.

The report, published in the current issue of , was carried out by Professor Richard Muller and Robert Rohde also from the Berkeley campus. They studied the disappearances of thousands of different marine species (whose fossils are better preserved than terrestrial species) over the past 500m years.

Their results were completely unexpected. It was known that mass extinctions have occurred in the past. During the Permian extinction, 250m years ago, more than 70 per cent of all species were wiped out, for example. But most research suggested that these were linked to asteroid collisions and other random events.

But Muller and Rohde found that, far from being unpredictable, mass extinctions occur every 62m years, a pattern that is ’striking and compelling’, according to Kirchner.

But what is responsible? Here, researchers ran into problems. They considered the passage of the solar system through gas clouds that permeate the galaxy. These clouds could trigger climatic mayhem. However, there is no known mechanism to explain why the passage might occur only every 62m years.

Alternatively, the Sun may possess an undiscovered companion star. It could approach the Sun every 62m years, dislodging comets from the outer solar system and propelling them towards Earth. Such a companion star has never been observed, however, and in any case such a lengthy orbit would be unstable, Muller says.

Or perhaps some internal geophysical cycle triggers massive volcanic activity every 62m years, Muller and Rohde wondered. Plumes from these would surround the planet and lead to a devastating drop in temperature that would freeze most creatures to death.

Unfortunately, scientists know of no such geological cycle.

‘We have tried everything we can think of to find an explanation for these weird cycles of biodiversity and extinction,’ Muller said. ‘So far we have failed. And, yes, we are due one soon, but I would not panic yet.’

©NASA
Coming Our Way
Well, they have a problem, don’t they? They think it’s coming and, based on the ancient legends, it happens very fast and almost without warning.

The classical "Big Five" mass extinctions identified by Raup and Sepkoski in 1982 (interestingly, right about the same time I started asking questions about Revelations culminating in The Noah Syndrome in 1985!) are widely agreed upon as some of the most significant. They are:

The late Ordovician period (about 438 million years ago) - 100 families extinct - more than half of the bryozoan and brachiopod species extinct.

78 million years later:

The late Devonian (about 360 mya) - 30% of animal families extinct.

106 million years later:

At the end of the Permian period (about 245 mya) - Trilobites go extinct. 50% of all animal families, 95% of all marine species, and many trees die out.

37 million years later:

The late Triassic (208 mya) - 35% of all animal families die out. Most early dinosaur families went extinct, and most synapsids died out (except for the mammals).

143 million years later:

At the Cretaceous-Tertiary (K-T) boundary (about 65 mya) - about half of all life forms died out, including the dinosaurs, pterosaurs, plesiosaurs, mosasaurs, ammonites, many families of fishes, clams, snails, sponges, sea urchins and many others.

As you can see from the above, using the number "62 million years" and building a theory on it is really a bit misleading. But does that mean we have nothing to worry about? Nope. Read on.

Raup and Sepkoski are mentioned as identifying the "Big Five", but the fact is that Sepkoski, a University of Chicago paleontologist suggested that the extinction of the dinosaurs 65 million years ago was part of a 26 million year cycle!! However, I would like to mention that if you multiply the 26: 3 X 26 is 78 - which just happens to be the time between the Ordovician and Devonian extinctions; 4 X 26 is 104 which is very close to the 106 million years between the Devonian and Permian extinctions; and 5 X 26 is 130, which (when dealing with these kinds of numbers) is close enough to the gap between the Triassic and K-T extinction to be in the ballpark. So, maybe there is something to this 26 million year thing after all, only each "return" has varying effects based on many other solar system variables. A companion star with a 26 million year orbit might be more stable, since Muller has suggested that a 62 million year orbit is too great to be stable.

As it happens, if we postulate the 26 million year orbit of a Companion Star, we would find that there ought to be a return about 39 million years ago, and then another 13 million years ago, which would put us half-way in the Companion star orbit cycle. Wherever the theorized Twin Sun might be at the moment, which we will talk about further on, what we know is that there are other extinction events of great magnitude that seem to have little to do with a 62 million year cycle and a great deal to do with some other cycle. Another thing that is clear is that extinction events occur far more frequently than the general public is aware of and yes, we are way overdue for one.

Leaving the possible triggers for mass extinctions for the moment, let’s look at some hows extinctions might occur. Here is a handy little run-down of the problem:

Ways to Destroy Life

Of all the ways in which scientists have proposed that it is possible to cause a mass extinction here are a few of the front runners. Conceptually there are 4 main ways:

1. Freeze it (Snowball Earth)

2. Boil it (Greenhouse Earth)

3. Drop a meteor on it ( Meteor Impact)

4. Cover it with ash and Lava ( Giant Volcanic Eruption)

It is important to realise that numbers 3 and 4 are essentially ways which have been put forward to explain 1 and 2, though Snowball earth and Greenhouse earth are still theories in their own right, as they are to some extent self replicating, i.e. we rather get stuck in vicious circles as the more we warm the earth, the more greenhouse gasses we can potentially release, (at least in theory).

Now that’s all very well and good but, how do these physical effects [1 and 2 alone] cause mass extinctions?

The simplest answer to this is climate. Every species alive on earth today and so presumably in the past is adapted to a certain range of conditions. In the same way that if we were suddenly whisked off to the North Pole and expected to live there for a year with only a wooly jumper and a Mars bar, we would surely die. It is the same in an extinction event, climatic zones essentially shift around the globe (so us being placed on the north pole is not as far fetched as you first thought), or ecosystems are starved of light or nutrients. This results in plants and animals being out of equilibrium with their surroundings, this not only causes the death of individuals but whole species. With the death of a species there is a gap in the food chain, and so even animals which have adapted to the new climate find themselves with no food so die out and so on…

EXTINCTION PROBLEMS IN A STRANGE ECOSYSTEM

If we consider the example of us at the North Pole, but this time with a whole box of Mars bars, assuming we did not freeze to death in the first day, we would slowly become more accustomed to the cold, maybe we would find shelter from the cold, but either way as soon as our prey (the Mars Bars) ran out, unless we found an alternative source of food we would starve. To create a more dynamic ecosystem let us assume we provide a food source for another organism such as a polar bear, now if we died what would the polar bear eat?

Unfortunately my example falls down here as no one is going to believe that without us eating Mars bars they’re going to reproduce uncontrollably. However, in our North Pole ecosystem of Mars bars, us and Polar bears, let us assume we find extra clothes and shelter, so the cold no longer controls our numbers, and we manage to find the recipe and ingredients for mars bars (and by some freak coincidence they provide us with all the essential nutrients for life), in this case it would be the polar bears controlling our numbers since they are our direct predators. So if polar bears were wiped out, then our numbers would no longer be controlled, so our population would over many generations grow, until eventually we could no longer supply ourselves with mars bars, or we may have even eaten all the mars bars in the world. This would cause a huge population crash, or maybe even extinction of the human race (or at least those dependant on Mars Bars). This rather abstract example helps illustrate the point that all the trophic levels of a food chain (or web) need to be in place, otherwise there will be instability in all other populations.

The above description of how Global warming or cooling can cause mass extinctions is clever, but it does not take into account the creativity of human beings. Certainly, there could be massive reductions in the human population as a consequence of Global Warming or Cooling, but it would be unlikely to produce a mass extinction such as those for which we have evidence in the past.

Back in the 1940s Dr. Frank C. Hibben, Prof. of Archeology at the University of New Mexico led an expedition to Alaska to look for human remains. He didn’t find human remains; he found miles and miles of icy muck just packed with mammoths, mastodons, and several kinds of bison, horses, wolves, bears and lions. Just north of Fairbanks, Alaska, the members of the expedition watched in horror as bulldozers pushed the half-melted muck into sluice boxes for the extraction of gold. Animal tusks and bones rolled up in front of the blades "like shavings before a giant plane". The carcasses were found in all attitudes of death, most of them "pulled apart by some unexplainable prehistoric catastrophic disturbance."[Hibben, Frank, The Lost Americans (New York: Thomas & Crowell Co. 1946)]

©RPP
The evident violence of the deaths of these masses of animals, combined with the stench of rotting flesh, was almost unendurable both in seeing it, and in considering what might have caused it. The killing fields stretched for literally hundreds of miles in every direction.[ibid.] There were trees and animals, layers of peat and moss, twisted and tangled and mangled together as though some Cosmic mixmaster sucked them all in 12000 years ago, and then froze them instantly into a solid mass. [Sanderson, Ivan T., "Riddle of the Frozen Giants", Saturday Evening Post, No. 39, January 16, 1960.]

Just north of Siberia entire islands are formed of the bones of Pleistocene animals swept northward from the continent into the freezing Arctic Ocean. One estimate suggests that some ten million animals may be buried along the rivers of northern Siberia. Thousands upon thousands of tusks created a massive ivory trade for the master carvers of China, all from the frozen mammoths and mastodons of Siberia. The famous Beresovka mammoth first drew attention to the preserving properties of being quick-frozen when buttercups were found in its mouth.

What kind of terrible event overtook these millions of creatures in a single day? Well, the evidence suggests an enormous tsunami raging across the land, tumbling animals and vegetation together, to be finally quick-frozen for the next 12000 years. But the extinction was not limited to the Arctic, even if the freezing at colder locations preserved the evidence of Nature’s rage.

Paleontologist George G. Simpson considers the extinction of the Pleistocene horse in North America to be one of the most mysterious episodes in zoological history, confessing, "no one knows the answer." He is also honest enough to admit that there is the larger problem of the extinction of many other species in America at the same time. [Simpson, George G., Horses, New York: Oxford University Press) 1961] The horse, giant tortoises living in the Caribbean, the giant sloth, the saber-toothed tiger, the glyptodont and toxodon. These were all tropical animals. These creatures didn’t die because of the "gradual onset" of an ice age, "unless one is willing to postulate freezing temperatures across the equator, such an explanation clearly begs the question." [Martin, P. S. & Guilday, J. E., "Bestiary for Pleistocene Biologists", Pleistocene Extinction, Yale University, 1967]

Massive piles of mastodon and saber-toothed tiger bones were discovered in Florida. [Valentine, quoted by Berlitz, Charles, The Mystery of Atlantis (New York, 1969)] Mastodons, toxodons, giant sloths and other animals were found in Venezuela quick-frozen in mountain glaciers. Woolly rhinoceros, giant armadillos, giant beavers, giant jaguars, ground sloths, antelopes and scores of other entire species were all totally wiped out at the same time, at the end of the Pleistocene, approximately 12000 years ago.

This event was global. The mammoths of Siberia became extinct at the same time as the giant rhinoceros of Europe; the mastodons of Alaska, the bison of Siberia, the Asian elephants and the American camels. It is obvious that the cause of these extinctions must be common to both hemispheres, and that it was not gradual. A "uniformitarian glaciation" would not have caused extinctions because the various animals would have simply migrated to better pasture. What is seen is a surprising event of uncontrolled violence. [Leonard, R. Cedric, Appendix A in "A Geological Study of the Mid-Atlantic Ridge", Special Paper No. 1 ( Bethany: Cowen Publishing 1979)] In other words, 12000 years ago, a time we have met before and will come across again and again, something terrible happened - so terrible that life on earth was nearly wiped out in a single day.

Harold P. Lippman admits that the magnitude of fossils and tusks encased in the Siberian permafrost present an "insuperable difficulty" to the theory of uniformitarianism, since no gradual process can result in the preservation of tens of thousands of tusks and whole individuals, "even if they died in winter." [Lippman, Harold E., "Frozen Mammoths", Physical Geology, (New York 1969)] Especially when many of these individuals have undigested grasses and leaves in their belly. Pleistocene geologist William R. Farrand of the Lamont-Doherty Geological Observatory, who is opposed to catastrophism in any form, states: "Sudden death is indicated by the robust condition of the animals and their full stomachs … the animals were robust and healthy when they died." [Farrand, William R., "Frozen Mammoths and Modern Geology", Science, Vol.133, No. 3455, March 17, 1961] Unfortunately, in spite of this admission, this poor guy seems to have been incapable of facing the reality of worldwide catastrophe represented by the millions of bones deposited all over this planet right at the end of the Pleistocene. Hibben sums up the situation in a single statement: "The Pleistocene period ended in death. This was no ordinary extinction of a vague geological period, which fizzled to an uncertain end. This death was catastrophic and all inclusive." [Hibben, op. cit.]

The conclusion is, again, that the end of the Ice Age, the Pleistocene extinction, the end of the Upper Paleolithic, Magdalenian, Perigordian, and so on, and the end of the "reign of the gods," all came to a global, catastrophic end about 12,000 years ago. [The Secret History of the World]

This is the event that Firestone, West and Warwick-Smith discuss in their book, The Cycle of Cosmic Catastrophes: Flood, Fire, and Famine in the History of Civilization, mentioned above.

But if the above accounts are the result of such a catastrophe, what might the Event itself be like? If you were to live to see it, what would you experience? The following is condensed and adapted from Chapter 11 of Firestone, West and Warwick-Smith’s book:

It begins with meteors failing like raindrops, a few here and there. Perhaps a few hit the sun, provoking large solar flares. The solar flares provoke colourful auroras even in the daytime sky. Then the day of the comets arrive. From horizon to horizon, growing larger every second, they streaked into the atmosphere, lighting up brighter than the sun.

Heated to immense temperatures by its passage through the atmosphere, the lethal swarm exploded into thousands of mountain-sized chunks and clouds of streaming icy dust. The smaller peices blew up high in the atmosphere, creating multiple detonations that turned the sky orange and red.

Then the largest comet smashed through the sheet of ice covering part of the northern hemisphere in what is now Hudson Bay. Other comets struck in Lake Michigan, Canada, Siberia and Europe. Then the ground shock waves hit, shaking the earth violently for ten minutes in great rolling waves and shudders. Fissures opened, trees shook and fell, and rivers and streams disappeared into the cracked earth.

Within seconds of the impact, the blast of superheated air expanded outward at more than 1,000 miles an hour, racing across the landscape, tearing trees from the ground and tossing them into the air, ripping rocks from mountainsides, and flash-scorching plants, animals, the earth, as well as any humans in its way. The only living things to survive would have been those who had sought shelter underground or underwater.

Across the upper part of North America and Europe, the immense energy from the multiple impacts blew a series of ever-widening, giant, overlapping bubbles that pushed aside the atmosphere to create a near vacuum inside. As the bubble passed by, the air pressure dropped making it difficult to breathe. Behind the expanding edge of the bubble, the Earth was stripped of the protective shield of the atmosphere. The blast had ejected tiny, fast-moving grains in all directions through the thin air. Some lodged into trees, plants and animals, while others went up only to fall back again at incredible speeds as there was no atmosphere to break their fall. At the same instant, high speed cosmic rays bombarded the area with radiation. Animals and humans dropped dead on the spot from the bombardment. Inanimate objects appeared to come to life and shiver and quak on the ground from the barrage.

When the outward push of the shock wave ceased, the vacuum began to draw back the air. As the expanded atmosphere rushed back toward the impact site, the bubbles collapsed, sucking white-hot gases and dust inwards at tornado speeds and then channelling them up and away from the ground. Some of the dust escaped from the Earth’s atmosphere while the rest flowed out as a red mushroom cloud that flattened out for thousands of miles across the upper atmosphere, blocking the sun and engulfing the Earth in darkness.

The dust and debris that was too heavy began crashing back down to earth. Still superhot from the blast, it gave off a powerful lavalike glow. The pieces landed on the continental ice sheet, instantly melting untold gallons of water that coursed off the ice sheet in all directions causing flooding.

The raging updraft through the hollow bubbles created an equally powerful downdraft of frigid, high-altitude air, travelling at hundreds of miles per hour. With temperatures exceeding 150 degrees F below zero, the downward stream of air hit the ground and radiated out from the many blast sites in all directions, flash-freezing within seconds everything it touched. The howling, frigid blast turned trees and plants into brittle ice statues and flash froze mastodons and mammoths with food in their mouths that we have uncovered still frozen in Siberia.

The rapid temperature fluctuations meant the end of millions of plants and animals…. but the destruction was only beginning.

The impacts and shock waves triggered enormous earthquakes along existing fault lines from the Carolinas to California while shaking awake dormant volcanoes from Iceland across to the Pacific. Erupting with furious activity, they spewed hot lava across the landscape and noxious chemicals into the air, adding to the already heavy cloud cover.

The impacts, the blast waves, and the eruptions started thousands of ground fires wherever there was fuel to feed them, some of which continued to burn for days. Fast-moving, wind-driven wildfires formed spiralling tongues of raging flames that twisted for thousands of feet into the air and the inferno raced through forests faster than birds and animals could flee. The roar of the fire shook the ground, and the fierce heat blew apart trees like bombs, exploded rocks like shrapnel grenades, and set off steam explosions wherever the fast-moving fire-front jumped across frozen ponds and streams. When the fires had finally burned themselves out, there was little left besides smoldering stumps and telltale charcoal strewn across the continents.

The noxious chemicals in the atmosphere fell back to earth as poisoned rain. In some places, the air was too toxic and oxygen-depleted to support life.

The impact in Hudson Bay sent up 200,000 cubic miles of the glacier, throwing off the icy debris that followed the pieces of the comet out across the continent. A rain of incandescent debris and chunks of steaming ice showered down across most of North America, Europe and Asia. Within minutes, the massive, low-flying clumps crashed into the Carolinas and the eastern seaboard, exploding into fireballs and gouging out the Carolina Bays, over 500,000 of them. Other lumps exploded across the plains from Nebraska and Kansas to Arizona.

©Fairchild Aerial Surveys for the Ocean Forest Company
Aerial view of some of the Carolina Bays taken in 1930

Pieces of flying ice and debris, large and small, fell from the Atlantic to the Pacific, from the Gulf of Mexico to the Arctic, from Europe over to Asia and even down to Africa. More than one-quarter of the planet was under siege.

But even that was not all.

The impact through the glacier at Hudson Bay sent high velocity meltwater surging under the ice sheet. The surges lifted and floated large sections of ice, causing monolithic ice blocks to slide southward along hundreds of miles of the ice front. Moving nearly as quickly as a horse is able, the blocks plowed over forests, shearing off the trees.

The oceans, too, were targets. Thousands of ice chunks and clouds of slushy water hit the Atlantic, exploding with colossal detonations. The multiple concussions triggered immense underwater landslides off the Carolinas and Virginia, releasing thousands of cubic miles of mud. In turn, the mud unleashed a 1,000 foot high tidal wave that raced away towards Europe and Africa at 500 miles an hour.

Nine hours later the wave hit, 1,000 feet tall at 400 miles per hour, probably taking with it some of the survivors of the first explosions. The wave broke over hundreds of miles inland, devastating everything in its path. Anything living on the coast was killed instantly.

Its momentum spent, the churning water paused briefly and then began its rush backwards to the coast, pulling with it the battered remains of plants and animals under its tow. The surge provoked, in turn, offshore landslides in Europe and Africa, sending a second round of megawaves back towards North and South America. Miles of coastland was hit by the 100 foot waves that triggered yet another wave of tsunamis that hit Europe and Africa once again. But little was left to damage.

Within minutes of the impacts, the subzero air and rising water vapour combined to produce heavy snow and sleet that reached as far south as Mexico, the Caribbean, and Northern Africa. In the south, the snow turned to rain and the northern hemisphere was under a steady downpour for months, a downpour of noxious water contaminated and deadly. Anyone lucky enough to survive was now a potential victim of acid, toxis metals, cyanide, formaldehyde, and arsenic, a combination that would kill many and render the rest gravelly ill.

The melted water of the glaciers had another effect: flooding into the North Atlantic, it turned off the ocean conveyor that brought warm water to the northern climes. Once shut off, coupled with the clouds of dust blocking the sun, the temperature fell drastically. Within days or weeks after the impacts, continental temperatures fell well below freezing, and a brutal ice age chill once again spread across the land, remaining in place for another thousand years.

And all of this in an instant, in less time than it takes to cook a meal or write an email.

©n/a
62 Million Years Ago A Dinosaur Meets Its Doom: Are We Next?

You will, of course, notice that "12,000 years ago" is just a rough estimate because some of the dates of their samples come back as old as 14 KYA and as recent as 10 KYA. When considering a 3600 year Comet Cluster Cycle, this range could cover more than one event. But what is important is that the main event did, apparently, happen in a single day and based on the scientific data collected by Firestone et al, it was one of the most horrifying events ever to happen on planet earth since modern Homo Sapiens appeared.

Why do I keep referring to a 3600 year cycle? Well, in addition to having been explicated within the context of the Cassiopaean experiment, it seems that this 3600 year period was important enough to certain ancient peoples that it was the basis of their mathematics.

Around 3,200 BC, the Sumerians devised their numerical notation system, giving special graphical symbols to the units 1, 10, 60, 600, 3,600. That is to say, we find that the Sumerians did not count in tens, hundreds and thousands, but rather adopted base 60, grouping things into sixties, and multiplying by powers of sixty.

Our own civilization utilizes vestiges of base 60 in the ways we count time in hours, minutes and seconds, and in the degrees of the circle.

Sixty is a large number to use as a base for a numbering system. It is taxing to the memory because it necessitates knowing sixty different signs (words) that stand for the numbers from 1 to 60. The Sumerians handled this by using 10 as an intermediary between the different sexagesimal orders of magnitude: 1, 60, 602, 603, etc. The word for 60, geš, is the same as the word for unity. The number 60 represented a certain level, above which, mutiples of 60 up to 600 were expressed by using 60 as a new unit. When they reached 600, the next level was treated as still another unit, with multiples up to 3,000. The number 3,600, or sixty sixties, was given a new name: šàr, and this, in turn, became yet another new unit.

So, they mystery is: why did the Sumerians enshrine the number 60 - and its multiple 60 X 60 - in their numbering system? Zecariah Sitchin believed that it was because there was a 10th planet in the solar system that had an orbit 3600 years long, and that they based their numbering system on the cycle of this event. But the evidence for the 10 planet - as a planet - and his related ideas, is rather skimpy, while the evidence for bombardment of the earth by masses of cometary debris is growing every day. Examining the hard data, it doesn’t take a genius to figure out that if there is something that returns every 3600 years, it is more likely to be a cluster of cosmic bodies than a 10th planet.

And that is bad news.

©Dartmouth, Classics Department
Santorini. View East from Nea Kammeni Volcano to Phirï on Crater Rim.

COMETS AND DISASTER IN THE BRONZE AGE

At a certain point in our history, the major civilisations of the world collapsed, simultaneously it seems. The Akkadian Empire in Mesopotamia, the Old Kingdom in Egypt, the Early Bronze Age civilisation in Israel, Anatolia and Greece, as well as the Indus Valley civilisation in India, the Hilmand civilisation in Afghanistan and the Hongshan Culture in China - the first urban civilisations in the world - all fell into ruin at more or less the same time. Not long afterward, in archaeological time, disaster overtook the Myceneans of Greece, the Hittites of Anatolia, the Egyptian New Kingdom, Late Bronze Age Israel, and the Shang Dynasty of China.

The reasons for these widespread and apparently simultaneous disasters - which coincided also with changes of cultures and societies elsewhere, such as in Britain - have long been a fascinating mystery. Traditional explanations include warfare, famine, and more recently ’system collapse’, but the apparent absence of direct archaeological or written evidence for causes, as opposed to the effects, has led many archaeologists and historians into a resigned assumption that no definite explanation can possibly be found.

Some decades ago, the hunt for clues passed largely into the hands of natural scientists. Concentrating on the earlier set of Bronze Age collapses, researchers began to find a range of evidence that suggested that natural causes rather than human actions, may have been initially responsible. There began to be talk of climate change, volcanic activity, and earthquakes - and some of this material has now found its way into standard historical accounts of the period.

Agreement, however, there has never been. Some researchers favoured one type of natural cause, others favoured another, and the problem remained that no single explanation appeared to account for all the evidence.

Over the past 15 years or so, however, a new type of ‘natural disaster’ has been much discussed and is beginning to be regarded, by many scholars, as the most probable single explanation for widespread and simultaneous cultural collapse, but not only in the Bronze Age but at another times as well. The new theory has been advanced largely by astronomers, and remains almost completely unknown amongst archaeologists (a few notable exceptions include the dendrochronologist Prof Mike Baillie of Queen’s University, Belfast, and Dr Euan MacKie at Glasgow University). The new idea is that these massive cultural disasters were caused by the impact of comets or other types of cosmic debris on the Earth. […]

Yet what was the cause of these earthquakes, eruptions, tidal waves, fire-blasts and climate changes? By the late 1970s, British astronomers Victor Clube and Bill Napier of Oxford University had begun to investigate cometary impact as the ultimate cause.. Then in 1980, the Nobel prizewinning physicist Luis Alvarez and his colleagues published their famous paper in Science that argued that a cosmic impact had led to the extinction of the dinosaurs. He showed that large amounts of the element iridium present in geological layers dating from about 65 million BC had a cosmic origin.

Alvarez’s paper had immense influence and stimulated further research by such British astronomers as Clube and Napier, Prof Mark Bailey of the Armagh Observatory, Duncan Steel of Spaceguard Australia, and Britain’s best known astronomer Sir Fred Hoyle. All now support the theory of cometary impact and loosely form what is now known as the British School of Coherent Catastrophism. […]

These scholars envisage trains of cometary debris which repeatedly encounter the Earth. We know that tiny particles of cosmic material penetrate the atmosphere every day, but their impact is insignificant. Occasionally, however, cosmic debris measuring between one and several hundred metres in diametre strike the Earth and these can have catastrophic effects on our ecological system, through multimegaton explosions of fireballs which destroy natural and cultural features on the surface of the Earth by means of tidal-wave floods (if the debris lands in the sea), fire blasts and seismic damage.

Depending on their physical properties, asteroids or comets that punctuate the atmosphere can either strike the Earth’s surface and leave and impact crater, such as the well-known Barringer Crater in Arizona caused by an asteroid made of iron some 50,000 years ago. At least ten impact craters around the world dating from after the last Ice Age, and no fewer than seven of these date from around the 3rd millennium BC - the date of the widespread Early Bronze Age collapses - although none occurred in the Near East.

Alternatively, comets and asteroids can explode in the air. A recent example - known as the Tunguska Event - occurred in 1908 over Siberia, when a bolide made of stone exploded about 5km above ground and completely devastated an area of some 2,000 km’ through fireball blasts. The cosmic body, although thought to have measured only 60 m across, had an impact energy of about 20 to 40 megaton, up to three times as great as the Arizona example (about 15 megaton), and was equivalent to the explosion of about 2,000 Hiroshima-size nuclear bombs - even though there was no actual physical impact on the Earth. […]

Until recently, the astronomical mainstream was highly critical of Clube and Napier’s giant comet hypothesis. However, the crash of comet Shoemaker-Levy 9 on Jupiter in 1994 has led to a change in attitudes. The comet, watched by the world’s observatories, was seen split into 20 pieces and slam into different parts of the planet over a period of several days. A similar impact on Earth, it hardly needs saying, would have been devastating.

According to current knowledge, Tunguska-like impacts occur every 100 years or so. It is, therefore, not farfetched to hypothesise that a super-Tunguska may occur every 2000, 3000 or 5000 years and would be capable of triggering ecological crises on a continental or even global scale. In the past, skeptics have demanded the evidence of a crater before they would accept an argument of cosmic impact, but it is now become understood that no crater is necessary for disastrous consequences to ensue. The difficulty this leaves scholarship, however, is that in a Tunguska Event no direct evidence is left behind. It may be impossible to prove that one ever took place in the distant past.

The extent to which past cometary impacts were responsible for civilisation collapse, cultural change, even the development of religion, must remain a hypothesis. But in view of the astronomical, geological and archaeological evidence, this ‘giant comet’ hypothesis should no longer be dismissed by archaeologists out of hand. [Dr Benny J Peiser: BRITISH ARCHAEOLOGY, December 1997, No 30, pp. 6-7. Dr Benny J Peiser is a historian and anthropologist at Liverpool John Moores University. With Mark Bailey and Trevor Palmer, he is editing "Natural Catastrophes during Bronze Age Civilisations" (Oxford: British Archaeological Reports, in preparation) ]

Among the many side-effects of cometary bombardments are earthquakes, tsunamis and volcanic eruptions. As it happens, there was a significant volcanic event at the time of the collapse of the Bronze Age civilizations that gives us a firmly fixed date: Thera. Recent developments published in the April 2006 issue of Science fix the date of the eruption between 1627 and 1600 B.C. with 95 % certainty. This, of course, is rejected by many archaeologists because they have spent their entire careers trying to date things according to the Bible, and it really upsets the apple cart to realize that they’ve been chasing an illusion.

©?
Rendering of a comet hitting the planet Mars

Yoshiyuki Fujii and Okitsugu Watanabe demonstrate that "large scale environmental changes possibly occurred in the Southern Hemisphere in the middle of the Holocene." [Microparticle Concentration And Electrical Conductivity of A 700 m Ice Core from Mizuho Station Antarctic, published in Annals of Glaciology (1-, 1988) pp. 38-42] (Within the last 10,000 years). Their depth profiles of microparticle concentration, electrical conductivity and Oxygen 18 at circa 1600 BC indicates a spike in readings for all of these elements. The evidence shows that this disturbance covered this designated period, but with a "huge spike" at c. 1600 BC.

Similar evidence exists at 5200 BC. This period shows less severe but similar climatological stress. The oxygen 18 profile is close to normal, but there is a visible volcanic dirt band. The dating of this segment is less close because it is clear that nobody is really looking for this cycle, but it appears to correspond to the ash band from the Byrd station core. [ cf. G. Cope Schellhorn, Ph.D.: Evidence of Cyclical Earth Changes, from When Men are Gods] In an article in Nature, November 1980, C.U. Hammer, H. B. Clausen and Dansgaard date a disturbance from the Camp Century ice core to 5470 BC +/- 120 years. This compares to the proposed Hekla eruption which was radiocarbon dated to 5450 BC +/- 190 years. There is an appreciably high acidity signal at these sections of the core which indicates a high level of volcanic activity - again, right at the 3600 year cycle mark.

It is conjectured that the cycle goes unnoticed because of long-term after-effects, such as cooling climate, as well as the fact that each cycle has greater or lesser effects on the earth depending on the particular dynamical interactions within the solar system at any disruption.

What is clear is that something happens at 3600 year intervals as shown by the ice cores, and is capable of setting off prolonged periods of earth changes that are above the levels of ordinary uniformitarian geologic and climatalogical changes.

Looking further: Michel R. Legrand and Robert J. Delmas of Laboratoire de Glaciologie et Geophysique de l’Environment published an article "Soluble Impurities in Four Antarctic Ice Cores Over the Last 30,000 Years" [Annals of Glaciology (10, 1988, pp 116-120)], in which they graphed the Oxygen 18 variations and the ionic components Na,NH 4 and Ca2 and H and Cl and NO3 and SO4. The time scale for each ionic component level as well as the O18 levels stretches back 30,000 years. The graph shows correlations to spikes at 5,200 BC, 8,800 BC, 12,400 BC, c. 16,000 BC, c. 19,600 BC. All of these were times of great geologic stress.

When looking at the data and taking into account the acknowledged dating inaccuracies (some of the ranges of dates can go 100 years in either direction of the spike, even though the spiking is regular and rhythmic) for the more recent dates, and 3 to 600 years variance for the older dates - especially when one considers that these are broad analyses and nobody was really looking for anything specific - they just said "wow! look at that wavy line!" - we find that the southern ice cores do not always register the same as the northern ones. The c. 1628 BC event that really slammed the tree rings in the northern hemisphere shows almost no registration in the Antarctic cores in terms of volcanic activity. But the northern cores show the activity beginning 1644 BC.

The evidence for the 5200 BC event is strong in the Dome C core. The 8,800 BC event is well marked - in fact, seems to be the strongest of them all. Keep in mind that this was 10,800 years ago - exactly within the range of dates reported by Herodotus and Plato. The oxygen 18 isotope variation is noticeable, the rise in sea-salt, elevated levels of C1 and C1/Na. There is an extreme spike in SO4 and H readings suggesting widespread volcanic activity - great earth changes were happening at that time, and they registered in the climate, the oceans, and were preserved in ice.

The 12,400 BC event is also extremely pronounced in the cores. The graphs show a quick, vast change including the end of the Wisconsin Ice Age. There is a great Oxygen 18 isotope variation as well as peaks of Na and very pronounced spikes in Ca, SO 4 and H.

There is absolutely no question that the Santorini event occurred. The acid signal in the ice core is very strong. Which means that there is very little question about when it occurred. Something very unusual and specific happened then, starting in 1644, and culminating in a major cataclysm, and it seems that it walked all over the Aegean and Anatolian area, leaving tracks that are impossible to miss. Impossible for anyone, that is, except Egyptologists and their kin.

All over the Mediterranean there were kingdoms and cultures that communicated and traded with one another. Reading the many books on each region, produced by the various experts on the different cultures, again and again one encounters the fact that a period of severe disruption was noted in the historical and archaelogical record. Somehow, such an event in one region is not necessarily connected to a similar event in another region. The idea that all of the disruptions in a given general time period may be simultaneous cannot be considered because it would disrupt the carefully constructed chronology that is based on endless acts of tetraphyloctomy. [Splitting a hair four ways; coined by Umberto Eco in Foucault’s Pendulum].

In his book Stratigraphic Comparée et Chronologie de l’Asie Occidentale, [London, Oxford University Press, 1948] Claude Shaeffer’s lifelong archaeological investigations led him to propose that a great natural catastrophe brought about the end of the Middle Kingdom in Egypt, and also devastated by fire and earthquake almost every other populated region of Crete, Cyprus, the Caucasus, Syria, Palestine, Persia, and Asia Minor in general. That’s one heck of a "local event." It is only logical to conclude that the Santorini event and the end of the Middle Bronze Age are one and the same event.

And it happened a little over 3,600 years ago.

In other words, we are overdue.

Now, let’s come back to what I mentioned above about being half-way through a 26 million year Companion Star orbit. We really have no idea where the theorized critter is or what it is up to, but we do have some clues. But the first question we want to ask is what is the relation between this companion star - Nemesis - and extinction? How can a star, way out beyond the solar system, have an effect on the third rock from the sun?

Far beyond the orbit of Pluto lies the Oort cloud.

©N/A
The Oort Cloud

The Oort cloud, alternatively termed the Öpik-Oort Cloud, is a postulated spherical cloud of comets situated about 50,000 to 100,000 AU from the Sun. This is approximately 2000 times the distance from the Sun to Pluto or roughly one light year, almost a quarter of the distance from the Sun to Proxima Centauri, the star nearest the Sun.

Click on the above image to study the larger copy. The solar system is engulfed by this cloud comprised of billions of comets. Imagine what would happen if a star passed through that cloud, knocking the comets in the same way a bowling ball sends bowling pins scattering in all directions. Imagine then a certain number of those comets heading towards the centre of the cloud, our sun and its solar system. The sun, being the largest object in the neighbourhood, would be the attraction point. The comets in the incoming cloud would be pulled into an orbit around the sun.

Although no direct observations have been made of such a cloud, it is believed to be the source of most or all comets entering the inner solar system (some short-period comets may come from the Kuiper belt), based on observations of the orbits of comets.

So far, only one potential Oort cloud object has been discovered; 90377 Sedna. With an orbit that ranges from roughly 76 to 928 AU, it is much closer than originally expected and may belong to an "inner" Oort cloud. If Sedna indeed belongs to the Oort cloud, this may mean that the Oort cloud is both denser and closer to the Sun than previously thought.

So, we have a mechanism which can hypothetically trigger the launching of a swarm of comets into the solar system. The orbit of the proposed binary twin of our sun conforms to the cycles of major extinctions on Earth. But it is still a hypothesis. More importantly, you might ask, even if we assign a high probability to the truth of the hypothesis, if these cycles of cometary swarms are kicked off anew every 26 million years, what evidence do we have that we are alive during one of the, shall we say, unlucky periods?

One of the corollaries of the Nemesis theory is that the dark companion might well become visible as a second sun in the sky when it approaches the sun. Is there any evidence that might suggest that people have ever seen a "second sun"?

In her book Comets and Popular Culture and the Birth of Modern Cosmology, Sara J. Schechner writes:

The sunny disposition of the weather during the coronation (of Charles II) was seen as the fulfillment of a prophecy. In 1630, at the time of Charles’ birth, a noonday star or rival sun allegedly had appeared in the sky. […]

Aurelian Cook in Titus Britannicus explained its import: ‘As soon as Born, Heaven took notice of him, and eyed him with a star, appearing in defiance of the Sun at Noonday….’

For Cook, the extra sun announced that Charles ruled by divine right. Moreover, the timing of Charles’ entry into London on his birthday was politically calculated to fulfill what had been portended at his birth. Abraham Cowley, poet, diplomat and spy for the court wrote: ‘No Star amongst ye all did, I beleeve, Such Vigorous assistance give, As that which thirty years ago, At Charls his Birth, did in despight of the proud Suns’ Meridian Light, His future Glories, this Year foreshow.

Edward Matthew devoted an entire book to the fulfillment of the prophecy declaring Charles "ordained to be the most Mighty Monarch in the Universe…"

Charles’ return was seen as a rebirth of England and duly recorded by a special act in the statute book, which proclaimed that 29 May was the most memorable Birth day not only of his Majesty both as a man and Prince, but likewise as an actual King…

Well, that certainly sounds like it fits the bill: 377 years ago a second sun appeared and no one, so far as I know, has ever linked this to either a comet or a supernova. Interestingly, it was followed thirty years later by the sighting of several comets.

But the 17th century was interesting for another anomaly involving our sun: the Maunder Minimum. Between the years 1645 and 1715, our sun stayed in a period of solar minimum.

During one 30-year period within the Maunder Minimum, for example, astronomers observed only about 50 sunspots, as opposed to a more typical 40,000&-50,000 spots. The Maunder Minimum coincided with the middle — and coldest part — of the so-called Little Ice Age, during which Europe and North America, and perhaps much of the rest of the world, were subjected to bitterly cold winters. Recently published research suggests that the Sun’s rotation slowed in the deep Maunder minimum (1666-1700).[1] At our current level of understanding of solar physics, a larger and slower Sun necessarily implies a cooler Sun that provides less heat to Earth.

Perhaps the close approach, astronomically speaking, of the dark companion was the cause of this dampening. The lower solar activity during the Maunder Minimum also affected the amount of cosmic radiation reaching the Earth. The resulting change in the production of carbon-14 during that period caused an inaccuracy in radiocarbon dating until this effect was discovered.

In total, carbon 14 analysis as well as tree rings and ice core studies indicate there seem to have been 18 periods of sunspot minima in the last 8,000 years, and studies indicate that the sun currently spends up to a quarter of its time in these minima. We can only speculate at the moment whether these cycles have a relationship to our dark companion and/or its cometary children.

Returning to our hypothesis, if we are correct, the dark star was seen 377 years ago. If it was in fact the companion, Nemesis, then the comets heading to the inner solar system should be heading our way. Depending on their locations and orbits in the Oort cloud, there would be variable groups - variable both in size and arrival time. Is there any evidence for this?

The third edition of the university textbook Exploration of the Universe, by George O. Abell, published in 1975, informs us that Jupiter has 9 moons as of 1974. It says:

The outer seven, however, have rather eccentric orbits, some of which have a large inclination to Jupiter’s equator. The four most distant satellites revolve from east to west, contrary to the motions of most of the other objects in the solar system. They may be former minor planets captured by Jupier. [p. 324]

Please note that Abell is suggesting that some of Jupiter’s moons have been captured by Jupiter’s gravity.

Now let’s time travel back to the future, and see what the latest information tells us about Jupiter’s moons:

Jupiter is now given 63 satellites. Forty-seven of those satellites have been discovered since 1999. What if they weren’t there before?

What about Saturn. Our 1975 text tells us that Saturn has 10 satellites. In 2007? Well, there are so many that one source declines to give a precise number!

However, counting the named satellites on the Timeline of discovery of solar system planets and their natural satellites gives us a count of 62, with 41 being discovered since 2000 and another ten in the 80’s and 90’s.

Moving outward, we come to Uranus, given five satellites in 1975, it now has 28, with ten being discovered in the 1980’s, six in the 90’s, and 7 since 2000.

Neptune had two satellies in 1975, now it has 13.

Planet 1975 2005
Jupiter
9
63
Saturn
10
62
Uranus
5
28
Neptune
2
13
Table 1. Number of moons

The explanation given most often to explain this surge in the numbers of satellites for these planets is that telescopes have gotten better. That is, we can see further, with greater detail, and can therefore find things that we couldn’t see before. It is an explanation that makes sense. One small problem with this theory is that the "new" moons of Neptune and Uranus showed up before the new moons of Jupiter and Saturn. One would think that powerful telescopes capable of finding moons as far away as the seventh and eighth planets would have found the hard to see moons of the fifth and sixth first.

Another possible explanation, and one which fits with new moons appearing around Nepture and Uranus prior to appearing around Jupiter and Saturn, is that these new moons, or some of them, are objects that have been trapped into orbits around these planets only recently, that they were captured by the gravity of these planets and removed from the incoming comet cloud. Passing the orbits of the outer planets first, they would arrive at the inner planets afterwards.

We also note that the much derided Immanuel Velikovsky, in his book Worlds in Collision, gives a time frame of nine years as the time it would take for a comet to cover the distance between Jupiter and Earth. The new Jovian moons were discovered beginning in the late nineties.

Do the math.

©Space Channel
Raindrops keep falling on our heads

Which brings us to a series of local stories that give impact a less than metaphoric meaning.

Friday, February 16 SOTT page brought us this story: Strange noise might have been meteor

By JIM SABIN, City Editor

NEWARK — Something happened at around 9 p.m. Wednesday that a lot of people heard, or even felt.

What it was, though, might forever remain a mystery.

"It" was a loud bang, something loud enough to be heard across southern and central Ohio, and loud enough to make small objects move in houses. Reports have rolled into The Advocate from Hanover to Heath, from Buckeye Lake to Granville, and NBC4 heard reports from Muskingum, Fairfield and Pickaway counties.

Rumors range from an earthquake to a meteor strike, a sonic boom to something ice-related. […]

Jeff Gill, of Granville, said he saw a meteor with a relatively long trail, with red, green and gold coloration. It was headed east to west and lasted about three seconds; after it faded, the sonic boom washed over him, he said.

"I saw it first. It was the most eerie, cool, scary, wonderful thing. You just see this dragon tail going across the sky," said Gill, who also writes a religion column for The Advocate. "All of a sudden, everything goes boom." […]

The reports came in from Ohio to New Jersey.

Notice the reference to the dragon tail. Could reports of meteorites be the basis for some of the ancient myths about dragons fighting in the sky? Check out Mike Baillie’s book Exodus to Arthur for more on that subject.

Some weeks ago, while much of the United States was watching the XLI Super Bowl, people in the Midwest were being treated to a different type of spectacle: Local residents witness meteor’s flaming flash.

If you saw a bright light with a flaming tail plummeting to earth Sunday night, you may have seen a minor meteor shower, according to reports in Wisconsin, Illinois and Iowa.

James T. Luedke of Ripon said he was driving in Green Lake County between 7:30 and 8 p.m. Sunday when he saw a "half-dollar sized flaming ball falling at a rapid speed to the earth" in the southern sky.

He described it as a round, orange flaming ball with a blue/green tail.

Kay Diederich of St. Cloud was driving out of the village about 7:50 p.m. with a friend when they saw a "ball of fire" shooting to the south.

"It almost looked like a plane crash," she said. Her friend is an EMT and she listened to her scanner, but no reports came in.

People across the Midwest reported seeing balls of fire streaking across the sky Sunday night, according to state news reports.

A preliminary report does indicate the objects came from a meteor. Most reports described the objects as bright lights with a flaming tail. Several of the objects were seen exploding when they hit the ground, according to WEAU. […]

Sightings were reported from Minnesota through Missouri and east through Illinois.

Then we have this report on February 7, 2007 from the United Kingdom: Meteor lights up the sky.

By Rachel PeggThe Argus

A meteor has been spotted falling to the Earth.

The shooting star was engulfed in bright flames as it shot towards the ground over Hangleton, Hove, at about 8.15pm yesterday. […]

Not to mention a report from Turkey: Meteorite lands in Didim

Friday, February 02Voices

POLICE were inundated with calls from scores of people from Didim to Bodrum after they heard a big bang and a flash of light across the skies.

Despite officers being unable to explain the flashing green, yellow and red lights, Voices has solved the phenomena.

It was not a UFO but a meteorite which crash through the earth’s atmosphere and landed in Yeşilkent.

A startled Abdullah Arıtürk revealed that the rock had smashed a hole in the ground at the Green Park Complex, at Yeşilkent, narrowly missing him by ten metres.

Police reported that people from Bodrum, Milas and Didim had heard a bang and seen the flashing light across the skies at about 5.30pm on Thursday (Jan 31).

Mr Arıtürk said: "I thought this was it. I thought it was the apocalypse. I saw the bang and the flashing lights and this rock smashed into the ground quite near me. It was very frightening."

After telling the Voices of his story, Mr Arıtürk is now awaiting scientists from Aegean University, in İzmir, to take the meteorite away for closer examination.

Fortunately, no one was hurt with these meteors, but people in India weren’t so lucky: Three Killed In Suspected Meteorite Fall In India’s Rajasthan

February 8th 2007

Three people were killed and four injured in a mysterious blast in a village in India’s northern Rajasthan state Thursday that villagers claim was caused by a meteorite, news reports said.

Residents of Banchola village in Bundi district, about 200 kilometres south of Rajasthan capital Jaipur, said the victims were sitting with some iron scrap in an open field when an "object" fell from the sky and hit them, IANS news agency reported.

"The matter is under investigation. We know that there was a blast but looking at the crater it does not seem that it happened due to a meteorite," a Bundi police official was quoted as saying by IANS.

He said the crater was just 8-10 inches in diameter and two inches deep. A team from the state-run forensic science laboratory in Jaipur was collecting evidence from the site, the official said.

Then there was the meteorite that crashed into a house in New Jersey recently and embedded itself in the wall: Possible Meteorite Crashes Through New Jersey Roof

By Chris NewmarkerAssociated Press

4 January 2007

FREEHOLD TOWNSHIP, N.J. — Authorities were trying to identify a mysterious metallic object that crashed through the roof of a house in eastern New Jersey.

Nobody was injured when the golf-ball sized object, weighing nearly as much as a can of soup, struck the home and embedded itself in a wall Tuesday night [image].

Federal officials sent to the scene said it was not from an aircraft.

The rough-surfaced object, with a metallic glint, was displayed Wednesday by police.

"There’s some great interest in what we have here," said Lt. Robert Brightman. "It’s rather unusual. I haven’t seen anything like it in my career."

He said he hoped to have the object identified within 72 hours, but declined to name the other agencies whose help he has enlisted.

Approximately 20 to 50 rock-like objects fall every day over the entire planet, said Carlton Pryor, a professor of astronomy at Rutgers University.

"It’s not all that uncommon to have rocks rain down from heaven," said Pryor, who had not seen the object that struck the Monmouth County home. "These are usually rocky or a mixture of rock and metal." […]

And the cottage destroyed by a meteorite in Germany in October 2006: German cottage destroyed by meteor .

Reuters

October 20, 2006

BERLIN - A fire that destroyed a cottage near Bonn and injured a 77-year-old man was probably caused by a meteor and witnesses saw an arc of blazing light in the sky, German police said on Friday.

Burkhard Rick, a spokesman for the police in Siegburg east of Bonn, said the fire gutted the cottage and badly burnt the man’s hands and face in the incident on October 10.

"We sought assistance from Bochum observatory and they noted that at that particular moment the earth was near a field of meteoroid splinter and it could be assumed that particles had entered the atmosphere," he said.

"The particles usually don’t reach the surface because they disintegrate in the atmosphere," he added. "But some can make it to the ground. We believe this was a bolide (meteoric fireball) with a size of no more than 10 mm."

And the falling ice that hit a car in Florida: Mysterious, Large Ice Chunk Falls on Tampa Man’s Car.

©n/a
Car dented by falling ice in Tampa.

1/28/2007 11pm report

TAMPA, FL (AP) — Raymond Rodriguez was changing a tire when an 18-inch chunk of ice plummeted from the sky with a piercing whistle, then a metallic crunch. The ice chunk crushed the roof of a nearby Ford Mustang on Sunday morning. No one was hurt.

"I was scared," Rodriguez said, who was only feet away. "It’s crazy, man."

The Federal Aviation Administration is reviewing flight schedules to see if the ice fell off a plane. The ice did not have a blue tint that would indicate it came from a plane’s lavatory. The National Weather Service said conditions in Tampa were not favorable for the formation of large balls of ice, known as megacryometeors.

"It’s not an act of God," said Carlos Javage, whose son’s car was wrecked by the mystery ice. "This came off an airplane."

So, what are we to make of this sudden appearance of so many "once in a lifetime" meteors across the globe? Anything? Coincidence? Or something else?

Let’s put together an overview of the data we have been collecting and outline the working hypothesis that we have to explain it. It isn’t very hopeful, we’ll tell you that right at the start. It may well make Tunguska look like a firecracker in comparison. The blast at Tunguska has been described thusly:

The explosion was probably caused by the airburst of a meteorite or comet 6 to 10 kilometers (4-6 mi) above the Earth’s surface. The energy of the blast was later estimated to be between 10 and 15 megatons of TNT, which would be equivalent to Castle Bravo, the most powerful nuclear bomb ever detonated by the US. It felled an estimated 60 million trees over 2,150 square kilometers (830 sq mi).

The Binary System

We look out at our sky and we see only one sun. We naturally conclude that our star system includes only the sun. However, binary star systems are very frequent.

There is an hypothesis that argues that our sun is part of such a binary system. The sun’s hypothetical companion has been named, as mentioned above, "Nemesis". The projected orbit of Nemesis is 26 million years, give or take the time necessary for the rising and falling of several civilizations.

Studies of the fossil record by Dave Raup and Jack Sepkoski have shown that there is a cyclic repetition to periods of extinction. The Nemesis theory was drawn up to explain the extinction cycle.

©Raup & Sepkoski
Chart of the 26 million year extinction cycle

I can offer no proof for the working hypothesis outlined above. We are working on a limited data set. The most that I can say is that an argument can be made suggesting the following scenario:

The sun’s dark companion, on its 26 million year orbit, came close to the solar system 377 years ago, showing itself and pushing in front of it comets, a few of which appeared thirty years after the 1630 showing of the dark star itself. The passage of the companion through the Oort cloud dragging hundreds of thousands of other bodies in its wake, swung around in its orbit, and flung a swarm of them our way, travelling now for nearly four hundred years. Members of that swarm have been picked off by the gravitational fields of the outer planets, increasing the numbers of moons in recent years. If the swarm has passed by Jupiter, then it may be arriving here very soon.

Are the articles pulled from papers around the world over the last few months the announcement of their arrival?

One final point. There have been reports that Earth is not the only planet being hit by "global warming". Might it be possible that this apparently widespread change of "climate" in the solar system is linked to an incoming comet cloud? We do not know and are sorely lacking in the means to acquire data to refine or reject the working hypothesis. Perhaps someone else out there does have the means. Whatever the explanation for a generalized warming of several planets, it is clear that we know very little about the fundamental mechanisms behind it. We are a speck in the universe, a drop in an ocean more vast, more complex, and more mysterious than we can imagine.

To close, I want to quote from the final pages of The Cycle of Cosmic Catastrophes: Flood, Fire, and Famine in the History of Civilization because the words there should have meaning for all of us.

©?

NOT-SO-HARMLESS SHOOTING STARS

If you want more evidence for what happened to the mammoths, you need only to look up at the clear night sky. In almost any month, you can see shooting stars from one of many meteor showers. Nearly every fiery streak you see is the tiny remnant of some giant comet that broke up into smaller pieces. Of course, most of those pieces are microscopic, but their parent comet was not - it was enormous. Astronomers know that, even today, hidden in those cosmic clouds of tiny remnants, there are some huge chunks of comet pieces. We pass through their clouds every year like clockwork, so eventually we will collide with some of bigger pieces.

In 1990, Victor Clube, an astrophysicist, and Bill Napier, an astronomer, published The Cosmic Winter, a book in which they describe performing orbital analyses of several of the meteor showers that hit Earth every year. Using sophisticated computer software, they carefully looked backward for thousands of years, tracing the orbits of comets, asteroids, and meteor showers until they uncovered something astounding. Many meteor showers are related to one another, such as the Taurids, Perseids, Piscids, and Orionids. In addition, some very large cosmic objects are related: the comets Encke and Rudnicki, the asteroids Oljato, Hephaistos, and about 100 others. Every one of those 100-plus cosmic bodies is at least a half-mile in diameter and some are miles wide. And what do they have in common? According to those scientists, every one is the offspring of the same massive comet that first entered our system less than 20,000 years ago! Clube and Napier calculated that, to account for all the debris they found strewn throughout our solar system, the original comet had to have been enormous.

So was this our megafauna killer? All the known facts fit. The comet may have ridden in on the supernova wave, [or was knocked into the solar system by the Companion Sun - LKJ] then gone into orbit around the sun less than 20,000 years ago; or, if it was already here, the supernova debris wave may have knocked it into an Earth-crossing orbit. Either way, any time we look up into the night sky at a beautiful, dazzling display of shooting stars, there is an ominous side to that beauty. We are very likely seeing the leftover debris from a monster comet that finished off 40 million animals 12 to 13,000 years ago.

Clube and Napier also calculated that, because of subtle changes in the orbits of Earth and the remaining cosmic debris, Earth crosses through the densest part of the giant comet clouds about every 2 ,000 to 4,000 years [or 3,600 years?]. When we look at climate and ice-core records, we can see that pattern. For example the iridium, helium-3, nitrate, ammonium, and other key measurements seem to rise and fall in tandem, producing noticeable peaks around 18,000, 16,000, 13,000, 9,000, 5,000, and 2,000 years ago. In that pattern of peaks every 2,000 to 4,000 years, we may be seeing the "calling cards" of the returning megacomet.

Fortunately, the oldest peaks were the heaviest bombardments, and things have been getting quieter since then, as the remains of the comet break up into even smaller pieces The danger is not past, however. Some of the remaining miles-wide pieces are big enough to do serious damage to our cities, climate, and global economy. Clube and Napier (1984) predicted that in the year 2000 and continuing for 400 years, Earth would enter another dangerous time in which the planet’s changing orbit would bring us into a potential collision course with the densest parts of the clouds containing some very large debris. Twenty years after their prediction, we have just now moved into the danger zone. It is a widely accepted fact that some of those large objects are in Earth-crossing orbits at this very moment, and the only uncertainty is whether they will miss us, as is most likely, or whether they will crash into some part of our planet.

That may seem like bad news, but there is a glimmer of good news too. For the first time in human kind’s known history, we have ways to detect those objects and prevent them from hitting us again. One such effort is Project Spaceguard, a multinational cooperative attempting to locate those Earth threatening objects, and other similar programs include the Near-Earth Asteroid Tracking (NEAT) telescope and the Spacewatch Project at the University of Arizona. Unfortunately, not one of them is funded nearly well enough to complete the job for many years, bur they are working at it steadily.

No one knows exactly how many dangerous comets and asteroids are out there, but astronomers are certain that hundreds to thousands of them remain undiscovered. The worst part is that many of those space objects are so dark and difficult to see that they are nearly invisible until they come very close, and by then it is too late. It is certain that one of these monsters is on a collision course with Earth - we just do not know the details. Is it days from now or hundreds of years from now? Even if we were sure one was coming, there is just very little that we can do about it currently.

We are years away from being able to control our own destiny as it relates to supernovae and giant comets and asteroids, but scientists are working on solutions. This is not a high priority with the world’s governments, however, which typically prefer to confront terrestrial threats rather than cosmic ones. To prevent one of those giant objects from smashing into us, collectively, we spend about $10 to $20 million annually, an amount less than the cost of one or two sophisticated fighter jets. Almost no money is spent trying to detect imminent supernovae [or comets].

Our politicians are seriously underestimating these severe threats, which are capable of ending our species, just as they snuffed out the mammoths a mere 13,000 years ago, only an eyeblink in cosmic terms. There are few threats of that magnitude facing us today. The survival of the human race is not seriously threatened by the avian flu, Al Qaeda attacks, the end of the Age of Oil, monster hurricanes, giant earthquakes, or enormous tsunamis; if any of those occur, most of us will continue with our lives. Furthermore, nothing on that list is broadly accepted as having caused worldwide extinctions in the past. The same cannot be said about supernovae and massive [cometary] impacts. Those two cosmic events are implicated in many of the largest extinctions on our planet over the last millions of years. Fortunately, we survived them, but many of our fellow species did not. Humankind might not survive the next one. It seems reasonable to forgo several of our military fighter jets each year to decrease our chances of being" nuked" from space by a supernova or a comet.

So, indeed, humanity has passed its "extinct by" date and, just as it was in the days of Noah…

They did eat, they drank, they married wives, they were given in marriage, until the day that Noe entered into the ark, and the flood came, and destroyed them all.

Likewise also as it was in the days of Lot; they did eat, they drank, they bought, they sold, they planted, they builded; But the same day that Lot went out of Sodom it rained fire and brimstone from heaven, and destroyed them all.

©Beloit University
Somehow, we don’t think it was a boat….

 

2 comments:

Anonymous said…

I think you just bowled a strike… and with your funny face on too…who would have thought Mars bars as the potential source of human species continuation? The opening quote reminded me of the power of Love, the creative principle in which chaos is used to destroy the old to make way for the new… or as young Harry Potter is told by the wand merchant of ‘he who must not be named’, "He did increadible things…terrible yes….but incredible" or something like that…
We seldom think of Love in such terms… the power of the forces of creation, the maker of form.

You threaded the needle of expectation rather excitingly this time leaving the reader looking for a good seat to enjoy the show…some may see it as fear, but Love is always in the eye of the beholder, and learning to accept the Truth allows joy to replace pain.

If nothing else, it should remind us all that nothing we experience remains the same except that found in silence… and in a world where the noise has reached its zenith, perhaps this is Nature’s call to shut up and listen.

10:04 PM   Anonymous said…

Wasn’t this cluster said to be following in the gravity well/wake of the companion star? Would that wake still be present after so many centuries if seen at the time of Charlemagne? Does this jive with the info from the C’s? As our system was said to be orbitting the now dark star, not it us… and if it’s already passed, why would it create fear in the public?

Second thoughts.

10:14 PM  

 

Uncategorized 2:42 pm

©?
What is the truth about Climate Change?

Some time ago I wrote about Climate Change as being probably the most pressing problem facing humanity today. It is so pressing that I am convinced that possibly 90% of the human race - over 6 billion people - could be at risk of certain death in the very near future - like within ten years - if this matter is not addressed adequately and appropriately very, very soon by our "glorious leaders" who seem to have little on their mind other than blowing up innocent people.

But then, that war-mongering has a hidden agenda behind it: to grab and hold resources.

But rest assured that the intent is not to grab and hold those resources for you and me; it is to get them for the "elite," that 6% of humanity that is on the top of the heap and intends to stay there regardless of the fact that those genes should never be passed on.

Well, the Climate Change Confusion factor is heating up.

Channel 4 recently broadcast a special on the "Climate Change Swindle," that was intended to "expose the myths about climate change that have been promulgated in order to hoodwink the world into accepting the man-made theory of global warming."

As far as it went, this special wasn’t too bad. However, it didn’t really tell the whole story which is that, yes, Climate Change is real and a serious threat, but not for the reasons given.

As it happens, one of the experts included in the presentation has now announced that he was badly mis-quoted, or quoted out of context, and he is back-pedaling like mad.

Keep in mind that this is really just a distraction, something to keep the masses busy so that they don’t see the real agenda: that it is intended that they should be "left out in the cold" because they didn’t act to get rid of corrupt leaders in time to do anything to prepare for what is coming.

To make the point, let’s look at this little debacle a bit more closely. Expert in oceanography quoted in Channel 4’s debunking of Global Warming says he was ’seriously misrepresented

It was the television programme that set out to show that most of the world’s climate scientists are misleading us when they say humanity is heating up the Earth by emitting carbon dioxide. And The Great Global Warming Swindle, screened by Channel 4 on Thursday night, convinced many viewers that it is indeed untrue that the gas is to blame for global warming.

But now the programme - and the channel - is facing a serious challenge to its own credibility after one of the most distinguished scientists that it featured said his views had been "grossly distorted" by the film, and made it clear that he believed human pollution did warm the climate.

Comment: This sentence right here is the first "twist." If the reader will go to Professor Wunsch’s website and read his actual comments, they will discover that he did NOT say the "human pollution did warm the climate" in the sense that this writer is trying to convey - as if that was all there was to it.

What Dr. Wunsch actually said will be discussed further on.

Professor Carl Wunsch, professor of physical oceanography at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology said he had been "completely misrepresented" by the programme, and "totally misled" on its content. He added that he is considering making a formal complaint.

A Channel 4 spokesman said: "The film was a polemic that drew together the well-documented views of a number of respected scientists to reach the same conclusions. This is a controversial film but we feel that it is important that all sides of the debate are aired. If one of the contributors has concerns about his contribution we will look into that."

Any complaint would provoke a crisis at Channel 4, now recovering from the Jade Goody Big Brother storm. It had to make a rare public apology after the Independent Television Commission convicted previous programmes on environmental issues by the same film-maker, Martin Durkin, of similar offences - and is already facing questions on why it accepted another programme from him.

The commission found that the editing of interviews with four contributors to a series called Against Nature had "distorted or misrepresented their known views".

Professor Wunsch said: "I am angry because they completely misrepresented me. My views were distorted by the context in which they placed them. I was misled as to what it was going to be about. I was told about six months ago that this was to be a programme about how complicated it is to understand what is going on. If they had told me even the title of the programme, I would have absolutely refused to be on it. I am the one who has been swindled."

Comment: Here we see the professor’s point: that it is not so simple as being ALL human caused, nor is it totally non-human caused. His point is how COMPLICATED the subject is.

When told what the commission had found, he said: "That is what happened to me." He said he believes it is "an almost inescapable conclusion" that "if man adds excess CO2 to the atmosphere, the climate will warm".

Comment: Notice here that Prof. Wunsch is not saying that human caused CO2 is the major factor.

He went on: "The movie was terrible propaganda. It is characteristic of propaganda that you take an area where there is legitimate dispute and you claim straight out that people who disagree with you are swindlers. That is what the film does in any area where some things are subject to argument."

Comment: Notice that Prof. Wunsch is here saying that there IS legitimate dispute about what causes global warming.

Mr Durkin last night said that Professor Wunsch was "most certainly not duped into appearing into the programme" and that it "had not in any way misrepresented what he said".

Before the programme was shown, the IoS asked Channel 4 why it had commissioned another film from Mr Durkin and, further, whether it was making any special checks on its accuracy.

A spokesman said the programme made by Mr Durkin for which it had had to apologise was a decade old, adding: "We treat Martin as any other film-maker."

Comment: Now we come to the propaganda and damage control:

The cold, hard facts about global warmingWhat do most scientists believe caused global warming?

Comment: Notice how the question is phrased: using the terms "most" and "believe." The word "most" is quite misleading, though "believe" is pretty much right on; has nothing to do with facts and data.

The vast majority are convinced it is human emissions of carbon dioxide.

Comment: In fact, this is NOT true. It is an out and out lie.

It was established scientifically 180 years ago - and has never been seriously disputed - that natural levels of the gas given off by decaying vegetation and the oceans help to keep the Earth warm; without it, and other natural greenhouse gases, the planet would be some 20C colder and we would freeze.

Comment: So far, so good. But here comes the twist:

Adding even the so far relatively small amounts from human activities makes us warmer.

Comment: This is where we find the major dispute. It is clear that the amount of CO2 emissions that are produced by human beings in our time do not anywhere come close to the volumes of CO2 emissions that have been produced at other periods of history that did NOT result in Global Warming. So the human factor is very much in question.

Has the world warmed before?Yes, and big warmings over prehistoric times were not started by increasing CO2 levels; changes in solar activity are more likely.

Comment: Another twist. There is clear evidence of other warmings that were definitely related to increasing CO2 levels that were precipitated by solar activity and OTHER causes. It is disingenuous to suggest that other warmings were not related to rising CO2 levels.

Levels of the gas started rising some 800 years into the warming, but then probably reinforced it, making it bigger and longer. Temperature and CO2 are interdependent; when one goes up the other follows. This time it is different because vast amounts of the gas are being artificially put into the atmosphere by humans.

Comment: So, they clarify here, just to cover their behinds, but that doesn’t excuse the preceding twist. As it happens, the current "global warming" spell is following this same pattern. Nothing new here.

What about more recent history?There was a warm period in Europe in the Middle Ages, again probably caused by solar activity, but it does not seem to have been a worldwide phenomenon, although records are scanty.

Comment: What a load of horse hockey! How easy it is to say "it doesn’t appear to have been worldwide" when the records are scanty. And again notice that the cycle was related to the Sun. But NOW, of course, the determination has been made to blame it on strictly human activity no matter what, and that is what this writer seems to be doing.

So is the sun responsible now?Some sceptics say so and probably it played the major role until quite recently. But over the past three decades, solar activity has scarcely risen, while temperatures have shot up - a fact disguised in the film. What has gone up is CO2 and even top sceptic Nigel Lawson admits it is "highly likely" that the gas has "played a significant part" in global warming this century.

Comment: Notice how cleverly the writer says "Some sceptics say so" instead of saying "many EXPERTS say so" and "probably it played a major role until quite recently." What a load of hooey.

There are quite a few experts - and considerable data to back it up - who are saying that the solar activity HAS increased. To back this up, it is pointed out that nearly every other planet in our solar system is ALSO experiencing Global Warming.

So, who is swindling who?

Now, let’s look at Prof. Wunsch’s actual comments:Partial Response to the London Channel 4 Film "The Great Global Warming Swindle" Carl Wunsch 11 March 2007I believe that climate change is real, a major threat, and almost surely has a major human-induced component.

Comment: Notice here that Prof. Wunsch says, very carefully, that Climate Change (notice he doesn’t even use the term "Global Warming,") "almost surely" - that is to say, it’s not a fact established by any hard data - "has a major human-induced component." That is to say, there is a lot more to Climate Change than human activity, though he BELIEVES that component might be major - "almost surely." ALMOST.

But I have tried to stay out of the "climate wars" because all nuance tends to be lost, and the distinction between what we know firmly, as scientists, and what we suspect is happening, is so difficult to maintain in the presence of rhetorical excess.

Comment: Here Prof. Wunsch is making the very careful point that what scientists know firmly and what they suspect are two very different things. And indeed, the rhetoric in the media, driven by political agendas, is quite excessive, particularly relating to the human element relating to "Global Warming."

In the long run, our credibility as scientists rests on being very careful of, and protective of, our authority and expertise.

Comment: We see here that Prof. Wunsch’s primary concern is his reputation among mainstream scientists. That should give us some warning…

The science of climate change remains incomplete.

Comment: You can say that again! But the rhetoric in the media, including the above article from the UK Independent debunking the debunking of Global Warming is just another case in point.

Some elements are based so firmly on well-understood principles, or on such clear observational records, that most scientists would agree that they are almost surely true (adding CO2 to the atmosphere is dangerous; sea level will continue to rise,…).

Comment: Notice his qualification: "most" scientists. Not all scientists. And in fact, quite often it is the scientist who goes against the "textus receptus" of the standard theory who is right.

Other elements remain more uncertain, but we as scientists in our roles as informed citizens believe society should be deeply concerned about their possibility: a mid-western US megadrought in 100 years; melting of a large part of the Greenland ice sheet, among many other examples.

Comment: Notice that he precedes the remarks about the possibilities of a megadrought in 100 years and the melting of the Greenland ice sheet with "Other elements remain more uncertain…" Next we get to the nitty gritty of his position, the one he has taken to preserve his reputation among his fellow scientists as well as the scientific thought police:
©n/a
Increased Hurricane activity is also part of "Global Warming." Hurricanes are huge machines that exchange heat and cold in our environment. An increase in heat can lead to a sudden cooling via violent storms, as the fossil record shows…

I am on record in a number of places as complaining about the over-dramatization and unwarranted extrapolation of scientific facts.

Comment: But didn’t he just say that there were possibilities that were uncertain, but that he felt that, as a scientist, there should be concern about them? Doesn’t he think it is possible that extrapolating "a mid-western US megadrought in 100 years; melting of a large part of the Greenland ice sheet" from the condition of Global Warming is perhaps unwarranted, especially considering the fact that the RECORD shows that every period of Global Warming was followed by a sudden and rapid Global Cooling? An Ice Age? What’s wrong with THOSE facts, that specific data that is, as the good professor points out, "based so firmly on well-understood principles, or on such clear observational records"??

Thus the notion that the Gulf Stream would or could "shut off’ or that with global warming Britain would go into a "new ice age" are either scientifically impossible or so unlikely as to threaten our credibility as a scientific discipline if we proclaim their reality.

Comment: And here, Prof. Wunsch demonstrates that he is either not a real scientist, considering all the data, or he is more driven by his concern for his reputation among the politically controlled scientific community than he is concerned with a real threat to humanity. Theres is certainly evidence that the Gulf Stream has shut off before, and there is evidence of sudden glacial rebound associated with this.

They also are huge distractions from more immediate and realistic threats.

Comment: Are they? Sudden Glacial Rebound seems rather immediate and realistically threatening to me and a lot of other experts.

The rest of Prof. Wunsch’s complaint focus mainly on trying to get himself out of hot water with the mainstream scientific community. And here we come to just how the good Professor can be an agent for political agendas without even intending it or being conscious of it.Yesterday we carried an interesting article, How The Media and Establishment Brainwash The Public. We carried this article not because we "believe" in "creationism," but because the example of how things work is very simple and important.

Anyway, I am going to paraphrase a bit of that article for the present purpose:

There are two broad categories of theories about Climate Change: first, are those who think that Climate Change is caused by human activity. Second, are those who think that Climate Change is natural and cyclical and the cycle can be known by examination of the historical data. There are actually several different camps (i.e. different theories) within each group, and there are hybrid groups (i.e. hybrid theories), but let us assume there are only two simple groups.

To visualize the two different camps, suppose there is a large field and there is a fence that bisects the field and you are standing at one end of the fence looking down the fence. On the right side of this fence are the Human Caused Global Warming advocates (the people who make up the "establishment" and are ruled by the politics of the day because that is how they get their funding) and on the left side of this fence are the Natural cycle advocates (the people who disagree with the "establishment" point of view).

You have the choice of siding with the establishment or the renegades.

In some cases this choice could affect your job. For example, if you taught biology in a public high school, and you taught Natural Cycles in your classroom, you might lose your job.If you are only looking for the benefits, and a promotion, then there is no question as to what theory you will teach. The Human Caused Global Warming side of the fence has virtually all the benefits.

Suppose you want to know the truth (as best as you are capable of honestly determining as an "open-minded" person) - is Human Caused Global Warming (HCGW) or Natural Cycle Climate Change (NCCC) correct based on the evidence currently available?

Suppose that you decide to start your decision making journey by talking first with the HCGW crowd; because everything you have heard in school is that HCGW has been proven to be true. So you head to the right side of the fence and start talking to an HCGW advocate.

Suppose this person tells you all the reasons why Global Warming is caused by human activity. He might go into "well-understood principles", or claimed "clear observational records" and claims that "that most scientists would agree that adding CO2 to the atmosphere is dangerous; sea level will continue to rise, and so on.

After this conversation, you start to walk away, but the person stops you. Then this same HCGW advocate starts telling you all of the things that are wrong with the NCCC crowd. He tells you one theory after another of the NCCC group, such as their nonsense about the Gulf Stream etc, and why each theory cannot be true and what a bunch of goons they are.

After this conversation, you now feel that you understand both the HCGW’s and the NCCC’s theories of Climate Change. You decide it is not necessary to go to the left side of the fence and talk to a NCCC representative because you already think you understand their views and why their views are wrong.

A Common Mistake

If you made such a decision, you would be making a common mistake: you have heard both sides of the issue, but from only one person on one side of the fence. You have really only heard how the people on one side of the fence feel about the issues. But you haven’t heard the arguments of the NCCC, from a NCCC expert, nor have you heard why the NCCC advocates think that the HCGW’s are wrong.

There are actually four categories of the two sides (these are the four things you need to hear to make an informed decision):

1) pro-HCGW (from the HCGW side), 2) anti-NCCC (from the HCGW side), 3) pro-NCCC (from the NCCC side), 4) anti-HCGW (from the NCCC side).

In other words, from the right side of the fence you have heard the pro-Human Caused Global Warming arguments and also from the right side of the fence you have heard all of the anti-Natural Cycle Climate Change arguments. But note that you have not heard the pro-Natural Cycle Climate Change arguments, from a Natural Cycle Climate Change expert, nor have you heard the anti-Human Caused Global Warming arguments, from a Natural Cycle Climate Change expert.

You have only heard two of the four categories because you have only heard from one person who is on one side of the fence.

Do you really know both sides of the issue?

No you don’t! You only know one side of the issue and two of the four categories. Until you go to the left side of the fence and hear about the pro-Natural Cycle Climate Change views, from a NCCC EXPERT, and you hear the anti-Human Caused Global Warming views, from an NCCC Expert, you don’t have a basis for making an objective decision.

Comment: And what is at the root of it all?

A media that is controlled by political elements for a definite and specific agenda, and it ain’t in your best interests, nor has it ever been.

Take that to the bank.

3 comments:

Richard said…

I always look foward to something new from this site! :)

Richard

6:42 AM   Rachid said…

What’s the point in trying to save 6 billion people? 10,000 years of civilization have given way to the most laborious lifestyles on the planet. Human suffering has progressively increased since the Neolithic Revolution.

Screw trying to save humanity. Civilization has invested enough time and resources into exploiting the world. While the social elites reap the rewards of our culture, a majority of humanity slaves away in hopes of a better tomorrow that has yet to come.

The day global warming wipes us out is the day the planet can finally breathe again.

5:17 PM   Anonymous said…

Does anyone, scientists included, know all the facts about climate change? I very much doubt it.

The influence of the Sun on Earth’s weather patterns is unknown. We simply do not know that much about the Sun.

But I strongly disagree with people who say that human pollution has no impact on the climate. Isn’t that what Exxon and Ford would like us to think?

I suspect the answer is that human industrial activity is severely aggravating the solar cycle.

If the North Atlantic Conveyor (aka Gulf Stream) was to cease carrying warm water to the northern European coastal regions, then the UK for example, being at the same latitude as Alaska, would see an extraordinary shift to a sub-arctic climate.

11:53 AM  

 

Uncategorized 2:39 pm

There is a really strange gal on the internet named Dee Finney. We learn on her website that it is…

…dedicated to present compelling evidence concerning a Great World Change. It invokes a number of areas of research, with dreams as the major key. The other areas of research include connections to crop circle formations, UFOs, ETs, synchronicities, and coincidences, signs in the sky, prophecies, myths, and religions. […]

Many people are getting these dreams and visions as the millenium changes. The more participants we find, the better the picture will be of what is coming and how we should prepare for it.

Dee is affiliated with a guy named Joe Mason, about whom we learn:

Joe’s research involves crop circles, the 11:11 coincidences, universal myths/religions, making it clear that humanity has been on an ascending path that corresponds to the chakra levels of the spiritual body of mankind.

We are nearing a leap to the heart chakra level of consciousness evolution en masse. The ongoing research explains the connections to the great Grand Cross alignment and solar eclipse on August 11, 1999, at 11:11 a.m.

I guess that "leap in heart chakra level of consciousness" musta been behind the take-over of America by the Bush Reich followed by 9-11 and the slaughter of the Iraqis not to mention the ongoing genocide of the Palestinians. In fact, I find Joe Mason’s focus on those numbers - 9s and 11s - to be rather suspicious in view of what is going to follow in this post. More:

Joe Mason and Dee Finney have been dream journaling on their own for over twenty years, trying to understand their own dreams as well as others from people met along the way. Joe discovered early on in his dream research that synchronicities and coincidences were happening in his life that confirmed some of the ideas he got in his dreams. Dee discovered that many of her dreams were prophetic as well as confirming gnostic religious views.

There is a link to meet the webpage authors. When you click it, you see this:

Maybe I am reading too much into this, but it seems to me that a psychologist would have a field day with the fact that Dee and Joe chose to represent themselves with two slug-like creatures. Of course, others might suggest that the "lovable" characters in fact bear a striking resemblance to the form traditionally used by artists to represent human feces. Moving swiftly along…

A few years earlier, this space was occupied by an actual photo of Dee and Joe.

Dee Finney’s story goes as follows:

In 1997, the first miracle occurred. Dee suddenly felt the need to share her life with a male partner. It was a feeling that came overnight after a dream.

Joe likewise had suddenly decided he didn’t want to be alone either and sought out a female partner despite the fact that he felt she would have to just sit and watch perhaps while he did his research work on a large spiritual project which he knew would be unfair to any woman to endure.

The morning that Dee felt the need to be with a male partner, she looked up at the ceiling and told the Universe to bring her a man who would be a total partner, not only in a physical way but in a spiritual way as well, one who would help her achieve her spiritual goals.

The next day, only 24 hours later, being a Saturday, Dee spent some time on the computer on AOL, reading and responding to e-mail, when she received a chat message requesting her presence at a special chat with a person who didn’t have regular AOL access. Dee decided to see what it was all about and on that chat is where Dee and Joe met. This was on the first Saturday of July, 1997.

Joe remembered Dee’s name from a previous e-mail, but Dee did not. Joe IMd Dee immediately to introduce himself and ask if she remembered him. Dee said she was a BIG dreamer and Joe said was researching dreams. Joe and Dee hit it off really well, and within moments, Dee knew that this was the man who had been sent to her.

It was only a matter of days that Joe knew too that Dee was the woman for his life partner.

There was a problem, a BIG problem. Joe lived in California and Dee lived in Wisconsin. That was no real problem, just a small detail to work out. On September 19th, Joe’s birthday, Joe flew to Milwaukee to get Dee and without even meeting previously in person, Dee moved to California to live with Joe and work on the DREAMS OF THE GREAT EARTH CHANGES with Dee as the web designer and BIG dreamer.

Ironically, Dee watched the tape of Abraham on December 26, 1996 on her birthday, and learned about positive co-creation, which is what brought Dee and Joe together forevermore. Joe learned about it from Seth teachings. See how great it works!!!

Joe had lived in a 8′ x 8′ room in a trailer, which was obviously not large enough for an added person, so Joe and Dee moved in with his wonderful and generous son T.J. who had a spare bedroom. Joe and Dee lived in a room of wall to wall books and computer equipment which most people would not be able to tolerate, but Joe and Dee were oblivious to that. The most important thing was that they were together and working on their spiritual projects together. Not long thereafter, a four bedroom, 2 bath house with a fireplace became available for rent at an incredibly low rent price which would allow them to have meetings with other spiritual people.

In the meantime, through a series of dreams Dee had, she was led and directed day by day by spirit on what to put on the web site. On December 16, 1997, Dee had a dream which is documented on her dream journal pages, and I quote: "DREAM - I had a dream about a computer page. When the dream was complete, I consciously tried to send the finished page to Joe’s computer. I was thinking, If Joe ever wakes up and remembers MY dream, it’ll be a miracle."

The music you hear is that miracle in a series of miracles which prove that positive co-creation works. On February19, 1998, Joe woke up and heard his dream voice say, "Put the music, ‘On The Sunny Side of The Street’ on your Positive Co-creation page." Joe and Dee were excited to hear that Joe had a dream voice message about the web site as this was his first web-site oriented dream. All the previous web-site dreams had been Dee’s dreams.

Joe searched the internet to find the music and the words to the song while Dee was working on a project to show how people were led by God through dreams and visions on a Bible Quotation basis which will be uploaded to the site also.

Dee became very tired after Joe left for work and went back to bed to take a nap. When Dee woke up and lay there recalling her dreams in order to write them down, she heard a loud beep in her left ear. Quietly, Dee waited for a message to come through. Then she heard a beautiful chord of music, which was followed by a visual film of a street scene where a beam of sunlight came down to shine on one side of the street while the remainder of the world remained dark.

And thus you hear "ON THE SUNNY SIDE OF THE STREET" while you read these words and scan the following Positive Co-creation links, put there because Dee saw a video of ABRAHAM channeled by Esther Hicks and how positive co-creation works in ones life. She saw that film on December 26th, 1996, her birthday. She made her list of goals that day and they are ALL coming true by using positive co-creation. In fact, they are BETTER than she set for her goals.

Now, she lives and works with the most wonderful man in the world, in her opinion. Joe had long been a student of the Seth teachings which teaches positive co-creation also. Joe and Dee happily present this music and these words for you to join with them in POSITIVE CO-CREATION. Your joyous future depends on it.

Wow. Dreams, auditory hallucinations, and channeling that depends on BELIEF. Hmmm…. Well, it takes all kinds.

Now, as it happens, there is a bit of history between me and Dee Finney. Dee was very active on Mike Lindemann’s ISCNI discussion on AOL years ago. Back then, she was similar to me – an ordinary housewife with an interest in metaphysics. Of course, I was talking about the Cs and we had a number of exchanges about that. Dee was very interested and our interaction was friendly and pleasant.

Then, of course, our paths separated. In a funny sort of way it could be said that some of my experiences were similar to Dee’s. I was engaged in a channeling experiment and the Cassiopaeans - "myself in the future" - encouraged me to research Gravity Waves. I did so, and that work is what led me to post material that was then sent to a physicist who "recognized" me as I recognized him when he wrote to me. This, of course, was the culmination of a lifetime of dreams and what seem to have been past-life influences: a family destroyed by the Nazis is reborn and re-assembled by miraculous events that span the planet.

The series of events throughout our lives that all led to our meeting and our work have still never been recounted; perhaps one day I will do it. But certainly, I didn’t just one day decide that I needed a man and, as if by magic, one appeared. In fact, it was the exact opposite. I decided in early 1996 that I needed to be alone so that I could devote myself to my work. And curiously, Ark had made the same decision in a slightly different context. No sooner had we decided that there was no possibility of Earthly love, that the only value was Universal Love, than the Universe gave us something so precious that it is almost impossible to speak about it: proof that love never dies and spirit is eternal; that if you "seek first the Kingdom of God," all else shall be given to you.

That was in July of 1996. July 5th, to be exact. That date is part of a long series of synchronicities so bizarre that even today, when I tell people about it, they shake their head in amazement. Funny that Dee had her meeting on July 5th also, only one year later. What is even more interesting is the fact that I had written to Dee to tell her the story of my meeting Ark with full details including date synchronicities, and so on. I still have a copy of the email.

I have briefly recounted here and there some of the truly bizarre events that surrounded the early months of my interactions with Ark who was, for all that time, still on the other side of the planet, including visions, dreams, incidents of bi-location, synchronicities that go beyond any mathematical probability, and so on.

But far be it from me to compare my experiences to the amazing fact that Dee Finney woke up one morning and decided she wanted a man and found one living in a trailer researching dreams a few states away. I’m just grateful that my husband felt compelled to learn English when he was young, knowing that he would need it some day; that he dreamed of his "American Wife" while I dreamed of my Polish husband all those many long, lonely and painful years; otherwise, our meeting would have been impossible.

Well, in any event, there is Dee Finney with her story of "Positive Co-creation" miracles, and there is me and Ark with our story of overcoming the most unbelievable obstacles imaginable put in the way of two people who wanted to be together. We weren’t able to be together when and where and how we wanted; still aren’t. No "low rent" house miraculously appeared for us to make our lives easy. Nothing about our story was easy: it was all about sheer grit and determination and love that suffers all and never gives up hope in Love itself.

But I digress.

It was some time after Ark and I married that I began to write The Wave, and it was during this period that we were contacted by Dee Finney. I recounted the exchange in the chapter about Shamanic Initiations:

A Shaman is, as Eliade describes, a Technician of Ecstasy. This is an essential qualification and/or result of contact with the Divine. More than that, in order to be in direct contact with the Divine, the human being must be able to "see the unseen." This Seeing is the capacity of human beings to enlarge their perceptual field until they are capable of assessing not only outer appearances, but also the essence of everything in order to access the level of being that enables them make choices that are capable of initiating a new causal series. Of course, problems arise when an individual attempts to be a Shaman without knowledge. A recent correspondent sent us some information about a popular channeled source that claims to be teaching a new perspective on physics.

Dear Ark and Laura, I don’t know much about Scalar Waves, certainly not enough to know whether or not the site below’s information on Scalar Waves is useful, but I pass the information along to you. I have heard Anna Hayes speak on the Jeff Rense radio show, and she made a good impression as an apparently calm and knowledgeable person.

Ark went to the site in question and began to read. After a period of study, he responded as follows:

Hi ____,

While reading:

"Dimensions are interwoven layers of scalar waves that serve to direct the flow of consciousness/energy into multiple patterns of refraction through which the hologram of matter density, linear time and manifest objectification of reality can be experienced. Dimensions exist in precise relationship to each other creating a 90-degree difference in Angular Rotation of Particle Spin between dimensional bands. Scalar Waves are points of Standing Waves, composed of quantities of consciousness, that emanate out of fixed points of vibration which form ultra-micro-particle units called Partiki, Partika and Particum. Scalar Waves exist within a fixed Scalar Field that forms the Universal Unified Field of consciousness/energy. Fixed scalar waves appear to move due to a perpetual action of internal fission and fusion, through which series of scalar standing wave points ‘flash on and off’ creating perpetual rhythms of motion called ‘flash-line sequences’ through which continual manifestation and de-manifestation of matter occurs."

I can’t help thinking that it is a pity that a person that evidently knows nothing about waves, dimensions, particle spin etc. chooses to "TEACH" others on these subjects. But, on the other hand, creating more confusion is what the "Lizzies" must have on their mind. And they seem to be successful. On the other hand, we are in a Free Will Universe - it is up to each person to choose the path and the "teacher." Thanks for the link - it helps me.

Best, ark.

As it happened, the response was also sent (by the correspondent asking Ark to look into it) to a promoter of the above channeling who then wrote to Ark:

Hi: One doesn’t need to know anything on a specific topic when the information isn’t coming from oneself but from a higher source.

Love, Light, and Joy

Dee Finney

Aside from the fact that actually reading that nonsense is an energy drain, such a perspective does NOT resonate with the Cassiopaean information in which independent study and gaining of knowledge is urged as the only means by which we can be protected from being led into "traps." Ark replied:

Sure, but to check whether the information comes from a higher source or lower source, it is always necessary first to check whether the information makes any sense or is just a mumbo-jumbo. There are lot of dead dudes and other entities that are more than ready to pour all kinds of nonsense into our heads.

Real research is ALWAYS necessary. How else can we know we are not being disinformed? You must never RELY on what the entities tell you. You always have to check and keep critical! Unless you WANT to live in an illusion. Many people do.

Best, ark

Now, what is interesting about this is that Dee Finney, who declared above about Anna Hayes that "One doesn’t need to know anything on a specific topic when the information isn’t coming from oneself but from a higher source," has now included Anna Hayes along with Cassiopaea in her "history of cults"!!

Oh yeah!

More than that, if you look at the new "Dee Finney Site Map" page, you will discover another interesting thing: Dee Finney imitates me in almost everything I do, witness her political articles.

Well, anyway, let me get down to brass tacks here: the following indented text is extracted from Dee Finney’s page on “UFO Cults”. This has been floating around the net for a few years now and generally I ignore this trash, but today just seemed like the right time to address it. One thing I would like to say at the very beginning is that writing or publishing the kind of filth you are going to read that is published about me says much more about the person producing it than it does about its target. It also occurs to me that the proof of Dee Finney’s "Positive Co-creation" pudding is in the fact that she is involved in this kind of defamation. Yeah, Dee’s version of "Positive Co-creation," you could call it! Let’s all sign up and hang out with her and her kind!

I should also note that this page first appeared in the summer of 2003, shortly after the major defamation campaign against me began which seems to have been triggered by my article: Mossad and Moving Companies. Now, of course, that could all be just coincidental that Bridges, Rense, and Finney all went off on me right after that article came out and was translated into 6 languages and flew around the world faster than the 767 that didn’t hit the Pentagon, but I don’t think so. I’m also not suggesting that Dee Finney is consciously involved with some kind of ultra-right wing fascist organization, but there is very suggestive evidence that the source of the slander and libel, Vincent Bridges, is. One of his other co-horts in defamation, Colleen Johnston, (I’ll cover her later in some detail), is affiliated with an individual with a military intell background, so altogether, it looks pretty suspicious from where I sit.

Anyway, on with the show:

Laura Knight-Martin-Jadzcyk - Born in 1952, Pasco County, Florida

I was not born in Pasco County. Minor point, but thought I would make it anyway just to highlight the really poor research behind this whole thing.

Editor’s note: [This means Dee Finney] It appears that I stepped into a hornet nest of controversy here. I will present the information as received from the parties involved and the reader can make up their own minds as to what is going on. From what I’ve discovered so far is that the information appears to be as to the analogy of the ‘pot calling the kettle black.’.

Actually, Dee Finney received information from Vincent Bridges and published it without verifying it in any way. It was only some time after she had published it, when a reader sent me a link to what she had published, that I responded and pointed out that there was another side of the story. Also, since Dee Finney knew me from some years back, and knew my story (as I have recounted above), she is being more than a little disingenuous here. There is a big difference between speaking truth to lies and lying for the sake of lying. The "pot calling the kettle black" has nothing to do with it and such a statement could only be made by someone who could say "One doesn’t need to know anything on a specific topic when the information isn’t coming from oneself but from a higher source." Let’s just say that Dee Finney subscribes to the "Fox News" theory of reality

Indeed, Dee doesn’t bother to KNOW anything, as in "investigate and evaluate" hard data.

The next two paragraphs of text that are included on Dee Finney’s page are actually an extract from A Wanderer’s Handbook, Chapter Two:

Laura Knight-Jadczyk puts it this way: All my life I have suffered physically. I cannot eat, sleep, or even breathe as other people do. I have been plagued with constant allergies, ear infections, eye infections, female problems, nerve problems, and, to top it all off, I broke my neck in 1994. I have had seven major surgeries, and my pelvis was separated during childbirth so that I was unable to walk for almost a year. But, it was all lessons. And that is another story. Suffice it to say that God has indeed allowed me to know Him![90]

Allergies are one of the most common wanderer’s illnesses. I became overwhelmed with massive allergies in 1968, as soon as I joined Don Elkins on a full time basis, which is also when my quiet chronic rheumatoid disease became acute and nearly unmanageable. My theory on the timing is that it was my decision to join Don that triggered those limitations that would keep my gaze turned more inward. In other words, this was a positive change metaphysically speaking, signaling the beginning of a pilgrimage that I am most grateful still to be on. I went to an allergist who tested me for forty-eight substances. I was allergic to them all. Wanderers are basically allergic to Earth.

Let me just be clear here. Dee Finney took the text above that was written by Carla Rueckert McCarty about HERSELF and attempts to present it as something akin to MY biography! Dee then goes straight into talking about me and my life with bogus claims that appear to be pulled from Vincent Bridges’ lie-filled hate site about me:

Laura was a disturbed child with a dysfunctional home life, such as a kidnapping by her stepfather at age four, suicide attempts and other self-destructive behaviour, who grew into a disturbed adult, plagued by hypochondria and often unsure exactly who fathered each of her five children, and who in the end divorced her first husband because she believed he was a reptoid zombie.

The next paragraph is written by Pulitzer Prize winning journalist Thomas French, in The Exorcist in Love, but again, Dee Finney does not give attribution to the writer or distinguish the voice of defamation from the voice of authentic observers of my life.

When it started, the exorcist was still a child.This was many years before she began talking to the dead and to those who were never alive. Before she figured out who she was and what she was and accepted that she did not fit. It was also before she took her wedding vows and brought five children into the world and then stepped off the cliff at the edge of her life, before she opened herself to the visions, before she confronted the entities with no names and then cast them back into eternal darkness. Before she took dictation from another corner of the galaxy, before she brought her son to visit his grave from another lifetime, before she had any idea what to think about the face at the window or the dream of the baby in the woods, before she devoted years to pondering the mysteries of the universe, only to discover that there was nothing more mysterious than her own heart. For Laura Knight, it started long before any of these things. It started several decades ago, when she was a child growing up on the west coast of Florida.

At this point, Dee gives a link to MORE that links to the St. Pete Times web special about me, as though ALL of the above text was by the same writer!

Now, let’s go back to that bit of text inserted by Dee Finney:

Laura was a disturbed child with a dysfunctional home life, such as a kidnapping by her stepfather at age four, suicide attempts and other self-destructive behaviour, who grew into a disturbed adult, plagued by hypochondria and often unsure exactly who fathered each of her five children, and who in the end divorced her first husband because she believed he was a reptoid zombie.

The fact is, as the history of my life shows, chronicled by Tom French and myself, I was no more disturbed than any other kid of my time and environment. Who of us growing up in the sixties escaped the terror of the Cold War, Atomic Bomb drills, Viet Nam, and so on? Yes, I was kidnapped by a whacked-out stepfather when I was four years old and it had a profound effect on me, and yes, I attempted suicide when I was 22 following a long depression after my grandfather died and a psychopathic boyfriend dumped me simultaneously. Fact is, in the U.S., that really isn’t an abnormal life. That’s a sad statement on society, but there it is. But notice that a single suicide attempt has morphed into plural with added undefined "self-destructive behavior." Then, of course, there is the "hypochondria." Well, after two serious automobile accidents, one of which necessitated a three year recovery period just to be able to walk and dress myself, a childbirth accident that left me unable to walk for six months, spinal stenosis, osteo-arthritis, I hardly think that qualifies as hypochondria. People who actually know me are amazed that I keep going in spite of numerous other physical traumas.

My own issues aside, what really bothers me most about the above text, other than the spin and twist, is the extremely disturbing reference to my children. "Often unsure exactly who fathered each of her five children"?? That is really an unspeakably filthy thing to say even if it were true, which, as it happens, it is not. Yes, I have five children. Yes, they do not all have the same father and I know exactly who they are and so do the children. So, what’s the problem here? I had a child, thought I could live my life as a single parent and figured out it wasn’t going to work and got married after which my husband and I had more children.

But the truth aside, what kind of degenerate pervert would write something like that - to defame me through my innocent children? The only kinds of people I know who would say something like that are the hypocrite Far Right Fundies who worship Bush and his pedophile Neocons. As I noted above, if this is an example of Dee Finney’s "Positive Co-creation," I want no part of it.

Moving along, we find that next Dee Finney quotes Vincent Bridges in his endless rants about me that he began after he was exposed as a phony by our researchers:

Vincent Bridges against the Cassiopeans through Laura Knight Jadzcyk

"Totalism is defined by psychiatrist Robert Lifton as the tendency to view the world in terms of ‘all or nothing’ alignments.Lifton details 8 ‘psychological themes’ that can be found in totalist groups:

— A ’sacred science’ — an ideology that is held to be true for all people at all times. This ideology generally claims to be inspired and scientific at the same time.

— ‘Milieu control,’ the control of human communication, not only over our communications with others, but also with ourselves.

— ‘Mystical manipulation’ — including deception and ‘planned spontaneity’ which seeks limit self-expression and independent action.

— The demand for purity, the notion that absolute purity exists, and that anything done in the name of this purity is ultimately moral.

— ‘The cult of confession’ — "There is the demand that one confess to crimes one has not committed, to sinfulness that artificially induced, in the name of a cure that arbitrarily imposed." (Lifton, Thought Reform and the Psychology of Totalism)

— ‘Loading the language’ — redefinition of language, with an emphasis on moral polarization, and thought terminating cliches.

— ‘Doctrine over person’ — the subordination of personal experiences to the doctrines of the sacred science.

— ‘Dispensing of existence’ — the doctrine that the group can decide who has the right to exist, and who does not. In other words, the cult manipulates the environment to ’set up’ the recruit to trap him or herself in a black and white mindset.

The Cassiopaeanists can be considered a form of scientific/materialist fundamentalism with spiritualist leanings. All "Knowledge" of value comes through the Cassiopaeans, as interpreted by Laura Knight-Jadcyzk with no dissent and no alternative interpretations allowed. Totalism, pure and simple…

Let me look at the first part of what Bridges quotes as "evidence against" me - the writings of Robert Lifton, (leaving aside for the moment that none of it applies and is just out and out BS.) Lifton himself, contrary to popular notions of "brainwashing", always maintained that such coercion could only influence short-term behavior or produce general neuroses and could not permanently change beliefs or personality.

Next, let’s consider the fact that many twisted ideas of so-called "thought control" or brainwashing have been seized upon fiendishly by agents of far right organizations to be used to demonize anyone who threatens to expose their agendas. It is for this reason, it seems, that the very term "cult" has been transmogrified in the past 50 years or so. Here I will quote from Joe Quinn’s article: Cult-ivating Terror:

The Oxford English dictionary entry for ‘Cult’ states: 1.a system of religious worship, esp. as expressed in ritual. 2.a devotion or homage to a person or thing. 2b. A popular fashion esp. followed by a specific section of society 3. denoting a person or thing popularised in this way.

It is clear that the above description could easily apply to any of the organised religions prevalent today. Christianity, Judaism, Islam, Buddhism (and others) are replete and indeed founded on ritual and "devotion to a person or thing." However, they are not generally referred to as ‘cults’. It seems that the term cult, in its modern and widely understood form, is reserved for any group formed under a hierarchical structure, where some form of coercion or manipulation of the group members exists. Generally there is also some focus of worship, be it the group leader(s) or some other outside personage or thing. The justification for worship or allegiance is usually tied to the perceived or stated benefits or potential benefits to be derived from same. (I know, sounds rather like accepted mainstream religions - go figure.)

It seems at a practical level however, that the key element in distinguishing a ‘cult’ from a mainstream religion is the existence of overt, identifiable coercion (physical or mental) or manipulation of members.

Having said that, physical coercion or "attacks on the physical integrity of members" in such groups or ‘cults’, while not without precedent, is less common, (physical coercion being a more obvious violation of free will and therefore more easily identified). A much more subtle, and for this reason effective form of coercion is intellectual, or more commonly emotional, manipulation. This is generally achieved through the aforementioned worship principle where members are encouraged to give of their time, energy, financial resources etc. in the hope, or with the promise of achieving the stated goal and/or benefits for the individual or group.

Very often the allegation that ‘mind control’ is used on cult members is made. Proving such a claim is problematic however, since the definition of mind control is broad to say the least. There can be many forms of ‘mind control’ varying in subtlety, although they are not called by that name (see the mass media coverage of the Gulf war for one example or the marketing techniques used against shoppers in supermarkets for another).

In relation to alleged ‘cults’, it is usually via the observation of the results of ‘mind control’ that assertions are most often made as to whether it is in use or not in any given group. These results include a by now widely known list of supposed ‘indicators’. For example: members joining ‘communes’ giving up possessions, extreme devotion and allegiance to a leader, and in a few cases giving up their lives by way of apparent suicide.

In line with this more practical understanding, Wikipedia.com gives the following definition of Cult:

"Since the 1960s, in English-speaking countries, especially in North America, most English speakers have adopted the term in a pejorative sense to denote groups, many of them with religious themes, that exploit their members psychologically and financially using group-based persuasion techniques (sometimes called "mind control"). Unlike legitimate religious movements, cults are characterized by high levels of dependency, exploitation, and compliance with demands of leadership that are unrelated to religion. 90% or more of cult members ultimately leave the group."

Using the above definition then, we can deduce that ‘cults’ are groups characterised by "high levels of dependency, exploitation, and compliance with demands of leadership that are unrelated to religion", while legitimate religious movements can supposedly use the same "high levels of dependency, exploitation, and compliance with demands of leadership", as long as they are related to religion.

The problem then is, what defines religion? One commentator suggests the following:

"…religion always begins in an experience that some individual has or that some small group of people shares. The response that this person or group makes to the original experience is what begins the process of interaction between the religion and the community. In extreme cases we can imagine a religion which lived and died unknown to all but the original experiencers, because their response turned inward and never created an interaction with others in the community; or a religion in which the response to the original experience so quickly and completely assimilated it to the traditions of the community that the germinal religion never acquired an independent identity. Most recognizable religions fall somewhere between these extremes, and thus acquire the identity by which we can recognize them.

Religion originates in an attempt to represent and order beliefs, feelings, imaginings and actions that arise in response to direct experience of the sacred and the spiritual. As this attempt expands in its formulation and elaboration, it becomes a process that creates meaning for itself on a sustaining basis, in terms of both its originating experiences and its own continuing responses."

If the true definition of religion is based on "belief that is a direct experience of the sacred and spiritual", then most of today’s mainstream religions that are founded on the experience or hearsay of another cannot constitute a valid ‘religion’ and therefore are in fact not religions at all. They continue nevertheless to retain "high levels of dependency, exploitation, and compliance with demands of leadership", essentially (under the above definition) making them ‘cults’.

[…]

Essentially there would seem to be two approaches that can be taken when attempting to assess the cult status of a group: One can approach it from a theological point of view or from a sociological point of view.

One religious professor in 1994 well summarized the popular perspectives concerning the identification of "cults" in an online posting, shortly after the tragedy at Waco, that deserves some consideration:

"As a professor of religious studies who specializes in research, writing, and teaching about America’s alternative religions, I can tell all of you that the word "cult" has become an essentially contested concept. That is, like many other words, there is no universally agreed-upon meaning.

"Before one can know what the term means one must know the user and his or her context religiously and socially. I tell my students there are four major approaches to using the term: journalistic (tends to be sensational), theological (defines "cult" by some standard of orthodox truth), sociological (uses "cult" to describe groups that self-consciously oppose the mainstream of culture), and psychological (uses a standard of psychological manipulation and coercion).

"What counts as a cult differs by these varying definitions. All three may agree on a certain group being a "cult" such as Jim Jones’ "Peoples’ Temple." But a theologian might label the LDS (Latter-day Saints) church a "cult" simply because it diverges considerably from standard orthodox Christianity, while a sociologist would say it isn’t a cult due to its size and influence."

The theological argument then, seems to hinge upon interpretation of religious texts, with various groups attempting to define the boundaries of what it means to be truly Christian. The argument is unlikely to be resolved any time soon given that none of the warring factors actually possess any conclusive proof.

For example, the theological approach is taken by the Christian countercult movement. It considers the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints (Mormon) a cult because the church rejects the traditional doctrine of the Trinity, has scriptures in addition to the Bible, and has various other unorthodox beliefs and practices.

In the end, size and influence seem to play a major part in deciding which religious group gets awarded ‘cult’ status. The Catholic Church, for example, has approximately a 2,000 year history, 600 million followers around the world, and vast financial resources at its disposal. It seems that this provides all the protection needed from the threat of ‘cult headquarters’ ever replacing the term ‘Vatican’ or ‘cult leader’ the title of ‘Pope.’

Rightly or wrongly then, smaller and newly formed religious groups are much more likely to find themselves the object of scrutiny than larger established mainstream religions, regardless of the evidence or lack thereof for provable ‘cultic’ behavior (if such a thing even exists from the theological point of view). Of course, given the monotheistic nature and monopoly on belief held by the major organised religions, it is certainly plausible that this situation is most acceptable to them, and that they may even contribute to its perpetuation. […]

The other approach available to ‘cult assessors’ is the sociological approach. This is the approach taken by most and forms the basis of the most serious allegations, as it precludes the theological argument which is fraught with difficulty and in the end coming down to a matter of belief rather than verifiable facts.

The sociological argument is essentially the ‘cultural’ argument wherein it is alleged that certain groups self-consciously oppose the mainstream of culture with all its inherent accepted ‘norms’. Implicit in this argument is that mind ‘control’ or ‘manipulation’ that is alleged to form a part of the make up of many cults does not form a part of the make up of modern civilised society and culture. This argument, as we discuss a little later, is also subjective.

The aforementioned wikipedia.com definition is interesting in that it states that the term cult in the "pejorative sense" was first adopted en masse in the 1960’s. Indeed it seems that prior to this time the term cult did not have negative connotations at all, being generally used (if used at all) to denote any belief system. As noted above the Oxford English dictionary gives the additional definitions of ‘cult’ as: 2a. a popular fashion esp. followed by a specific section of society 3. denoting a person or thing popularised in this way.

The definition of what is and what is not a cult is not officially defined by any government agency in the US. The term remains open to interpretation and, as is discussed further below, it perhaps better serves the essential goals of government for it to remain that way. As a result the prosecution of ‘cults’ or ‘cult leaders’ has generally been carried out under more mundane infractions of the law, for example, kidnapping or extortion, or, in the case of the Waco incident, ‘gun control’. […]

As stated, the main requirement for ‘cult’ status would seem to be what can be broadly termed ‘violation of free will’. For this to be present it seems logical that at the outset there must be some level of deceit in the presentation of what the ‘member benefits’ will be. No prospective cult would attract many devotees if among the benefits of membership it included: subtle mind control, physical beatings, incarceration, daily insult sessions, etc. In short, ‘cults’ as they are popularly defined, are definitely not ‘what you see is what you get’ type organisations. […]

What can be observed in our society at present, is that in the mind of the average citizen, the concept of a ‘cult’ is understood as more of a vague threat than anything clearly defined and understood. From the generally ill-informed position of the "man in the street" it can perhaps be likened to the now ever present threat of "terrorists" and "terrorism"; he understands it as something bad, or threatening but would be hard pressed to give any clear examples of where it is and exactly what level of threat it poses to him, personally. This limited and distorted perception of the common person may be indicative of a certain way in which information is disseminated in our society and about the possible agenda of those that disseminate it.

What seems to be true is that the ‘cult’ label is so powerful, and carries so much stigma, and can be used in a directed way to damage and destroy groups and individuals exactly because of the very things that it labels as ‘cultic manipulation,’ i.e. the susceptibility of the human psyche to programming and subtle suggestive techniques of one sort or another. Governments must employ the force of public opinion in order to take public action. In our modern society in which people of a predatory nature seem to thrive, any accusation can, and often is, made to stick when stated and stated often enough by those in apparent positions of power and influence.

Dozens if not hundreds of incidents in our recent history can be cited where the public was (and continues to be) led to believe something as truth when in fact it was not. The recent Iraq WMD debacle involving various Western governments is but one large-scale example. Human history is indeed replete with "urban myths"- many of them forming some of our most accepted and sacred foundational cows. From science to history to religion to politics, no field of study is exempt.

Information is, and probably always has been, a highly valued commodity. "Knowledge is power," as the saying goes. While originally the stated role of governments was to carry out the will of the people, it is clear today that is no longer the case. The job of governments now, it seems, is purely the control of resources, with the most important ‘resource’ being the citizenry. The information that society is ‘allowed’ to receive, shapes the perception of the members of that society. Therefore, control of information is key to control of perception, and control of perception is key to the control of the population. Read any of Noam Chomsky’s articles or interviews on the media and control of information here for a more in-depth analysis of the control of information and how it is used to manipulate and coerce the masses of people to serve the elite in governments.

Today we have terms like ‘Total Information Awareness’ (closely tied to, and since 9/11, synonymous with the US government project ‘Terrorism Information Awareness‘), which is in itself a ‘cult of information‘, or ‘cult of awareness’. This philosophy and it’s importance is promoted and implemented from the ‘top level’ in our society. We have people like John Ashcroft, presently on a whirlwind tour of the US, attempting to promote, or perhaps instill this concept into the minds of the populace, the goal being to create an environment or atmosphere wherein the masses of people will be convinced that it is in the interest of their own protection or that of the country (and thus their ‘patriotic duty’) to funnel information about their fellow citizens upwards to their ‘leaders.’ Neighbours are encouraged to keep a watch on each other and report "suspicious behavior", with the list of just what defines "suspicious behavior" being supplied by the office of Mr. Ashcroft. We are told that mere disgruntled citizens may well constitute the ‘enemy in our midst’.

The masses are told that the benefits of compliance with the requirements of the cult of information lie in the fact that we will be safer; more secure in our beds at night. In short, the cult of information is essentially a cult of fear. Fear must first be instilled in the minds of the masses to inspire them to feed this upward flowing stream of information to their leaders - designed to facilitate the extirpation of any contrary source of information - and fear is a principle that humans seem somehow pre-designed and preprogrammed to wholeheartedly embrace.

What this boils down to is: if you control the knowledge that people have, you control the people. As such, it is not hard to see that if governments understand knowledge as power, and they seek to retain power, they must seek to control the flow of information the aim of which MUST be to LIMIT knowledge.

If you control the spread of information you can control what people think. If you control what people think, you are, effectively, controlling their minds. And we come around in a circle to what is truly CULTIC.

From this point of view, logically, any group that threatens the government monopoly on information and power, and therefore their control of the people, is a THREAT and must be dealt with.

As Richard Dolan has written:

"Anyone who has lived in a repressive society knows that official manipulation of the truth occurs daily. But societies have their many and their few. In all times and all places, it is the few who rule, and the few who exert dominant influence over what we may call official culture. - All elites take care to manipulate public information to maintain existing structures of power. It’s an old game." [7]

As noted above, the allegation that ‘mind control’ is used on cult members is often made when labeling any group as a "cult." However, there can be many forms of ‘mind control’ - including the mass media coverage of the Gulf war - although they are not called by that name. And if we are to rely on the criteria on which assertions of ‘cult’ are based, that is observation of the results of ‘mind control’, i.e. members joining ‘communes’ giving up possessions, extreme devotion and allegiance to a leader, and in a few cases giving up their lives by way of apparent suicide, we certainly find reasonable justification for labeling the current US administration as a CULT for persuading hundreds of thousands of Americans to give up their possessions and join the commune of the US military out of extreme devotion to a proven liar, George W. Bush, resulting in what could be termed apparent suicide in Iraq.

As discussed above, it seems that there exists a certain type of mentality that is predisposed to wholeheartedly and unquestioningly accepting this type of establishment fear-based programming. Such individuals are easily controlled within the contexts of standard religions which, as can be noted, are also generally all fear based. However, in the 1960s, there was a popular upsurge in the awareness of the masses at large due to outrage at the Viet Nam war. The US government set out to eradicate radical protests against government policies, and what is now popularly known as COINTELPRO - Counter Intelligence Program - was created.

Of course, COINTELPRO in one form or another has always existed, and was described in some detail by Machiavelli. Now, keeping in mind that the elite controllers of the masses seek most definitely to control perception via the control of information, we can deduce that this must require that any sources of information that lead to knowledge - knowledge being power - must be marginalized or even eliminated entirely in order for control to be maintained. This leads to the next logical step which is to realize that COINTELPRO must also be used to vector "ideological" trends - beliefs, etc.

COINTELPRO methods included sending anonymous or fictitious letters designed to cast those individuals or groups they wished to contain or destroy in a bad light, publishing false defamatory or threatening information, forging signatures on fake documents to make their targets look bad in some way, introducing disruptive and subversive members into organizations to destroy them from within, and so on. Blackmailing insiders in any group to force them to spread false rumors, or to foment factionalism was also common. COINTELPRO also concentrated on creating bogus organizations.

These bogus groups could serve many functions which might include attacking and/or disrupting bona fide groups, or even just simply creating a diversion with clever propaganda in order to attract members away in order to involve them with time-wasting activity so as to prevent them from doing anything useful. COINTELPRO was also famous for instigation of hostile actions through third parties. It is in this sense that we can best understand many of the groups that have willingly and enthusiastically taken on the role of self-appointed ‘cult busters, going about their ‘work’ in a frenzy of slandering and finger-pointing, evoking the image of the Spanish inquisition with it’s motto of "kill them all, god will know his own". Apparently irony is wasted on them and the adage: "people in glass houses should not throw stones" means nothing to them.

It is in the context of COINTELPRO that we can better understand many curious things about this issue of ‘cults.’ For many years the ‘Cult Awareness Network’ [8] worked closely with US government officials to tackle the threat of purported ‘cults’. It actively urged the press, Congress and law enforcement to act against any non-mainstream religious, psychological or even political movement, which it described as a "cult." After interviewing CAN’s executive director at the time Cynthia Kisser, a reporter wrote:

"No one knows how many destructive cults and sects exist in the United States. Kisser’s binder holds 1,500 names gleaned from newspaper clippings, court documents and thousands of calls to the network’s hotline. Some of the groups have legitimate purposes, Kisser says. But her group’s efforts show that most, despite wildly diverse beliefs, share stunningly similar patterns of mind control, group domination, exploitation and physical and mental abuse."

CAN critics pointed out that so-called "mind control" techniques are not much different than the techniques used in education and socialization efforts used by all schools, churches, ideologies and philosophies. CAN’s other successful approach was to refer relatives of group members to "deprogrammers" who charge thousands of dollars for their services and, according to a former national director of CAN’s predecessor, the Citizens Freedom Foundation, "kicked back" some of the money to CAN.

‘Deprogramming’ often includes kidnapping individuals, subjecting them to sleep and food deprivation, ridicule and humiliation, and even physical abuse and restraint until they promise to leave the alleged cult - doing the very things they accuse the ‘cult’ of doing! Because deprogrammers usually involve family members in these kidnappings and deprogrammings, victims rarely press charges. However, in the last few years 5 deprogrammers have been prosecuted for kidnapping or "unlawful imprisonment." One such deprogrammer is Rick Ross, a convicted jewel thief, who has boasted of more than 200 "deprogrammings." CAN executive director at the time Cynthia Kisser praised him as being "among the half dozen best deprogrammers in the country." In the summer of 1993 Rick Ross was indicted in Washington state for unlawful imprisonment. See here for more info on ‘deprogrammers’

The fear principle is perhaps the most prized weapon in the government’s armory of population management and control tools. The apparent human predisposition for fear of the unknown, strange or the ‘weird’ is undoubtedly exploited by government agencies in garnering public support for its condemnation of groups that it perceives as threatening to its monopoly on control. It understands that it can find fertile ground in the mass mind for the dissemination of negative fear based propaganda about "cults" or ‘terrorists’ etc. This in turn feeds the growth of ‘cult busters’ and ‘cult busting’ mentality and essentially allows for any group it chooses to be tarred with the ‘cult’ or the ‘terrorist’ brush. [See here for an article by Paul Joseph Watson on fear based propaganda]

It is indeed fortunate for the government that the existence and availability of the term ‘cult’ with its by now well-established and immediate negative connotations can be so easily used as a weapon with which to attack and defame. Any group that the government may deem a threat to its monopoly on truth can be quickly and easily dealt with simply by assigning it the ‘cult’ label. It is a remarkably effective means with which to control and, if needed, effectively neutralise any such group. For such a group the evidence, or lack thereof, of any "cultic" behavior becomes irrelevant.

Without doubt real cults practicing some form of mind programming have existed and continue to exist, yet due to the aforementioned human nature and nature of governments and those that govern, it is almost inevitable that many have been and will be wrongly accused, and deliberately so. […]

It appears that, as a result of the high profile sensationalist news coverage on the various ‘cults’ over the past half century, the term has become widely known and at the same time assumed its negative connotations. It was through these few, well publicised events involving alleged ‘mind control’ that the popular understanding of the word "cult" has been firmly imprinted on the minds of the populace. The most shocking cases were those where alleged physical and mental coercion took place and the deaths of a number of the members resulted.

The "Jonestown massacre" in the forests of Guyana in 1978 was one such case. At the time there were suggestions that the CIA and even Israeli intelligence agencies were in some way involved, that the leader Jim Jones was a CIA asset, and that the members of the US embassy in Guyana who were closely involved with the members of ‘Jonestown’ were CIA agents.

The allegations included suggestions that the CIA’s mind-control program, code-named MK-ULTRA, was not stopped in 1973, as the CIA had told Congress. Instead, it is suggested, it had merely been transferred out of public hospitals and prisons into the more secure confines of religious "cults", Jonestown being one of those "MK-ULTRA experimental cults". The implication here is that the fact that ‘mind programming’ nowadays goes hand in hand with the term cult, may be due more to "outside influences" than due to any intrinsic or automatic part of an alleged group’s makeup or function. There were also conflicting reports as to whether the 913 people that died actually committed suicide, with the Guyanese coroner at the time saying that as many as 700 members showed signs of having been murdered.

What is verifiably true about the "Jonestown massacre" is that a US congressman Leo J. Ryan had been to the Jonestown with various reporters and a delegation of concerned relatives of Jonestown members on the day of the "suicides" and was killed in the events that followed. This was, of course, blamed on the Jonestown cult - that they wanted to suppress Congressman Ryan’s report. But the possibility exists that Congressman Ryan’s report needed to be suppressed for exactly the opposite reasons - that it would be unfavorable to those labeling the Jonestown group as a "cult." In the end, the question can be asked about this event: who benefits? And the answer is that it put a powerful sociological tool into the hands of the government - the idea that a "cult" was, indeed, a very dangerous thing. The "fear of cults" was literally created with this event.

Another example of a much publicised ‘cult’ confrontation, where the destruction of the group and the deaths of its members in a horrific fire was the ultimate outcome, occurred at Waco Texas in 1993.

In April 1993 eighty nine ‘Branch Davidians’ lead by ‘David Koresh’ died when BAFT (Bureau of Alcohol Firearms and Tobacco) agents stormed their compound at Mount Carmel in Waco Texas. While the general impression among the public was - and still is - that the deaths were the result of ‘cultic activities’, at the time there were well founded allegations that government agents acted in a disproportionate way to the threat and that the deaths were unnecessary.

Nancy Ammerman, a Visiting Scholar at Princeton University’s Center for the Study of American Religion, was one of the outside experts assigned by the Justice Department to evaluate BATF and FBI’s handling of the Branch Davidians. She was particularly critical of Rick Ross and the ‘Cult Awareness Network’.

"Although these people often call themselves ‘cult experts,’ they are certainly not recognized as such by the academic community. The activities of the CAN are seen by the National Council of Churches (among others) as a danger to religious liberty, and deprogramming tactics have been increasingly found to be outside the law… Mr. Rick Ross, who often works in conjunction with the Cult Awareness Network (CAN), has been quoted as saying he was ‘consulted’ by the BATF. . . The Network and Mr. Ross have a direct ideological (and financial) interest in arousing suspicion and antagonism against what they call `cults’. . . It seem clear that people within the `anti-cult’ community had targeted the Branch Davidians for attention." [9]

We note with chagrin that this "arousing of suspicion and antagonism" led to the deaths of undoubtedly innocent people - including many small children - in a particularly gruesome manner.

It would seem that financial gain is a significant motivating factor in the activities of so called cult busters such as Ross. In ‘Inside the Cult‘ there appears the Jan. 16, 1993 diary entry of a former branch Davidian, Marc Breault (also the co- author of the book) where he describes a conversation he had with Branch Davidian Steve Schneider’s sister:

"Rick (Ross) told Sue that something was about to happen real soon. He urged her to hire him to deprogram Steve. Rick has Sue all scared now. The Schneider family doesn’t know what to do. Rick didn’t tell them what was about to happen, but he said they should get Steve out as soon as possible. I know that Rick has talked to the ATF." [10]

We should note carefully that Rick Ross was primarily interested in being "hired to deprogram," and that whatever he knew, he withheld for financial gain.

After the April 19th fire Methodist Minister Joseph Bettis wrote Attorney General Reno,

"…from the beginning, members of the Cult Awareness Network have been involved in this tragedy. This organization is widely known for its use of fear to foster religious bigotry. The reliance of federal agents on information supplied by these people, as well as the whole record of federal activity deserves your careful investigation and public disclosure. . . Cult bashing must end, and you must take the lead."

Representative Harold Volkmer charged that the initial attack on the Branch Davidians was part of a pattern of "Gestapo-like tactics" at the bureau.

"I fail to see the crimes committed by those in the Davidian compound that called for the extreme action of BATF on Feb. 28 and the tragic final assault." [11]

Representative John Conyers branded the April 19th gas and tank attack a "military operation" and called it a "profound disgrace to law enforcement in the United States." He told Janet Reno, "you did the right thing by offering to resign. I’d like you to know that there is at least one member of Congress who is not going to rationalize the innocent deaths of two dozen children."

Reno, however, apparently recovered quickly from her attack of conscience.

Los Angeles journalist Cletus Nelson writes:

"From the very outset, the public was falsely led to believe a multiracial spiritual community was largely comprised of gunrunning "rednecks" steeped in violent apocalypse theology and martial rhetoric.

As if to further darken the picture, thinly veiled allegations of child abuse and cultic phenomenon were widely circulated on television and in the mainstream press. This egregious use of what media analysts refer to as "negative framing" would seal the fate of the controversial 7th Day Adventist sect when it was deemed politically expendable by Washington officials." [12]

Whatever the truth behind the events at Waco and Jonestown (and it is undoubtedly not as black and white as the media would have us believe), the result was to imprint on the mind of the global population the idea that small groups with alternative views were synonymous with cults, and cults were the equivalent of dangerous, fanatical religious beliefs, manipulative mind control and a host of other antisocial activities. The reader can make the ‘logical’ connections between Rick Ross and his ilk and the government COINTELPRO idea on their own. "Birds of a feather…"

As stated, there is no definitive definition or established criteria for what constitutes a cult in the USA. However in France there has been considerable research done by government agencies into the subject. The French National Assembly has produced a general outline of what may constitute a "cult" in modern parlance:

Report of the French Assembly Inquiry Commission on Cults Dec. 20 1995 [13]

Section I: 2:(d) The concept retained by the Commission.

Any movement presenting itself as religious with the following criteria:

Mental destabilization

Exorbitant demands of a financial nature

A breaking off of contact with one’s original environment

Attacks on the physical integrity of members

The recruitment of children

Having a discourse more or less antisocial

Involved in troubles of a public order nature

Involved in serious judicial problems

Misappropriation of traditional economic circuits

Attempts to infiltrate the public powers.

The Commission insists on the fact that as the definition of cults is in many ways difficult.

In conducting its work it attempted to ensure that it did not simply accept the definition of cults proposed by those who are engaged, in one way or another, in the promotion of new religions or those engaged in the struggle against the real or supposed excesses of purported cults.

In its work the Commission was conscious that neither newness nor the small number of members, nor even eccentricity could be retained as criteria permitting to label as a cult a so-called religious movement: the largest contemporary religions were often at their start little more than cults with small numbers of members; many established and socially recognised rites today, in their beginning gave rise to reservations and oppositions."

The very fact that that the French government has publicly sought to investigate the cult phenomena and outline criteria defining one suggests that they take the issue seriously. At the same time however, from the above definition, we see also that they approach the subject in a reasoned and logical way. First of all, rejecting what we might call the COINTELPRO standard of tarring and feathering. As the French Assembly pointed out rather succinctly, The largest contemporary religions today started as little more than cults.

Given the nature of the world - where knowledge IS power - and the nature of the research we do - helping people to think, to acquire knowledge - it is hardly surprising that we would be targeted with the kind of libel and defamation for which COINTELPRO is famous.

What HAS surprised us, however, has been the nature and the level of attacks that have come from one or two specific areas. Given what we have outlined above and what we know of the nature of the moral character of our detractors, it is unsurprising also that the ‘cult’ label would be the first to be pulled out and used by them against us, without any qualms whatsoever. Suffice to say that we have been subjected to the most vicious libel and slander imaginable, most specifically directed at our personal integrity and work. These slanderous accusations include but are by no means limited to the accusation of ‘cult’.

Readers that have perused the reports we have published on the activities of these "petty tyrants" will be aware of the insidious and menacing aura they seem to exude as they go about their business of attacking us and our work. Many times we have certainly felt physically threatened - ’stalked’ - by these people:

"Although there is no universally accepted definition of cyberstalking, the term is generally used to refer to the use of the Internet, e-mail, or other telecommunication technologies to harass or stalk another person. It is not the mere annoyance of unsolicited e-mail. It is methodical, deliberate, and persistent. The communications, whether from someone known or unknown, do not stop even after the recipient has asked the sender to cease all contacts, and are often filled with inappropriate, and sometimes disturbing, content. Essentially, cyberstalking is an extension of the physical form of stalking.

Cyberstalking victims who call the National Center for Victims of Crime often complain of not being taken seriously or of not even being recognized as victims by law enforcement agencies they have contacted. Responding to a victim’s complaint by saying "you can’t be hurt on the Internet–it’s just words" or "just turn off your computer" is not acceptable or responsible. It’s unreasonable to expect cyberstalking victims to walk away from their on-line activities, which may comprise their professional career, in order to avoid this kind of problem. On-line harassment and threats are just as frightening and distressing as off-line harassment and threats.

A recent incident described in the Cyberstalking Report from the U.S. Attorney General is typical of the lack of law enforcement training and expertise that can be so frustrating for victims. [14]

A woman complained to a local police agency that a man had been posting information on the Internet claiming that her nine-year-old daughter was available for sex, and including their home phone number with instructions to call 24 hours a day. Numerous calls were received. Although every call was reported to local police by the family, the police officer simply advised them to change their phone number. Cyberstalkers use a variety of techniques. They may initially use the Internet to identify and track their victims. They may then send unsolicited e-mail, including hate, obscene, or threatening mail. Live chat harassment abuses the victim directly or through electronic sabotage (for example, flooding the Internet chat channel to disrupt the victim’s conversation).

With newsgroups, the cyberstalker can create postings about the victim or start rumors that spread through the bulletin board system. Cyberstalkers may also set up a web page on the victim with personal or fictitious information or solicitations to readers.

Another technique is to assume the victim’s persona on-line, such as in chat rooms, for the purpose of sullying the victim’s reputation, posting details about the victim, or soliciting unwanted contacts from others.

More complex forms of harassment include mailbombs (mass messages that virtually shutdown the victim’s e-mail system by clogging it), sending the victim computer virii, or sending electronic junk mail (spamming).

There is a clear difference between the annoyance of unsolicited e-mail and on-line harassment. Unsolicited e-mail is to be expected from time to time. However, cyberstalking is a course of conduct that takes place over a period of time and involves repeated, deliberate attempts to cause distress to the victim. […] The fact that cyberstalking does not involve physical contact may create the misperception that it is less threatening or dangerous than physical stalking. Cyberstalking is just as frightening and potentially dangerous as a stalker at the victim’s front door." [10]

One of the most remarkable things about this however, is that anyone is free to look objectively at our work and stated intentions and quickly and clearly see that we fail miserably in terms of "cult qualifications;" in fact we fall at the very first "test."

Every definition of cult requires that the group in question have some form of religious aspect or worship as a fundamental basis or their ‘raison d’être’. As is clearly evident for anyone who cares to take a look at our published material, we do not. In fact, in articles posted on our website and every day as part of our "Signs of the Times" news page, we report on the many inconsistencies and hypocrisies that are evident in the major organised religions and their New Age offshoots and the controlling influences they obviously exert upon many millions of people. However, this is merely our opinion.

Above all we value free will and the right for each person to decide and choose for him/herself. At the same time we are not so naive to fail to realise that to some this concept is detestable - so detestable, in fact, that they want very much to shut us down, drive us off the internet, and - no doubt - if possible, destroy us completely.

In light of the above analysis of the status of cults in our society and just what qualifies any group for "cult" status, it is clear from our perspective - and surely from anyone who has taken even a cursory glance at our work and research - that our detractors and those that would seek to slander and defame us, must find another pigeon hole in which to stuff us - or another allegation to level at us - for we simply do not qualify for the cult label in the modern definition with all it’s accompanying negative connotations.

Alternatively, for those that prefer to ignore reason and objective evidence, they may continue to label us a cult as they wish. However in such a case, in the interest of logical consistency, they should also assign the cult moniker to every other research body and organisation which honestly pursues its goals, openly seeks to network with other researchers with the necessary skills, and freely offers the results of its work in a public forum for the scrutiny of all - for that is what we do.

We have no hierarchy, we have no leaders, we have no defined goal other than to better understand the nature of the world in which we live. We do not practice any forms of coercion or manipulation; they are anathema to the common morals we share as human beings. We simply attempt to offer an opportunity to those that feel they may understand the application of the theories that we have developed, and wish to add their efforts to the furthering of the research we are involved in.

Our broad research goals are clearly defined, nothing other than an honest desire to pursue these goals as part of a network of like-minded individuals is asked or required of any potential group members. Our online school is still FREE to any applicant who is qualified by virtue of being as free as possible of cultic thinking and beliefs. No one is required to pay anything at all, and we ask only for donations (supporting our research and publishing) that are commensurate with the perceived value of our work by the receiver/reader/participant. No one has ever been excluded for financial reasons from FULL participation in EVERY aspect of our work. As an innate function of the research we do and the networking principles which guide it, any benefits are shared equally by all.

We believe in enabling people to think and decide freely to the extent such freedom is at all possible in this world. We believe a broad informational base is a prerequisite for exercising what freedom of mind may be humanly attainable and working as a network to gather and provide such information and analysis to the interested. This is what we consider our service.

We are not in the business of converting people and do not believe in a one-size-fits-all solution to the concerning challenges of our time. We are of the opinion that spiritual evolution of man may only proceed individual by individual and do so at the individual’s choosing. And the choice to advance entails a great deal of work and dedication to gathering KNOWLEDGE - the very thing that the powers that be seek to limit to humanity.

That is the full extent of what we think and do and believe.

It is indeed a lamentable state of affairs that we feel obliged to address the question of "cults" at all. However the explosion in recent years of groups of all shapes and forms has given rise to many charlatans and disinformation artists. From the evidence available it appears that many of them have less than honourable intentions towards their prospective audience and potential members. In fact, we have investigated many of these "disinformation" groups and artists in our research and the results are published on our web site.

In this respect we are happy to be able to contribute to the efforts of all those that seek objective and verifiable truth in the face of lies and deceit, whatever their origin.

We hope that, as a result of this brief analysis, we may have provided the reader with a slightly deeper understanding of the ‘cult’ label and phenomena. As with all our research, our goal was to provide as balanced and objective analysis as possible and as a result help to shed further light on this rather complicated subject.

In particular we hope we have drawn attention to the various factors that have lead to the current climate in which the ‘cult’ label can so easily be used to unfairly discredit and malign a group or organisation which may nevertheless possess genuinely honest intentions and information.

We seek only to be allowed to continue to pursue our research in the open and honest way in which we have always done. The evidence of the truth of this statement is clear and available for all those who wish to see it.

To be continued…

 

2 comments:

Anonymous said…

Seems that you ‘fell’ for this debating tactic again, using up your time and energy on self-defense instead of slanting their criticisms for an offensive move of your own. It is said that the creation is a game, and that we should learn to enjoy it. With that in mind, it seems you should use this recent joust to our own advantage, as it seems your opponent leans too much into their thrust, and that a mere shift in your center of gravity may perhaps upend their intentions without much ado. The key seems to be found in learning to enjoy the joust for what it is, as every knight must keep their sword sharp and ready for the real fight, not these faints along the way, which merely test our awareness. It seems they protest too much. And isn’t that always a sign of weakness? Perhaps what they seek is the flash of steel that ends the fight? At least that way, both sides are served fruitfully, and balanced is maintained in the saddle. Just a thought.

10:31 PM   javier rosas said…

Laura: i just want to thank you for sharing the knowledge. By the way i am from Oaxaca. Yes, The very same place where Don Juan spent time with Castaneda. If things dont get to "weird" in the future, you should visit the city of Oaxaca here in Mexico. Ixtlan is just merely an hour trip from downtown. They say (well actually it is said in marketing)that oaxaca is the spiritual heart of mexico. who knows?. I also would like to know if my country or the people of my country can or will play a role (even a small one) in the years to come you know who better to know about the petty tyrants than the mexicans and latin americans in general. Thank you again.

5:52 AM